JP6947264B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine, the gaming machine is known having an abutment hand stage capable of contacting the Yu Technical sphere (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-223176

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of making the flow of the gaming ball suitable by the contacting means.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of making the flow of a gaming ball suitable by abutting means.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 can come into contact with the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball. It is provided with a contact means which is formed and influences a game ball flowing down the flow-down passage so as to flow into the second branch passage, and a game board having a game area on the front side. There is a predetermined passage that is communicated with the first branch passage and can receive a game ball from the first branch passage, includes a displacement means formed so as to be displaceable, and flows down from the flow passage to the first branch passage. When the game ball to be played can flow down to the predetermined passage, a part of the displacement means is brought into contact with the contact means, so that the contact between the contact means and the game ball is brought into contact with the game ball. is released, at least part of the rundown path, rather than the game board Ru is disposed on the rear side.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the flow of the gaming ball can be preferably made by the contacting means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. (A) is a front view of the general winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit in line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in line XIII-XIII of FIG. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is a rear view of a general winning opening unit. It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is an exploded perspective front view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of the first unit, (b) is a side view of the first unit, and (c) is a rear view of the first unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the 1st unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the 1st unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXI-XXI line of FIG. 18 (b). It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the 1st unit shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in line XXIII-XXIII of FIG. 18B. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 21, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit on the XXIVc-XXIVc line. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 26 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit on the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit on the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 25 (a). Yes, (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the XXVIIc-XXVIIc line of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 25 (a). be. (A) is a front view of the second unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the 2nd unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the 2nd unit. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd unit in the XXXXII-XXXII line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a side view of the center frame. (A) is a perspective front view of the center frame, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a center frame. It is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXXVI-XXXVI line of FIG. 33. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a game board, and (b) is a schematic disassembled cross-sectional view of a game board. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a perspective rear view of the back case and the board box, and (b) is a rear view of the back case and the board box. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhang state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the retracted state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 1st overhanging state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the 2nd overhang state. (A) is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first overhanging state, and (c) in the second overhanging state. It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LIVa-LIVA line of FIG. 50, and (b) is the sectional schematic view of the lower displacement unit in the LIVb-LIVA line of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 50, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVc-LVc line of 52. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit in the LVIa-LVIa line of FIG. 52, and (b) is a front view of a first link member and a cam member of the lower displacement unit in the second overhanging state. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the 1st position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member at a 2nd position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member at a 3rd position. (A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68 (b), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68 (a). (A) is a top view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a sorting unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 70A. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit. It is a front view of the distribution unit and the lower displacement unit. It is a top view of the distribution unit and the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a sorting unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a sorting unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a sorting unit. It is a front view of a rotating unit. It is a rear view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. (A) is a side view of the decorative unit in the direction of arrow XCIIa of FIG. 91, and (b) is a side view of the decorative unit in the direction of arrow XCIIb of FIG. 91. It is an exploded perspective front view of a decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a decorative unit. It is a rotation unit in the direction view of the arrow XCVa of FIG. 89, and (b) is a rotation unit in the arrow XCVb of FIG. 89. It is a rotation unit in the direction view of the arrow XCVa of FIG. 89, and (b) is a rotation unit in the arrow XCVb of FIG. 89. (A) is a closed state, (b) is an intermediate state, and (c) is an open state, which are side views of the decorative unit and the right transmission member. (A) is an open state, (b) is an intermediate state, and (c) is a side view of a decorative unit and a right transmission member in a closed state. (A) is a side view of the decorative unit in the closed state, and (b) is a side view of the decorative unit in the open state. (A) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body in the direction of arrow Cb of FIG. 100 (a), and (c) is an arrow Cc of FIG. 100 (a). It is a side view of a rotating body in a directional view. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating body. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a rotating body. (A) is a side view of the rotating body when the opening / closing member is closed, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body when the opening / closing member is open. (A) and (b) are side views of the decorative unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit and a rotating unit. It is a top view of the lower displacement unit in the arrow CVI direction view of FIG. 105. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit and a rotating unit. (A) is a top view of the ball pedestal, (b) is a front view of the ball pedestal, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the ball pedestal along the CVIIIc-CVIIIc line of FIG. 108 (a). Is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball cradle. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a ball cradle. (A) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotating unit in the CXI-CXI line of FIG. 87. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the upper displacement unit. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the retracted position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the intermediate position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state which the upper displacement member is arranged in the overhanging position. (A) is a front view of the variable portion, and (b) is a rear view of the variable portion. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member at a 3rd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member at the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the sorting unit according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CXXXIV-CXXXIV line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in the range CXXXV of FIG. 134. It is a front view of the rotating unit in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotating unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) to (c) are side views of the decorative unit in the direction of arrow CXXXIX of FIG. 138. (A) to (c) are side views of the decorative unit in the direction of arrow CXXXIX of FIG. 138. It is a side view of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a side view of the displacement unit. It is a side view of the displacement unit when the game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a side view of the displacement unit when the game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a rotation operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine in the CXLVII-CXLVII line of FIG. 145. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine. 9 is a perspective front view of the first link member according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 9B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of the game board in tenth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member in line CLIIIb-CLIIIb of FIG. 153 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member of FIG. 153 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member in the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion according to the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion. (A) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member in the CLVc-CLVc line of FIG. 155 (b). (A) is a front view of the special winning device according to the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, and (c) is the CLVIc-CLVIc line of FIG. 156 (a). It is sectional drawing of the special winning apparatus. It is an exploded perspective front view of a special winning device. (A) is a top view of the special winning device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device in line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb of FIG. 158 (a). (A) is a rear view of the back case in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case in the CLIXb-CLIXb line of FIG. 159 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a rear view of the back case in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case in the CLXIb-CLXIb line of FIG. 161 (a). (A) is a front view of the back case according to the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the back case. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a schematic top view of the game board, and (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. It is an exploded perspective front view of the engaging member in 19th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a one-way cross-sectional view taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb of FIG. 165. It is an exploded perspective view of the back case and the rotating unit in 20th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the rotating unit and the engaging member. (A) is a rear view of the rotating unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case and the rotating unit according to the 21st embodiment. (A) is a rear view of the rotating unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotating unit in the CLXXIb-CLXXIb line of FIG. 171 (a). (A) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case and a rotating unit. (A) is a rear view of a rotating unit and an engaging member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a rear case and a rotating unit. It is a perspective front view of an engaging member and a fixing member. (A) and (b) are front views of the rear case. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case in the CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa line of FIG. 175 (b). It is a front view of the back case in 24th Embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case in line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb of FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board in the 25th embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board in the 26th embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the game board in the 27th embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the 28th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the 29th embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a general winning opening unit in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a general winning opening unit in the thirty-first embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize apparatus in 32nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the special winning device, (b) is a top view of the special winning device, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc line of FIG. 185 (a). Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device in the CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb line of FIG. 186 (a). (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member in the 33rd embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a special winning device. (A) is a front view of the game board in the 34th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb line of FIG. 188 (a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine in the CXC-CXC line of FIG. 188. (A) is a front view of the game board in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXCIb-CXCIb line of (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the special winning device. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the CXCIII-CXCIII line of FIG. 191 (b). (A) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board in the 36th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view schematic cross section of the game board. (A) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board according to the 37th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 38th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member in the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line of FIG. 197 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the lower displacement member of FIG. 197 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member in the CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member in 39th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and FIGS. 199 (b) and 199 (c) are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement member. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the 40th embodiment, and FIG. 200 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit on the CCb-CCb line of FIG. 200 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the 41st embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the CCIb-CCIb line of FIG. 201 (a). (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit on the CCIIa-CCIIa line of FIG. 201 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit on the CCIIb-CCIIb line of FIG. 201 (a). be. It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in 42nd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case in line CCIVb-CCIVb of FIG. 204 (a). (A) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case in the CCVb-CCVb line of FIG. 205 (a). (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the CCVIb-CCVIb line of FIG. 206 (a). It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in 43rd Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CCIXa-CCIXa of FIG. 208 (b), and FIG. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a rear case. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a rear case. It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in 44th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case in line CCXIIIb-CCXIIIb of FIG. 213 (a). (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the rear case. It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in 45th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (A) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 111, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. The lower plate unit 15 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashes plate 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 640 is compared with the case where the first electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric accessory per hit. At least one of the number of times the 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change or the time reduction. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the 2nd symbol is increased as compared with the normal medium.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

It should be noted that the second winning opening during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a per hit by increasing the probability of hitting during the probability change or the time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls that flow down the game board can pass through the balls that are fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembling position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

Further, on the left side of the first winning opening 64 in the front view, a third winning opening 82 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins, the third winning opening 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 521 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, via the throwing unit 600. That is, the third winning opening 82 is arranged in a state of communicating with the first opening 521, which will be described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third winning opening 82. The third electric accessory 82a is configured to be rotationally displaced with respect to the game board 13 so as to be openable and closable. Normally, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) and the ball wins a third prize. It is difficult to win a prize in the mouth 82. On the other hand, when a big hit is determined triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the third electric accessory 82a is opened (expanded) for a predetermined time before, after, or during the big hit. State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the third winning opening 82. Further, a sensor device SE1 for detecting a passing ball is mounted on the downstream side of the third winning opening 82.

The timing of opening the third electric accessory 82a does not have to be triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 5640, and the passing of the ball of the first through gate 66 sleeping ball. As a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed with the above, when the symbol of "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, it may be opened.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the ball can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 640a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82, is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. NS. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 200 and the game board 13. 7 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 rotates downward from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the displaced state is a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is projected from the state shown in FIG. 7 to the first overhang position described later, and in FIG. 10, the lower displacement member 440 is the maximum overhang. The state of being displaced to the second overhanging position, which is the position, is shown in each figure.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotating unit 700, and the like. The distribution unit 500 and the ball throwing unit 600 attached to the back surface of the game board 13 are accommodated.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably arranged on the front view rectangular horizontally long base member 910 arranged in the upper portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and the base member 910. The upper displacement member 940 is provided, and an effect of rotationally displacement the upper displacement member 940 while sliding is formed on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300. A detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described later.

The lower displacement unit 400 is slidably arranged on a horizontally long base member 410 having a rectangular shape in front view, which is arranged in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the base member 410. The lower displacement member 440 is provided, and the lower displacement member 440 is slidably and rotationally displaced on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case. A detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described later.

The rotating unit 700 includes a rear base 720 having a substantially rectangular front view arranged on the right side (arrow) of the front view of the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and the front of the back base 720. The rotating body 800 is provided in the above, and the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 13 is visible to the player. A detailed description of the rotating unit 700 will be described later.

The ball throwing unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and the game ball thrown from the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 to the back side of the game board 13 is placed in the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. A path for throwing the ball is formed.

The distribution unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed opposite the path forming member 510, and the base plate thereof. It is provided with a distribution member 540 that distributes a game ball that is attached to the 520 and flows down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each throw path (second throw path KR2 or third throw path KR3). The game ball distributed to the distribution member 540 is sent to the lower displacement unit 400. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

<The first decorative body and the second decorative body are arranged adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction>
Next, the general winning opening unit 150 arranged on the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16.

First, the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, FIG. 12A is a front view of the general winning opening unit 150, and FIG. 12B is a line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12A. It is sectional drawing of the general winning opening unit 150 in.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a center frame 86 arranged in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. And a general winning opening unit 150.

The base plate 60 includes a first opening 60a that is opened in the central portion in the front view, and a second opening 60b that is opened downward in the gravity direction of the game region formed by the rail members 76 and 77. .. A center frame 86 is arranged in the first opening 60a, and a general winning opening unit 150 is arranged in the second opening 60b. Further, a sticker having a decoration (pattern, pattern, etc.) formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is attached to the base plate 60 so that the player can visually recognize the decoration. The decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to the sticker, and the decoration may be printed (painted) on the front surface of the base plate 60.

The general winning opening unit 150 is arranged in the game area (front of the base plate 60) of the game board 13, and the route of the game ball flowing down the game area can be changed. Further, the general winning opening unit 150 is the end on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the gravity direction in the front view (arrow B direction view) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is placed along the part. In addition, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the seal arranged on the base plate 60 is illustrated with the reference numeral of the decorative member 60c. Further, in the present embodiment, a character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 60c.

The general winning opening unit 150 includes a main body portion 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, a first standing portion 152 erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151, and the like. The first erection portion 152 is arranged on the back side of the main body portion 151 and the second erection portion 153 extending from the end portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center side of the game area. It mainly includes a decorative member 154 to be formed, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed on the front side of the main body portion 151.

The main body portion 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b opened in the plate thickness direction of the base plate 60, and is covered with the opening of the second opening 60b. It is arranged on the front side of the. Further, the second opening 60b allows the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 63 arranged in the main body portion 151 to be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). Further, the main body portion 151 has an inclined surface 151a that inclines toward the base plate 60 side from the inner portion toward the outer end portion in the front view, and a recess that is recessed in the back surface of the base plate 60 side (arrow B direction side). It is mainly provided with 151b and a back surface portion 151d forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recess 151b.

The inclined surface 151a is formed so as to be inclined by about 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 151a and flowed down along the inclination of the inclined surface 151a, and can be moved to the front side of the main body portion 151.

Here, when the inclined surface 151a is not formed at the end of the main body 151 and the side surface of the main body 151 is formed perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60, it flows down the game area of the game board 13. There is a possibility that the game ball to be abutted (collisions) from a direction orthogonal to the side surface of the main body portion 151, and the abutted game ball bounces in the direction opposite to the flow direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball in contact with the side surface of the main body portion 151 can be moved to the front side of the main body portion by the inclined surface 151a, the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area is temporary. It is possible to suppress the stagnation. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

As described above, the back surface portion 151d is the back surface of the main body portion 151, and is formed with a constant width around the recess 151b in the rear view. Further, the back surface portion 151d is arranged in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) in a state where the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60.

The recess 151b is recessed toward the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F). Further, the recess 151b has a recessed bottom surface 151b2 which is a bottom surface in the recessing direction, and an inner side surface 151b3 which is erected from the outer edge of the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

The recessed bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface of the decorative member 154 described later, and is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface of the main body portion 151. As a result, when the decoration of the decorative member 154 is visually recognized through the main body portion 151, the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be uniformly visually recognized.

The inner side surface 151b3 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in front view. Further, the shape of the inner side surface 151b3 in front view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 described later. As a result, when the decorative member 154 is arranged in the recess 151b, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 154 from protruding to the outside of the recess 151b. Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, so that the back surface portion 151d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60 It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 151 from projecting to the front side of the base plate 60 from the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

The recess 151b is a recess for accommodating the decorative member 154 described later in the recessed space, and the recessing depth (the recessed distance to the front side (arrow F direction side)) is larger than the thickness dimension of the decorative member 154. It is set large. Further, the recess 151b is recessed along the shape of the end portion of the main body portion 151 at a position separated from the end portion of the main body portion 151 in the front view to the inside of the main body portion 151 by a certain distance.

Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the recess 151b, it is possible to prevent the back surface of the decorative member 154 from projecting toward the back surface side of the main body portion 151. Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60, so that the back surface portion 151d of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60 It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 151 from projecting to the front side of the base plate 60 from the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from above the gravity direction of the main body 151 (in the direction of the arrow U) to the front of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

The first erection portion 152 is erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151 on the end portion side (inner rail 76 side) of the game area. The standing dimension of the first standing portion 152 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the inner rail 76 planted in front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) in the planting direction. Further, in the first standing portion 152, the distance between the front door 5 covering the front side of the game board 13 facing the glass unit 16 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body portion 151 can collide with the first standing portion 152 at the lower end portion in the gravity direction of the game area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body 151 from colliding with the inner rail 76, and it is possible to prevent the inner rail 76 from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 facing each other is a space for guiding the game ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13, and is a space with the inner rail 76. The space for arranging reinforcements and the like between facing the outer rail 77 is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to dispose the reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from bending, and there is a risk that the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the inner rail 76 and the inner rail 76 bends.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening unit 150 (first standing portion 152) arranged in the game area makes it difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to collide with the inner rail 76. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distance between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 from being changed due to the bending of the inner rail 76. As a result, the game ball can be stably launched into the game area.

The second erection portion 153 extends downwardly and inclined from the end of the first erection portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the game area (first winning opening 64) in the front view. It is installed (see Fig. 2). As a result, the game ball flowing down between the inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 facing each other (see FIG. 2) is placed on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the downwardly inclined extending portion of the second standing portion 153. When the ball is thrown, the game ball can be rolled along the downward inclination of the second standing portion 153 and thrown toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area on the side opposite to each other (arrow L direction side) between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 is won (inflowed) into the first winning opening 64 arranged in the center of the game area. It can be made easy.

The decorative member 154 is formed in a plate shape and is adhered to the back surface side of the main body portion 151. Further, the decorative member 154 is formed on the front surface of the main body portion 151 side with a decoration that is continuous with the decoration formed on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 in the front view. As a result, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be visually recognized as the decoration of 1 together with the decoration of the decorative member 154. In the present embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 154, and the character of the decorative member 60c and the character of the decorative member 154 can be visually recognized as one character.

Further, the decorative member 154 is formed of a light-transmitting material. As a result, the light that has passed through the second opening 60b from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 is incident from the back surface of the decorative member 154 and emitted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 154. Can be made to. Therefore, the decoration formed on the front surface of the decorative member 154 can be brightened so that the player can visually recognize the decoration, and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player.

Next, the base plate 60 and the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in line XIII-XIII of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 is formed to have a larger outer shape than the opening shape of the second opening 60b of the base plate 60 in the front view. As a result, when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is located between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recess 151b of the main body portion 151 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Is placed in. Therefore, when the adhesive between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 is peeled off due to aged deterioration or the like, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 154 from falling off from the game board 13.

Further, the decorative member 154 has a width dimension that overlaps with the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and has a circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 projecting from the back surface of the main body 151, which will be described later, is inserted. It is set to be larger than the diameter of the opening 60 g (see FIG. 11). As a result, a gap is formed between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c in the front view due to the displacement of the arrangement of the decorative member 154 with respect to the main body 151 or the displacement of the position where the decorative member 60c is formed. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Further, the three general winning openings 63 arranged in the main body 151 are connected to openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. 71) arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and are generally used. The game ball that has won the prize opening 63 is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4 of the distribution unit 500. A detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

Further, in the distribution unit 500, a substrate (not shown) having a light source capable of irradiating light on the front side is arranged on the base plate 520 (see FIG. 71), and the light emitted from the substrate is the base plate. The back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 is irradiated through the second opening 60b of 60.

Therefore, the second opening 60b is used as a space for irradiating the path of the game ball winning from the general winning opening 63 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 with light. As a result, it is not necessary to separately form an opening for throwing the game ball, an opening for passing light, and two openings, so that the entire back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 is irradiated with light. In addition to making it easier, the general winning opening 63 can be arranged in the entire area of the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the general winning opening unit 150 can be improved, and light is emitted from the entire area of the general winning opening unit 150 to give the player the decoration (decorative member 154) of the general winning opening unit 150. It can be made easy to see.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative decorative member 154 connected to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is a main body portion arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60. Since it is arranged on the back surface of 151, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be arranged at positions adjacent to (approaching) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are tilted at an angle with respect to the front view (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). When 154 is visually recognized, it is possible to prevent the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 from being visually recognized as being displaced as compared with the case where the decoration of the general winning opening unit is arranged in front of the general winning opening unit. As a result, the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be visually recognized by the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the player's viewpoint, and the design of the game board 13 is improved. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the connection between the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In FIG. 14, the light path visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As described above, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration in total. Therefore, in order for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the misalignment of the two decorations. However, when forming the decoration on the base plate 60 or when arranging the decorative member 154 on the main body 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration at an accurate position (the same position each time). Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative members 154 are arranged so as to be displaced from each other with respect to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are arranged. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration as one decoration in combination with the decoration of.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is arranged on the back surface side of the inclined surface 151a. As a result, the connecting portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be made difficult to be accurately recognized by the player (the connecting portion is blurred so that the player can visually recognize the connecting portion). Therefore, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be recognized by the player as one decoration.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the connecting portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P1” (see FIG. 14)) is an inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 151. Located on the back side of. Therefore, the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint and the connecting portion between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as “boundary P2” (see FIG. 14)) of the player The light emitted toward the viewpoint can be the light reflected at different positions of the decorative member 60c or the decorative member 154 (that is, on the path of the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint. In addition, the formation of the boundary P2 can be suppressed).

Therefore, at the boundary P1, the misalignment of the decorative member 60c with respect to the decorative member 154 is easily recognized by the player as the misalignment of the decoration, and at the boundary P2, the misalignment of the decoration due to the difference in the refraction direction of the light is easily recognized by the player. Since the decorations visually recognized by the player from the respective positions of the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be the decorations at different positions, the misalignment of the decorations at the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 is the same at the same position. It is possible to prevent the player from seeing it. Therefore, the misalignment of the decoration at the boundary P1 and the misalignment of the decoration at the boundary P2 are combined to prevent the amount of misalignment of the decoration from becoming large and being recognized by the player. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Further, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, from the player's point of view, the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the main body portion 151 (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P3" (see FIG. 14)) and The boundary P1 can be arranged between the boundary P2 and the boundary P2. Therefore, the boundary P1 can be arranged between the misaligned positions (boundaries P2 and P3) of the decoration due to the refraction of the light when the light is emitted from the main body 151. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the area to be recognized from being displaced from the position of the decoration from being extended. That is, it is possible to limit the area where the decoration is visually recognized with the position shifted with respect to the front surface of the game board 13. As a result, the misaligned area of the decoration can be reduced with respect to the game area of the game board 13, so that the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In this embodiment, the face of the character is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60, and the body of the character decorated on the decorative member 60c is decorated on the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150. That is, the outline of the decoration is positioned at the connecting portion of the decoration between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize that the misalignment of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 is the outline of the decoration. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

Further, in this embodiment, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is decorated up to the neck of the character's face, and the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 is decorated with the decorative member 60c. Is decorated, and the character's face (neck) and clothes are decorated with different shades (in this embodiment, the face is skin-colored and the clothes are black). As a result, the misalignment of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 is set as a portion having a different hue, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are separated. Can be done. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as the decoration of 1.

As described above, the main body 151 is provided with a recess 151b on the back side, and a decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recess 151b. Further, the shape of the inner side surface (inner side surface 151b3) of the recess 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view. As a result, when the decorative member 154 is arranged in the main body portion 151, the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b can be used as a guide (positioning). As a result, when the decorative member 154 is attached to the main body portion 151, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the decorative member 154 from being displaced with respect to the main body portion 151.

Further, on the back surface side of the main body portion 151, protrusions 155 (see FIG. 15) protruding in a columnar shape are formed at a plurality of positions (three places (see FIG. 15) in the present embodiment). The protrusion 155 is a positioning protrusion that positions the general winning opening unit 150 with the base plate 60 when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, and is inserted into the recess 60d recessed in the base plate 60. Further, at least one position (one place in the present embodiment) of the protrusion 155 is projected from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recess 151b and inserted into the opening formed in the decorative member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used as positioning when the decorative member 154 is arranged on the main body 151.

Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the general winning opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, and can be positioned when the decorative member 154 is arranged on the main body portion 151. Therefore, since the positioning portion when arranging the decorative member 154 on the front side of the decorative member 60c can be the same portion, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 may be misaligned. Can be suppressed. As a result, the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be combined and easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Further, the protrusion 155 projecting from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 is formed in a region (attachment region of the adhesive tape 154a) in the range E1 (see FIG. 15) described later. As a result, when the decorative member 154 is arranged in the main body 151, one part of the edge of the decorative member 154 is positioned on the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b with the protrusion 155 inserted in the opening of the decorative member 154. By arranging them together, the two positions of the decorative member 154 can be positioned with respect to the main body portion 151. Therefore, it is not necessary to align the edges of the decorative member 154 at two positions on the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b and dispose the decorative member 154 on the main body 151. As a result, the work of arranging the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 can be simplified.

Next, the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning opening unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In FIG. 15, the range of the adhesive tape 154a attached to the decorative member 154 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with a reference numeral E1. Further, in FIG. 14, the light path visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In the present embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed from the light-transmitting double-sided tape and is attached to the range E1.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesive tape 154a for adhering the decorative member 154 and the main body portion 151 is attached along the end portion of the decorative member 154 with a constant width. As a result, in the area where the adhesive tape 154a is not attached (the portion other than the range E1), the main body portion 151 (concave bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (front surface of the decorative member) are connected by the thickness of the adhesive tape 154a. A gap (space) of a predetermined width is formed between them.

Further, the adhesive tape 154a is adhered to a region from the end of the decorative member 154, passing through the boundary P3 and exceeding the virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) orthogonal to the inclined surface 151a. As a result, the light emitted from the inclined surface 151a passing through the main body 151 is covered with the adhesive tape 154a on the portion affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed) E1 (decorative member). It can be the end of 154). As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the game board 13 from a position higher than usual (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)), FIG. As shown, the light L exiting from the inclined surface 151a toward the player's line of sight repeatedly reflects the front and back of the main body 151 and passes through the inside of the main body 151. In this case, if the entire front surface of the decorative member 154 comes into contact with the main body 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of light is changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 each time it is reflected on the decorative member 154 side. NS. Therefore, the light emitted from the inclined surface 151a passing through the inside of the main body portion 151 cannot be reflected only by the change in wavelength due to the decoration of the end portion of the decorative member 154. Therefore, since the decoration recognized by the player from the inclined surface 151a is different from the wavelength of the decoration recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, the decoration is not connected between the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by setting the adhesive portion of the decorative member 154 to the main body portion 151 only in the range E1, the light L that reflects and passes through the inside of the main body portion 151 is the decoration of the decorative member 154. It can be made unaffected (the wavelength of light does not change). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the light emitted from the inclined surface 151a passing through the main body 151 attaches the adhesive tape 154a to the portion affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed). The pasted range E1 (the end portion of the decorative member 154) can be set, and the decoration of the inclined surface 151a visually recognized by the player can be easily seen by the player as being connected to the adjacent decoration. As a result, the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36. First, a method of arranging the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 includes a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding the central opening of the base plate 60, and a projecting portion projecting outward in the radial direction of the base frame 86a. It is configured to include 86b.

The base frame 86a has a shape along the central opening of the base plate 60, a part of the base frame 86a is inserted inside the central opening, and a portion excluding a part of the base frame 86a is the base plate 60. It is arranged on the base plate 60 in a state of projecting to the front side of the.

The projecting portion 86b is projected on the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the game area of the game board 13. As a result, the special winning device 550 arranged in the projecting portion 86b can be arranged on the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the game area, and when hitting right in the special game state. A part of the throwing path of the game ball can be configured by the special winning device 550.

Further, the projecting portion 86b is located above the opening 86b1 that opens in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) and above the opening 86b1 (arrow U direction) and toward the back side (arrow B direction side). It mainly includes a recess 86b2 to be recessed.

A part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 86b1. As a result, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special winning device 550 arranged on the back side of the projecting portion 86b via the opening 86b1.

The recess 86b2 can accommodate a part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, inside. Further, a detection device 86b3 capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged in the recess 86b2. Thereby, the game ball passing through the portion accommodated inside the recess 86b2 of the first unit 551 can be detected.

The special winning device 550 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the projecting portion 86b. The second unit 552 and the second unit 552 are mainly provided.

The first unit 551 is provided with a space (path) through which the game ball can flow down, and a part of the first unit 551 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13. Further, the first unit 551 is arranged on the center frame 86 by a screw inserted through the second unit 552. A detailed description of the arrangement method of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. 18 (a) is a front view of the first unit 551, FIG. 18 (b) is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18 (c) is a rear view of the first unit 551. .. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 arranged on the front side and a second path member 570 arranged on the back side of the first path member 560. , A third path member 580 arranged on the back surface of the second path member 570, and the third path member 580 are mainly provided.

The first path member 560 is formed with a front plate 564 formed in a plate shape along the front surface of the game area of the game board 13 and a substantially U-shaped cross section opened on the upper side (arrow U direction side). The first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563 projecting from the upper end to the back side of the face plate 564, and the first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563 thereof. A first wall portion 565 formed so as to be continuous with the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the portion 563 and extending along a part of the end portion of the front plate 564, and a lower portion of the first wall portion 565 thereof. It is mainly provided with two sets of second wall portions 566 and third wall portions 567, which are formed in the above and project from two locations separated by a predetermined interval.

The front plate 564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between the second path member 570 or the third path member 580, which will be described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member. NS. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551 through the front plate 564.

Further, the front plate 564 includes a guide portion 564a projecting from the second path member 570 side (back surface side (arrow B direction side)).

The guide portion 564a is a wall portion that prevents the entire wall surface of the front plate 564 from being contaminated by the game ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551, and is the second path member 570 or the third path member 580 described later. It is extended along the flow path of the game ball that flows down between the opposite surfaces. Further, the guide portion 564a is projected at a position where the radius of the game ball is separated from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. In other words, the guide portion 564a is projected at a position substantially the same as the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560. Thereby, the portion where the front plate 564 and the game ball come into contact with each other can be limited to the protruding tip portion of the guide portion 564a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent scratches and the transfer of dirt adhering to the game ball due to contact with the game ball over the entire area of the front plate 564. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the inside of the first path member 560 via the front plate 564.

The first receiving unit 561, the second receiving unit 562, and the third receiving unit 563 are portions that receive the game ball flowing down from the gaming area above the first unit 551 (in the direction of arrow U) into the inside of the first unit 551. , The upper opening is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at the end portion on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564. NS.

The first receiving unit 561 is set to have a larger receiving width (width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) of the game ball than the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563. As a result, the game ball flowing into the special winning device 550 is more likely to flow into the first receiving unit 561 than the second receiving unit 562 or the third receiving unit 563.

Further, the first receiving portion 561 communicates with a flow path formed inside the first unit 551. As a result, the game ball received by the first receiving unit 561 flows down inside the first unit 551. The flow path of the game ball of the first unit 551 will be described later.

The second receiving section 562 and the third receiving section 563 communicate with a flow path formed inside the second unit 552, which will be described later. As a result, the game ball received by the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 flows down inside the second unit 552. The flow path of the second unit 552 will be described later.

The first wall portion 565 is an inner wall that forms a space for throwing a game ball between the first wall portion 565 and the fourth wall portion 573 formed on the second path member 570, which will be described later. One end of the first wall portion 565 is connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above, and the other end side extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR) over the lower side of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563. It is mainly composed of an upper side wall portion 565a extending in the direction) and a curved wall portion 565b formed by being curved in a substantially C shape in the rear view and connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper surface (the surface on the side of the arrow U direction) of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, above the rolling surface when the game ball rolls, and is the fourth wall portion 573. It is formed at a position separated from the diameter of the game ball on the upper side (arrow U direction side) in the direction orthogonal to the upper surface of the game ball.

The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of the game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. NS. Further, the curved wall portion 565b is formed in a semicircular shape centered on the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall portion 573 by flowing down along the inner wall of the curved wall portion 565b, and the rolling of the game ball. The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall that forms a space for a path that branches off from the main flow path of the game ball that flows down inside the first unit 551, and is a pair of wall portions projecting from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the two is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the number of routes flowing down the first unit 551 can be increased.

The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion forming an inner surface of a path branching from the main throwing path (main path SK3) of the game ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551, and protrudes from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the pair of wall portions facing each other is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of paths of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551.

Further, the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 are arranged so that their downstream ends are opposite to each other in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the first unit 551. As a result, the game ball can be thrown to both sides of the first unit 551 in the left-right direction from the branch passage described later.

The second path member 570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 571 facing the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and a fourth wall portion 573 projecting from the front surface of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560. The fifth wall portion 574, which is projected downward from the fourth wall portion 573 at a predetermined distance, and the fifth wall portion 574, which is projected downward from the fifth wall portion 574 at a predetermined distance. The sixth wall portion 575 and the like are mainly provided.

The base plate 571 is arranged at a position separated from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 by a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. Further, the base plate 571 has a first opening 571a, a second opening 571b, and a third opening 571c that are opened at positions corresponding to the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563, respectively. A fourth opening 571d that opens below the first opening 571a, and a fifth opening 571e and a sixth opening 571f that open above the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575, respectively. A recessed portion 571g located between the fifth wall portion 574 and the sixth wall portion 575 and recessed on the back surface side is provided.

The first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c provide game balls that flow into the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 of the first path member 560 described above. It is an opening through which the base plate 571 is passed to the back side.

Further, the base plate 571 includes a first rolling portion 576, a second rolling portion 577, and a second rolling portion 571 projecting from the lower end portion of the first opening portion 571a, the second opening portion 571b, and the third opening portion 571c to the back side. 3 Rolling unit 578 is provided. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is connected to the third path member 580 described later, and the game ball passing through the second opening 571b or the third opening 571c is placed in the second unit 552 described later. Each ball is thrown.

The first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d are covered with a part of the third path member 580, which will be described later, on the back surface side. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is thrown from the fourth opening 571d to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 571.

The fourth wall portion 573 projects from the base plate 571 along the lower end portion of the fourth opening 571d and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). The upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the side of the fourth opening 571d, which is opened on the left side of the base plate 571 in the front view, toward the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of arrow R). .. As a result, the game ball that passes through the fourth opening 571d and is thrown to the front side of the base plate 571 is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, and the base plate 571 is tilted by the inclination of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573. The ball can be thrown to the right side (arrow R direction side).

The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion serving as a rolling surface of the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565 described above, and is a portion of the game ball in a direction orthogonal to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573. It is projected at a position separated below the diameter and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the base plate 571. Further, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fifth wall portion is inclined downward as it goes from the curved wall portion 565b side (arrow R direction side) to the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) described later. Is formed. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b to the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 can be rolled to the recessed portion 574g side. Further, the fifth wall portion 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are arranged side by side in the extending direction of the fifth wall portion 574. Further, the recessed width and recessed depth of the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, a fifth opening 571e that opens into the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b. As a result, the game ball flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is sent to the back side of the base plate 571.

The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream end portion (the end portion on the arrow L direction side) of the fifth wall portion 574, and a gaming ball that rolls on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 is recessed. The ball can flow into the inside of the 574 g and be thrown to the upper part of the sixth wall portion 575 formed below the recessed portion 574 g (in the direction of arrow D).

The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that becomes a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls on the fifth wall portion 574 and is sent to the recessed portion 574 g, and is a portion of the game ball that is downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574. It is projected from the base plate 571 at a position separated from the diameter of the base plate 571, and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR) of the base plate 571. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 is formed with its upper surface inclined downward from the recessed portion 574 g side (arrow L direction side) toward the third wall portion 567 side described above. As a result, the game ball thrown from the recessed portion 574 g to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can be rolled to the throwing path side formed by the third wall portion 567. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 includes a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b that are recessed downward on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are arranged side by side in the extending direction of the sixth wall portion 575. Further, the recessed width and recessed depth of the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, a sixth opening 571f that opens into the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b passes through the sixth opening 571f and is sent to the back side of the base plate 571.

The third path member 580 includes a first lining member 581 arranged on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) and a second path member 570 on the lower side in the gravity direction (arrow). The second lining member 582 arranged on the back surface of the D direction side), the first drive unit 583 arranged between the first lining member 581 and the second lining member 582, and the second lining. It mainly includes a second drive unit 584 arranged on the back surface of the member 582.

The first lining member 581 includes a curved portion 581a arranged on the back surface side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d described above, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 581b connected to the lower side of the curved portion 581a. , Is mainly provided.

The curved portion 581a is formed by being curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side are opened, and the first rolling portion 576 is arranged inside the curved portion 581a. (See FIG. 24 (a)). Further, the distance between the curved inner wall surface of the curved portion 581a and the protruding tip portion of the first rolling portion 576 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that rolls the first rolling portion 576 can be made to flow down along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and thrown to the lower side of the first rolling portion 576. Therefore, by sending the game ball to the curved portion 581a that curves toward the back side, the rolling time of the game ball can be lengthened. As a result, even if the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be secured on a plane parallel to the game area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Further, the curved portion 581a is arranged at a position where the lower end portion is slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening portion 571d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed down from the first rolling portion 576 along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and has been thrown into the fourth opening 571d to flow back and flow into the inside of the curved portion 581a.

The mounting portion 581b is formed with through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first covering member 581 to the back surface of the second path member 570 are inserted. Further, the mounting portion 581b includes a columnar body 551a projecting in a columnar shape toward the back surface side. The columnar body 551a is provided with a screw hole at the tip thereof for fastening the second unit 552, which will be described later, to the first unit 551. As a result, the screw inserted from the back surface side of the second unit 552 can be screwed into the columnar body 551a to fasten the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The second covering member 582 includes a second curved portion 582a arranged on the back side of the sixth opening 571f and a back side wall portion arranged on the back side of the first receiving recesses 574a to the fourth receiving recesses 575b. 582b and the like are mainly provided.

The second curved portion 582a is formed by being curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side is opened (see FIG. 24 (c)). Further, the second curved portion 582a includes an erection wall 582a1 erected from the front side to the back side inside the U-shape. The internal space of the second curved portion 582a is formed by the erection wall 582a1 next to the first space 582a2 on the left side (arrow L direction side) in front view and the first space 582a2 with the erection wall 582a1 in between. It is divided into a second space 582a3.

The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of the game ball, and are formed from the front side to the back side. Further, the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are connected on the back side. Further, the inner surface of the first space 582a2 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the front side. As a result, the game ball thrown from the recessed portion 571g to the second curved portion 582a is rolled to the back side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2, and the second curved portion 582a is curved at the end portion on the back side. The ball is thrown into the second space 582a3, rolled to the front side by the inclination of the second space 582a3, passed through the opening of the sixth opening 571f, and thrown to the front side of the base plate 571.

The back side wall portion 582b is a throwing path that is sent to the first receiving recesses 574a to the fourth receiving recesses 575b and guides the game ball passing through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f to the lower side of the special winning device 550. It is the wall part on the back side of. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b can be collected. Therefore, the game ball that is thrown into the first receiving recesses 574a to the fourth receiving recesses 575b, passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 described later, and gives the player the game value, flows down the game area again, and the game value. Can be prevented from being given to the player again.

The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a, a first solenoid 583a, and a first variable plate. It mainly includes a first protective member 583c that surrounds the periphery of the 583b.

The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) according to the displacement of the axis of the first solenoid 583a. .. Further, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the tip of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the fifth opening 571e described above, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess are inserted. It is located above 574b. As a result, when the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent the game ball from flowing into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

The first protective member 583c is formed in a box shape in which the second path member 570 side is open, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is arranged inside the first protective member 583c. Further, the first protective member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 583c1 is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw through which the through hole 583c1 is inserted is inserted into the through hole 581b1 of the first lining member 581 or the through hole 582b1 of the second lining member 582 and is formed in the second path member 570. It is screwed. Therefore, by arranging the first drive unit 583 on the second path member 570, the first lining member 581 and the second lining member 582 can be arranged on the second path member 570. As a result, the number of screw fastening portions of the first lining member 581 and the second lining member 582 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, since the first lining member 581 or the second lining member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583, the first drive unit 583 wins a special prize. When it is forcibly removed from the device 550, the first lining member 581 or the second lining member 582 and the second path member 570 are incompletely fastened, and the game ball becomes the first lining member 581 or the second. It is easy to make it impossible to pass through the lining member 582. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a fraudulent state.

Like the first drive unit 583, the second drive unit 584 includes a second solenoid 584a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, and a second variable plate 584b connected to the shaft of the second solenoid 584a. It mainly includes a second solenoid 584a and a second protective member 584c that covers the periphery of the second variable plate 584b.

The second variable plate 584b is formed from a plate-like body that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is formed by being bent like a crank in a front view. Further, in a state where the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b is inserted into the sixth opening 571f described above, and the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving are received. It is arranged above the recess 575b. As a result, when the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent the game ball from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

The second protective member 584c is formed in a box shape in which the second path member 570 side is open, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is arranged inside the second protective member 584c. Further, the second protective member 584c includes a back side wall portion 584c1 that covers the back side of the throwing path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. As a result, not only the back side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566 can form a throwing path, but also the back side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566 can cover the second path member 570. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the fraudulent member from being inserted from the side surface of the first unit 551 and fraudulently performed on the detection devices SE3 to SE6 arranged on the second path member 570.

Next, the throwing path of the game ball flowing into the inside of the first unit 551 from the first receiving unit 561 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 on the XXI-XXI line of FIG. 18 (b). FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 on the line XXIII-XXIII of FIG. 18B. 24 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 on the XXIVa-XXIVa line of FIG. 21, and FIG. 24 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 on the XXIVb-XXIVb line of FIG. FIG. 24 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 on the XXIVc-XXIVc line of FIG.

The game ball flowing into the first unit flows down the main paths SK1 to SK6 of the game ball in the order of main path SK1, main path SK2, main path SK3, main path SK4, main path SK5, and main path SK6. Alternatively, the main path SK3 in the middle of flowing down the main paths SK1 to SK6 flows into the sub-path HK1 communicating with the main path SK3 and flows down the sub-path HK1. Alternatively, it is flowed from the main route SK5 on the way down the main route SK1 to the main route SK6 into either the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3 communicating with the main route SK5 and flows down either the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3. do.

Further, the sub-paths HK1 to HK3 are provided with detection devices SE3 to SE6 for detecting the passage of the game ball, and the detection of the game ball by the detection devices SE3 to SE6 gives the player a predetermined game value. Granted. In the present embodiment, a player is given a game value by a prize ball having a predetermined number of balls.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK1 is formed by a curved portion 581a of the first lining member 581 and a first rolling portion 576 of the second path member 570 (see FIG. 24A). It is a space and communicates with the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. As described above, the curved portion 581a is formed by being curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side are opened, and the game passes through the main path SK1. The ball can be diverted to the back side. As a result, when the game ball passes through the space where the area in the front view is limited (the inside of the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d, the amount of movement of the game ball in the left-right direction can be reduced. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the main path SK1. This makes it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the first unit 551, and enhances the interest of the player. can.

Further, as will be described later, since the game ball flowing into the main path SK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, the player can be given a game value by rolling the game ball. It can be made easier for people to see. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the hobby. The main path SK1 is communicated with the main path SK2 described later, and a game ball passing through the main path SK1 can flow into the main path SK2.

Further, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is accommodated and arranged in the recess 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86 described above. As a result, when the game ball is clogged in the main path SK1 (the flow is slow), the defect can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and an error can be notified.

Further, the passage width of the main path SK1 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than the opening through which the game balls of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) pass. As a result, a game ball (illegal game ball) having a diameter larger than the diameter of the standard game ball (11 mm) is manufactured, and when the ball is illegal (game), the ball is used as the main path. It can be fastened inside the SK1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal game ball from flowing down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 arranged on the downstream side of the main path SK1 and being illegally performed. Further, by keeping the illegal game ball on the main path SK1, it is possible to detect it by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and notify the error (illegal). In this case, the fraud means that the fraudulent game ball is fitted into any of the openings of the detection devices SE3 to SE7, the detection devices SE3 to SE7 continue the detection, and the fraudulent game ball is paid out (game value). Is to get.

The main path SK2 is a space formed between the first wall portion 565 of the first path member 560 and the fourth wall portion 573 of the second path member 570. The game ball flowing into the main path SK2 rolls on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 and flows down. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and to be inclined downward as it is separated from the fourth opening 571d.

Therefore, the above-mentioned curved portion 581a (curved path to the back surface side) is formed in a portion for switching the throwing direction of the game ball (a connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2), so that the player can take the main path. It is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the SK1 from being lost. That is, when a path curved to the back side is formed in the middle of a linear throwing path extending in the left-right direction (for example, the main path SK2), the gaming ball rolling at a constant acceleration along the curved path. Since the acceleration is changed (decreased), the line of sight chasing the game ball precedes the game ball, and the player may lose sight of the game ball.

On the other hand, since the rolling direction of the game ball is switched and a curved path to the back side is formed in the portion where the rolling speed of the game ball is originally slowed down, the player's line of sight must precede the game ball. Can be suppressed to prevent the player from losing sight of the game ball.

Further, the curved portion 581a, which is the inner wall of the main path SK1, is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction) of the first unit 551 slightly to the right (arrow R direction) with respect to the left-right central portion of the game board 13. It is formed at the side end). Therefore, a curved path (main path SK1) to the back side is formed on the side where the player who is located in front of the game board 13 can easily see the first unit 551, so that the player can easily see the first unit 551 from the main path SK1 to the main path. It is possible to easily suppress losing sight of the game ball passing through SK2.

Further, the main path SK2 communicates with the curved path WK1 and communicates with the main path SK3 described later via the curved path WK1. As a result, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 flows into the main path SK3 via the curved path WK1. A detailed description of the curved path WK1 will be described later.

The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall portion 573 and the fifth wall portion 574 of the second path member 570. The game ball flowing into the main path SK3 rolls on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 and flows down. Further, in the main path SK3, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above is projected onto the main path SK3 at the time of overhanging. In a state where the first variable plate 583b protrudes on the main path SK3, a game ball that rolls on the upper part of the fifth wall portion 574 rolls on the upper surface of the first variable plate 583b and is sent to the main path SK4. NS.

On the other hand, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is retracted from the main path SK3, the sub-path HK1 of the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall portion 574. Game balls are flowed in. The secondary path HK1 is sent to the recovery path formed by the back side wall portion 582b via the fifth opening 571e.

As described above, the first unit 551 includes a first variable plate 583b that overhangs the throwing path of the game ball or retracts from the throwing path, and due to the displacement of the first variable plate 583b, the main unit 551 is main. Since the game ball flowing down the path SK3 can be changed to the case where it is guided by the sub-path HK1 and the case where it is guided by the main path SK4, it changes in the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. Can be given.

In this case, since the game ball flowing into the sub-path HK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the game ball has flowed into the sub-path HK1. Further, since the first variable plate 583b is arranged in the middle of the throwing path formed in the first unit 551 and is displaced in the viewing direction (arrow FB direction) of the player, the first variable plate from the player The displacement of 583b can be made difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the flowing game ball of the first unit 551, and it is possible to easily give the player a hobby due to the flowing game ball.

Further, the sub-path HK1 has a main path SK3 that throws the game ball from the right side (arrow R direction side) to the left side (arrow L direction side) in front view, and a game ball located below the main path SK3 from the left side. It is formed on the fifth wall portion 574 that forms between the main path SK6 that throws the ball to the right side. Therefore, since the sub-path HK1 is formed by utilizing the space between the game balls being thrown to the left and right, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the first unit 551 from becoming large in the vertical direction. As a result, by reducing the outer shape of the first unit 551, the range in which the player can follow the game ball with his / her eyes can be narrowed, and the player can easily see the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. can.

The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571 g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing into the main path SK4 abuts on the protrusion 568 and is thrown to the inside (back side) of the recessed portion 571 g, and then rolls around the protrusion 568 along the inner surface of the recessed portion to be recessed. The ball is thrown to the outside (front side) of the installation part. That is, the game ball is rolled so as to bypass the protrusion 568. Further, the main path SK4 is communicated with the main path SK5, and a game ball passing through the main path SK4 can flow into the main path SK5.

The main path SK5 is a space formed by the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 of the second lining member 582 of the third path member 580 described above. The game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls the inside of the first space 582a2 to the back side as described above, and then rolls the inside of the second space 582a3 to the front side. Further, in the main path SK5, the second variable plate 584b of the second drive unit 584 described above projects onto the main path SK5 at the time of overhanging. In a state where the second variable plate 584b protrudes on the main path SK5, a game ball rolling inside the second curved portion 582a is sent to the main path SK6.

On the other hand, when the second variable plate 584b is retracted from the main path SK5, the sub-path HK2 of the space formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall portion 575 The game ball is evacuated. The secondary path HK2 is sent to the recovery path formed by the back side wall portion 582b via the sixth opening 571f.

Further, the second curved portion 582a constituting the main path SK5 is formed to be curved toward the back side as described above, and the game ball passing through the main path SK5 can be diverted to the back side. As a result, even when the area in front view is set in a predetermined limited space, the distance by which the game ball can roll can be increased.

Further, the second variable plate 584b is configured so that a part of the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part of the downstream side of the main path SK5 are displaced or retracted, and the main path SK5 is displaced. Since a curved path to the back side is formed between the upstream side of the main path SK5 and the downstream side of the main path SK5, the time during which the game ball passing through the main path SK5 may give the player a game value. Can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prolong the time for giving the player an interest.

The sub-route HK3 is communicated with the communication portion between the main route SK4 and the main route SK5. The sub-path HK3 is a space formed between the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and the back side wall portion 584c1 of the third path member 580.

The sub-path HK3 is in a direction different from the flow-down direction of the game ball when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 (front view right direction (arrow R direction) (front view left direction (arrow L direction)). The sub-path HK3 is opened. The lower inner edge of the inflow port of the sub-path HK3 is set below the second variable plate 584b (in the direction of arrow D).

Here, when the game ball normally flows down from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 (in a state where no external force other than gravity acts), the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the main path SK5 or the sub-path HK2. NS. On the other hand, at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 into the sub-path HK2, the second variable plate 584b is projected and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, and an external force other than gravity is applied to the game ball. When is acting, the game ball is pushed out to the inflow port of the sub-path HK3 by the second variable plate 584b and flows into the sub-path HK3.

Therefore, the first unit 551 includes a second variable plate 584b that projects on the throwing path of the game ball or retracts from the throwing path, and due to the displacement of the second variable plate 584b, the main path SK4 of the first unit 551. Alternatively, since the game ball flowing down the main path SK5 is guided to either the main path SK5, the sub-path HK2, or the sub-path HK3, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 can be changed.

In this case, since the game ball flowing into the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3 gives the player a predetermined game value, the player is closely watched whether the game ball has flowed into the sub-path HK2 or the sub-path HK3. Can be made to. Further, since the second variable plate 584b is arranged in the middle of the throwing path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, it is possible to make the first unit 551 pay attention to the flowing game ball, and it is possible to easily give the player a hobby due to the flowing game ball.

Further, as described above, on the upstream side of the main path SK4, the path through which the game ball flows is switched by the first variable plate 583b. Therefore, a game ball that does not flow into the sub-path HK1 on the upstream side and is not given a game value to the player can flow further downstream and flow into the sub-path HK2 or HK3. Therefore, by passing the game ball, which may have been given the game value to the player once, through the switching portion of the flow path, the player is made to have the desire for the game ball to flow into the sub-paths HK2 and HK3 again. be able to.

Further, a main path SK4 curved to the back side is arranged between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5 at which the flow path of the game ball is switched. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range in the front view, and the position of the game ball can be easily recognized by the player. That is, after the main path SK3 has flowed down, the player is made to recognize the position of the game ball through the main path SK4, so that the player pays attention to the game ball that rolls on the main path SK5 connected to the downstream of the main path SK4. It can be made easy. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball in which the game ball flows into the sub-paths HK2 and HK3, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, at both left and right ends on the front side of the second variable 584b, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24C) that incline toward the back side toward the ends in the left-right direction are formed. As a result, when the second variable plate 584b is projected at the timing when the game ball flows into the sub-path HK2 from the main path SK4 and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, the inclined surface 584b1 This allows the game ball to be pushed out to the inflow port side of the secondary path HK3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560 by the inclined surface 584b1 and the sub-path HK2, and the flow direction is different due to the difference in the timing at which the game ball is flowed down. It is possible to form a plurality of routes (three routes in the present embodiment) to which the above can be switched.

The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing down the main path SK6 is sent to the game area of the game board 13. Therefore, if the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 561 does not flow into the first receiving recesses 574a to the fourth receiving recesses 575b, the game value is not given to the player, and the game board 13 from the main path SK6. The ball is thrown into the game area and collected from the out port 71 formed on the game board 13.

<Guide means to displace the game ball in the front-back direction>
Next, the flow of the game ball from the main path SK2 to the main path SK3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28. 25 (a) and 26 (a) are partially enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIGS. 25 (b) and 26 (b) are XXVb of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 on the −XXVb line. 27 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 25 (a), and FIG. 27 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 25 (a). It is a schematic cross-sectional view of 551, and FIG. 27 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the line XXVIIc-XXVIIc of FIG. 25 (a). 28 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 in the line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. 25 (a), and FIG. 28 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 25 (a). It is a schematic cross-sectional view of 551. Note that FIG. 26 shows a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main path SK2, the main path SK3, and the curved path WK1 are recessed in the base plate 571 of the second path member 570 in an arc shape in cross section toward the back surface side. 571h, a second recess 571i and a third recess 571j, a first step portion 571k projecting stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK2 to the front side, and a second step projecting stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK3. A section 571 m and the like are provided.

The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 has a first convex portion 564b, a second convex portion 564c, and a third convex portion 564d at positions facing the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j, respectively. Be thrust.

The dimension L11 between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c (see FIG. 28A) is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the distance between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571 facing each other. It is set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28 (a)) of. As a result, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d is placed in the first concave portion. The rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball may be slowed down by bringing the 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d. can.

Further, the opposite dimension between the first concave portion 571h and the first convex portion 564b and the opposite dimension between the third concave portion 571j and the third convex portion 564d are the opposite distance dimensions between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c. The distance is set to be substantially the same as L11.

Further, the projecting tip surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d face each other with the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. The distance dimension L13 between them (see FIG. 28A) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d is first convex. It can collide with the portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d. As a result, the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Further, in this case, the game ball in contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d flows down inside the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. .. Therefore, the flowing game ball can be guided in the recessing direction of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The step portion 571k projects from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK2 to the front side. Further, the step portion 571k is formed on the downstream side in the path of the main path SK2. The step portion 571k is set at a position where the upstream end of the main path SK2 protrudes from the front of the base plate 571 to the front side, and the downstream end is at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Set. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the step portion 571k and moved to the front side.

Further, the step portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface whose upstream end portion projects from the upstream side to the downstream side toward the front side. As a result, the game ball that flows down the main path SK2 and comes into contact with the upstream end of the step portion 571k can be guided to the front side and flowed down to the downstream side.

Further, the step portion 571k has an upstream end portion formed on the upstream side of the main path SK2 with respect to the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the game ball that comes into contact with the step portion 571k and is guided to the front side can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

The first recess 571h is recessed in the base plate 571 constituting the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the first recess 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at a position protruding to the front side by the step portion 571k. The depth of the recess toward the back surface at the center of the first recess 571h in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L22 (see FIG. 27 (b)) of the step portion 571k toward the front surface. As a result, the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown without violence flows into the inside of the first recess 571h without being displaced in the recessing direction of the first recess 571h (the back side (arrow B direction side)). be able to.

On the other hand, the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown in a violent state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the step portion 571k and guided to the front side of the main path SK2, and the first convex of the front plate 564. It is brought into contact with the portion 564b. As a result, the game ball can be thrown inside the first recess 571h while suppressing the rampage of the game ball.

Further, the first recess 571h has a height dimension Y8 (the height dimension Y8 from the rolling surface of the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2 (the surface of the fourth wall portion 573 on the arrow U direction side) to the recessed bottom surface in the orthogonal direction. (See FIG. 25A) is set to the radius of the game ball, and is concave in the direction orthogonal to the rolling surface of the game ball on the downstream side of the main path SK2 (the surface of the fourth wall portion 573 on the arrow U direction side). The height dimension Y9 to the bottom surface (see FIG. 25A) is set higher than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is thrown along the first recess 571h, the resistance in the direction of lifting up in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) is applied to the game ball to cause the game ball to roll. The moving speed can be reduced. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be sufficiently reduced, and the game ball can be easily flowed down smoothly.

The radius X11 (see FIG. 27B) in the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, and when the game ball is thrown inside the first recess 571h, the radius X11 is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball. The game ball can be brought into contact with the inner wall. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the first recess 571h at two locations, and to prevent the resistance to rolling of the game ball from increasing due to the increase in the contact portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping on the main path SK2.

The first convex portion 564b formed at a position facing the first concave portion 571h is directed from the upstream end of the first concave portion 571h to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK2 (arrow R direction in FIG. 27B). It is formed at a position separated from the ball, and the value of the separation is set to a dimension smaller than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, and the ball can be easily thrown inside the first concave portion 571h.

The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1 and is formed in an elliptical shape whose outer shape in front view is long in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Further, the center position of the second recess 571i in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the front view is set to the intermediate position of the curved path WK1. Further, the second recess 571i is formed at the center position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view in the direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the curved path WK1.

The main path SK1, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK2 are all set to have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25 (a)) orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball in the front view. The width dimension L18 is set to be approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

Further, in the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j, the maximum width dimension in the lateral direction in the front view is set to approximately 1/2 of the width dimension L18 described above. As a result, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1 and main path SK2) can be passed through the front side of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j. , The game ball can be easily thrown inside the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The step portion 571m projects from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3 to the front side. Further, the step portion 571m is formed on the upstream side in the path of the main path SK3. The step portion 571m is set at a position where the downstream end of the main path SK3 protrudes toward the front side of the base plate 571, and the upstream end is set at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. NS. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 from flowing backward (rebounding) beyond the step portion 571m to the upstream side after being sent to the downstream side of the step portion 571m.

The third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 forming the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view. Further, the third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 at a position protruding to the front side by the step portion 571m. The depth of the recess toward the back surface at the center of the third recess 571j in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L23 (see FIG. 27 (c)) of the step portion 571 m toward the front surface. As a result, the game ball to which the main path KR3 is sent can be easily discharged from the inside to the outside of the third recess 571j.

Further, the end of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 is the end on the upstream side of the main path SK3 of the first variable plate 583b that switches the path flowing down to the sub-path HK1 described later (in the direction of the arrow R). It is arranged above the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow U) of the end). As a result, when the stop position of the first variable plate 583b is displaced upward in the direction of gravity due to the displacement (when the first variable plate 583b is arranged above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), By throwing the game ball passing through the main path SK3 along the inner surface of the third recess 571j, the ball can be thrown without being caught by the first variable plate 583b. As a result, it is not necessary to dispose the first variable plate 583b downward in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent to each other, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the vertical dimension of the first unit 551. ..

Further, in this case, the third recess 571j is formed in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) in the longitudinal direction in the front view, and is separated upward from the game ball flowing down the main path SK3. , The resistance in the upward direction can be applied to the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b from being caught by the first variable plate 583b.

Further, the first unit 551 transmits a main path SK2 for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction (side in the direction of arrow R) with respect to the game board 13 in the front view, and a game ball thrown from the main path SK2. The curved path WK1 includes a main path SK3 that throws a ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the main path SK2, and a curved path WK1 that connects one side of the main path SK2 and the main path SK3. Since the guide means (second convex portion 564c and second concave portion 571i) for sending the game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side of the game board is provided on the inner walls on the front side and the back side of the game board. The game ball passing through the curved path WK1 can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-rear direction of the game board 13 in the front view).

Therefore, the flow of the game ball accelerated by rolling on the main path SK2 (first path) rather than when the throwing path of the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 is formed on the same plane in the front-rear direction in the front view. You can slow it down. Therefore, the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 returns to the main path SK2 by the amount that the flow speed of the game ball can be slowed down, or the throwing direction of the main path SK2 inside the curved path WK1 (horizontal direction in front view (horizontal direction in front view). It is possible to suppress swaying (shaking) in the direction of the arrow LR)). As a result, the line of sight of the player can follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the curved path WK1.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in the front view) with respect to the game board 13 in the front view, the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 is correspondingly. It is not necessary to lengthen the path to prevent the game ball from swinging, and the path of the curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be housed in a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and a space for arranging the first unit 551 with respect to the game board 13 can be secured.

Further, the recess width of the first recess 571h is increased toward the upstream side of the main path SK2 in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the main path SK2 (arrow UD direction). As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily received in the first recess 571h. Further, since the recess width of the first recess 571h is set to be smaller toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, it is easy for the game ball received by the first recess 571h to come out from the same position. That is, the first recess 571h can easily accept the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2, and can easily let the game ball escape from the same position on the downstream side of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball can be easily thrown into the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1 communicating with the downstream of the main path SK2.

In this case, the recessed end of the first recess 571h in the flow direction (arrow R direction) of the main path SK2 is the rolling surface (fourth) of the main path SK2 in the rolling direction of the game ball to which the main path SK2 is sent. It is formed at a position exceeding the upper surface of the wall portion 573). Therefore, the game ball that escapes from the first recess 571h can be less affected by the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball that has escaped from the first recess 571h can be easily thrown into the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1.

Further, the main path SK2 is inside the path from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall portion 565b side (that is, from the front left side (arrow L direction side) to the front view right side (arrow R direction side)). The space is formed so as to be inclined toward the front plate 564 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). Further, the main path SK2 is formed so that its rolling surface (the surface of the fourth wall portion 573 on the upper side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the front side. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, it is possible to easily slow down the rolling speed of the game ball at the first convex portion 564b, and it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 from flowing back through the main path SK2 due to the reaction force that collides with the curved wall portion 565b. .. As a result, the game ball can be stably flowed down at the position where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed.

The upper end portion (end portion in the arrow U direction) of the second recess 571i is drawn linearly along the rolling locus of the center of the game ball that rolls on the main path SK2 (fourth wall portion 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 25 (a)). As a result, the game ball that is thrown from the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed and flows into the curved path WK1 can be easily received by the second recess 571i.

A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at a portion where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (curved path WK1). As described above, the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d, and the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. Since the distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28 (a)) between the two and the opposite is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball flowing down between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c is second. It can be brought into contact with the convex portion 564c and pushed into the inside of the second concave portion 571i. Therefore, the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 (exiting between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c) can flow down along the arc on the inner surface of the second concave portion 571i.

Here, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 tends to flow down a position closer to the rolling direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. Therefore, the game ball that flows down inside the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the region on the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the second recess 571i and flows down. Therefore, the throwing direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be easily directed to the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b and temporarily stopping the flow at the position where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (see FIG. 28).

Further, since the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 can be directed toward the flow direction of the main path SK3, the force with which the game ball collides with the curved wall portion 565b can be reduced. Can be done. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b due to the game ball repeatedly colliding with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

Further, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 arranged on the front side, and the first concave portion 571h is formed on the second path member 570 arranged on the back side.

Here, when a recess (a recess corresponding to the first recess 571h of the second path member 570) that is recessed toward the front side is formed in the first path member 560, the recess is recessed and the first path member 560 is recessed. It is necessary to increase the plate thickness of. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the transparency of the first path member 560 deteriorates, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551.

Further, when a concave portion is formed on the back surface of the bulging portion that partially bulges in front of the first path member 560, the bulging portion bulges toward the front side of the first path member 560, and the game board 13 It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) arranged on the front side of the glass unit. Therefore, since the first path member 560 is separated from the glass unit 16, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

On the other hand, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 arranged on the front side, and the first concave portion 571h is formed on the second path member 570 arranged on the back side. , The thickness of the first path member 560 arranged on the front side can be reduced. Further, since the portion that partially protrudes from the front side of the first path member 560 is not formed, the first path member 560 can be arranged close to the glass unit 16. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

The second convex portion 564c is located below the main path SK2 (upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573) in the direction of gravity (arrow D direction), and descends in substantially the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 in the front view. It is formed at an angle. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i facing each other is guided to the region on the right side of the front view (arrow R direction side) of the second concave portion 571i by the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, since the recessed surface of the second recess 571i is formed to be curved, the game ball that abuts on the inside of the region on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i in the front view and flows down. The ball can be thrown in the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the inflow of the game ball from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 can be made smooth.

Further, the second recess 571i is a virtual line IL4 (a virtual line IL4) in which the end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in front view is drawn linearly along the rolling locus of the center of the game ball that rolls on the main path SK3. It is formed at a position in contact with FIG. 25 (a)). Thereby, the height of the center of the game ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recess 571i can be set on the virtual line IL4. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is thrown toward the flow direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). Therefore, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the main path SK3 or the curved path WK1, and the game ball sent to the main path SK3 collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1. Stagnation inside those pathways can be suppressed.

Therefore, the flow direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be directed to the throwing direction of the main path SK3 at a position close to the rolling surface of the main path SK3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 from the curved path WK1 from being thrown in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the main path SK3 from colliding with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and stagnation.

<Place the first member that gives high game value on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29 (a) is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 29 (b) is a rear view of the second unit 552. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit 552.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 is a fourth path member 610 arranged on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and a fourth path member 610 thereof. A game ball throwing path is formed between the fifth path member 620 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) and the fifth path member 620 arranged on the back side of the fifth path member 620. A sixth path member 630 and a decorative member 650 arranged on the side surface of the second unit 552 are mainly provided.

The fourth path member 610 is attached to the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above. Further, the fourth path member 610 stands on the mounting plate 611 formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in front view and on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) from the end of the mounting plate 611. It is provided with a side wall portion 612 to be provided, and a first continuous passage 615 and a second continuous passage 616 through which an internal space is communicated with a second rolling portion 577 and a third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551.

The mounting plate 611 is recessed in a circular shape on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and has an insertion portion 617 in which a through hole is formed in the recessed bottom surface, and a fifth path member 620. Attached to the path side fastening part 618 and the decorative side fastening part 619, which are projected in a circular shape on the side (back side (arrow B direction side)) and have holes for screwing screws on the protruding tip surface. An opening 613 opened in the center of the plate 611 and a second insertion portion 614 opened outside the opening 613 are provided.

The insertion portion 617 is a portion through which the tip of a screw for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is inserted, and is formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) of the mounting plate 611.

The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion where a screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 632 of the sixth path member 630, which will be described later, is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632. As a result, the sixth path member 630 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The decorative side fastening portion 619 is a portion to which a screw inserted into the fastening hole 652 formed in the decorative member 650 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. As a result, the decorative member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged in the first unit 551. As a result, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be arranged inside the opening 613. Therefore, when the fourth path member 610 is arranged on the back surface of the first unit 551, it is possible to prevent the fourth path member 610 from becoming large in the front-rear direction, and to surround the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a. It can be surrounded by the fourth path member 610.

The first passage 615 and the second passage 616 are formed in a U shape in which the upper side (arrow U direction side) is open in the front view, and are extended in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). .. Further, in the first passage 615 and the second passage 616, the end portion on the front side is brought into contact with the back side of the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551, and the back surface thereof. The side end abuts on the front side of the ends of the first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 of the fifth passage member 620, which will be described later. Further, the first passage 615 and the second passage 616 are formed so as to be inclined downward from the first unit 551 side toward the fifth passage member 620. As a result, the game ball thrown from the second rolling section 575 and the third rolling section 578 of the first unit 551 to the first passage 615 and the second passage 616 is transferred to the first passage 615 and the second passage 615 and the second passage. The communication passage 616 can be rolled to flow into the first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 of the fifth path member 620.

The second insertion portion 614 is a hole through which a screw to be screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the protrusion portion 86b is inserted when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protrusion portion 86b of the center frame 86. It is formed at a position corresponding to the screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. As a result, the fourth path member 610 can be arranged on the back surface of the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86.

The side wall portion 612 is the side surface of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened. It is a plate member that covers the side surface of the mounting plate 611, and is erected on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611. The vertical dimension of the side wall portion 612 on the front side (first unit 551 side) is set to a length that abuts on the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. As a result, since the side wall portion 612 is arranged between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal object from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed of a plate having a substantially rectangular front view, a first inflow port 625 and a second inflow port 626 opened in the plate member 621, and a periphery of the second inflow port 626. The second erection wall 623 erected on the sixth path member 630 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) extending below the second inflow port 626, and the first from the periphery of the first inflow port 625. Mainly, the first erection wall 624 erected on the sixth path member 630 side below the inflow port 625 and the fastened portion 627 projecting from the plate member 621 to the sixth path member 630 side. Prepare for.

The plate member 621 is formed to have an outer shape smaller than the outer shape in the front view of the fourth path member 610, and is arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the fourth path member 610. Further, the plate member 621 includes a central opening 622 that is opened at the center in the front view. The central opening 622 is formed larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a in the rear view, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. As a result, when the plate member 621 (fifth path member 620) is arranged on the back surface side of the fourth path member 610, the second solenoid 584a inserted through the inside of the opening 613 of the fourth path member 610 is centered. It can be placed inside the opening 622.

As described above, the first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 are used to connect the first passage 615 and the second passage 616 of the fourth path member 610 to the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member. It is a portion (opening to allow inflow) to be received between facing 630.

The fastened portion 627 is a portion for screwing the tip of the screw through which the fastening hole 633 formed in the sixth path member 630, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. As a result, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened. Further, the protruding dimension of the fastened portion 627 toward the sixth path member 630 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a gap is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 so that the game ball can flow down.

The first erection wall 624 is a wall that guides a game ball flowing in between the first inflow port 625 and the opposite of the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630, and is extended downward and has a first wall. 2 Connected to the erection wall 623. The second erection wall 623 is a wall that guides the game ball that has flowed into the fifth path member 620 from the second inflow inlet, and extends in the vertical direction of the plate member 621. A description of the throwing path formed by the first erection wall 624 and the second erection wall 623 will be described later.

The sixth path member 630 is a second central opening 634 opened in a base plate 631 formed of a plate having a substantially rectangular front view and a base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. And an insertion hole 632 and a fastening hole 633 formed through the periphery of the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631.

The second central opening 634 is formed to have substantially the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 in front view, and when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined, the second central opening 634 is formed to have substantially the same size as the central opening 622. It communicates with the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. Thereby, when the second unit 552 is arranged on the back side of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be arranged inside the second central opening 634.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the throwing path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit 552 on the line XXXII-XXXII of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32, the second unit 552 is formed by being surrounded by the second erection wall 623 and the sub-path HK4 formed by being surrounded by the first erection wall 624 of the fifth path member 620. It is provided with an auxiliary route HK5.

The sub-path HK4 extends downward from the first inflow port 625, and then is bent toward the sub-path HK5, which will be described later, and communicates with the sub-path HK5. Further, in the sub-path HK4, a detection device SE7 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged in a downwardly extending portion. Thereby, it is possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the sub-path HK4. Further, when the detection device SE7 detects the passage of the game ball, a predetermined game value is given to the player (in the present embodiment, the prize ball of the game ball).

In the present embodiment, the number of game balls (for example, 3) awarded to the player as the game balls pass through the detection device SE7 is the detection device SE3 arranged in the first unit 551. The number is less than the number of game balls (for example, 15) that are awarded to the player as the game balls pass through ~ SE6. That is, the game value given to the player as it passes through the detection device SE7 is given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 arranged in the first unit 551. It is set higher than the game value to be played. This makes it easier to draw attention to the game ball passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the hobby.

The sub-path HK5 extends downward from the second inflow port 626 and communicates with the recovery path of the pachinko machine 10 below the second unit 552. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the sub-path HK5 is collected without giving the player a game value. Further, the game ball that flows down the sub-path HK4 and is detected by the detection device SE7 is sent to the sub-path HK5 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the special winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 formed of a material capable of transmitting light and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a second unit arranged on the back side of the first unit 551. The first unit 551 includes a first receiving section 561 capable of entering a game ball, and the second unit 552 includes a second receiving section 562 and a third receiving section capable of entering a game ball. A game ball having 563 and entering the first receiving unit 561 has a higher game value to the player than a game ball entering the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 (payout of the game ball). Is given.

Therefore, the handling of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is complicatedly formed (for example, the throwing path of the first unit 551 and the throwing path of the second unit 552 are in the front-rear direction in the front view. When the game ball is flowed down to the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same timing, the player can easily watch the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 as compared with the case of crossing the first unit 551. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 provided with the first receiving unit 561 having a high game value. As a result, since the player can visually recognize the game ball passing through the route that gives the player a high game value, it is possible to easily improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the inlet of the throwing path for throwing the game ball to the first unit 551 (first receiving section 561) and the inlet of the throwing path for throwing the game ball to the second unit 552 (second receiving section 562 and third). Since the receiving portions 563) are formed at adjacent positions, the receiving portion 563) flows into the first unit 551 to which a high game value is given, or flows into the second unit 552 to which a low game value is given, or the game ball flows into the second unit 552. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to judge until it flows in. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player an interest until just before the game ball flows into the special winning device 550.

Next, the arrangement state of the special winning device 550 on the center frame 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37. 33 (a) is a front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 33 (b) is a side view of the center frame 86. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86 in the XXXVI-XXXVI line of FIG. FIG. 37 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 37 (b) is a schematic disassembled cross-sectional view of the game board 13. Note that FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 36.

<Fixing means for urging the first member toward the base member>
As shown in FIGS. 33 to 37, the special winning device 550 has a first unit 551 that can be removed on the front side of the center frame 86 and a removable first unit 551 on the back side of the center frame 86 with the center frame 86 in between. It consists of a possible second unit.

The first unit 551 is the front side of the projecting portion 86b in a state where the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side of the first unit 551 are inserted into the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86. Is arranged in. Further, the first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a projecting in a columnar shape on the second unit 552 side.

The columnar body 551a is formed at a position facing the insertion portion 617 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552, and has a hole at the tip into which the screw through which the insertion portion 617 is inserted is screwed.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by screws inserted into the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. More specifically, the first unit 551 is disposed between the first unit 551 and the fourth path member 610 disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) via the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86. Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted from the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 into the columnar body 551a.

Further, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, the screw inserted into the second insertion portion 614 formed in the second unit 552 is recessed in the projecting portion 86b. By screwing it into (see FIG. 35), the projecting portion 86b and the fourth path member 610 can be fastened. As described above, since the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, the first unit 551 is fastened to the projecting portion 86b by fastening the fourth path member 610 to the projecting portion 86b. It is concluded against.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the opening dimension Y1 (see FIG. 37 (b)) of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 in the vertical direction is the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570). It is set slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37 (b)). Further, the distance dimension Y4 (see FIG. 37B) from the contact surface of the first unit 551 with the front surface of the base plate 60 to the contact surface of the second unit 552 with the base plate 60 is the first unit. When the 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, the thickness dimension Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37B) is set to be slightly smaller.

As a result, when the first unit 551, the second unit, and 552 are fastened, the first unit 551 can be urged to the base plate 60 side (back side). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the front surface of the base plate 60 and the first unit 551. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten the first unit 551 with screws from the front side of the base plate 60, and the screw fastening allowance is not required on the front side of the first unit 551. The area on the front side can be used as a throwing space for a game ball. As a result, it is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed in the first unit 551.

Further, since the fastening portion (columnar body 551a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is formed so as to project on the back surface side of the first unit 551, the fastening portion is formed on the front side of the base plate 60. It is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed in the first unit 551.

Further, since the second unit 552 can be urged to the base plate 60 (front side), it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60 so as to be illegally inserted into the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551. can.

Further, since the first unit 551 is arranged on the base plate 60 by a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, a fastening allowance (screw is inserted) with the base plate 60 on the front side of the first unit 551. It is not necessary to form an extension portion) in which an opening is formed. As a result, the entire area can be used as the throwing path with respect to the outer shape of the first unit 551 in the front view, and the throwing path of the first unit 551 can be increased.

Further, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is outside due to fraud from the front side of the game board 13. It can be suppressed. As a result, fraud to the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Further, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the head of the screw. As a result, the player recognizes the configuration for fixing the first unit 551 to the base plate 60, so that the player's interest can be suppressed from being lowered.

Further, the first unit 551 is arranged on the base plate 60 in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base plate 60 by the fixing means (screws) fastened from the back side of the base plate 60. The first unit 551 and the base plate 60 can be arranged in close contact with each other by the urging force acting on the one unit 551 on the back surface side.

Further, since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86 in a state where a throwing path capable of throwing a game ball is formed in each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the throwing path of the first unit 551 and the second unit 551 are provided. It is possible to prevent the throwing path of the unit 552 from deviating during assembly of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 from stopping at the throwing path of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

In addition, the first unit 551 includes a rolling surface (second rolling section 577 and third rolling section 578) for allowing the game ball sent to the first unit 551 to flow into the second unit 552. Therefore, if each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is fastened to the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86, an error in assembling the first unit 551 to the center frame 86 occurs, and the first unit 551 There was a risk that the game ball could not be smoothly thrown from the unit 551 to the second unit 552.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552, so that the error at the time of fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is minimized (when fastened). The place where an error can occur can be set to the minimum). As a result, the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

The fifth and sixth path members 620, 630 to be fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions overlapping at least a part of the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 of the fourth path member 610 in the rear view. .. As a result, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are removed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first unit 551 forming the main routes SK1 to SK6 from being removed from the center frame 86 and the main routes SK1 to SK6 from being illegally performed.

Further, the projecting portion 86b is provided with an upright portion 86b5 standing (folded back) on the side of the second unit 552 at the end (see FIG. 33 (b)). As a result, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86 with the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed therebetween, the upright portion 86b5 becomes the first unit 551. It is in a state of surrounding the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side.

Therefore, with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 arranged on the center frame 86, an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire may be inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 facing each other. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being illegally performed while the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86.

Further, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, and an upright portion 86b5 is interposed. Therefore, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be arranged by utilizing the space in which the standing portion 86b5 is arranged. Therefore, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are on the back side. It is possible to suppress the protrusion. As a result, the circumference of the back side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be easily surrounded by the second unit 552, and the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be tampered with from the back side. It can be suppressed by 2 units 552.

Further, since a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is arranged between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, a game ball flowing down the second unit 552 is placed. It can be hidden by the 1 solenoid 583a and the 2nd solenoid 584a to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, even if the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in the front view, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 can be moved. It can be easily made visible to the player. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551, which is given to the player a game value higher than the game value given to the player by the game ball flowing down the second unit 552. Because it can be done, it can be easily given to the player.

Further, in the state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged on the center frame 86, the decorative member 650 is arranged so as to cover the inner side surface of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from being inserted into the special winning device 550 through the opening of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 583a arranged in the first unit 551 has a central opening formed on the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552 on the back surface side. It is inserted inside the 622 and the second central opening 634. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second unit 552 from bulging toward the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B), and it is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires from being accessed by the first solenoid 583a.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, it is possible to prevent the second path member 570 of the first unit 551 on which the first solenoid 583a is arranged from bending. As a result, the passage of the game ball of the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

Further, as described above, since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are arranged so as to be surrounded by the opening 86b1 of the projecting portion 86b formed in the center frame 86, the load is relatively large (heavy). The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be supported by the opening 86b1 (protruding portion 86b). As a result, it is possible to prevent the projecting portion 86b from bending due to the load of the special winning device 550.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the center frame 86 arranged on the base plate 60 from bending (bending), so that the arrangement of the first unit 551 arranged on the center frame 86 is displaced with respect to the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

Further, the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 for sending the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 are formed outside the opening 86b1 of the projecting portion 86b. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated by the drive of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged inside the opening 86b1 hinders the rolling of the game ball sent from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552. It can be suppressed. In other words, the protrusion 86b can suppress the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the protrusion 86b. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

As described above, the first solenoid 583a is arranged so that the back surface side is inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. As a result, the wiring of the detection devices SE3 to 6 of the first unit 551 and the first solenoid 583a can be arranged by inserting the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. Further, since the wiring can be arranged along the first solenoid 583a, it is possible to suppress the wiring from being entangled.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the projecting portion 86b on which the first unit 551 is arranged bends. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the center frame 86 arranged on the base plate 60 from bending (bending), so that the arrangement of the first unit 551 arranged on the center frame 86 is prevented from being displaced with respect to the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

<Displacement member that arranges the fixing member of the board unit on the back member>
Next, the connection structure of the back case 300 and the substrate box 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42. First, the structure of the back case 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

FIG. 38 (a) is a front view of the back case 300, and FIG. 38 (b) is a rear view of the back case 300. FIG. 39 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 300, and FIG. 39 (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the back case 300 includes an engaging member 310 arranged on the front side (box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) of the bottom wall portion 301 and a back surface. A fixing member 320, which is arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the case 300 and fixes the above-mentioned board box 100 (main control device 110), is mainly provided.

Further, the back case 300 includes a protruding portion 301b projecting from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. It includes a second opening 301d that opens at opposite positions.

The projecting portion 301b is a shaft for holding the engaging member 310 in a slidable state, and is inserted inside a sliding groove 314 that opens in the engaging member 310, which will be described later. Further, the projecting portion 301b is projecting in an annular shape, and a screw can be screwed into the annular shape. Therefore, after inserting the projecting portion 301b inside the sliding groove 314, a screw having a head having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 314 is screwed into the projecting portion 301b to engage the engaging member. The 310 can be arranged in the back case 300.

The first opening 301c is an opening for inserting a part of the fixing member 320 (engaged portion with the engaging member 310) described later, and the engaging portion of the fixing member 320 (engaged portion 332 described later). ) Is formed into a shape that can be inserted. As a result, the fixing member 320 arranged on the back side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engaging member 310 arranged on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

Further, the first opening 301c is a protruding wall 301c1 projecting to the back side at an end portion on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) of the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 on the engaging side (arrow L direction side). To be equipped. The protrusion 301c1 is formed in a hook shape in which the tip of the protrusion on the back surface side bends by approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in a direction away from the first opening 301c (arrow R direction).

The protruding wall 301c1 is inserted into the locking portion 331 of the fixing member 320 whose tip is described later. Thereby, the opposite side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 arranged on the back case 300 can be supported (engaged) at both left and right (arrow LR directions) ends, and the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be engaged. It is possible to suppress the concentration of force on the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310 from being damaged. A detailed description of the arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be described later.

The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part (operator 315) of the engaging member 310, which will be described later, into the back side of the back case 300, whereby the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the back side of the back case. It can be operated from. Therefore, as described above, after the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back surface of the back case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the back side of the back case 300 to attach the fixing member 320 and the engaging member to the back case 300 ( It can be engaged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301).

The engaging member 310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and extends in a direction parallel to each other, the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 thereof. It is composed of a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312.

The above-mentioned 2 sliding grooves 314 are formed in the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, respectively, and are long in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312. It is opened in an elongated hole shape. As a result, the engaging member 310 is made slidable in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312.

In the first piece 311, the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected serves as an engaging portion with the fixing member 320 described later. An engaging portion 316 that is formed and projects outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and the engaging portions 316 at the two locations. From the substantially intermediate position toward the recess 317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. It includes a protruding operator 315.

The outer shape of the engaging portion 316 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view, and the outer surface on one side (arrow R direction side) is directed from one end to the other side (arrow L direction side). The outer surface on the other side is formed as an inclined surface protruding outward of the piece 311, while the outer surface on the other side is in the vertical direction (arrow U) which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311. -D direction) It is extended.

The recess 317 is formed by notching in the thickness direction of the first piece 311 and is recessed from one side (arrow R direction side) end of the first piece 311 toward the other side (arrow L direction side). NS. Therefore, one side of the first piece 311 is bifurcated. As a result, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320. A detailed description of the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described later.

The operator 315 is an operation portion for operating the engaging member 310, and is formed at the other end of the first piece 311. Its protruding dimension is larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. It is set to a value and is projected toward the back side of the back case 300 by at least a dimension that can be grasped by an operator with a finger. As a result, the operator 315 can be projected from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 315) can be grasped and operated.

The second piece 312 includes a fastening hole 318 that is recessed in a circular shape on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is a portion for screwing a screw to be inserted into a hole (see FIG. 89) penetrating the back base 720 of the rotating unit 700, which will be described later. As a result, after the rotating unit 700 is arranged inside the back case 300 (the front side of the bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 arranged on the back side of the rotating unit 700 is operated to operate the engaging member. The 310 can be operated to a specified position (engagement position with the fixing member 320 described later), and a screw is screwed into the fastening hole 318 to fasten the engaging member 310 and the rotating unit 700 (rear base 720). can do. Therefore, the engaging member 310 arranged at the specified position can be disabled only by the operation of the operator 315 protruding from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, in the state where the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 315 is illegally operated, and the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (main control device 110) are easily replaced with the illegal board box. Can be suppressed.

In this case, the screw that is fastened to the fastening hole 318 through the hole of the back base 720 of the rotating unit 700 can be operated from the hole from which the first winning opening 64 arranged in the game board 13 is removed. good. In this case, since it is not necessary to release the fastening between the game board 13 and the back case 300, it is possible to suppress the complicated replacement work for the normal board box 100. As a result, the normal replacement work of the board box 100 can be simplified.

The fixing member 320 is composed of a back case 300 and a separate member. As a result, the substrate box 100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than the rear case 300. Therefore, the substrate box 100 can be fixed as compared with the case where the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the rear case 300. It can be easily arranged. As a result, the board box 100 can be easily arranged in the back case 300 in a state where the board box 100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 320.

Further, the back case 300 can be diverted as a part having the same shape in each pachinko machine model, but the board box 100 has a different shape and size depending on the model of each pachinko machine 10, so that the board box 100 The fixing member 320 on which the machine is arranged cannot be used as a diversion with another pachinko machine. Therefore, as compared with the case where the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the back case 300, the mold at the time of molding the back case 300 can be the same mold as another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320 having a smaller outer shape than the back case 300, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The fixing member 320 is composed of an interposing member 330 that engages with the engaging member 310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposing member 330. As a result, the shaft support member 340 can be used as a diversion product having the same shape as the fixing member of another gaming machine.

The interposition member 330 is formed in a box shape in which the front side (arrow F direction side) is open, and the locking portion 331 projecting from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction). Engagement portion 332 formed in a frame shape protruding from the side surface of the back case 300 side (front side), an insertion hole 333 opening in a circular shape on the bottom surface of the box shape, and a shaft support member 340 from the back surface. It mainly includes a protrusion 334 protruding to the side.

Further, the interposing member 330 is formed with protrusions that project from both outer sides of the engaged portion 332 in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction) toward the front side (arrow F direction side) in a columnar shape. Further, the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 is formed with a circular opening recessed at a position corresponding to protrusions protruding from both outer sides in the gravity direction of the engaged portion 332. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion into the opening, the movement of the interposing member 330 (fixing member 320) in the vertical direction in the front view is restricted.

The locking portion 331 is provided with an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 301c described above. The protruding wall 301c1 projecting into the bottom wall 301c1 is inserted into the bottom wall 301c1 so as to be engaged with the bottom wall portion 301. As a result, when the intermediate member 330 (fixing member 320) is arranged in the back case 300, the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 331 of the intermediate member 330 and one side of the intermediate member 330 (arrow R). The directional side) can be locked with respect to the back case 300.

The engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 310, and the protrusion dimension toward the back case 300 side (arrow F direction side) exceeds the engaging member 310 arranged in the back case 300. The distance dimension from the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front of the bottom wall portion 301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engaging member 310 to the front of the bottom wall portion 301. Set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are arranged at overlapping positions in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the intermediate member 330 to the shaft support member 340 described later is inserted, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the shaft support member 340.

The protrusion 334 is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the tip end portion on the bending side and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the shaft support member 340 described later. Will be done. As a result, the insertion portion 344 can be inserted and arranged between the tip portion of the protrusion 334 on the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330.

The shaft support member 340 has a box-shaped main body 341 that opens on the back case 300 side (arrow F direction side) and a substantially U-shaped cross section from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the main body 341. It is mainly provided with a bulging support portion 342.

The main body 341 has an insertion portion 344 protruding upward from the side surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side), and a box-shaped main body portion 341 from the bottom surface side (arrow D direction side) to the back surface side (arrow). It mainly includes a fastening hole 343 that is recessed toward the B direction side).

As described above, the insertion portion 344 is a plate member that is inserted between the tip end portion of the protrusion 334 on the bent side and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper side of the shaft support member 340 from tilting toward the back side of the back case 300.

The fastening hole 343 is arranged on the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D) that is biased toward the end opposite to the insertion portion 344. Further, as described above, the fastening hole 343 is a hole for fastening a screw through which the insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39B) of the intermediate member 330 is inserted. Therefore, in the shaft support member 340, the insertion portion 344 on the upper side (arrow U direction side) is inserted into the protrusion 334 of the intervention member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the intervention member 330. Therefore, since the shaft support member 340 is fixed to the intermediate member 330 only by fastening the lower screw, the number of fastening portions can be reduced and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

The support portion 342 is a portion to be caulked and fastened to the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) described above, and is formed in a hollow shape in which a caulking metal fitting can be arranged. The substrate box 100 is held in a rotatable state with respect to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with a caulking metal fitting.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (a) to 41 (b). FIG. 40A is a front view of the rear case 300 in a state before engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, and FIG. 40B is a front view of the rear case 300 before engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320. It is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the state of. FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the rear case 300 in a state after the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 41 (b) is a view after engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320. It is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the state of. In addition, in FIG. 40 (b) and FIG. 41 (b), a part of the outer shape of the engaging member 310 overlapping with the back case 300 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), before engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, the interposing member 330 and the shaft support member 340 are placed on the interposing member 330 side (front side (arrow). It is fastened and combined with screws inserted from the F direction side)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the intermediate member 330 and the shaft support member 340 from being illegally disassembled (the fastened screws are removed) from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100, which is caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340, from being replaced with an illegal board box.

The intervening member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 320) in the fastened state have a protruding wall 301c1 formed in the first opening 301c inside the locking portion 331 of the interposing member 330 as described above. Will be inserted. In this case, the intervening member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 320) in the fastened state are arranged in the first opening 301c from the bent side (arrow R direction side) of the protruding wall 301c1.

When the fixing member 320 is arranged in the back case 300, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is arranged at a position facing one side (engaging portion 316 side) end portion of the engaging member 310. As a result, by sliding-displace the engaging member 310, one side (arrow R direction side) end of the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

Here, the outer dimensions of the two engaging portions 316 of the engaging member 310 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) are the openings in the vertical direction of the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 described above. It is set larger than the dimension. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 cannot be arranged in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

On the other hand, the engaging member 310 can easily elastically deform the first piece 311 by the recess 317 recessed on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 as described above, and is engaged. Due to the triangular shape of the joining portion 316, the force when the engaging member 310 is slidably displaced and comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 can be applied to the concave portion 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, the bifurcated first piece 311 can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), in the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320, the engaging member 310 is slidably displaced, and the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is an interposition member. When inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of 330, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to the shape before deformation. As described above, the engaging portion 316 is extended in a direction in which the side surface on the other side is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311. Therefore, the force that elastically deforms the first piece 311 toward the recess 317 is not applied only by the force that slides and displaces the engaging member 310 in the opposite direction. That is, the inclined surface and the recess 317 of the engaging portion 316 make it easy to insert the first piece 311 into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332, and the side surface of the other side (arrow L direction side) of the engaging portion 316 It is possible to make it difficult for the first piece 311 inserted in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 to come off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back side of the back case 300 due to the illegal act of the player, and the board box 100 (main control device 110) caulked and fastened to the fixing member 320 is an illegal board box. It can be suppressed from being exchanged for.

Further, the back case 300 is arranged between the base plate 60 and the back case 300, and is the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60, and is the base plate 60 and the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The fixing member 320 includes an engaging member 310 that can be operated from the outside between the facing portions of the above, and the fixing member 320 includes an engaged portion 332 that projects to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300, and the engaged portion 332 thereof. And the engaging member 310 are engaged with each other and are arranged on the back case 300. Therefore, in a state where the accessory device (rotating unit 700 in this example) is arranged between the base plate 60 and the back case 300. The engaging member 310 can be operated from the outside between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 to engage the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320.

Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be arranged on the back case 300 without being disturbed by the accessory device arranged between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 facing each other. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily arranged on the back case 300.

Further, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300, the engaging portion between the back case 300 and the fixing member 320 is used as the base plate. It can be arranged between the 60 and the rear case 300 facing each other. This makes it difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released from the back side of the base plate 60, and it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being illegally (for example, being replaced with an illegal fixing member). can.

Further, the back case 300 includes a first opening 301c opened in a portion where the fixing member 320 is arranged, and a second opening 301d opened in the portion where the engaging member 310 is arranged. The engaging member 310 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300 and from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300 via (inserting) the second opening 301d. The fixing member 320 is operable, and since the engaged portion 332 that has passed through the first opening 301c is arranged on the front side of the back case 300, the engaging portion 332 of the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is arranged. It is possible to make it difficult to access the engaging portion with the rear case 300 from the back side. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be fixed to the back case 300 regardless of the size of the accessory device arranged in the back case 300, and the board box is operated from the back side of the game board 13 and is illegal. It can be prevented from being replaced with.

Further, since the engaging member 310 includes an operator 315 that penetrates the second opening 301d and projects to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300, the front side of the back case 300 (arrow F direction side). ), The engaging member 310 can be easily operated. As a result, the engagement operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be facilitated.

Further, since the engaging member 310 can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 can be slidably displaced with respect to the back case 300 in the front-rear direction (arrow). Since it is not displaced in the FB direction, the front side (arrow F direction side) of the engaging member 310 can be easily used as an arrangement space for the accessory device arranged in the back case 300. As a result, the area on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as a space for arranging the accessory device.

Next, an operation when the fixing member 320 is removed from the back case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a substantially L-shape in front view, and the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is the first. It can be operated from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 300 through the opening 301c.

Therefore, the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 is elastically deformed to the recessed side of the recess 317 with a special tool or the like, so that the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 are engaged with each other. The match is released. In the disengaged state, the engaging member 310 is displaced in the direction of pulling out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332 (in the direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is restored. , The engagement between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

The gap between the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 and the first opening 301c is preferably formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person who removes the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 can be made impossible to insert, and a special tool can be inserted. As a result, the board box 100 (main control device 110) can be replaced only by an operator having a dedicated tool, and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced by an unauthorized board box 100.

Next, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) caulked and fastened to the shaft support member 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b). 42 (a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110), and FIG. 42 (b) is a rear view of the rear case 300 and the board box 100 (main control device 110). Is. In FIG. 42B, the outer shape of the engaging member 310 overlapping with the substrate box 100 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the substrate box 100 includes a bearing portion 117 projecting from one end on one end side (side in the direction of arrow R). A pair of bearing portions 117 are arranged in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) at predetermined intervals. As described above, the pair of bearing portions 117 are portions that are caulked and fastened to the support portion 342 of the shaft support member 340, and the dimensions of the support portion 342 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and the distance between the facing portions are substantially equal. Set to the same. As a result, the substrate box 100 is fastened to the shaft support member 340 by disposing a support portion 342 between the pair of bearing portions 117 facing each other and inserting a caulking pin from above the bearing portion 117 to caulking and fixing the board box 100. Will be done.

According to the substrate box 100 configured as described above, the substrate box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the shaft support member 340 and is arranged on the back surface side of the engaging member 310. As described above, when the operator 315 is operated to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320, the operator 315 can be easily operated by rotating the board box 100. Further, after the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the substrate box 100 is arranged on the back side of the engaging member 310, so that the operator 315 can be difficult to operate from the back side of the back case 300. .. As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, it is possible to prevent the operator 315 from being operated and replaced with an illegal board box.

The other end side (arrow L direction side) of the board box 100 is inserted from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the board box 100 toward the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and fastened to the back case 300. It is fixed by the screw to be made. As a result, the substrate box 100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Next, a detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. First, a structure for displacementing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

FIG. 43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. It should be noted that FIGS. 43 to 14 show a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position (the position arranged at the lowermost position with respect to the base member 410).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. The 420, the link member 430 connected to the base member 410 and displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end connected to the link member 430. It is mainly provided with a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by transmitting a driving force from the link member 430.

The base member 410 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members having a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 arranged on the front side and a back base 412 arranged on the back side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the back base 412.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction on the paper in FIG. 43), two columnar shaft support pins 411c and 411d protruding toward the back side, and a shaft support pin 411d. It is mainly provided with a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape about the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes through which two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed so as to extend in the left-right direction, respectively. Therefore, by displacing the protrusions 472 and 473 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by being curved in an arc shape, respectively, and are upward (upward in FIG. 43) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411. ) Is opened. Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at different positions on the axes of their respective arcs, and the gap between the opposing portions in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end portion to the right end portion.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, does not change, the lower displacement member 440 rotates when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove. It can be displaced while being moved. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated along with the sliding without applying the driving force for rotation to the lower displacement member 440. The detailed displacement mode of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 of the transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-like body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411c from being broken (damaged) when a force is applied to the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction.

The shaft support pin 411d is a protrusion inserted into a through hole 431a formed at one end of a first link member 431, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the shaft support pin 411d is formed of a metallic rod-like body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411d from being broken (damaged) when a force is applied to the first link member 431 toward the through hole 431a.

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back surface side of the front base 411 and is formed to be curved around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance that abuts on the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from being displaced forward. Further, since the curved wall portion 411e is formed by being curved around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d, the first link member 431 even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the shaft support pin 411d. The plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the above can be brought into contact with the protruding tip surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The collection port 411f is an opening for allowing the ball ejected from the exit opening 471 to flow into the collection port 411f and collect it by moving the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later. The downstream side of the collection port 411f is connected to the collection path of the ball. The recovery port 411f is a hole formed by projecting from the right end portion of the front base 411, and its opening surface is a surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the lower displacement member 440 in the first overhanging state. It is a surface located on the lower side of the exit opening 471 in the direction of gravity.

Further, the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the exit opening 471 can be received in the collection port 411f and quickly collected.

The back base 412 has groove portions 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 44) toward the back side, and a locking portion 412c formed so as to project toward the front side in the vicinity of the groove portion 412b. Formed mainly in preparation.

The groove portion 412a is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411c of the front base 411 described above, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411c, and faces the shaft support pin 411c. It is recessed in the position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held so as not to fall off from the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 after inserting the shaft support pin 411c into the shaft portion 422a. Further, since the back base 412 can hold the tip end portion of the shaft support pin 411c, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface thereof, the shaft support pin 411c is in contact with the front base 411. It is possible to prevent bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove portion 412b is a hole for inserting the tip end side of the shaft support pin 411d of the front base 411 described above, is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pin 411d, and faces the shaft support pin 411d. It is recessed in the position. Therefore, the first link member 431 is held so as not to fall off from the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 after inserting the shaft support pin 411d into the through hole 431a. Further, since the back base 412 can hold the tip of the shaft support pin 411d, when a force is applied to the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the shaft support pin 411d becomes the front base 411. It is possible to prevent bending and breaking from the connecting portion of.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end side of the urging spring SP1 described later, and is formed on the outside of the urging spring SP1. As a result, one end side of the urging spring SP1 can be locked. A detailed description of the urging spring SP1 will be described later.

The transmission member 420 includes a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam meshed with the transmission gear 421 and rotated by driving the transmission gear 421. It is mainly provided with a member 422.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear having a toothed surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when electric power is applied to the drive motor KM1 and the shaft portion is rotated, the transmission gear 421 is also rotated in the same manner.

The cam member 422 is formed in a shape in which one ends of two semicircles having different outer shapes in the front view are combined, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. A tooth surface 422b that meshes with the transmission gear 421 is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the semicircle having a small outer shape of the cam member 422, and a shaft portion 422a is formed through the center of the semicircle. A sliding groove 422c recessed on the back surface side facing the link member 430, which will be described later, is formed in a semicircular portion having a large outer shape of the cam member 422.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted as described above, and the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by the shaft support pin 411c so that the cam member 422 can rotate the shaft of the shaft support pin 411c. It is held rotatably in the center.

Since the cam member 422 is arranged on the base member 410 with the tooth surface 422b meshed with the transmission gear 421, when the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 422a. can.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer peripheral portion of the semicircular portion having a large radius of the cam member 422. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end side to the other end side. Further, the sliding groove 422c is displaced downward with a step portion 422c1 extending in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 when the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state described later. When the member 440 is located in the second overhanging state described later, the step portion 422c3 extending from the sliding protrusion 431d in the direction of the through hole 431a, and the lower displacement member 440 are in the retracted state and the second overhanging state. It is provided with a step portion 422c2 extending in the direction of the through hole 431a from the sliding protrusion 431d when it is located in the first overhanging state in the intermediate state.

The link member 430 is formed of two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the ends of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432.

The first link member 431 is formed by being bent into a dogleg shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced with the displacement of the cam member 422, and has a through hole 431a that penetrates in the front-rear direction on one end side and a columnar connecting projection 431c that protrudes on the back side on the other end side. A plate-shaped projection 431b projecting at a position facing the curved wall portion 411e described above and a columnar sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion are mainly provided.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the shaft support pin 411d is inserted as described above. The first link member 431 is rotatably held with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 with the shaft support pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-shaped protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses the position shift of the first link member 431 in the front-rear direction and prevents the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 arranged in the front, and penetrates through the plate-shaped protrusion 431b. It is formed in a plate-like body that protrudes in a curved shape about the hole 431a, and the protruding length is set to be larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back surface of the cam member 422 from colliding with the front surface of the first link member 431.

Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is set to be larger than the thickness (dimension in the arrow FB direction) of the cam member 422. Further, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the projecting tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b is arranged with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 55A)).

The cam member 422 is arranged in a displaceable state between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped protrusion 431b and the projecting surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e facing each other. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps including the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other are larger than the above-mentioned distance X14. It is set large.

As a result, when the first link member 9431 bends in the direction in which the distance X14 becomes smaller (arrow F direction), the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) faces the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b. Can be brought into contact with. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from being sandwiched between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b and the projecting surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e to regulate the displacement.

The connecting protrusion 431c is a shaft portion that is connected to the second link member 432, which will be described later, and is inserted into the through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head from the back side is larger than that of the through hole 432a. Large screws etc. are fastened. As a result, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f projecting to the back surface side is formed at the edge portion of the through hole 431a. The wall portion 431f is a wall surface for fitting and holding the urging spring SP1 described later on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The link-side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that locks the other end side of the urging spring SP1 fitted into the wall portion 431f, and is formed so as to project like a hook on the back surface side of one end side of the first link member 431. .. Therefore, one end of the urging spring SP1 is engaged with the locking portion 412c of the back base 412, and the other end is engaged with the link side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. NS. Therefore, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 can be applied in the direction of rotating the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the urging force of the urging spring SP1 acts, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 can be suppressed.

The sliding projection 431d is formed at a position separated from the through hole 431a, which is substantially the same distance as the separation distance from the through hole 431a to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Further, the tip portion of the sliding protrusion 431d is inserted inside the sliding groove 422c. That is, the size of the outer diameter of the sliding protrusion 431d is formed to be smaller than the width dimension between the sliding grooves 422c facing each other.

By arranging the sliding protrusion 431d inside the sliding groove 422c, the sliding projection 431d slides and is displaced inside the sliding groove 422c with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422. That is, when the cam member 422 is displaced, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be described later.

Further, since the sliding protrusion 431d and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b are formed at positions close to each other, the plate-shaped protrusion 431b suppresses the displacement of the first link member 431 to the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, it is not necessary to increase the recessed depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the rigidity of the sliding groove 422 can be ensured without increasing the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction.

One of the second link members 432 is formed in a long front view rectangle, and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The second link member 432 is mainly provided with a through hole 432a formed through the one end side in the front-rear direction and a through hole 432b formed through the other end side in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 432a is a hole for connecting to the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted therein. As a result, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431.

The through hole 432b is connected to the lower displacement member 440 described later and can transmit the displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432b is a hole into which the protrusion 482a of the back case 482, which will be described later, is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 becomes the second link member 432. It is held rotatably with respect to. Therefore, when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced, the drive of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted via the link member 430.

Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. FIG. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state, and FIG. 49 is a lower displacement unit in the second overhanging state. It is a front view of 400. FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state, and FIG. 52 is a lower displacement unit in the second overhanging state. It is a rear view of 400. In addition, in FIGS. 50 to 52, the state in which the back surface base 412 is viewed transparently is shown. Further, in FIGS. 50 to 52, a part of the plate-shaped protrusion 431b and the curved wall portion 411e of the first link member 431 is shown by a chain line.

Further, the retracted state is a state in which the sliding protrusions 431d arranged inside the sliding groove 422c are arranged between the opposite steps 442c1 and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged on the lower side. The second overhanging state is a state in which the sliding protrusions 431d are arranged between the step portions 442c3 facing each other, and the tip end side of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the uppermost position. The first overhanging state is a state in which the sliding protrusions 431d are arranged between the stepped portions 442c2 facing each other, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 at the first position is rotated by the transmission gear 421 to form the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the sliding groove 422c. The shaft portion 422a is positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) when viewed from the rear. In this case, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and is positioned at the step portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 is in a state where the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is located on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the through hole 431a on one end side when viewed from the rear (rotating around the through hole 431a). It is in a state where the end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, one end side (through hole 432a side) connected to the first link member 431 is located on the right side in the rear view (right side in FIG. 50). As a result, in the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432, the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411 are located on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the rear view. It is considered to be in a state. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b facing each other in the vertical direction is larger on the right side in the rear view than on the left side. It is placed in the state of being. That is, it is in a state of being arranged in front of the front base 411.

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first overhanging state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by displacing the cam member 422.

In the first overhanging state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the retracted position and displaced to the third position. As a result, the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Due to this rotational displacement, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c and is arranged at the third driven position. In the first overhanging state, the sliding protrusion 431d is guided between the facing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated by approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is from the retracted position to the upper left of the rear view (FIG. 51). It is displaced to the upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b because the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side in the rear view to the left side, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 48). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is located on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the tip side. That is, at the time of transition from the retracted state to the first overhanging state, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slidably displaced so that the tip end side of the lower displacement member 440 overhangs to the right side of the base member 410 in the front view. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable region of other displacement accessories. It is possible to suppress collision with other displacement accessories.

Further, since the recovery port 411f is located below one end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 sides connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, is located. When the ball is launched and falls downward from the exit opening 471 as it is, the ball can be thrown to the collection port 411f.

The displacement from the first overhanging state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second overhanging state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first overhanging state.

In the second overhanging state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 from the first overhanging state, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position of the first overhanging state (third position). It is placed in the second position. Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (the step portion 422c3 side is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Further, the sliding of the first link member 431 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c by this rotational displacement. The moving protrusion 431d is displaced according to the displacement of the sliding groove 422c and is arranged at the second driven position. In the second overhanging state, the sliding protrusion 431d is a stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Guided between facing inner walls.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connecting projection 431c side) is seen from the position in the first overhanging state. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left of FIG. 52).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b because the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411. As described above, the distance between the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in the vertical direction is narrowed from the right side in the rear view to the left side, so that the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 49). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, similarly to the first overhanging state, in the second overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned on the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip side. That is, at the time of transition from the retracted state to the second overhanging state, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slidably displaced so that the tip end side of the lower displacement member 440 overhangs to the right side of the base member 410 in the front view. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable region of the other displacement accessory, and it is possible to suppress collision with the other displacement accessory.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. FIG. 53A is a rear view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the retracted state, FIG. 53B is the first overhanging state, and FIG. 53C is the second overhanging state. be. In FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c), the portion of the cam member 422 that overlaps with the first link member 431 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 53 (a), in the retracted state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c facing each other. Further, as described above, the sliding projection 431d is formed at a position substantially the same as the distance between the through hole 431a and the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422, and at a position separated from the through hole 431a. Therefore, when a force rotating about the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the retracted state, the force is applied from the sliding projection 431d to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. can. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 from being displaced in the retracted state.

As shown in FIG. 53B, in the first overhanging state, the sliding protrusions 431d of the first link member 431 and the stepped portions 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are arranged between the facing surfaces of the inner walls. Therefore, as in the retracted state, when a force rotating around the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the first overhanging state, the force is applied from the sliding projection 431d to the cam member 422. It can act on the shaft portion 422a. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 from being displaced in the first overhanging state.

Here, in the first overhanging position, the drive motor KM1 needs to be maintained in the stopped state in order to maintain the stopped state because it is an intermediate position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, there is a problem that energy consumption increases when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first overhanging position (intermediate position of displacement).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between the inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c, as described above. In addition, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position in the middle of the displacement, even if the electric power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped, the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 from increasing when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped in the middle of displacement.

As shown in FIG. 53 (c), in the second overhanging state, the sliding protrusions 431d of the first link member 431 and the stepped portions 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are arranged between the facing surfaces of the inner walls. Therefore, as in the retracted state and the first overhanging state, when a force rotating around the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 located in the second overhanging state, the force slides. The protrusion 431d can act on the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, the rotational force of the first link member 431 can prevent the cam member 422 from rotating. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 from being displaced in the second overhanging state.

Further, since each step portion 422c1, 422c2, 422c3 extends in the direction connecting the sliding protrusion 431d and the through hole 431a, the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced. The width dimension of can be reduced. Therefore, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding projection 431d at which the first link member 431 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a at the retracted position, the first overhanging position, and the second overhanging position is made small. can. Therefore, the gap in which the first link member 431 in each state can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a can be reduced. As a result, the width of the lower displacement member 440 in each state swaying due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, and the player can easily visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440 regulate that the lower displacement member 440 is displaced in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. FIG. 54 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 on the LIVa-LIVA line of FIG. 50, and FIG. 54 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 on the LIVb-LIVA line of FIG. be. Note that, in FIGS. 51 and 52, the rear base 412 is shown transparently, but in FIGS. 54A and 54B, a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in a non-transparent state is shown. ..

As shown in FIG. 54A, the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is arranged between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction. That is, since the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 formed by combining a plurality of equipments via the second link member 432, the load of the lower displacement member 440 causes the front-rear direction. Since the cam member 422 is arranged in the front where there is a risk of bending, it is possible to prevent the first link member 431 from bending forward. As a result, since the first link member 431 can be suppressed from moving forward, the downward displacement member 440 can be suppressed from swinging in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state is arranged between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the case of the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, in the retracted state and the first overhanging state, the cam member 422 is arranged on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, when the link member 430 is formed of the two members, it is necessary to make the connecting portion rotatable, so that the rigidity of the link member 430 is weaker than that of the other portions due to the gap, and the link member 430 is easily bent. Since the member 422 is arranged, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion of the link member 430 from bending. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Regulate the displacement of the displacement member by the regulatory means that regulates the displacement of the driven member>
Next, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 50, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the LVb-LVb line of FIG. FIG. 55 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the LVc-LVc line of FIG. 52.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e are in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Placed in different positions. Therefore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first overhanging state (third position), it is possible to suppress an increase in the resistance acting on the cam member 422. As a result, the displacement start of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state (third position), a part of the cam member 422 is a curved wall portion 411e. It is arranged at a position separating a predetermined gap on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the. As a result, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the axial side surface of the cam member 422 is brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e, and the cam member 422 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side.

The surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (arrow F direction side) is formed on a flat surface parallel to the back surface of the front base 411 (see FIG. 45). As a result, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from partially contacting the curved wall portion 411e and to prevent the force from being concentrated on a part of the cam member 421e. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from being damaged.

Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first overhanging state (third position), the protrusion 473 connected to the tip side (front base 411). And the opposite side in the longitudinal direction) are rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the force component at which the lower displacement member 440 tilts in the front-rear direction is increased. Therefore, in the case of the first overhanging state (third position), the force acting on the link member 430 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is stronger than in the case of the retracted state (first position). Be enlarged. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced beyond the retracted state (first position) to the first overhanging state (third position), a part of the cam member 422 is a curved wall. Since it is arranged on the front side of the portion 411e, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction between the first overhang state (third position) and the second overhang state (second position), and the player can displace the lower displacement member 440. Can be easily seen.

The displacement of the link member 430 to the back surface side can be regulated by disposing the link member 430 between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings toward the back surface side, the link member 430 can be brought into contact with the back surface base 412 to regulate the displacement of the link member 430. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

Further, the front base 411 is provided with a regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) for restricting the swing of the link member 430 in a direction other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaced between the first position and the second position. The first displacement region that displaces the third position between the first position and the intermediate position between the first position and the second position and the second displacement region that displaces the second position from the third position can be displaced. The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by the displacement of the cam member 422 from the first position to the second position, and the link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. The first driven region that displaces the third driven position at the intermediate position with and the second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position can be displaced, and the second displacement region and the first driven region are displaceable. When the cam member 422 is displaced in the second displacement region, the cam member 422 is restricted from swinging in a direction other than the displacement direction by the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e). Therefore, the swing of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be regulated by utilizing the same portion of the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e).

Therefore, since it is sufficient to form the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) at one place, the shape of the regulating means is different from the case where the regulating means for regulating the displacement is formed on each of the cam member 422 and the link member 430. Can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the swing of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be regulated by using the same portion of the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e), the link member 430 can be applied to one regulating means (curved wall portion 411e). Since it is not necessary to form the cam member 422 and the regulating portion, respectively, the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second overhanging state, the protrusions 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b formed in the front base 411. (Color C (see FIG. 14) arranged on the protrusions 472 and 473) is the front side (arrow F direction side) of the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 as the cam member 422 is displaced. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). As a result, when the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the back side by the protrusions 472 and 473 (color C arranged on the protrusions 472 and 473), the cam member 422 is pushed to the back surface side. There is a risk that it will be rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction around 422a and come into contact with the link member 430.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the displacement of the cam member 422 to the front side can be regulated by abutting the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 is centered on the shaft portion 422a. It is possible to suppress rotational displacement in the front-back direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the link member 430 and the cam member 422 from coming into contact with each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first overhanging state (third position), the displacement is regulated by the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 is curved during the initial operation. It is possible to prevent the frictional resistance from increasing due to contact with the wall portion 411e. As a result, the initial operation of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described. FIG. 56A is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the LVIa-LVIa line of FIG. 52, and FIG. 56B is a first view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second overhanging state (second position). It is a front view of the link member 431 and the cam member 422. In FIG. 56B, the outer shape of the base member 410 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end portion of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the first link member 431. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction in which the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the second displacement state can be regulated. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be dispersed between the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b and the contact portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431, and transmission is possible. It is possible to prevent the tooth surfaces of the gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b from being damaged.

When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the contact surface between the plate-shaped protrusion 431b of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 is in contact with the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is set in a direction orthogonal to the virtual line KS1 passing through the portion. As a result, when a force that displaces from the second displacement state to the retracted state (first position) acts around the axis of the first link member 431, the force is applied to the shaft of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is possible to suppress the action in the direction of rotating around. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the cam member 422 by the force acting on the first link member 431.

Here, as described above, the tip side (the side opposite to the protrusion 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction) of the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is maximized. Since the transmission of the force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the position of the second displacement state.

Further, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position in the second displacement state, a force that rotates around the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 is applied by the load of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the end portion of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-shaped protrusion 431b, and the force PW1 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a and the sliding of the cam member 422. The inner wall of the moving groove 422c is pushed out from the sliding projection 431d, and the force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a acts in a direction of canceling each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from rotating due to the force acted on by the first link member 431.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that FIG. 60A shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is transparently viewed, and FIG. 60B shows a transparent view of the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 is a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 470, and a case member 480 and a base member 470. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 460 displaceably arranged between them and a decorative member 450 formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.

The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and has protrusions 472 and 473 protruding to the back side on one end side and an erection wall 471a standing on the front side from the edge on the other end side. , Left-right direction (FIG. 57 left-right direction) A protruding wall 477 that protrudes vertically from the upper end of the central part to the front side in an up-down U-shape, and an engraved on the upper end of the base member 470 from the end of the protruding wall 477 to one end side. The rack gear 476 to be installed, the shaft portions 474 and 475 protruding to the front side, the rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the back surface on one end side of the base member 470, and the vertical center portion of the base member 470. Is mainly provided with an opening 479 that extends from one end side to the other end side and is recessed.

The protrusions 472 and 473 are connecting portions that are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 to connect the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411 as described above. Therefore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between the inner walls facing each other.

The erection wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481 described later is attached to the base member 470, and has a diameter of a sphere. It is set to a larger vertical dimension.

The shaft portions 474 and 475 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the transmission gears 462 and 463 of the transmission mechanism 460, which will be described later, to rotatably hold the transmission gears 462 and 463, and are larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole of the transmission gears 462 and 463. It is formed in a columnar shape with a small outer diameter.

The rack gear 476 is engraved with a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 described later. As a result, the movable rack 464, which will be described later, slides and displaces with respect to the base member 470, so that the transmission gear 465 can be rotated.

When the ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600, which will be described later, is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450, the projecting wall 477 causes the ball to fall to the outside of the lower displacement member 440. It is a wall surface for suppressing the above, and is formed larger than the diameter of the sphere between the facing wall portions formed in a substantially U shape.

The wiring locking portion 478 is a member for locking the flexible wiring (not shown) to the control board arranged on the back side of the base member 470, and one end of the flexible wiring between the wiring locking portion 478 and the base member 470. It is attached to the back side of the base member 470 in a state of being interposed. As a result, even if the lower displacement member 440 is displaceably arranged with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to prevent the flexible wiring from being entangled.

Further, the wiring locking portion 478 is provided with a protrusion 478a protruding in a columnar shape on the back surface side. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that protrudes to the back side of the link member 430 connected to the back side, and is set to a distance that allows contact with the front surface of the back base 412. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging backward, and it is possible to prevent the link member 430 from colliding with the back surface base 412.

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the slide displacement direction of the movable rack 464 arranged on the front side, and the guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464, which will be described later, is inserted inside.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member arranged in front of the base member 470, and meshes with the transmission gears 461, 462, 463, the drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface and slidably arranged in front of the base member 470, and a transmission gear rotatably arranged in the movable rack 464 and in a state of being meshed with the rack gear 476. A rack 466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and slidably arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and a ball rotatably arranged on one end side of the rack 466. It is mainly provided with a receiving portion 467.

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted in the shaft hole, and the drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 in a state of being connected to the drive motor KM2, whereby the base member 470 is attached. Is arranged in.

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 are rotatably held by the base member by inserting the shaft portions 474 and 475 of the base member 470 into the shaft holes. Further, the transmission gears 461 to 463 are gear trains meshed with each other, and when the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2, the terminal transmission gear 463 is rotated.

The movable rack 464 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in a front view, and has a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b projecting in a columnar shape from the front side, and projecting upward from one end side of the upper end surface. The contact plate 464c, the guide plate 464d projecting from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, the rack guide portion 464e projecting to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d, and the lower end projecting to the other end. It is mainly provided with a collision portion 464f.

The rack gear 464a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, by arranging the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in a toothed state on the base member 470, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion in which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 465.

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that abuts on the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, and displaces the distribution member 540. That is, the distribution member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. The mode of contact between the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-like body inserted inside the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 464 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2 can be displaced along the extending direction of the opening 479. In the present embodiment, since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

The rack guide portion 464e is a protruding wall for regulating the displacement direction of the rack 466, which will be described later, and is projected from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f is a wall portion that abuts on the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492, which will be described later, to displace the displacement member 492, and is formed so as to project from the lower end of the movable rack 464. Further, the collision portion 464f is formed so that the other end side is inclined. As a result, the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492 can be slid along the inclined surface to be displaced.

The rack 466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b protruding from the other end side to the back side in a columnar shape, and a shaft portion 466b protruding toward the front side. It is mainly provided with two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466d which is recessed from one end to the other end on the back surface side.

The rack gear 466a is meshed with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464. As a result, when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 slides and displaces, so that the transmission gear 465 is rotated according to the slide displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. .. Therefore, the rack 466 can be displaced with respect to the movable rack 464.

The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion inserted into the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held rotatably.

The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion inserted into the opening 481a of the front case 481 described later, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness. As a result, when the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 from the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extending direction of the opening 481a. can.

The recessed portion 466d is in a state in which the rack guide portion 464e is arranged inside when the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464. As a result, when the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 from the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. can.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined as the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slidably displaced in the left-right direction, the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, and the transmission is transmitted. There was a risk that the driving force would not be transmitted well from the gear 465 to the rack 466.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 is formed because the sliding plate 466c and the opening 481a and the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed at two locations that define the displacement direction of the rack 466. It is possible to suppress the change in the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 when the displacement state of the above is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission of the drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 from being hindered.

Further, the sliding plate 466c is formed so as to project from two positions in the left-right direction (FIG. 57 (a) left-right direction) of the rack 466, and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is formed. It is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57) at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 most overhangs the movable rack 464).

Here, at the displacement end position, since the ball receiving portion 467 arranged on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) as described later, the ball receiving portion arranged on one end side of the rack 466 is performed. The other end side of the rack is likely to be displaced due to the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, a load is likely to be applied to the tooth joint surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 most overhangs the movable rack 464). Since it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57), the rack 466 at a position where the ball receiving portion 467 engages with the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 when the ball receiving portion 467 performs a firing operation (rotational operation). Can be suppressed from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 from being damaged.

The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion that holds the game ball, is formed in a substantially U-shape in front view, and is formed so that the ball can be received in the inner portion of the U-shape. That is, the inside of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball can be formed in the inner portion of the ball receiving portion 467. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape and a leg portion 467a protruding downward from the lower outer peripheral surface.

As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for holding the ball receiving portion 467 in the rack 466 in a rotatable state, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. Further, after the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, the urging spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft of the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. NS. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the rack 466 in a state of being urged around the right side in the front view. A detailed description of the aspect of the ball receiving portion 467 will be described later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that urges the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the urging spring SP2, and the tip of the leg portion 467a is a front surface described later with the U-shaped open portion of the ball receiving portion 467 facing upward. It is set at a position where it abuts on the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481. Thereby, it is possible to regulate the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 481 arranged on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate in the front view, and has an opening 481a extending in the left-right direction at a position substantially intermediate in the direction of gravity, a bottom wall portion 481b formed so as to project from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge portion. It is mainly provided with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above, when the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted inside.

The bottom wall portion 481b is formed so as to project from the lower end portion of the front case 481 to the back surface side, and extends in the left-right direction. Further, in the bottom wall portion 481b, when the front case 481 is arranged on the base member 470, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface thereof.

The back case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the back side of the base member 470, and the outer shape in the front view is formed in a rectangular horizontally long shape smaller than the outer shape of the base member 470. Further, the back case 482 includes a protrusion 482a protruding toward the back side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b, the back case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotated by fastening a screw or the like whose head is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a. Can be connected in the same state.

The decorative member 450 is formed in an outer shape that imitates a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 is formed mainly including a front side decorative portion 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a back side decorative portion 452 arranged on the back side of the back case 482. In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

The front side decorative portion 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the front case 481 in the front view, and is attached to the front case 481. As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front side decorative portion can be made invisible to the player.

The back side decorative portion 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front side decorative portion 451. As a result, the member arranged on the back side of the front side decoration part 451 from above the back side decoration part 452 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, the displacement member 492 is arranged on the same plane as the front decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is formed mainly including a shaft portion 492a projecting to the back surface side and a protrusion 492b.

The shaft portion 492a is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be connected to the front case in a rotatable state. Further, an urging spring SP3 is arranged on the tip end side of the shaft portion 492a into which the shaft hole 481c is inserted. As a result, the displacement member 492 can be arranged in an urged state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be described later.

The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force that rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 according to the displacement.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) displaceable on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold the game ball. Moreover, since the displacement member 492 is formed so as to be injectable and can be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

That is, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, the change in the position of the center of gravity due to the launch of the game ball is offset. When a configuration is adopted in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in the direction in which the displacement member 492 is displaced, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to a change in the position of the center of gravity. Further, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction with the launch of the game ball. When a displaceable configuration is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction.

Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position in the second displacement state, the force PW1 in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56B). And the force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a acts in a direction in which they cancel each other out, and the cam member 422 is acted on from the first link member 431. Rotation by force can be suppressed. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be arranged in a stable state. Therefore, when the game ball is launched from the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings due to the inertial force generated by the launch of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 is displaced by the collision portion 464f colliding with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacement of the displacement member 492. .. That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 can also be used as a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by the sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is detected according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control of driving the displacement member 492 with the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost and ensuring the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. FIG. 61 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. It is a figure. 64 (a) to 64 (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440.

The first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 61) with respect to the base member 470. The second position is the position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower side (lower side in FIG. 62) of the projecting wall 477 in the direction of gravity. The third position is the position where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the right end in the left-right direction of the base member 470.

Further, in FIGS. 61 to 64, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the transition state immediately before the displacement to the third position is shown in order, and in FIG. 64C, the lower displacement member 440 at the third position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 61, the lower displacement member 440 at the first position is in a state where the movable rack 464 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Further, in the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 are overlapped in the front-rear direction. That is, the rack 466 is also positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470, like the movable rack 464. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

At the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are gathered at the left end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while being slidably displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states), the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged near the rotating axis. It is desirable to keep it in the specified state.

According to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 that displaces the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superposed on the front and rear (two-stage rack). It can be brought closer to the grooves 411a and 411b (the rotation axis side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second overhanging positions, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position, so that the lower displacement member 440 is set. The driving force when the is rotationally displaced can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. As a result, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted from the rack gear 464a that meshes with the transmission gear 463 to the movable rack 464, and the movable rack 464 is slid and displaced to the right with respect to the base member 470.

When the movable rack 464 is slide-displaced, the transmission gear 465 arranged in the movable rack 464 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470 in accordance with the slide displacement. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid and displaced to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2 in the same manner as the displacement from the first position to the second position. Since the transmission of the drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is released from the contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. , The urging force of the urging spring SP2 arranged on the shaft portion 466b causes rotational displacement around the shaft of the shaft hole 467b.

More specifically, in the first and second positions (the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the left side of the ball receiving portion 467 in the front view from the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position), the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in front. It is in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481, and the rotation clockwise in the front view is restricted around the shaft hole 467b due to the urging force of the urging spring SP2.

On the other hand, when the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip portion is arranged on the right side of the front view from the end portion of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the bottom wall portion 481b and the base member 470 stand. It is arranged inside the recess 481b1 formed between the wall and the wall 471a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 around the shaft hole 467b is restricted. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated by approximately 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. In the following, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position will be referred to as a firing operation.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 includes a recess 481b1 recessed in the track region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction), and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. In addition to providing a leg portion 467a that is engaged with the recess 481b1, the posture can be changed by engaging the leg portion 467a with the recess 481b1, so that the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. The structure can be simplified.

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slidly displaced to the right side in the front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464 and collides with the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 launches and the ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter, so that the lower displacement member 440 swings and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. The inertial force can be applied in the opposite direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging when the sphere is discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Next, the operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. 65 (a) to 65 (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. In addition, in FIGS. 65A to 65C, the transition states in which the ball is received by the ball receiving unit 467 are shown in order.

Further, in FIGS. 65A to 65C, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line.

Further, in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the horizontal direction of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is illustrated by a two-dot chain line with a reference numeral of the virtual line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is first stretched. The horizontal direction in the displacement state is illustrated with the reference numeral of the virtual line H2. Further, the angle at which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the position in the retracted state to the position in the first overhanging state is shown with a reference numeral of angle θ. The virtual line H1, the virtual line H2, and the angle θ are also shown in the figures after FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the virtual line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is positioned at the first position. The game ball T1 is thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to the opening 451a formed in the front side decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440. The game ball T1 thrown into the opening 451a is thrown inside the projecting wall 477 and is thrown inside the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the game ball T1 is thrown into the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged below the protruding wall 477, so that the game ball T1 thrown inside the protruding wall 477 is placed inside the ball receiving portion 467. You can throw the ball. By accepting the game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced according to the operation of the ball receiving portion 467.

As shown in FIG. 65 (c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be arranged at the first position while the game ball T1 is arranged on the ball receiving portion 467.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceable on the base member is known. According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of being displaced between the overhanging position where the base member is extended to the game area and made visible to the player and the evacuation position where the base member is retracted from the game area, the base member is It is possible to perform an effect of displacement of the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since one side of the base member is displaceably arranged on the base member, when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with one side as a dead center. There was a problem that sticking was likely to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so that the base member tends to rattle due to the influence of the inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts the displacement from the second position and the displacement is performed from the first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position. It is formed so that the starting mode can be formed, and at least the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410 (for example, the lower displacement member 440 projects into the game area and is visible to the player. In the first overhanging state), the displacement is started from the first position, so that the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the lower displacement member than the second position, by setting such a first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 The weight can be kept close to the dead point when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410, and the influence of the inertial force when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state is reduced by that amount. It can be difficult to act on the displacement member 440. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

Further, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) while being slidably displaced. Therefore, if the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while the game ball T1 is arranged far away from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is likely to be generated in the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to move the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467. There is a problem that a collision sound is generated due to the collision between the ball and the game ball T1, or the ball receiving portion 467 is damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position, so that the game ball T1 can be displaced on the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440. It can be placed (approached) in the vicinity. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) while the game ball T1 is received by the lower displacement member 440, centrifugal force is applied to the game ball T1. It can be suppressed from occurring. As a result, it is possible to prevent a collision sound from being generated when the game ball T1 and the ball receiving portion 467 collide with each other, or to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being damaged.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 440, the transmission mechanism 460 for operating the ball receiving portion 467 is formed by the movable rack 464, the transmission gear 465 (pinion gear) and the rack 466 (rack member), and the ball receiving is received by the rack 466. Since the portion 467 is arranged, when the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started from the first position, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weights of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are on one side of the lower displacement member 440. It can be kept close to (a fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state.

Further, in the state where the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is set to the sliding groove 411a, 411b side of the front base 411 (the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440). It can be easily moved to the side). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the first and second overhanging positions, the lower displacement member 440 is set to the first position, so that the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced. The driving force can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, the payout operation of the ball will be described with reference to FIG. 66. 66 (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. In addition, in FIGS. 66A to 66C, the transition state of the lower displacement member 440 in the payout operation of the sphere is shown in order. Further, in FIGS. 66A to 66C, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, the ball payout operation is an operation of paying out the game ball T1 received by the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the exit opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 66A to 66C, the payout operation of paying out the ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 displaces the lower displacement member 440 from the first position to the third position in order. It is done by.

That is, the game ball T1 is received inside the ball receiving portion 467 in the receiving operation, and the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position is displaced to the third position, so that the game ball T1 is placed on the ball receiving portion 467. With the displacement, it is transported to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 moved to the exit opening 471 side is given an inertial force to the exit opening 471 side by the slide displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position, and the ball receiving portion 471 is subjected to an inertial force. It pops out from the inside of the part 467. As a result, the ball can be discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Here, since the displacement direction when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts the displacement from the first position is the direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is set to the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 is subjected to the transmission gear 465 (the transmission gear 465) after the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started. The portion on the rack gear 466a side to which the pinion gear) is meshed is directed to one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be brought closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles with respect to the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be moved closer. It is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 when it is displaced from the stopped state.

The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction), and when the third position is reached, the posture is changed so that the ball receiving portion 467 receives one game ball T1 up to the third position. It is possible to easily maintain the state held by the portion 467 and prevent the game ball T1 from falling off from the ball receiving portion 467, while when the second position is reached, the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is used. Therefore, the game ball T1 can be easily discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

The ball receiving portion 467 shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c) is paid out at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the virtual line H1). When performing the operation, the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 performs the payout operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the position in the first overhanging state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 440 The game ball paid out to the outside of the 440 is thrown to the upper part of the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the discharge operation when two or more balls are thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 67 (a) to (c) and 68 (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440.

In addition, in FIGS. 43A to 43C and 44A to 44C, the transition states of the discharge operation are shown in order. Further, in FIGS. 43 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 44 (a) to (c), the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are transparently viewed, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is seen transparently. The outer shape of is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c), when two or more balls are continuously thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T2 can be dropped on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced from the first position to the second position, and the first game ball T1 can be thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467, and the second game ball T2 can be the first ball. It can be brought into contact with the game ball T1 of No. 1 and fastened inside the projecting wall 477 (see FIG. 67 (b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 receives the first game ball T1 in the ball receiving portion 467. The 467 can be displaced to the first position, and the second game ball T2 can be dropped on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

Here, in a gaming machine that displaces a ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position to the third position due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, if a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the sorting member 540 of the sorting unit 500, which will be described later. There is a possibility that a specified number or more of game balls are thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the amount of game balls exceeding the specified number. For example, a game ball exceeding a specified number may enter the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 and be bitten into a movable portion, resulting in damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that the number of game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the inside of the back case 300).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable from the second position to the first position opposite to the throwing direction of the ball. The orbital region can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the distribution member 540 and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is expanded, and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is increased. Can be accepted in the orbital region. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiving unit 467 and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, the game balls exceeding the specified number. It is possible to prevent problems caused by the ball.

Further, the ball receiving unit 467 can receive and hold one game ball T1 thrown from the distribution unit 500 described later at the second position, and can hold the ball in the direction from the second position to the first position (second direction). ) Is formed so as to be displaceable by a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, after receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (first direction). ), The number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be thrown to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 (the region in the first direction from 467 of the ball receiving portion). Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, since the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, the first game balls T1 and 2 It is possible to separate the game ball T2 after the ball. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), the game of the second and subsequent balls while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the first game ball T1. The operation of discharging only the sphere T2 from the orbital region becomes possible.

Further, in the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball and then the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position to discharge the game ball T1 from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the second ball is used. The game ball T2 of No. 2 falls on the upper part of the rack 466, the second game ball T2 is thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the transmission gear 465, and the second game ball T2 is displaced downward by the downward displacement member 440. There is a risk that it will not be able to be discharged to the outside.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the receiving operation of receiving the ball in the ball receiving portion 467 is performed, and after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position, the first position opposite to the exit opening 471 is performed. Since it can be displaced to, it is possible to prevent the second game ball T2 from being unable to be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In other words, in a game machine provided with an accessory that ejects a game ball thrown into the accessory, a position that accepts the ball by the operation of a member that ejects the ball (ball receiving portion 467 in the present embodiment). If only the (second position) and the position where the ball is ejected (third position) are displaced, when two or more game balls are thrown into the accessory, the ball is ejected to the member that ejects the ball. Where there is a risk of discharging the second game ball T2 on the side opposite to the exit (exit opening 471), in the present embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving portion 467 is ejected from the exit opening 471. By displacing the game ball T2 to the first position on the opposite side of the ball, the second game ball T2 can be thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (c), after the second game ball T2 is thrown on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before the firing operation. By doing so, the second game ball T2 can be rolled to the exit opening 471 side in a state of being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be discharged from the exit opening 471.

In this case, the ball receiving portion 467 is above the center position of the second game ball T2 in which the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion is thrown on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (above FIG. 68 (a)). Is placed in. Further, in a state where the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is arranged in a state of being tilted by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Further, since the side surface of the U-shape (right side of FIG. 68 (a)) of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end portion of the leg portion 467a, the second ball is played. The outer surface of T2 can be brought into contact with the leg portion 467a.

Further, since the leg portion 467a is in a state of being tilted by approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a and the outer surface of the lower hemisphere (lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side) of the second game ball T2 Be abutted. As a result, when the second game ball T2 is rolled toward the exit opening 471, a force for lifting the second game ball T2 upward can be generated on the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, the frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped when the second game ball T2 is rolled toward the exit opening 471.

In other words, the leg portion 467a is projected from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the protruding tip thereof is the trajectory of the ball receiving portion 467. Since the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower half surface of the game ball (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2) sent to the region, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction). When displaced to, the game ball can be moved while pushing its lower half surface with the leg portion 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, a leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 (the second and subsequent game balls T2). By interposing, the distance between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be secured by the protrusion length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

Further, since the leg portion 467a has a role of changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and a role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof by engaging with the recess 481b1, the number of parts is increased accordingly. It can be reduced to reduce the product cost.

Further, since the size of the recess 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball sent to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, that is). When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the retracted state, the recovery port 411f is arranged below the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the game ball T2 that has been ejected in the retracted state is sent to the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is in a state of being located below the exit opening 471. Further, the opening of the collection port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the ejected game ball T2 is sent to the collection port 411f.

That is, since the collection port 411f is arranged below the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (standing wall 471a side) in the vertical direction and has an opening in the vertical direction, the ball receiving portion 467 is the first. The game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) that is moved along with the movement in the three position directions (first direction) and discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is received from the opening of the collection port 411f. Can be collected.

Further, the opening of the recovery port 411f is vertical at the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (standing wall 471a side) at least at each position of the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state. It is arranged downward in the direction. As a result, the game ball (that is, the second ball) is discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 regardless of whether the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted position, the first overhanging state, or the second overhanging state. Subsequent game balls T2) can be received and collected from the opening of the collection member.

It should be noted that, in the position where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally with the virtual line H1), FIGS. 67 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 68 (a) to (c). When the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged, the game ball discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f. Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged at the position where the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 440 is discharged. The game ball paid out to the outside of the 440 is thrown to the collection port 411f as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is discharged from the exit opening 471 will be described. 69 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the firing operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the erection wall 471a side to open the exit. It can be pushed out of the lower displacement member 440 from 471.

In this case, when the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 come into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the exit opening 471. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 can be returned to the state before the rotational operation by utilizing the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is brought into contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when the game ball T2 thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged, it is possible to prevent the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 from falling off.

Further, the lower displacement member 440 is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the orbital region when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position direction (first direction) and is recessed. A standing wall 471a located on the first direction side of 481b1 is provided, and the second and subsequent game balls thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 are displaced in the first direction of the ball receiving portion 467. When it is moved, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the erection wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving portion 467 is regulateably formed. Therefore, the first game ball T1 is moved. While maintaining the state held by the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to easily discharge only the second and subsequent game balls from the orbital region.

That is, since the height of the erection wall 471a from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the erection tip is lower than the radius of the game ball, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the leg portion, the lower half surface of the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the erection wall 471a, so that the game ball can easily get over the erection wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a), and a reaction force is applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion and prevent the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467 from falling off. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the game area.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball is not interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, so that the leg By engaging the portion 467a with the recess 481b1, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. As a result, the first game ball T1 (that is, the game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467) can be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467 by utilizing the change in the posture of the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. FIG. 70A is a top view of the sorting unit 500, and FIG. 70B is a rear view of the sorting unit 500. FIG. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the distribution unit 500 is provided between a base plate 520 formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view and a base plate 520 attached to the front side of the base plate 520 and facing the base plate 520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which a ball can flow down, a distribution member 540 that is rotatably attached to the back side of the base plate 520, and a base plate 520 that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 520. And an extension path member 530 that extends the flow path of the sphere formed between the path forming member 510 and the path forming member 510.

The base plate 520 has a columnar shaft portion 523 projecting to the back side, a first opening 521 formed through an arc shape centered on the shaft of the shaft portion 523, and a radius larger than the first opening 521. A second opening 522 that is formed through a large arc shape, a rolling portion 525 that has a U-shaped cross section that opens on the upper end side and extends in the left-right direction, and a hook-like protrusion on the back side. It is mainly provided with a locking portion 524 to be formed.

The shaft portion 523 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 described later and attaches the distribution member 540 to the base member in a rotatable state, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545. Will be done.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 of the distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted, and the opening has a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542. It is formed. Further, since the distribution member 540 is attached to the base plate 520 in a rotatable state, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are larger than the dimensions in the circumferential direction of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view. The length of the arc is formed large.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion that engages the urging spring SP4 with the locking portion 544 formed on the distribution member 540, and one end of the urging spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling portion 525 is a bottom surface on which the sphere rolls, and has a curved shape formed in a U shape while being inclined downward toward one end on the left side (left side in FIG. 70 (b)) when viewed from the rear. It is formed larger than the outer shape of the sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 from stopping at the rolling portion and to roll the ball to one end side.

Further, the rolling portion 525 includes a plurality of protrusions 525b protruding from the front and rear side surfaces toward the inside of the U-shape, and an opening 525a opening at one end on the back side.

The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear side surfaces at regular intervals, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at positions where they are staggered in front view. Therefore, since the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can collide with the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down.

Here, as described above, the ball is thrown to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position (FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b)). )reference). Therefore, when the throwing speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3 is increased, the game ball is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 before moving the ball receiving portion 467 to the second position. There is a risk of being struck.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b are formed so as to project from the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3, and the gaming ball passes through the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3. Since resistance can be imparted, the speed of the game ball passing through the third throwing path KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position), the required time can be lengthened by that amount, so that the game ball can be reliably secured to the ball receiving portion 467. Can be received by. Further, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be slowed down, so that the product cost can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed so as to be open to the back surface side of one end of the rolling portion 525, and its outer shape in rear view is formed to be larger than the size of a sphere. Therefore, the ball that rolls the rolling portion 525 to one end side is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular vertically long plate having a width smaller in the left-right direction than the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back side thereof. By forming the space between the two facing each other larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, a flow path of a plurality of spheres is formed inside the sphere.

The path forming member 510 includes a first throwing path 511 that opens on the upper end surface, a first throwing path KR1 that is formed between the side walls of the first opening 511, and a second throwing path that is connected to the first throwing path KR1. KR2 and the third throwing path KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 opening on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of the second throwing path KR2 and the third throwing path KR3 are formed through in the front-rear direction. On the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth throwing path KR4 formed by the plurality of openings 514,515,516 and the wall on the back side of the openings 514,515,516, and the fourth throwing path KR4. It is mainly provided with a fourth opening 517 to be opened.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing the ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600, which will be described later, to flow into the inside of the sorting unit, and is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510, and its outer shape is larger than that of the ball. It is formed large. Further, the first opening 511 is connected to the ball throwing unit 600 so that the ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600 can flow in.

The first throwing path KR1 is a path for flowing a ball flowing in from the first opening 511 between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed by extending downward. Further, the fourth throwing path KR4 is formed so as to extend to about one-third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and the downstream end is connected to the second throwing path KR2 and the third throwing path KR3. Will be done. That is, a ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is formed so as to flow down the second throwing path KR2 or the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the second throwing path KR2 is a path formed by being connected to the first throwing path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when a ball that flows down from the first opening 511 and flows down the first throwing path KR1 flows down to the second throwing path KR2, it is discharged from the second opening 512 to the outside of the distribution unit 500.

The second opening 512 is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for collecting balls. Therefore, the ball discharged from the second opening is collected by the collection route. Further, a sensor device SE2 for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged inside the second opening 512 (downstream end of the second throwing path KR2). Therefore, the sensor device SE1 detects the number of game balls passing through the third winning opening 82, and the sensor device SE2 detects the number of game balls passing through the second throwing path KR2. The number of game balls passing through the path KR3 can be detected.

That is, it is possible to detect whether or not a predetermined number of game balls (1 ball) are stored upstream of the regulation plate 541, which will be described later, by the difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the balls passing through the second throwing path KR2 (sensor device SE2). When the number is 7, it can be detected that one game ball is flowing (stored) in the third throwing path KR3.

As described above, the third throwing path KR3 is a path formed by being connected to the first throwing path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the third opening 513. That is, when a ball that flows down from the first opening 511 and flows down the first throwing path KR1 flows down to the third throwing path KR3, it is discharged from the third opening 513.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end side (opposite end side of the opening 525a) of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520. Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is thrown inside the rolling portion 525. That is, the ball thrown into the third throwing path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 through the third opening 513.

The openings 514 to 516 are formed on the back side of the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13, respectively, and the balls that have won the third winning opening 82 are thrown. That is, when a ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins the third winning opening 82, the ball is thrown into the distribution unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth throwing path KR4 is formed by being connected to the openings 514 to 516, is connected to one path on the downstream side, and is connected to the fourth opening formed on the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for collecting the sphere. Therefore, the ball that has won the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 is thrown into the fourth throwing path KR4 of the distribution unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

The extension path member 530 is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the lower side open, and is extended in the left-right direction. Further, the extension path member 530 is formed so that the inner diameter of the U-shape is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by disposing it on the upper part of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520, the ball thrown to the upper part of the rolling portion 525 can be thrown inside the rolling portion 525 and the extension path member 530. , It is possible to prevent the ball rolling on the rolling portion from falling from the rolling portion 525.

Further, the extension path member 530 is formed with protrusions 531 formed at regular intervals at the same positions in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. As a result, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down as in the case of the protrusion 525b.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view in which one is long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 includes a regulation plate 541 and a storage plate 542 protruding from the front side in a plate shape, a shaft hole 545 formed through the upper one end side, and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 formed on the back side. It is formed mainly with and.

As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 can rotate to the base plate 520 by inserting the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 into the shaft hole 545 and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the shaft hole to the shaft portion 523 from the back side. It is attached in a good condition.

The regulation plate 541 is arranged at a connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 via the first opening 521, and a ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 flows into the second throwing path KR2. The plate member is formed so as to project toward the front side of the shaft hole 545 on the front side, and the protrusion distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the displacement region of the regulation plate 541 can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second throwing path KR2 via the second opening 522 and stores the balls flowing down the second throwing path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542, and is a plate member of the shaft hole 545. It is formed so as to project to the front side from the end surface on the front side, and the protrusion distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the radius of the arc is formed to be larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulation plate 541. Therefore, the storage plate 542 is formed at a position separated from the shaft hole 545 by the regulation plate 541. As a result, the regulation plate 541 can be projected to the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second throwing path KR2. Further, the displacement region when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The protrusion 543 is a drive transmission member that exerts a rotational driving force on the distribution member 540 by colliding with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above, and projects to the other end side of the distribution member 540. It is formed. That is, a protrusion 543 to which the driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to the one end side on which the shaft hole 545 serving as the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is formed. As a result, the collision force of the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced.

Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the contact plate 464c can be reduced, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. Further, since the energy when the contact plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision noise can be reduced when the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide with each other. The details of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

Further, a bulging portion 543a that bulges in a circular shape is formed at the contact portion of the protruding portion 543 with the contact plate 464c at the protruding tip. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced, the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the drive motor KM3.

The locking portion 544 is a portion that locks the urging spring SP4 with the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 as described above. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a force to rotate to the locking portion 524 side, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 540 from swinging due to vibration of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the flow path of the ball of the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 500 on the line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 70 (a). In FIG. 73, the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, in FIG. 73, a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is shown.

Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is a state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is arranged on the second throwing path KR2. ..

As shown in FIG. 73, the lower end side of the flow path of the first throwing path KR1 is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 73), and the tilted portion is gentle. It is formed by being curved in an S shape. Further, the tip portion curved in an S shape is connected to the third throwing path KR3, and the second throwing path KR2 is tilted toward the end of the first throwing path KR1 in the direction opposite to the tilting direction of the first throwing path KR1. It is connected in the state of.

As a result, by colliding the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 with the lower surface of the tilted portion, the flowing direction of the ball can be directed from the direction of gravity to the tilting direction of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, the ball can flow down toward the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 (the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3). Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 540 is not arranged, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 can be thrown to the third throwing path KR3.

Here, the flow path through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow path, and the game ball flowing down the flow path to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A game machine that sorts is known.

However, since the conventional gaming machine has a structure in which the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one by one, the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are the first branch. It is evenly distributed (that is, half each) to the aisle and the second branch aisle. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 which is formed so as to be displaceable and receives the game ball from the third throwing path KR3 is provided, and the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 hits the distribution member 540. Since the distribution member 540 is displaced by being displaced in contact with the ball, the number of game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 or the second throwing path can be changed according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 can be changed.

As for the displacement of the distribution member 540, the distribution member 540 can be displaced by using the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, a drive means and a transmission mechanism for displace the distribution member 540 are separately provided. Can be unnecessary. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the sorting member 540 is controlled by using position detection by a sensor device or driving by a driving means, the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting member is lowered due to a malfunction due to a detection failure or a control failure. Invitingly, according to the present embodiment, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member that receives the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3, the distribution destination of the sorting member 540 is set to the third throwing path in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. By switching to, the displacement member can surely receive the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, since the game ball flowing down the flow path is only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, it is insufficient to give the player an interest.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in a state where the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is the third throw path KR3 (first branch passage), the flow of the game ball in the third is restricted. In a state where the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is the second throw path KR2 (second branch passage), a storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) that allows the flow of game balls on the third throw path KR3 is provided. , Can give the player a taste.

That is, when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is the third throwing path, the flow of the game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 is restricted, the game balls are stored in the third throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate is used. When the distribution destination by 541 is the second throwing path KR2, it is possible to allow the game ball to flow down in the third throwing path KR3 and to let the game ball stored in the third throwing path KR3 flow down (open). can. As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing path) to one of the third throwing path KR3 or the second throwing path KR2, the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 is distributed. It is possible to form an action of flowing down (opening). Further, these storage and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, the player can be given a hobby.

Further, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) in which the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) and the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are integrally formed is provided, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation, that is, when the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, they are two parts, so these two parts are operated. The structure to be used becomes complicated and the reliability of operation is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified by that amount, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability of operation can be improved. be able to.

Further, the distribution member 540 is formed so as to be displaceable at the storage position (first state position) and the regulation position (second state position), and when the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the regulation plate 541 is the first. 3 The ball throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is arranged at a position to be the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position that restricts the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path KR3, and the distribution member 540 is displaced to the regulated position. In this state, the regulating plate 541 is arranged at a position where the second throwing path KR2 is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path is allowed. In addition to the operation of allocating the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing path) to one of the third throwing path KR3 or the second throwing path, by displacing the ball at two positions (storage position and restricted position), the first 3 It is possible to form an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game balls distributed to the throwing path KR3 and an operation of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (open), and to store these. And the opening operation can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of operation.

The distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotatably formed, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the third throwing path. By projecting to KR3, the flow of the game ball is restricted, and the distribution member 540 is formed in an arcuately curved shape centered on the rotation axis. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the wall can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) is arranged so that the side facing the upstream of the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is concave, the storage plate 542 to the third throwing path KR3 protrudes. In the initial state (that is, only the tip side of the flow state changing means is projected into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in an direction that makes it easy to regulate the flow of the game ball. It is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

Further, in a state where the storage plate 542 is projected to the third throwing path to the maximum and restricts the flow of the game ball, the concave portion of the storage plate 542 can stably hold the game ball, so that the game ball can be suppressed from rampaging.

The distribution unit 500 applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 (integrated member) to urge the regulation plate 541 in the direction of projecting into the third throwing path (first branch passage). ) Is provided, and the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. Therefore, the urging force of the urging spring SP4 is used. , The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture in which the storage plate 542 projects into the third emergency path (that is, the storage position).

In this case, the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. Since the distance from the ball is large, even if the same impact force is applied, the storage plate 542 is likely to be immersed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from being immersed in the recess 519 by the amount of the urging force.

Further, since the distribution member 540 (integrated member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) protrudes into the third throwing path (first branch passage) due to its own weight, the own weight is used. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in a posture (that is, a storage position) in which the storage plate 542 projects into the third throwing path KR3. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from being immersed in the recess 519 by the amount of its own weight.

Further, even if the urging spring SP4 (the urging means) is dropped, the distribution member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulation plate 541 protrudes to the third throwing path KR3 due to its own weight, and the game is played to the third throwing path. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down.

Further, the distribution member 540 is provided with an urging spring SP4 that applies an urging force to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on either the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2, and the ball receiving portion 467 is a distribution member. By displacing the 540 in a direction opposite to the direction of the urging spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2, and the urging force of the urging spring , The distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to either the third throw path KR3 or the second throw path KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 540 from inadvertently switching the distribution destination. In this case, after the distribution member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging spring SP4. Therefore, it is not necessary that the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the distribution member 540. That is, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the sorting member 540. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. 74 (a) and 74 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500 in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. Note that FIG. 74 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the storage position, and FIG. 74 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the regulated position. Further, in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position, the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 is centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. It is a state in which the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3 after being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, the storage plate 542 is arranged on the third throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is arranged inside the recess 518 formed in the wall of the.

In this case, the distance dimension L1 between the end of the tip protruding inward of the third throw path KR3 of the storage plate 542 and the inner wall of the third throw path KR3 facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream side of the third throwing path KR3 (the first throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

Further, the distance dimension L2 from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542 to the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3 is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere and larger than the diameter of the sphere. Set small. As a result, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 can be set to one. In the following, the state of the distribution unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the state where the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulation position, the regulation plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throw path KR1 and the third throw path KR3. , The storage plate 542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back surface side of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance dimension L3 between the end of the tip protruding inward of the first throwing path KR1 of the regulation plate 541 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulation position and the storage position, the ball thrown in the first throwing path KR1 is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third throwing path KR3. It is possible to form a state in which a ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third throwing path KR3 and is thrown into the second throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by displacing one distribution member 540, when the flow path of 1 is divided into the flow path of 2, the flow path of the sphere can be reliably switched to either of them.

Further, the urging spring SP4 applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on the second throwing path KR2, so that the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball. It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being switched to the third throwing path.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (sorting means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage) or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the appearance position thereof is the first. Since it is an inner wall on an extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the first throw path KR1, the regulation plate 541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first throw path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the regulation plate 541 to the flow-down passage or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game balls can be distributed. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 541.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) projects from the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) to allow the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) to the second throwing path (the second throwing path). It is distributed to the second branch passage), and the protruding direction of the regulation plate 541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is projected. When the game ball comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the process, the game ball can be pushed into the second throwing path KR as the regulation plate protrudes. As a result, the distribution to the second throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In the present embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is located closer to the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541. May be placed in. That is, the shaft of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at the position of the point P on the back surface of the third throwing path KR3 on the downstream side of the shaft hole 545 of the distribution member 540 shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). .. In this case, the arrangement positions of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 formed on the distribution member 540 are formed at the same positions as in the present embodiment.

When the shaft hole 545 is arranged at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulation plate 541 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced can be made faster than that of the storage plate 542. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position as described later, the regulation plate 541 can be quickly projected onto the flow path. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 from flowing into the third throwing path KR3 at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulated position to the storage position.

Further, in this case, the shapes of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in the front view are formed in an arc shape centered on the point P. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the regulation position to the storage position (or opposite), the displacement regions of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized. Further, the recesses 518 and 519 that receive the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 on the outside of the third throwing path KR3 have a concave shape along the displacement locus of the regulation plate 541 and the regulation plate 541.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, a case where two or more balls are thrown from the throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position will be described. 75 (a) and 75 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500. 76 (a) and 76 (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, from FIG. 75 (a) to FIG. 76 (b), the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in are shown in order. Further, FIGS. 75 (a) to 76 (b) show a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 75A and 75B, when the first game ball T1 is thrown into the first throwing path KR1 in a state where the sorting member 540 is arranged at the storage position, as described above. , The game ball T1 is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

In this case, since the storage plate 542 is located on the downstream side of the distance between the radius and the diameter of the sphere from the upper end of the third throwing path KR3, a part of the sphere stopped at the upper part of the storage plate 542. Is in a state of protruding toward the first throwing path KR1 side (see FIG. 75).

Therefore, as described above, the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed so as to be able to roll on the inner wall on the gravity direction side thereof. Since the storage plate 542 (means for changing the flow state) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the third throwing path KR3, the game ball is started after the storage plate 542 is started to protrude into the third throwing path KR3. It is possible to shorten the time required for the flow of water to be regulated. As a result, when the distribution destination of the regulation plate 541 is switched from the second throw path KR2 (second branch passage) to the third throw path KR3 and the game ball is distributed to the third throw path KR3, the game ball is distributed. It is possible to easily make the protrusion of the storage plate 542 in time for the regulation of flow.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the third throwing path KR3, and in a state of being maximally protruding from the third throwing path KR3, a force component in the protruding direction is acted on from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when the flow of the game ball distributed to the third throwing path KR3 is regulated, it is possible to prevent the storage plate 542 from being immersed in the recess 519 due to the impact when the game ball collides. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76A and 76B, when the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first throwing path KR1 when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the game ball T2 becomes The ball is thrown in the direction from the first throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third throwing path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

In this case, as described above, since the game ball T1 is in a state of protruding toward the first throwing path KR1, the game ball T2 is sent to the second throwing path KR2 without being thrown inside the third throwing path KR3. Since it can be guided, the game ball T2 can be thrown to the second throwing path KR2 without staying inside the third throwing path KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

That is, the inner wall of the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) on the side where the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage) is desired is a game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3 (first). Since the last game ball of the specified number (1 ball) of the game balls stored in the branch passage) is formed so as to be guided to the side surface of the third throw path KR3, the game ball flowing down the first throw path KR1. Can be easily flowed down to the second throwing path KR2 after colliding with the last game ball out of the specified number of game balls.

Of the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (opposite side to the regulation plate 541). Further, in the present embodiment, the specified number is set to one ball. In this case, the game ball at the end means the game ball itself stored in the third throwing path KR3.

Further, as described above, in the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage), the lower end side of the flow path is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 73), and is tilted. The portion is formed by being curved in a gentle S shape. That is, since the flow direction at the downstream end of the first throw path KR1 (flow passage) is formed in the flow direction at the upstream end of the third throw path KR3, the game ball flowing down the first throw path KR1 is the third. If the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball when it collides with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls stored in the throw path is different from the flow direction at the upstream end of the third throw path KR3. Can be made. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trailing game ball from jumping out from the upstream end of the third throwing path KR3 and flowing into the second throwing path KR2 due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

Further, since the upper end portion of the third throwing path KR3 is formed so as to be inclined in the inclined direction of the lower end portion of the first throwing path KR1, the position where the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 is the upper hemisphere of the game ball T1. At the same time, it can be set to the second throwing path KR2 side. Therefore, the bounce direction of the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be set to the entrance (upper end) side of the second throwing path KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily thrown to the second throwing path KR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying in the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

Further, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the flow of the game ball in the third throwing path KR3 is regulated by the storage plate 542 (flow state changing means). 3 When a specified number (1 ball) of game balls are stored in the throwing path KR3, the game balls flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) can flow down to the second throwing path KR2 (second branch passage). When more than the specified number of game balls flow down the flow passage, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (the second and subsequent game balls T2) from staying in the first throwing path KR1. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the regulating plate 541 (the operation of setting the distribution destination to the second throwing path KR2) from being hindered by the game ball stuck in the first throwing path KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a case where a ball is thrown into the throwing path when the sorting member 540 is arranged at the regulated position will be described. 77 (a) and 77 (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b) show the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in, respectively. Further, FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b) show a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when a ball is thrown into the first throwing path KR1 with the distribution member 540 arranged at the regulated position, the thrown game ball T1 becomes the first thrown ball. It collides with the regulation plate 541 at the lower end of the path KR1. As a result, the game ball T1 is guided by the second throwing path KR2 and flows down the second throwing path KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, an operation when the ball is allowed to flow down to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 will be described. 78 (a) and 78 (b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, FIGS. 78A and 78B show the transition states of the spheres when the spheres flow in, respectively. Further, FIG. 78 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 78 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulation position.

As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state (the state shown in FIG. 78 (a)), the distribution member 540 is displaced and placed at the regulated position. , The game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 is flowed down to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3.

That is, the flow of the ball into the third throwing path KR3 is limited to the ball stagnant above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, the number of balls stagnant above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so that the balls can flow down to the third throwing path KR3 one by one. Therefore, since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 can be stabilized, it is possible to prevent an unintended number of balls from flowing down to the third throwing path KR3.

Therefore, the distribution member 540 (distributing means) has a regulation plate 541 (first infestation portion) and a regulation plate 541 (first infestation portion) formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the third throwing path (first branch passage) according to the displacement of the distribution member 540. The regulation plate 541 is provided with a storage plate (second infestation portion), and the regulation plate 541 projects a game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) into the second throwing path KR2 (second branch). The storage plate 542 is formed so as to be able to be distributed to the passage), is located on the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 from the regulation plate 541, and is distributed to the third throwing path KR3 by protruding into the third throwing path KR3. The flow of the game balls is regulated so that the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed so that one of them protrudes into the passage of the third throw path KR3 and the other is outside the passage (recess) of the third throw path KR3. Since it is retracted to the inside of 518, 519), by displace the distribution member 540 according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member), only the specified number (1 ball) of game balls can be transferred to the third throwing path KR3. It can be distributed to and received by the ball receiving unit 467.

That is, the first state in which the regulation plate 541 projects to distribute the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 to the second throwing path, and the regulation plate 541 retracts to flow down the first throwing path KR1. A third state in which the game balls to be distributed to the third throwing path are distributed to the third throwing path, and a third state in which the second infestation portion protrudes to regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3 (store the game balls). And the state of the second infestation part, and the fourth state in which the game ball stored in the third throwing path is allowed to flow down and be received by the ball receiving part can be formed. By combining the above, only a specified number (1 ball) of game balls can be distributed to the third throwing path KR3 and received by the ball receiving unit 467.

Further, since the distribution member 540 includes the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution member 540 (in order to operate the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 and exert their functions). Structure) can be simplified. Further, when one of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third throwing path KR3, the other is retracted out of the passage of the third throwing path KR3, so that there are two ball receiving portions 467. It suffices that the distribution member 540 is also formed so as to be displaceable at two positions according to the positions (first position and second position). That is, by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions, the above-mentioned first to fourth states can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution member 540 and the structure of displace the distribution member 540 with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 can be simplified, and the reliability of the distribution operation of the game ball can be improved accordingly.

Next, the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 80. FIG. 79 is a front view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 80 is a top view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. The state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the distribution unit 500 is arranged on the front side (lower side of FIG. 80) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 are arranged at positions where they overlap in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolled on the rolling portion 525 is thrown into the lower displacement member 440 via the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, the ball is thrown to the lower displacement member 440 from the third winning opening 82 formed in the game board 13 via the ball throwing unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. Is done.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 includes a rolling unit 525 that communicates with the trajectory region of the ball receiving unit 467, and the distribution member 540 regulates the passage of the game ball in the rolling unit 525. Therefore, for example, the distribution member 540 may be used. Even if a malfunction occurs and the second and subsequent game balls T2 are thrown, the second and subsequent game balls T2 are surely thrown to the orbital region of the distribution member 540 via the rolling unit 525. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems caused by the second and subsequent game balls T2.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. 81, 83 and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84 and 86 are cross-sectional views of the sorting unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 81, 83 and 85, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 arranged on the front side is shown. .. Further, in FIGS. 82, 84 and 86, the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 arranged on the back surface side is shown by a chain line.

Further, in FIGS. 81 and 82, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the first position and the distribution member 540 is arranged at the regulated position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state. The positioned state is illustrated. In FIGS. 83 and 84, a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at the second position and the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state. The state is illustrated. In FIGS. 85 and 86, a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position and the distribution member 540 is arranged in the storage position is shown, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state. The state located in is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the state where the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first position, the ball receiving portion is as described above. The rack 466 that drives the 467 is arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and the movable rack 464 is arranged on the back side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the movable rack 464 is in a state of being arranged on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (the left side of the lower displacement member 440 in the front view), similarly to the rack 466. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is located on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side (the surface on the left side in the front view) of the contact plate 464c is in contact with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is displaced to a position (regulation position) in which the regulation plate 541 is projected from the first throwing path KR1 by the action of the driving force of rotation about the axis of the shaft hole 545.

Therefore, in the state where the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position, the ball thrown into the first throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is the third throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second throwing path KR2 without flowing down. Further, as described above, by displacing the distribution member 540 from the storage state in which the balls are stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulated position, the game is played on the downstream side of the third throwing path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542). You can throw a ball. At this time, by operating the ball receiving portion 467 to receive the ball, the game ball can be thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467.

The opening operation of the third electric accessory 82a for keeping the game ball stored in the distribution unit 500 is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, and the ball receiving portion 467 is the first. When displaced to the position, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the game ball passing through the first throwing path KR1 is not restricted from flowing down by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and the unintended game ball is the first. 3 Throwing path It is possible to suppress the throwing of the ball to the downstream side of the KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the throwing of the game ball to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is regulated according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Or acceptable. That is, since the regulation or tolerance of the throwing of the game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the sorting member can be switched according to the detection result of the sensor that detects the position of the sorting member 540. It is possible to eliminate the need to control the driving means for driving the 540 or each of these means, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of operation.

Further, the distribution member 540 sends the game ball T2 to the trajectory region of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 from the second position to the first position direction (second direction). Therefore, the game ball can be reliably thrown to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 and the region on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable at a switching position for switching the distribution member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). In the state where the portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third throwing path KR3, and in the state where the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving portion is transferred from the third throwing path. Since the 467 can receive the game ball and the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second throwing path KR2, the specified number of balls that the ball receiving unit 467 can receive (1 ball in this embodiment) can be obtained. It is possible to prevent the excess game ball from being distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the ball receiving unit 467 receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third throwing path. There is a risk that the game balls will be distributed to the third throwing path KR3 in excess of the specified number that can be received by the ball receiving unit 467. If a means for regulating the inflow of the game ball into the third throwing path KR3 is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, and after the specified number of game balls (1 ball in the present embodiment) are distributed to the third throwing path KR3, the distribution member 540 is in the receiving position. When the ball is displaced to, the distribution destination is switched to the second throwing path KR2, so that it is possible to prevent a game ball exceeding one ball from flowing down to the third throwing path. Therefore, the ball receiving unit 467 can prevent the game balls exceeding the receivable specified number (1 ball) from being distributed to the third throwing path KR3. Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-mentioned means (means for regulating the inflow of the game ball into the third throwing path KR3), it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

Further, when the power is turned on (on), the pachinko machine 10 starts from a position where each operating unit is turned off (off). Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control thereof may be reset. In that case, if the distribution member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the stored state operates during the initial operation to cause the game ball to flow down to the third throw path KR3. There is a risk that the game ball will be thrown to the retracted side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 arranged at the third position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized, so that even if the pachinko machine 10 is not located at a predetermined reference position and the power is turned off, the pachinko machine is turned off. It is possible to prevent an unintended game ball from being thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 when the power of the machine 10 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged inside the lower displacement member 440.

Further, when the power is turned off while the game ball is left in the orbital region of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is left in the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to perform the discharge operation described above. The game ball can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and collected from the collection port 411f.

Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the second position or the third position (position other than the first position). In this state, as described above, the rack 466 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 83) of the lower displacement member 440, and the movable rack 464 is placed in the lower displacement member 440. It is arranged at a position movable from the other end side (left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 83) to one end side.

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position separated from the other end side of the lower displacement member 4440 to one end side. In this case, the other end surface (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) of the contact plate 464c is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is thrown into the third ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) protruding from the path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is retracted and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the second position or the third position (position other than the first position), the first throwing path of the distribution unit 500 The ball thrown to the KR1 is in a state of being stopped above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the ball thrown to the first throwing path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2. ..

Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the lower displacement member 440 slides with respect to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced according to the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the distribution member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the distribution member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is thrown into the third ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) protruding from the path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the ball thrown into the first throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Will be done. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the stored state, the ball thrown to the first throwing path KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2. ..

That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the second overhanging state (a state other than the retracted state), the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is opened with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440. Since the position is displaced, the communication state of the ball between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the distribution unit 500 is released. Therefore, when the ball flows down into the third throwing path KR3, the ball may be discharged into the back case 300 from the opening 451a. However, in the present embodiment, the third throwing member 540 is set as the storage position. It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the downstream side of the path KR3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls of the back case 300 from being discharged inside.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed so as to be displaceable in the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state, and when the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state, Since the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the lower displacement member 440, a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the retracted state and a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state. It is possible to form a mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, when the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first or second overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3 (third throwing path KR3). The rolling portion 525 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are in a non-communication state). Therefore, in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state), the sorting destination by the sorting member 540 is the third throwing path. It is possible to suppress switching to KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is arranged on the base plate 520 of the distribution unit 500 formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the size of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 is increased accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Here, since the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first overhanging state to the retracted state is not only rotational displacement in the left-right direction but also rotational displacement, the contact plate 464c in the tilted state is subjected to the rotational displacement. The protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 may come into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 540 may not be rotationally displaced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the state of being displaced to the first overhanging position shown in FIG. 85 to the retracted state, the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at a position other than the first position. It is in a state of being displaced to (second position or third position). As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced in the retracted state from colliding with the protrusion 543. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 540 from being unable to be rotationally displaced due to the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c.

Further, since the swelling portion 543a is formed in the distribution member 540 as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhanging state to the retracted state due to poor control or the like, the contact plate 464c The distribution member 540 can be rotationally displaced even when the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface.

That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulging portion 543a, the bulging portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c comes into contact with the contact plate 464c. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotationally displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 540 from being unable to be rotationally displaced due to the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c.

Next, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotating unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. 87 is a front view of the rotating unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotating unit 700, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 700, and FIG. 90 is an exploded view of the rotating unit 700. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotating unit 700 includes a decorative unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, a ball pedestal 710 arranged on the upper side of the decorative unit 750 in the direction of gravity, and the ball pedestal. The back base 720 arranged on the back side of the 710 and the decorative unit 750, the left side transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the front view of the decoration unit 750, and the right side transmission member arranged on the right side of the front view of the decoration unit 750. It is formed mainly with 740.

The ball cradle 710 is a member for dropping a game ball emitted from an exit opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. As a result, the ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 can be thrown to the rotating unit 700. The detailed configuration of the ball cradle 710 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body in which a curved portion is arranged upward in a side view, and a character or a pattern is decorated on the front side. Further, the decorative unit 750 is composed of a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of a drive described later. The configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

The back base 720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball cradle 710 and the back side of the decorative unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view. As described above, since the decorative unit 750 is composed of a plurality of movable members, the fastening portion thereof is limited, but the decorative unit 750 and the ball cradle 710 are on the back side at a position invisible to the player. By connecting the above, the decoration unit 750 and the ball cradle 710 can be assembled as one unit while ensuring the range of motion of the decoration unit 750.

The left transmission member 730 is attached to the drive motor KM4 arranged on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 87) of the decorative unit 750, the transmission member 730 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. It is mainly provided with a motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 730, and a throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733. NS.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decorative unit 750, which will be described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730, which will be described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c. The transmission gear 731d is arranged adjacent to the transmission gear 731d and coaxially arranged by the shaft 735, and the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d is mainly provided.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

The transmission gear 731b is provided with a one-way clutch OW1 inside, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits a rotational driving force to a right-side transmission member 740 on the right side of the decorative unit 750.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring that is arranged inside and a cam surface is formed on the outer peripheral surface, an outer ring that is arranged outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases and becomes resistance to transmit power to the inner ring, and the outer ring moves in the other direction with respect to the inner ring. When rotated to, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller decreases, and the clutch slips and disconnects the power transmission.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the transmission gear 731b can transmit the driving force for rotation to the shaft portion JB1, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, the transmission gear 731b can transmit the driving force for rotation. The outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring, and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is cut off.

The transmission gear 731c is provided with a one-way clutch OW1 inside like the transmission gear 731b. A shaft 735 is arranged inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c can transmit the driving force of rotation to the shaft 735 when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, and the inner ring when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4. On the other hand, the outer ring slips and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off. Further, the transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and the rotation directions of the transmission gears 731c are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, it is switched to a mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or a mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

The transmission gear 731d is attached to the shaft 735. As described above, the shaft 735 is rotated only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and rotation in the other direction is non-rotation.

The load gear 731e is connected to the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed to include a shaft portion 791a that is rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed so that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, a force equal to or more than a predetermined amount is also required to rotate the load gear 731e connected to the shaft portion 791a.

As a result, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 800 from rotating due to the inertial force. That is, the resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force acting around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 is stopped.

Further, the load gear 731e is connected to the transmission gear 731d which is arranged coaxially with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 can be limited to rotation in one direction for rotating the transmission gear 731d. That is, when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the other direction, the transmission of the drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is cut off, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed from acting. As a result, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, it is possible to suppress the action of the resistance of the load gear 731e.

The motor base 732 is formed in a box shape in which the decorative unit 750 side is open, and the drive motor KM4 is arranged on the outside of the bottom portion of the box (left side in FIG. 87) with the shaft inserted inside the box. Thereby, the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 can be arranged inside the motor base 732. That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is set to be larger than the width dimension of the transmission gear 731a. As a result, the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a can be arranged on the decorative unit 750 in a state of being attached to the motor base 732, and the transmission gear 731a can be prevented from colliding with the decorative unit 750.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decorative unit 750 with the left side transmission member 730 arranged between them. Further, a through hole 733a is formed through the decorative unit 750 at a position facing the shaft hole of the rotating body 800, which will be described later. As a result, the ball rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be discharged to the outside through the through hole 733a. A description of the ball thrown to the rotating body 800 will be described later.

The throwing path cover 734 is a member arranged on the outside of the gear cover 733 (left side in FIG. 87), is formed of a plate-like body, and has a wall portion protruding from the edge portion toward the gear cover 733. As a result, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover 734 facing each other, and the ball through which the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 is inserted is inserted through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotating unit 700. Can be done. The ball discharged from the gap between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover facing each other is thrown to a collecting path (not shown) and collected.

The right transmission member 740 covers the rotating member 741 connected to the other end side of the shaft portion JB1 described above, the arm member 742 having one end connected to the rotating member 741, and the rotating member 741 and the arm member 742. It is mainly provided with a crank cover 743 arranged in the decorative unit 750 in this state.

The rotating member 741 has a main body portion 741b formed in a disk-shaped plate shape, a one-way clutch OW1 fitted to the shaft of the main body portion 741b, and a columnar column protruding on the opposite side (right side of FIG. 87) of the decorative unit 750. It is mainly provided with a protrusion 741a.

In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. Further, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when a rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotation speed faster than the rotation speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated to drive the rotation member 741 of the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by a driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be rotated at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape in which a C-shape and an I-shape in a side view are combined, and is formed by connecting the other end of the I-shape to one end of the C-shape. Further, the arm member 742 includes a shaft hole 742a formed through the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b formed through the one end of the I-shaped portion, and C. It is mainly provided with an elliptical second sliding groove 742c formed through the other end of the character portion.

The shaft hole 742a is a hole into which the shaft portion 764a formed in the right side plate 764 of the box member 760, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decorative unit 750 because the shaft portion 764a is inserted into the shaft hole 742a and arranged in the decorative unit 750.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction formed in the ellipse is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

Further, the rotating member 741 is formed so that the outer diameter is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and the shaft is a distance from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742 to half the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion. It is placed at a position farther away than. As a result, by rotating the rotating member 741, the arm member 742 can be reciprocated to rotate around the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which the protrusion 773a of the right lid portion 773, which will be described later, is inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction formed in the ellipse is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 773a. Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. Further, the right lid portion 773 is formed so as to be rotatable and displaceable with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 741 is rotated, and the arm member 742 reciprocates in rotation to rotate the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 is mainly provided with an elliptical portion 743a formed in a rear view ellipse and a ball throwing portion 743b formed so as to be connected to the back surface side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and the outer shape in the side view is formed larger than the displacement regions of the arm member 742 and the arm member 742, and the arm member 742 is formed from the edge portion to the decorative unit 750 side. A wall portion is formed that protrudes larger than the thickness of the wall. As a result, when the crank cover 743 is arranged on the decorative unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decorative unit 750.

The ball throwing unit 743b is a path member for throwing the ball to the recovery path when the ball flowing down the flow area in front of the game board 13 is collected from a predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside. It is formed in the shape of a rod with a space of space. Further, the upper end side of the ball throwing portion 743b is opened and connected to the collection port of the game board 13, and the lower end side is connected to the opening formed in the decorative unit 750. As a result, the ball collected on the game board 13 can be passed through the inside of the decorative unit 750 via the ball throwing unit 743b and guided to a collection path (not shown).

Next, the decoration unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decorative unit 750. 92 (a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the direction of arrow XCIIa of FIG. 91, and FIG. 92 (b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the direction of arrow XCIIb of FIG. 91. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative unit 750. In addition, in FIG. 91 (b) and FIG. 91 (c), the right side side plate 764 and the left side side plate 765 of the box member 760 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decorative unit 750 has a box member 760 and a lid arranged on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side of FIG. 91 (a)) of the box member 760 and the box member 760 which are the outer decorative portions of the decorative unit 750. The member 770 is mainly provided with a rotating body 800 arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770.

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 arranged below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 arranged in front of the base member 762, and a lower surface plate 763 arranged on the bottom surface of the base member 762. It is mainly provided with a right side side plate 764 arranged on the right side of the base member 762 in the front view and a left side side plate 765 arranged on the left side of the base member 762 in the front view.

The base member 762 is formed in a rectangular shape that is larger than the rotating body 800 in the top view, and has a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the direction of gravity. The upper surface of the base member 762 is formed on a curved surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. Thereby, when the base member 762 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating body 800, the collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed.

The base member 762 is mainly provided with a recess 762a which is recessed downward in the left-right direction on the upper surface and a ball throwing portion 762b which is recessed in a substantially L shape on the bottom surface.

The recess 762a is a groove in which the shaft portion JB1 described above is arranged, and is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b arranged on the side surface of the decorative unit 750. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball throwing portion 762b is bent and recessed in an L shape on the bottom surface, one end side is connected to the opening 764b of the right side plate 764, and the other end side is the back side of the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761. Is connected to. Further, the recessed width of the ball throwing portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. As a result, by disposing the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side, it is possible to throw the ball inside the box member 760.

The front plate 761 is formed so as to be horizontally long in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. Further, the front plate 761 is formed with a winning opening 761a having a size capable of inserting a ball on the front side. The winning opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown inside the winning opening 761a is thrown to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762.

The right side plate 764 is formed in a D shape in which the outer shape in the side view is curved upward. Further, the right side plate 764 has a shaft portion 764a projecting to the outside of the decorative unit 750, a bearing portion 764c formed to penetrate below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape having the same shaft as the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800. A curved opening 764d is formed in the center, an opening 764b that opens at a position facing the lower end of the ball throwing portion 762b of the crank cover 743, and a semicircular side view formed on the axis of the rotation axis of the rotating body 800. It is mainly provided with an engaging portion 764e.

The opening 764b is a hole for allowing the ball thrown from the ball throwing portion of the crank cover 743 to be thrown to the base member 762, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the ball. As a result, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762.

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the shaft portion JB1 described above is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. As a result, the driving force can be transmitted to the above-mentioned right side transmission member 740.

The curved opening 764d is an opening through which the protrusion 773a projecting from the right lid portion 773 is inserted into the inside. Further, the curved opening 764d is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the lid member 770 because the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced. As a result, when the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 773a from colliding with the curved opening 764d.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the end portion on the right side of the front view of the base plate 810 arranged inside the rotating body 800 to hold the base plate 810 non-rotatably. That is, the tip end portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e and arranged. As a result, the base plate 810 is made non-rotatable.

The left side surface plate 765 is formed so that the outer shape in the side view is substantially the same as that of the right side surface plate 764. Further, the left side surface plate 765 penetrates through which a through hole 765a formed through the shaft of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800 side, and a shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 are inserted. It is mainly provided with a hole 765c.

The through hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball discharged from the opening on the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800 into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 765a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and the size of the inner diameter thereof is set to be the same as the inner diameter of the opening on the left side of the front view of the rotating body 800.

The shaft portion 765b can be inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in the rotation regulating member 780, which will be described later, to hold the rotation regulating member 780 in a rotatable state. The displacement of the rotation regulating member 780 will be described later.

The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 to form a ball throwing path through which the ball can pass by the ball throwing portion 762b and the lower surface plate 763 of the base member 762. Further, the lower surface plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. The opening 763a is an opening for throwing a ball thrown inside the ball throwing portion 762b into a collection path (not shown). Therefore, the ball won in the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the ball is thrown from the game area to the ball throwing portion 743b of the right transmission member 740, and the ball can be discharged from the inside of the decorative unit 750.

The lid member 770 includes a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 in front view, and a curved lid portion 771. It is mainly provided with a left side lid portion 772 to be fastened to the side surface on the left side when viewed from the front.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has an outer shape in a side view formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, and is formed with a radius larger than that of the rotating body 800. The curved lid portion 771 includes a transparent portion 771a formed from a transparent plate on a part on the front surface side.

The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize a pattern, a character, or the like drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800. That is, even if the rotating body 800 has the upper end side covered with the lid member 770, the player can visually recognize the display of the rotating body 800 through the transparent portion 771a.

The right side lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius on the outside of the annulus is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the size of the outer diameter of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 in the side view. As a result, the right lid portion 773 is arranged with the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 inserted through the inner portion of the annular shape.

Further, the right side lid portion 773 is formed mainly provided with a protrusion 773a projecting to the outside (right side in the front view) of the decorative unit 750 and a recess 773b recessed in the outer peripheral edge portion in the radial direction. .. As described above, the protrusion 773a is a protrusion inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742.

The opening / closing member 870 can be rotated by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870, which will be described later, into the recess 773b. Therefore, the recessed width of the recess 773b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. Further, the recess 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge portion of the right side lid portion 773 in which the curved lid portion 771 is arranged.

The left side lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius on the outside of the annulus is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the left lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the tooth surface 881a of the left rotating portion 880, which will be described later. As a result, the left lid portion 772 is arranged with the left rotating portion 880 of the rotating body 800 inserted through the inner portion of the annular shape.

Further, the left side lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a projecting to the outside (left side when viewed from the front) of the decorative unit 750. The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left side lid portion 772 by arranging the sensor plate 772a between facing the bifurcated sensors (not shown).

Here, the lid member 770 with respect to the rotating body 800 will be described. The arrangement of the lid member 770 in the assembled state of the rotating body 800 is a state in which the left and right ends of the rotating body 800 are inserted inside the right side lid portion 773 and the left side lid portion 772 before assembly (separate member). do. Then, the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected by assembling the right side lid portion 773, the left side lid portion 772, and the curved lid portion 771. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable with respect to the rotating body about the axis of the rotating body 800.

The rotation restricting member 780 is formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in a side view. The rotation restricting member 780 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 781 penetrating the bent portion, a protrusion 782 protruding toward one end in the bending direction, and a contact surface 783 formed flat at the tip on the other end side. Will be done.

As described above, the shaft portion 765b of the left side surface plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781. As a result, the rotation restricting member 780 is rotatably held with respect to the left side surface plate 765. Further, the urging spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is applied to the rotation restricting member 780.

The protrusion 782 can regulate the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 by engaging with the engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880, which will be described later. The contact surface 783 is a surface to which the end portion on the back surface side of the above-mentioned lid member 770 abuts, and the rotation restricting member 780 can be rotated by abutting the lid member 770. The mode of regulation between the rotation regulating member 780 and the rotating body 800 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 96, the transmission path of the driving force when the driving motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 95 (a) and 96 (a) are the rotating unit 700 in the direction of arrow XCVa of FIG. 89, and FIGS. 95 (b) and 96 (b) are the rotating unit 700 in the arrow XCVb of FIG. 89. be.

In FIG. 95, the displacement direction of each member when the axis of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 96, when the axis of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise), the displacement direction of each member is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is stopped.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735 is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates in the forward direction, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed on the transmission gear 731b is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates around the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, in the one-way clutch OW1 arranged on the transmission gear 731, the rotation of the outer ring is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is not rotated. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are in the non-rotating state. That is, when the drive motor KM4 makes a negative rotation, the driving force to the lid member 770 is in a transmitted state, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmission means) that transmits the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the opening / closing member 870 described later via the transmission gear 731c (rotation side drive means) that transmits the drive force to the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770. By disposing the one-way clutch OW1, the rotational force can be transmitted to one of the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b and the transmission to the other can be blocked according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4. .. As a result, the drive target to be driven can be switched only by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, that is, the rotation of the rotating body 800 and its rotation according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4. The stop can be switched between the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 and the stop thereof, and the structure can be simplified while making it possible to form a plurality of modes.

Here, in a structure in which the driving target (rotating body 800 or opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770)) is switched according to the rotation direction of the driving means by using the one-way clutch OW1, the driving force is transmitted from the driving motor KM4. When it is cut off, it becomes a state in which it can freely rotate or displace in the direction driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, the driving target of the driving means is switched from the rotating body 800 to the opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770). When the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body 800 becomes rotatable and may continue to rotate (rotate) due to the inertial force.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the load gear 731e (load gear) meshed with the transmission gear 731d driven by the transmission gear 731c is provided, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is cut off. However, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear 731e can be used to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, the displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97 (a) and 98 (c) are in the closed state, FIGS. 97 (b) and 98 (b) are in the intermediate state, and FIGS. 97 (c) and 98 (a) are in the open state. It is a side view of the decoration unit 750 and the right side transmission member 740.

In addition, in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c) and 98 (a) to 98 (c), the state in which the crank cover 743 of the right side transmission member 740 is removed is shown. Further, the closed state of the decorative unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged so as to cover the upper half surface (upper side of FIG. 97 (a)) of the rotating body 800, and the open state is a state in which the lid member 770 rotates. It is in a state of being displaced and arranged on the back side (right side of FIG. 97C) of the rotating body 800. The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged at a position between the closed state and the open state.

Further, in FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c), the states of being displaced from the closed state to the open state are shown in order, and in FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (c), the displacement from the open state to the closed state is shown. The states to be displacement are shown in order.

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the displacement of the lid member 770 when the lid member is displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. The driving force is transmitted to the arm member 742 by rotating the driving motor KM4 in the negative direction as described above.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the back side (right side of FIG. 97A) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, in the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b into which the protrusion 741a is inserted is arranged on the back surface side of the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 97 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding from the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is arranged above the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97B, when the rotating member 741 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees and the protrusion 741a is positioned below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is formed. With the displacement of the protrusion 741a, the shaft hole 742a is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 97B).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the upper side of the shaft hole 742a in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 97B). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed at a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back surface side of the rotating body 800. ..

In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is arranged on the back side of the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the center position of the rotating body 800 formed in a columnar shape). Therefore, due to the load of the lid member 770, a rotational force is applied in the direction of displace the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1 so that the outer ring can rotate in advance of the inner ring. Therefore, the drive of the drive motor KM4 is stopped by the load of the lid member 770. The lid member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the back surface side of the rotating body, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated by approximately 90 degrees from the position in the intermediate state. That is, it is the leftmost end (left side in FIG. 97) of the displacement region of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by an operation of driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it in the intermediate state and an operation of loading and dropping the lid member 770.

As a result, when the lid member 770 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the section for driving the drive motor KM4 can be halved from the entire section, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Further, the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be set to follow the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be set to follow the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, it is not necessary to complicate the control. As a result, control can be simplified and control failure can be suppressed.

The displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section, the displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the load of the lid member 770 is referred to as a second section, and the first section is designated by the reference numeral DK1. Will be described with a DK2 reference numeral in the second section.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the displacement of the lid member 770 when the lid member is displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the open state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 98 (a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742, and the curved lid of the lid member 770. It is assumed that the portion 771 is arranged on the back side of the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated by approximately 90 degrees and the protrusion 741a is positioned above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is formed. With the displacement of the protrusion 741a, the shaft hole 742a is displaced to the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 98B).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the upper side of the shaft hole 742a in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 98B). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced upward by approximately 45 degrees from the state where the curved lid portion 771 is positioned on the back surface side of the rotating body 800. It is said that it is placed in the position where it was made.

Further, the lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (position in FIG. 97 (a)) is arranged in the game area (front side of the game board 13) and is located in the open position (FIG. 97 (c)). The lid member 770 displaced to (position) is arranged outside the area of the game area (on the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and rotating the rotating body 800. In particular, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening / closing member 870 that is displaced toward the game area side, so that the gaming machine flowing down the game area collides with the opening / closing member 870. It is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being opened (overhanging).

Further, since the lid member 770 is arranged outside the game area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position provides a space for the opening / closing member 870 to project into the game area. Can be secured. Therefore, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side by that amount, and the opening / closing member 870 can be easily made visible to the player.

Further, the lid member 770 is rotatably formed around an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating body 800, and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotating body 800, so that the lid member 770 is in a closed state. The space required for displacement between the position (covering position) and the open position (retracted position) can be suppressed, and therefore a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. Further, by forming the lid member 770 in a curved shape in this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from being stopped on the lid member 770 arranged at the closed position, and to make it smooth. Can be flowed down to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), when the rotating member 741 is further rotated by approximately 90 degrees and the protrusion 71a is displaced to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is generated. Is displaced to the back surface side (right side of FIG. 98 (c)) of the shaft hole 742a as the protrusion 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 98C) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is arranged above the rotating body 800.

In this case, the position of the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced to the front side of the rotation axis of the lid member 770 with the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, in the middle of the intermediate state to the closed state, the load of the lid member 770 exerts a rotational force in the direction of displacement the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the drive of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

Therefore, the lid member 770 can be closed by the load of the lid member 770, so that the lid member 770 can be reliably closed.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is displaced only by the drive motor KM4, there is a risk that the lid member 770 cannot be stopped at a normal position when the drive stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the rotating member 741 has one rotation direction and the stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return to the normal position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position where the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped by using the load of the lid member 770, so that the stop position of the lid member 770 can be prevented from shifting. can.

Here, a gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving force, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force to the displacement member is known. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the transmission state of the driving force by the transmitting means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant. Therefore, when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at a speed, and it is not possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections. In order to obtain the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which increases the product cost and the control cost. Invite. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission means (rotating member 741 and arm member 742) includes the one-way clutch OW1, and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 becomes the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1. On the other hand, when the inner ring is displaced in one direction, the roller engages with the inner ring and the outer ring to transmit the driving force, and when the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the inner ring and the outer ring The engagement of the roller with the outer ring is released, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and in the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is attached to the inner ring. Since it is displaced in one direction, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the other section regardless of the driving state of the rotating member 741. .. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the lid member 770 and enhance the effect of the displacement of the lid member 770.

Further, since the outer ring can be preceded by the inner ring in one direction regardless of the driving state of the driving motor KM4, for example, the driving motor KM4 can be driven at a constant driving speed in the entire section of the displacement section of the lid member 770. It can be driven, and it is not necessary to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, the control can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the operation can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the roller is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, so that the displacement member is placed in the stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (driving motor KM4) in such a driving state can be used as a driving force for driving the rotating body 800. That is, the two members, the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800, can be displaced by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4).

Further, the lid member 770 is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is arranged at a position eccentric from the center of rotation. In the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction, the outer ring can be displaced in advance in one direction with respect to the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the lid member 770. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section of the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, the transmission of the driving force is projected from the main body portion 741b to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached and the main body portion 741b thereof, and the protrusion 741a (pin portion) located displaced from the rotation center of the main body portion 741c. Since it is performed by the rotating member 741 (crank member) having the above and the arm member 742, the rotating member 741 is rotated by the outer ring, and the protrusion 741a is slid along the first sliding groove 742b. The other end side (second sliding groove 742c side) can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the lid member 770 can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, since the section of the second section DK can be formed in both reciprocating movements, when the lid member 770 is reciprocated, when it is displaced in any direction, it starts from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased, and as a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be changed, and the effect of the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, the displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 (a) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 99 (b) is a side view of the decorative unit 750 in the open state. In addition, in FIG. 99A and FIG. 99B, the state in which the left side surface plate 765 of the box member 760 is viewed transparently is shown.

As shown in FIG. 99A, when the lid member 770 is closed, the rotation restricting member 780 is in a state in which the protrusion 782 side is pushed downward by the urging force of the urging spring SP5 (FIG. 99). In (a), the state is rotated clockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 (L4). <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is made rotatable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99B, when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation restricting member 780 is a lid member 770 in which the contact surface 783 is displaced to the back surface side of the rotating body 800. It is in a state where the contact surface 783 is pushed down downward (in FIG. 99 (b), the contact surface 783 is rotated counterclockwise about the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engaging protrusion 882 is made larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 (L6). <L4).

As a result, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882 in the rotating body 800 in which the engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is arranged at the lowermost position in the direction of gravity. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged with each other, the rotating body 800 is made non-rotatable. In the present embodiment, the position where the rotating body 800 cannot be rotated (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening / closing member 870 of the rotating body 800, which will be described later, is opened. Is set to.

That is, in the rotation regulating member 780 (rotation regulating means) that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position), and the other side of the displacement member is stretched in the game area. Since the rotation of the rotating body 800 is restricted when it is pulled out, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening / closing member 870 overhanging, and the opening / closing member 870 interferes with other members located on the rotation locus. Can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body 800 due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

Here, a state in which a first member and a second member formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is arranged at an lining position that invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member and a lining position thereof. There is known a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retracted position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by arranging the first member in the lining position and displacementing the first member to the retracted position from the state where the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the effect.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed so as to be displaceable, there is a possibility that the second member will be displaced when the second member is exposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) can be regulated when the lid member 770 (first member) is displaced to the open position (retracted position). Since it is formed, the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the effect of the effect can be ensured. That is, when the effect of moving the lid member 770 to the open position and exposing the rotating body 800 is performed, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open state, which must be performed for the effect, is rotated. It is used as a means of regulating the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

Further, as will be described later, the shape of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically from the center of rotation (see FIG. 101). Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, it is not necessary for the rotating body 800 to have a shape whose center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, when the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 is displaced to the closed position by the gravity of the rotating body 800 due to rotation (may rotate) around the center of rotation. A configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so that the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated is particularly effective, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state, and the effect can be ensured.

The rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis. In this case, by forming the rotating body 800 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the position of the center of gravity thereof can be arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half surface from a metal material and the other half surface from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be generally positioned on the side of the metal material having a higher specific density than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. 100 (a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 100 (b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the direction of arrow Cb of FIG. 100 (a), and FIG. 100 (c) is a side view of the rotating body 800. It is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the direction view of arrow Cc of FIG. 100A. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed in a columnar shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 arranged on a shaft portion, and a first display unit 830, a second display unit 840, a third display unit 850, and a fourth display unit 830 arranged so as to surround the base plate 810 and combined in an annular shape. A display unit 860, a right-handed rotating unit 89 arranged at one end in the axial direction, a left-handed rotating unit 880 arranged at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening / closing member arranged inside the first display unit 830. It is formed mainly with 870.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section in the axial direction and is formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed to include a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 that project outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the right side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 100A). The right end portion 811 is formed mainly provided with a tip portion 811a that partially protrudes from the protruding tip of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811b that is an inner portion of the annular shape.

The tip portion 811a is further projected in the axial direction from the tip portion of the right end portion 811, and the protruding region in the right side view (direction view in FIG. 100C) is inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764. Is set smaller than the area of. The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side surface plate 764 (cover member 770) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped with respect to the rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to the LED board 820, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed through the side surface on the right side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front. As a result, the wiring can be inserted.

The left end portion 812 is formed so as to project in an annular shape from the left side (left side in FIG. 100A) of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front. The left end portion 812 is formed mainly including a tip portion 812a protruding from the lower semicircle of the left end portion 812 and a communication hole 812b in the inner portion of the annular shape.

The tip portion 812a is further projected in the axial direction from the tip portion of the left end portion 812, and the protruding shape in the left side view (direction view in FIG. 100B) is an annular lower semicircle.

The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 by the opening / closing member 870 described later to the outside of the rotating body 800. The inner diameter of the communication hole 812b is set to be larger than that of the sphere, and is set to be substantially the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

Further, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protruding distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance in contact with the through hole 733a. Further, a protrusion 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end surface of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be substantially the same as the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. As a result, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left side transmission member 730) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be stopped with respect to the rotational displacement of each display surface (first display unit 830, second display unit 840, third display unit 850, and fourth display unit 860) described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is arranged on the bottom surface of the base plate 810 in a rotatable state. The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and a protrusion 813a inclined on one end side is formed. Further, in the reverse rotation prevention member 813, an urging spring SP6 is disposed between the reverse rotation prevention member 813 and the base plate 810, whereby the protrusion 813a is always urged to the left side in the front view (left side in FIG. 100A). It is said that.

The right-handed rotating portion 890 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The right-handed rotating portion 890 is formed so that the inner diameter inside the annulus is larger than the size of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810. As a result, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the right rotation portion 890. Further, the right-handed rotating portion 890 is formed mainly including a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and a sliding groove 892 that is curved and opened around the shaft hole 891.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 872. As a result, it is possible to prevent the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced with respect to the first display portion 830.

The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and its radius is set to be the same as the separation distance to the protrusion 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870. As a result, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is inserted into the sliding groove 892, so that the protrusion 871 can be slid inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced.

The counterclockwise rotating portion 880 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The counterclockwise rotating portion 880 is formed so that the inner diameter inside the annulus is larger than the size of the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810. As a result, the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the counterclockwise rotating portion 880. Further, the counterclockwise rotating portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 protruding from the inner edge portion in an annular shape, an engaging protrusion 882 protruding from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which inclined surfaces are continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. Formed in preparation.

The wall portion 881 is formed so as to project to the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front. The wall portion 881 is provided with a communication hole 881b that opens inward while having a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the protruding tip. The tooth surface 881a is meshed with the transmission gear 881d as described above. As a result, the driving force of the driving motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 can be discharged by opening the opening / closing member 870 described later.

As described above, the engaging protrusion 882 is a protrusion to which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged. The engaging protrusion 882 is formed so as to project from the left side surface of the counterclockwise rotating portion 880 when viewed from the front. Further, two engaging protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and a protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 is formed so as to be inserted between the two engaging protrusions 882.

The cross section of the locking portion 883 is formed in a serrated shape. When the counterclockwise rotation portion 880 is arranged on the base plate 810, the tip of the protrusion 813a of the reverse rotation prevention member 813 described above is in contact with the locking portion 883. As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotating portion 880 in one direction acts, the protrusion 813a can be slid along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883 to rotate the left rotating portion 880. When a rotational force that rotates the left rotating portion 880 in the other direction acts, the surface of the locking portion 883 is caught by the protrusion 813a and the rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to regulate that the rotating body 800 is rotated in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the driving motor KM4. Therefore, for example, the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is biased or the game ball. It is possible to prevent the rotating body from rotating in the reverse direction due to a collision or the like.

Each of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 is formed in the same curved shape, and by connecting the end faces of each other, it can be formed into one annular shape. Further, the inner diameters of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 formed into one ring are set to be substantially the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating units 880 and 890. Thereby, by arranging the display units 830 to 860 on the left and right rotating units 880 and 890, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 can be formed into one columnar shape.

In addition, characters and patterns are drawn on the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860, respectively, and as described above, the characters and patterns are rotated by being transmitted from the counterclockwise rotation unit 880 to rotate each character. And patterns can be made visible to the player.

The first display portion 830 is mainly provided with an opening 831 opened on the curved surface thereof and a bearing portion 832 which is open to the shaft side and is formed so as to project in a U shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening / closing member 870, which will be described later, is arranged, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer shape of the opening / closing member 870. The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size such that the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 can be inserted into the open U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening / closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832, the opening / closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display portion 830. The displacement mode of the opening / closing member 870 will be described later.

The LED board 820 can emit the LED light mounted on the LED board 820 by supplying electric power. Further, the LED board 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810.

Next, opening and closing of the opening / closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103A is a side view of the rotating body 800 when the opening / closing member 870 is closed. FIG. 103 (b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the open state of the opening / closing member 870. In FIG. 103, when the opening / closing member 870 overlaps with another member, its outer diameter is shown by a chain line.

The closed state of the opening / closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged substantially parallel to the outer peripheral surface of the first display unit 830. On the other hand, the open state of the opening / closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged so as to intersect the outer peripheral surface of the first display unit 830.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the rotating body 800 in the closed state of the opening / closing member 870, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is on one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 (the shaft in FIG. 103 (a)). It is located on the lower side of the portion 872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103B, in the rotating body 800 in the open state of the opening / closing member 870, the protrusion 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is located on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890. That is, the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 is performed by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the clockwise rotating portion 890.

Next, the displacement of the protrusion 871 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. 104 (a) and 104 (b) are side views of the decorative unit 750. In addition, in FIG. 104A and FIG. 104B, the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

Further, in FIG. 104 (a), a state in which the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state and the opening / closing member 870 is in the closed state is shown. FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the decorative unit 750 is in the open state and the opening / closing member 870 is in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the decorative unit 750 is closed, the outer edge of the right lid 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871. When the decorative unit 750 is closed, the outer diameter L7 from the rotating shaft on the lower half surface of the right lid portion 773 is smaller than the distance L8 from the shaft of the right rotating portion 890 to one end side of the sliding groove 892 (L7). <L8).

Further, the dimensional difference between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 871. Therefore, when the outer edge portion of the right lid portion 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871, the protrusion 871 is displaced to one end side of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decorative unit 750 is closed, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the decorative unit 750 is opened, the recess 773b formed in the outer edge portion is displaced with the displacement of the right lid portion 773. In this case, the protrusion 871 is inserted inside the recess 773b. As a result, the protrusion 871 can displace the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is opened by the urging force of the urging spring SP7 arranged between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

As described above, the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 to the open state can be performed according to the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, since it is not necessary to dispose the drive source for driving the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be made small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening / closing member 870 can also be used as a driving means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving forces of different driving means, the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other if a control failure occurs. And the lid member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, so that interference between the opening / closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the opening / closing member 870 is opened, the tip end side of the rotation is arranged above the winning opening 761a of the box member 760. As a result, the ball thrown from the throwing portion 711c of the ball cradle 710, which will be described later, can be dropped onto the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870.

In this case, the rotation tip side of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged above the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the sphere that falls on the upper surface can be rolled toward the inside of the rotating body 800. The game ball that is rolled inside the rotating body 800 is rolled onto the upper surface of the base plate 810 that is arranged inside the rotating body 800. Further, since the base plate 810 is in a state of being inclined downward toward the left end portion 812 side, the sphere rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 is rolled toward the left end portion 812 side and rotated from the inside thereof. It can be discharged to the outside of the body 800. That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball throwing path.

Further, as described above, the rotating body 800 is provided with the rotation restricting member 780 that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800, so that the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. When performing the effect, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced by further displacing the opening / closing member 870. On the other hand, the rotating body 800 may rotate (rotate). Therefore, it is particularly effective that the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed so that the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be regulated, whereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. And the production effect can be secured.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating member that is rotatably formed and whose outer surface around a rotation axis is visibly arranged by a player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof can be visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the rotating member is insufficiently utilized because it is only used as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer surface thereof. .. That is, the rotating member is formed to be relatively large because it is necessary to hold a display that can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, while the occupied space is large, the part other than the outer surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed inside the rotating body 800 to the outside, and also has an opening 831 and a communication hole 881b formed so that the game ball can pass through. (Communication port) is provided, so that the game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is regarded as a dead space, can function as a storage space or a throwing passage for the game ball, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the display of the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized by the player when the rotating member is stopped, there is little change in the effect mode and the effect is insufficient. There was a problem that it was.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) displaceably arranged on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is provided, the outer surface is generated as the rotating body 800 rotates or stops. In addition to the effect mode in which the player visually recognizes the display of, the effect mode in which the opening / closing member 870 is displaced can be formed, so that the effect mode can be changed accordingly and the effect effect can be enhanced.

When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), a part of the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is formed by the opening / closing member 870. It can be made smaller, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening / closing member 870 protrudes outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 can be easily visually recognized by the player. It can be done, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening / closing member 870 arranged at the closed position, and the opening / closing member 870 is arranged (displaced) at the open position when the rotation is stopped, so that the rotating body 800 can be used as an outer surface. The visually recognizable portion (opening / closing member 870) can form a mode in which the rotating body 800 protrudes outward in the radial direction, which can enhance the interest.

Further, an LED board 820 that emits light to the base plate 810 is arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 870 is set to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the internal space is communicated to the outside, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 870 is placed in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and the light emission from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and to displace the opening / closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening / closing member 870, and the product cost. Is bulky. Further, if the driving means for displacing the opening / closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, so that it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced according to the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. The rotating body 800 can be rotated and the opening / closing member 870 can be displaced by using the KM4 in combination. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the opening / closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

Further, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as an inflow port for the game ball to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the communication hole 881b is used. Can be used as an outlet for the game ball to flow out from the internal space to the outside. That is, the rotating body 800 can be used as a throwing passage for the game ball without rotating the rotating body 800 (rotating member) (while maintaining the stopped state).

Further, since the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the communication hole 881b is formed on the axial end surface of the rotating body 800, the game ball into the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) can be formed. The inflow can be easily seen by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body 800 is maintained in the stopped state.

That is, when the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is arranged so as to be visible to the player, an opening 831 (inflow port) is formed on the outer surface thereof, so that the inflow of the game ball can be easily made visible to the player. On the other hand, when the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, if the rotating body 800 is arranged at the rotation position where the communication hole 881b is above, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating body 800 in the direction of the rotation axis, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotation position of the rotating body 800.

Further, a displaceable opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is arranged inside the opening 831 (first communication port), and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 is opened. When the opening / closing member 870 is shielded and the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening 831 is opened, so that the inflow of the game ball through the opening 831 is switched between the shielded state and the allowable state. be able to.

Further, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the side opposite to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 by using the opening / closing member 870.

In addition, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily stopped on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the rotating body 800, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the inflow port by using the opening / closing member 870. In this case, if the opening / closing member 870 receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated by the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. .. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed so that the rotation regulating member 780 is displaced to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800, whereby the opening / closing member 870 is played. It is possible to easily maintain a state in which the area is overhanging at a predetermined position.

The shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 is arranged on the rotation direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) with respect to the other side. Therefore, when the rotating body 800 is rotated, even if the opening / closing member 870 interferes with the members arranged around the rotating member, the force generated by the interference closes the opening / closing member 870 (displaces to the closed position). Can act in the direction of). That is, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced to the overhang (second position) by interfering with other members when the rotating body 800 is rotated. Further, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 870 from engaging with other members to hinder the rotation of the rotating body 800.

Further, the base plate 810 (fixing member) arranged in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is non-rotating with respect to the box member 760 (base member) in which the rotating body 800 is rotatably arranged. By rolling the game ball that has flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 toward the communication hole 881b on the upper surface of the base plate 810, the game ball rampages in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling and staying in the internal space.

As described above, since the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 870 is regulated by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening / closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) interferes with the members around the rotating body 800. Can be suppressed.

As described above, in the rotating body 800, the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back surface side of the base plate 810 is inserted is opposite to the end surface of the rotating body 800 in which the communication hole 881b is formed. It is formed on the end face of. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, in the case of electrical wiring to the LED board arranged inside the rotating body 800, if the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, the wiring is entangled by the rotation of the rotating body 800, so that the axial end surface of the rotating body is entangled. However, if the opening for the game ball to flow in and the opening for the game ball to flow out are formed on both end surfaces of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, it is difficult to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be the outer peripheral surface thereof, one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet of the game ball, and the other is the insertion of wiring. Since it can be used as a mouth, it is easy to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (wiring to the LED board 820) can be facilitated. Further, since the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated as much as possible, it is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball that rolls in the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communication hole 881b and the electrical connection line.

Next, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotating unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotating unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the direction of arrow CVI of FIG. 105. In addition, in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotating unit 700 are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. Further, in the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction of FIG. 106), the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a substantially central position in the front-rear direction of the ball cradle 710.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a mode of throwing a ball from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating unit 700 will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotating unit 700. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is arranged in the first overhanging state.

As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, and the ball receiving portion 467 arranged inside the lower displacement member 440 is in a state of receiving the ball inward (ball receiving operation is performed). When the firing operation is performed in the state), as described above, the ball arranged inside the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440.

The ball discharged from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 freely falls and falls on the ball cradle 710 of the rotating unit 700 arranged on the right side in the front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

Next, the configuration of the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 (a) is a top view of the ball cradle 710, FIG. 108 (b) is a front view of the ball cradle 710, and FIG. 108 (c) is a CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108 (a). It is sectional drawing of the ball cradle 710 in line. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball cradle 710.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball cradle 710 is connected to a box-shaped dish receiving portion 711, a solenoid 712 arranged inside the dish receiving portion 711, and the solenoid 712. The displacement member 713 and the cover member 714 that covers the solenoid 712 are mainly provided.

The dish receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, an upright portion 711b erected on the edge portion of the bottom plate 711a, a ball throwing portion 711c protruding from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a ball throwing portion 711c. It is mainly provided with a shaft hole 711d formed through the erection portion 711b erected at the edge portion of the above.

The bottom plate 711a is formed in a shape that bends downward toward the throwing portion 711c side, which will be described later. As a result, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the throwing portion 711c by its deflection (inclination).

Further, the bottom plate 711a is made of a flexible material, and the lower surface of the bottom plate 711a (the lower surface of FIG. 108 (c)) is textured to form fine irregularities on the surface. As a result, when the bottom plate 711a is molded, the ratio of heat shrinkage can be made different between the upper surface and the bottom surface, so that the bottom plate can be easily bent toward the bottom surface side. That is, when the bottom surface to which the texture processing is applied is heat-shrinked due to the unevenness, it becomes difficult for a force to act in the direction of convexly bending the bottom plate side. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed on a flat surface, a pulling force acts in the horizontal direction when heat shrinks, and the end portion tends to change upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, it is possible to easily bend the sphere in a direction in which it is easy to roll when it is thermally contracted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom plate 711a from becoming a defective product when it is molded.

The upright portion 711b is a wall portion that is erected on the upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 108 (c)) from the outer edge portion of the ball throwing portion 711c. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a from falling downward from the edge portion thereof. In the present embodiment, the vertical dimension of the vertical portion 711b is set to be approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere.

Further, the erection portion 711b is formed by connecting the central erection portion 711b1 that divides the region of the bottom plate 711a into two to the erection portion 711b. The central standing portion 711b1 divides the upper region of the bottom plate 711a into a region where a ball is thrown on one side and a region where a solenoid 712, which will be described later, is arranged on the other side.

The ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the position in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 108 (a)) is arranged on the right side (right side in FIG. 108) of the substantially center position of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the throwing portion 711c protrudes from the bottom plate and is therefore curved downward. As a result, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can be dropped downward via the throwing portion 711c. A winning opening 761a of the lid member 770 is arranged below the throwing portion 711c (see FIG. 106), and a ball falling from the throwing portion 711c can be thrown into the winning opening 761a.

The shaft portion 713a of the displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. As a result, the displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

When electric power is applied to the solenoid 712, the shaft inserted inside the solenoid 712 can be displaced by the piston. A transmission member 712a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to the displacement member 713 described later, and a communication hole 712a1 is formed at the tip thereof.

The displacement member 713 is formed in a C-shaped cross section, and is mainly provided with protrusions 713b projecting outward of the C-shape at one end thereof and shaft portions 713a projecting inward of the C-shape at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. As a result, the displacement of the solenoid 712 is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712.

The cover member 714 is formed to have an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the solenoid 712, is arranged above the solenoid 712 arranged on the upper portion of the bottom plate 711a, and is fastened and fixed to the dish receiving portion 711. Thereby, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

Next, a ball falling on the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. 110 (a) and 110 (b) are cross-sectional views of the ball cradle 710. It should be noted that FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b) correspond to the cross section of the ball cradle 710 of FIG. 108 (c).

As shown in FIG. 110, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 freely falls in the direction of gravity, and the rotation unit 700 side (right side in FIG. 110 (a)) due to the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467. ). That is, it is dropped with respect to the bottom plate 711a of the ball cradle 710 in the lower right direction in the front view.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is formed by bending downward toward the ball throwing portion 711c side, and the ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the right side with respect to the bottom plate 711a. Can be an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the right side. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sphere and the inclination direction of the bottom plate 711a on which the sphere falls can be brought close to each other in parallel.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), it is possible to prevent the ball that has fallen on the bottom plate 711a from bouncing in the upward direction (upward in FIG. 110 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball pedestal 710 of the rotating unit 700 from falling from the ball pedestal 710.

Further, the ball that has fallen on the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the throwing portion 711c by the momentum of the falling. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball up to the throwing unit 711c can be shortened. As a result, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball cradle 710 can be smoothly thrown.

Next, the light emission of the ball cradle 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. 111 (a) and 111 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 700 in the CXI-CXI line of FIG. 87. It should be noted that FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state, and FIG. 111 (b) shows the state in which the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the light emission to the ball cradle 710 in the state where the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the closed state is performed by the LED base 721 arranged on the back side of the rear base 720. ..

More specifically, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED board 721 is reflected on the back surface side of the lid member 770 to be incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball cradle 710. Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, it is possible to diffusely reflect the incident light due to the unevenness of the textured processing. As a result, the entire bottom surface of the ball cradle 710 can be made to emit light.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111B, when the decorative unit 750 is arranged in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770 as described above. It is transmitted through the lid member 770 without being reflected. Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, it can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and incident on the ball cradle 710.

Further, in this case, by rotating the third display unit 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball cradle 710 side (upper side in FIG. 111B), light is emitted from the LED 821 of the LED board 820 arranged on the back side of the base plate 810. The light to be generated can be reflected on the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850.

As described above, the inner wall of the third display unit 850 is textured, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 can easily emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than the other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display unit 850 on the ball cradle 710 side.

Next, a detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, a structure for displacementing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 114 is an exploded rear view of the upper displacement unit 900. In addition, in FIGS. 112 to 114, the state in which the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the retracted position (the position arranged at the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 is arranged inside the base member 910 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and the base member 910. The transmission member 920, the rotating member 930 rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced with the displacement of the transmission member 920, and one end slidably and displaceably connected to the base member 410 and the rotating member 930. It is mainly provided with an upper displacement member 940 which is connected to and displaced by transmitting a driving force from the rotating member 930.

The base member 910 is formed by combining two horizontally long plate members having a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 911 arranged on the front side and a back base 912 arranged on the back side. A transmission member 920 and a rotating member 930 are arranged between the front base 911 and the back base 912.

The front base 911 includes three sliding grooves 911c, 911d, 911e penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 112), a shaft support pin 911b protruding toward the back side at the center position in the circumferential direction, and one end side of the front base. It is mainly provided with a shaft portion 911f projecting to the front (on the left side in the front view) and an opening 911a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side.

The opening 911a is an opening for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged in the front base 911 to the back side. As a result, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted into the back side of the front base 911.

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted into the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 described later, and the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923 can be rotatably held. That is, the shaft support pins 911g and 911b are formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft holes of the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923.

The sliding groove 911c is formed through the shaft of the shaft support pin 911b in an arc shape. The sliding groove 911c is an opening through which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 described later is inserted, and the radius of the arc thereof is substantially the same as the distance from the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923 described later to the shaft support pin 923a. Set. As a result, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the shaft support pin 923a inserted into the sliding groove 911c, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin from colliding with the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which the shaft support pins 951, 952 of the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support pins 951, 952. Will be done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the front view) of the front base 911. On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered on the lower side of the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the distance dimensions between the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d facing each other in the vertical direction are different. As a result, when the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are slid inside the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, the upper displacement member 940 is slid while rotating due to the difference in the distance dimension between the opposites in the vertical direction. NS.

The shaft portion 911f is formed so as to project in a columnar shape on the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of the rotating member 930, which will be described later, to hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

The back base 912 is a plate member attached to the back side of the front base 911 at predetermined intervals. The back base 912 is formed from a metallic material. As a result, the overall rigidity of the base member 910 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base member 910 from being twisted when the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is arranged on the base member 910 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape.

The transmission member 920 is arranged between the front base 911 and the back base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 mainly includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, a transmission gear 922 meshed with the transmission gear 921, and a transmission gear 923 meshed with the transmission gear 922. Is formed.

As described above, the transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 arranged on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole. As a result, the transmission gear 921 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the driving motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 is meshed with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above. As a result, the driving force for the rotation of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

The transmission gear 923 is formed by providing a shaft support pin 923a projecting to the front side on the outer peripheral edge portion thereof. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the shaft support pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

The rotating member 930 mainly includes a through hole 931 formed in a rod shape having a long one side and penetrating in the front-rear direction at one end, and an opening 932 extending in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. Formed in preparation.

As described above, the through hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted, and the rotating member 930 can be rotated with respect to the front base 911 by inserting the shaft portion 911f. Can be held. Further, an urging spring SP8 is arranged at the tip of the shaft portion 911f. As a result, the rotating member 930 is urged in the direction of lifting the other end side upward with respect to the front base 911.

The opening 932 is a groove into which the shaft support pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and the shaft support pin 923a is slidably formed inside. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the shaft support pin 923a is displaced, the shaft support pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 932. Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is arranged in a state where one end is rotatably supported by the shaft, the rotating member 930 is rotated about one end by the displacement of the shaft support pin 923a.

Further, on the other end side of the rotating member 930, an annular member 933 formed in a front view annular shape and in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness is arranged on the back surface side.

The front side of the annulus member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof. The annulus member 933 is a portion connected to the upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. Further, the annulus member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected to each other, and the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced as the rotating member 930 is rotationally displaced.

A protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member. can.

Further, the arc axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930, the first open portion 960 can be displaced. A detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be described later.

On one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930, a shaft portion cover 913 and a deformation regulation cover 914 formed from a plate-like body are arranged in front of the rotating member 930. The shaft portion cover 913 is arranged in front of the rotating shaft portion of the rotating member 930, so that the rotating member 930 is prevented from rattling in the front-rear direction. The deformation control cover 914 is arranged at a position separated from the rotating shaft by a predetermined distance, and it is possible to prevent the rotating member 930 from being deformed in the front-rear direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 arranged on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 is a base body 950 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930, two first open portions 960 rotatably arranged on the back side of the base body 950, and the base body 950. It is mainly provided with two second open portions 970 rotatably arranged on the front side and a variable portion 980 arranged on one end side.

The base body 950 is mainly provided with two shaft support pins 951 and 952 projecting on the back surface on one end side and a shaft portion 953 projecting on the back surface on the other end side.

The shaft support pins 951, 952 are protrusions inserted into the sliding grooves 911e and 911d of the front base 911 as described above. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the shaft support pins 951, 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, so that the upper displacement member 940 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction. At the same time, the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotating member 930. Therefore, when the rotating member 930 is rotationally displaced about one end by the driving force of the driving motor KM5, the driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 by the displacement of the annular member 933. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first opening portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are arranged on the back surface side of the base body 950. The first open portion 960 is rotatably pivotally supported and arranged on the other end side of the base body 950. Further, the first open portion 960 includes a protrusion 961 that protrudes to the back surface side and is arranged inside the sliding groove 933a of the annular member 933. As a result, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930 due to the displacement of the rotating member 930, the protrusion 961 can be slid inside the sliding groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved shaft of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a position different from the rotating shaft of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Along with this, the first open portion 960 axially supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second opening portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two pieces are arranged on the front side of the base body 950. The second open portion 970 is rotatably pivotally supported and arranged on the other end side of the base body 950. Also. The second open portion 970 is formed to include an engaging projection (not shown) that engages when the first open portion 960 is displaced in a predetermined manner. As a result, as described above, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced around the shaft support portion when the upper displacement member 940 is subjected to a predetermined rotational displacement, the first open portion 960 engages with the second open portion 970. The second open portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged in the retracted position. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at an intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is arranged at the overhanging position.

The retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 is a position in which the shaft support pins 951, 952 are arranged on the other end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (the right side of the front base 911 in the front view). Is. The overhanging position is a position in which the shaft support pins 951 and 952 are arranged on one end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (on the left side of the front base 911 in the front view). Further, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to an intermediate position between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the upper displacement member 940 changes its longitudinal direction from a substantially horizontal direction (FIG. 115 left-right direction) to a substantially vertical direction (FIG. 115 left-right direction). It is rotationally displaced in the vertical direction of FIG. 117).

Further, with the rotational displacement, the position on one end side of the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the position of the right end portion in the front view of the front base 911 to the substantially central position in the front view. That is, when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor KM5 as described above, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slidably displaced.

Further, when the displacement is performed from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 116 to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 117, the first open portion 960 arranged in the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. The second open portion 970, which is displaced by engaging with the rotational displacement of the first open portion 960, is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, at the overhanging position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is directed to the vertical direction, and the first open portion 960 and the second open portion 970 are displaced.

In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape imitating the shape of a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, the displacement from the first position to the third position causes the first open portion 960 and the second open portion 970 to be displaced, so that the player can visually recognize the displacement that makes the human arm thicker. ..

Next, the variable portion 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 118 (b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980.

As shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape imitating a human hand, and the main body portion 981 and the main body portion 981 forming the rear portion of the hand are formed. It is mainly provided with finger portions 982 to 986 which are connected to form a finger portion of the hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is arranged inside the main body 981, and the variable plate (not shown) arranged inside can be displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 118 (a)). Will be done.

The finger portion 982 is a portion corresponding to the thumb, and the base portion side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. As a result, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are formed mainly including a first link RB1 arranged on the base side and a second link RB2 arranged on the tip side inside the finger portions 983 to 986.

The first link RB1 is connected to the second link RB2 in a rotatable state on the tip side, and is connected to the variable plate of the main body 981 on the base side. Therefore, the variable plate of the main body 981 is moved by the piston, so that the second link RB2 can be displaced via the first link RB1 and the first link RB1. As a result, the fingers 983 to 986 can be displaced. In the present embodiment, by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the operation of opening and closing the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction on the paper in FIG. 43), two columnar shaft support pins 411c and 411d protruding toward the back side, and a shaft support pin 411d. It is mainly provided with a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape about the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes through which two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed so as to extend in the left-right direction, respectively. Therefore, by displacing the protrusions 472 and 473 inserted through the sliding grooves 411a and 411b along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed by being curved in an arc shape, respectively, and are upward (upward in FIG. 43) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411. ) Is opened. Further, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at different positions on the axes of their respective arcs, and the gap between the opposing portions in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end portion to the right end portion.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated along with the sliding without applying the driving force for rotation to the lower displacement member 440.

The shaft support pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 of the transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the shaft support pin 411c is formed of a metal rod-like body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft support pin 411c from being broken (damaged) when a force is applied to the cam member 422 from the outer peripheral surface thereof in the axial direction.

Next, the lower displacement member 2440 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. In the first embodiment, the case where the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2 has been described, but the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466. It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the driving motor KM2. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that FIG. 120 shows a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are transparently viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 2460 displaceably arranged between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 450 formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.

The base member 2470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and an erection wall 471a erected on the front surface from the edge on the other end side. Left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 120) A protruding wall 477 that protrudes from the upper end of the central portion to the front side in a U-shape that is opposite to the vertical direction, a shaft portion 474, 475 that protrudes from the front side, and a shaft portion 474. It is mainly provided with shaft portions 2470a and 2470b projecting above 475.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member rotatably supported by the transmission gear 2468a described later, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member rotatably supported by the transmission gear 2468b described later, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As will be described later, the transmission gear 2468a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged in a state in which the gear tooth surfaces engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof are meshed with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b in the front view is set to the distance corresponding to the radius of the transmission gear 2468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is arranged in front of the base member 470, and has a transmission gear 461,462,463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 2464 that is slidably displaceable in front of the base member 470, a transmission gear 2468a that meshes with the movable rack 2464, and a transmission gear 2468b that meshes with the transmission gear 2468a. A rack 46 that meshes with the transmission gear 2468b and a ball receiving portion 467 that is rotatably arranged on one end side of the rack 466 are mainly provided.

The movable rack 2464 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body in a front view, and has a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision portion 464f protruding from the lower end surface. Is mainly formed.

The rack gear 2464g is meshed with a transmission gear 2468a described later. As a result, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated according to the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are pivotally supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470 in a state of being in mesh with each other as described above. As a result, when the transmission gear 2468a is rotated, the transmission gear 2468b is rotated. Further, the transmission gear 2468b is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are arranged at positions partially displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the transmission gear 2468a is prevented from colliding with the rack 466 and the transmission gear 2468b is prevented from colliding with the movable rack 2464.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that, in FIG. 121, similarly to FIG. 120, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIG. 121, when electric power is applied to the drive motor KM2 and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the firing position by the transmission mechanism 2460 described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in different directions from each other. NS.

More specifically, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side (left side of FIG. 121) of the lower displacement member 440 by rotating the drive motor KM4. Along with this displacement, the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (right side in FIG. 3). As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 can be reduced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 due to a change in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Next, the lower displacement member 3440 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism has been described, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by the link mechanism. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. 122A is a front view of the lower displacement member 3440 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 122B is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 125 (a) and 91 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440.

Note that FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is transparently viewed, and in FIG. 125 (b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 are transparently viewed. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and rear of the base member 3470, and a case member 480 and a base. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 3460 displaceably arranged between the member 3470 and a decorative member 450 formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 480.

The base member 3470 is a plate member formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and has protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and an erection wall 471a erected on the front side from the edge on the other end side. A sliding wall 3470c formed continuously from the base end side of the erection wall 471a and erected on the lower edge of the base member 3470, and an upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (FIG. 122 (a) left-right direction). Mainly provided with a protruding wall 477 that protrudes from the front side in a U-shape opposite to the vertical direction, and an opening 479 that is recessed in the central portion of the base member 470 in the vertical direction while extending from one end side to the other end side. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion for abutting with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 and regulating the position (aspect) of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, it is formed so as to project to a position below the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with the opening of the U-shaped portion facing upward.

Further, the sliding wall 3470c is formed with a recess 3470c1 recessed below the end portion on the standing wall 471a side. The recess 3470c1 is a groove for receiving the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 into the recessed portion 3470c1. As a result, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid toward the upright portion side by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the recess and the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotated. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be made to perform a firing operation (an operation of discharging the ball held inside the U-shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 is attached to a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480 described later, a first link member 3468 connected to a shaft of the drive motor KM2 and rotatably arranged, and the first link member 3468 thereof. A second link member 3469 connected in a rotatable state and a ball receiving portion 467 connected to one end side of the second link member 3469 are mainly provided.

The first link member 3468 is formed from a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body, has a shaft hole 3468b formed through one end side, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and bulges toward the other end side. It is mainly provided with a load portion 3468c to be formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole through which the rotating shaft 3469a of the second link member 3469, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed through the shaft hole 3468b in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 3469a.

The connecting hole 3468a is a hole to be fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. By internally fitting the shaft of the drive motor KM2 into the connecting hole 3468a and fastening the shaft member 3468a, the first link member 3468 can be rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM2.

The load portion 3468c is formed so as to bulge toward the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a. The load portion 346c is a member for applying a load for locating the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side of the connecting hole 3468a, and is formed so as to bulge outward from the one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long state, and is arranged on the back surface side of the first link member 3468. The second link member 3469 is mainly provided with a rotating shaft 3469a projecting from the other end side in a columnar shape toward the front surface and a through hole 3469b formed through the one end side in the front-rear direction.

As described above, the rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468. As a result, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 can be connected in a rotatable state.

The through hole 3469b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. Further, the through hole 3469b is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b and the through hole 3469b of the ball receiving portion 467 are arranged coaxially, and a screw having a head larger than the width of the opening 469 in the lateral direction is inserted into the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b from the back side of the base member 3470. Is inserted and fastened to the through hole 3469b, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is connected to the second link member in a rotatable state.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 3481 arranged on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 arranged on the back side.

The front case 3481 is formed in a rectangular horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 3481d which is penetrated at a position facing the drive motor KM2, a bottom wall portion 481b which is formed so as to project from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge portion. Is mainly provided with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 3481d is a hole for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 to the back side, and is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the back side.

Next, the displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, and FIG. 126 (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position. FIG. 127 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the third position, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 at the second position.

From FIG. 126 (a) to FIG. 127 (b), the transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are shown in order. Further, FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b) or 127 (a) and 127 (b) show a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are transparently viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, in the downward displacement member 440 at the first position, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are the longitudinal directions of the base member 3470 in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction). The first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction while being substantially parallel to the direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 126 (a)).

That is, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side (left side in FIG. 126 (a)) of the base member 3470. As a result, the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced from the state of the first position, one end side of the first link member 3468 is the base member 3470. Displaced with respect to. As a result, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, one end side of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, so that one end side of the second link member 3469 is the base member 3470. It is pushed out to the other end side of. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the state of the second position and the first link member 3468 is rotated by approximately 180 degrees from the state of the first position. , The connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis. Therefore, one end side of the second link member 3469 is further pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the urging spring SP2 and fired.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced to one end side of the base member 3470. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, the rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the change in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468. Therefore, it is not necessary to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes, so that the lower displacement member 3440 tends to rattle, and the ball receiving portion 467 is quickly retracted. Therefore, the rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed by quickly bringing the position of the center of gravity closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440.

Further, by immediately displacementing the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the ejection operation when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the discharged game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that displaces the base member 470 downward by the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is applied to cancel the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

Next, the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is formed so as to be capable of firing is described, but the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment is the lower displacement member arranged in the retracted state. The firing operation of 440 is regulated. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIG. 128, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment has an opening opened in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the standing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. 4471b is formed.

The tip portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

On the front base 411, an engaging wall 4411g formed in a substantially L shape continuous with the bottom surface of the collection port 411f is formed.

The engaging wall 4411g can regulate that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position (launching operation) by inserting the tip portion 4411g1 bent into a substantially L shape into the opening 4471b. .. That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 located in the retracted state.

Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. In addition, in FIGS. 129 and 130, a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are transparently viewed is shown as in FIG. 128, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown by a chain line. Illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 129, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at the third position is shown. Further, in FIG. 130, a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state and the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged in the first position is shown.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engaging wall 4411g, and the recess 481b1 or the opening Invasion of 4471b is restricted. As a result, the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted.

Therefore, when the ball thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 by the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the third position. Can be prevented from rotating and ejecting the game ball held inside the ball receiving portion 467.

That is, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed when the game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball) are discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position. Can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the position in the first overhanging state (the position not in the retracted state), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engaging wall 4411g are separated from each other. Therefore, in the first overhanging state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform the firing operation.

That is, when the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (1 ball) is discharged from the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467 with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed. It is possible to suppress the change and make it easier to maintain the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 holds a specified number of game balls, while engaging when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first and second overhang positions. Since the wall 4411g is separated from the internal space of the opening 4471b, the leg portion 467a is engaged with the opening 4471b as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, so that the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed. It is possible to easily discharge a specified number of game balls from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135. In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulated state has been described, but the distribution member 540 in the fifth embodiment slides and displaces to form the storage state and the regulated state. do. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. 131 (a) is a top view of the sorting unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131 (b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 5500. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 134 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 5500 in the CXXXIV-CXXXIV line of FIG. 131 (a). In FIG. 134, the outer shape of the distribution member 540 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment has a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and is attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and faces the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of flow paths through which a ball can flow down, a distribution member 5540 that is slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520, and a base plate that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 5520. It is mainly provided with an extension path member 530 that extends the flow path of the sphere formed between the 5520 and the path forming member 510 facing each other.

The base plate 5520 has two columnar shaft portions 5526 protruding toward the back surface, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed through the base plate 5520 in a rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section in which the upper end side is open to the side surface of the upper end. It is mainly provided with a rolling portion 525 that is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking portion 524 that protrudes like a hook on the back surface side.

Two shaft portions 5526 are formed so as to project toward the back surface side, and are inserted into the two sliding grooves 5546, which will be described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are openings through which the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 5542 of the distribution member 5540, which will be described later, are inserted, and the opening has a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. It is formed. Further, since the sorting member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger in the sliding direction of the sorting member 5540 than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. Formed in the opening.

The sorting member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view in which one is long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 5540 is a sliding groove 5546 formed in a long hole having a regulation plate 5541 and a storage plate 5542 protruding to the front side in a plate shape and a long hole substantially in the same direction as the extension direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. And a locking portion 544 formed in the shape of a hook on the back surface side.

The regulation plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 via the first opening 5521, and the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is the second throwing path KR2. It is a plate member that regulates the inflow to the first opening 5521, and the distance protruding from the first opening 5521 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a straight line in front view, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the slide direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slidably displaced, the displacement region of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. As a result, the opening region of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The storage plate 5542 is a plate member that is arranged on the second throwing path KR2 via the second opening 5522 and allows a game ball that flows down the second throwing path KR2 to flow down to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542. The distance protruding from the opening 5522 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a straight line in front view, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slidably displaced, the displacement region of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. As a result, the opening region of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole formed through in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the sliding groove 5546. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 5526 into the sliding groove 5546 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back surface side, the distribution member 5540 is held in a state where it can be slidably displaced with respect to the base plate 5520. be able to.

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two locations and their longitudinal directions are parallel to each other. As a result, the distribution member 5540 can be slidably displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

Next, the displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. 135 (a) and 135 (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 5500 in the range CXXXV of FIG. 134. Note that FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the storage position, and FIG. 135 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulation position.

As shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state where the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulated position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged in the shape of the third throwing path KR3, and the regulating plate 5541 is on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is arranged inside the recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip protruding inward of the third throw path KR3 of the storage plate 5542 and the inner wall of the third throw path facing the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream side of the third throwing path KR3 (the first throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 5542.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), when the distribution member 5540 is arranged at the regulation position, the regulation plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throw path KR1 and the third throw path KR3. , The regulation plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the third throwing path KR3, and the storage plate 5542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall portion on the back side of the path forming member 510. NS.

In this case, the distance dimension L10 between the end of the tip protruding inward of the first throwing path KR1 of the regulation plate 5541 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulation position and the storage position, the ball thrown in the first throwing path KR1 is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third throwing path KR3. It is possible to form a state in which a ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third throwing path KR3 and is thrown into the second throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by sliding-displace one distribution member 5540, the flow path of the sphere can be reliably switched to either of the flow paths of the sphere when the flow path is divided into the flow path of 1 and the flow path of 2.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 (sorting means) is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first throwing path KR1 (flow passage) or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage), and the appearance position thereof is the first. 1 It is an inner wall on an extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the throwing path KR1. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the regulation plate 5541 to the flow-down passage or the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) until the game balls can be distributed. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 5541.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 (distribution means) projects from the third throwing path KR3 (first branch passage) to allow the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 (flowing passage) to the second throwing path (the second throwing path). It is distributed to the second branch passage), and the protruding direction of the regulation plate 5541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second throwing path KR2, so that the game ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 is projected. When the game ball comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the process, the game ball can be pushed into the second throwing path KR as the regulation plate protrudes. As a result, the distribution to the second throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Next, the rotating unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 140. In the first embodiment, the case where the load gear 731e is connected to the drive of the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is restricted from operating by the inertial force has been described. However, the rotating body 800 in the sixth embodiment has a load. The gear 731e is removed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. FIG. 136 is a front view of the rotating unit 6700 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating unit 6700. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 6500.

As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the rotating unit 6700 includes a decorative unit 6750 including a rotating body 800 that is rotationally displaced, a ball pedestal 710 arranged on the upper side of the decorative unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, and the ball pedestal. The rear base 720 arranged on the back side of the 710 and the decorative unit 6750, the left transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decorative unit 6750 in the front view, and the crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the front view of the decorative unit 6750. And are formed mainly with.

The decorative unit 6750 is mainly formed by including a box member 760 formed in a box shape in which the upper side in the direction of gravity is opened, and a rotating body 800 rotatably arranged inside the box member. That is, in the first embodiment, the decorative unit 750 is formed in a state where the rotating body 800 is arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the lid member 770 is removed. NS.

The left transmission member 730 is attached to the drive motor KM4 arranged on the left side surface (left side in FIG. 136) of the decorative unit 750, the transmission member 6731 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. Mainly, the motor base 732, the gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and the throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and is formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the gear cover 733. Formed in preparation.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c. It is mainly provided with a transmission gear 731d which is arranged adjacent to and coaxially arranged by a shaft 735.

The transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits a driving force to the transmission gear 731c. In the first embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached to the inside of the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b of the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the driving force for rotation can be transmitted to the shaft 735, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the driving force in the other direction is transmitted to the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. The outer ring slips (idles) and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off.

Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. 139 (a) to 139 (c) are side views of the decorative unit 6750 in the direction of arrow CXXXIX of FIG. 138, and FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c) are views of the arrow CXXXIX of FIG. 138. It is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in.

In addition, in FIG. 139 and FIG. 140, the state in which the left side surface plate 765 of the box member 760 is viewed transparently is shown. Further, in FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (c), the mode in which the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 displaces the second section DK2 is shown in order, and in FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c), the rotating body The mode in which the center of gravity G of 800 displaces the first section DK1 is shown in order.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced in the left direction (viewing in the 139 direction) and clockwise (clockwise).

As described above, the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically around the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (a) is arranged above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotation axis. When it starts, a force that rotates in the direction of rotation is applied by the load.

Therefore, the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged on the transmission gear 731c is disengaged, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (drive motor side). It is in a state of being driven. That is, in the second section, the rotation speed of the rotating body 800 can be made faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

The rotating body 800 that rotates the second section DK2 under the load is rotated by the load to a position where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 139 (c) is located below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotation speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 and enhance the effect of following the displacement of the rotating body 800.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. In the first embodiment described above, the case where the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring (that is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 is increased) by its own weight has been described. The displacement member 7710 in the embodiment uses the weight of the game ball to bring the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 ahead of the inner ring (that is, increase the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

141 and 142 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 according to the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 141 schematically shows a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 142 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the descending position.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 transmits a rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to a displacement member 7710 formed so as to be slidable and the displacement member 7710. The transmission member 7720 and the load gear 7730 that is rotated according to the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710 are mainly provided.

The displacement member 7710 is a member that is supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the virtual line L1. The driven pin 7711 projecting from the side surface of the displacement member 7710 and the lower surface of the displacement member 7710. It mainly includes a rack gear 7712 engraved along the virtual line L1 and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710.

The virtual line L1 is set as a straight line that inclines downward from the ascending position shown in FIG. 141 toward the descending position shown in FIG. 142. That is, in the ascending position, the displacement member 7710 is positioned above the descending position in the direction of gravity.

The driven pin 7711 is a member that is slidably inserted into the drive groove 7723b in the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720, and is formed as a columnar body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated with the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding the game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and by being rotated around the rotation shaft 7713a, the standing state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. 142 can be obtained. It can be formed. In the upright state, the game ball can be held by projecting one end side from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, since one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, the game ball can be discharged from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by an urging force acting from an urging spring (for example, a torsion spring) (not shown). An engaging pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), and when the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced to the descending position, the engaging pin is on the other end side of the ball receiving member 7713. When the 7740 is engaged, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated and brought into a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid and displaced to the ascending position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring to return to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 is a disk-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by a driving means (not shown) described above, and is projected from the axial end surface of the rotating member 7721 and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating member 7721. It mainly includes a columnar drive pin 7722 and an arm member 7723 in which a driven groove 7723a through which the drive pin 7722 is slidably inserted is formed.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the driving means. Specifically, in the one-way clutch OW1, when the inner ring is connected to the drive means, the outer ring is connected to the rotating member 7721, and the inner ring is rotationally driven by the drive means in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141). When the rotational driving force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A), while the inner ring is rotationally driven by the driving means in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141). , The power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721) is cut off.

In the arm member 7723, a drive groove 7723b through which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted is formed on the other end side, which is opposite to the one end side on which the driven groove 7723a is formed. At the same time, the space between the driven groove 7723a and the drive groove 7723b (intermediate portion) is rotatably supported by the rotation shaft 7723c.

The drive pin 7722 is formed as a columnar body having an outer shape slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the drive groove 7723b are formed as linear grooves along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 7723.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, when the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state where the displacement member 7710 is arranged at the ascending position shown in FIG. 141. , The drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation shaft 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates clockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing down the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slidably displaced along the virtual line L1 and is displaced in FIG. 142. It is placed in the descending position shown in.

On the other hand, when the rotating member 7721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state where the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the descending position shown in FIG. 142, the drive pin 7722 is moved in the driven groove 7723a. Acting on the wall surface, the arm member 7723 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation shaft 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing up the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slidably displaced along the virtual line L1. It is arranged at the ascending position shown in 141.

Here, the load gear 7730 is formed so that a predetermined amount of resistance is generated when the load gear 7730 rotates, similarly to the load gear 731e in the first embodiment. As a result, the weight (own weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723 to rotate the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), so that the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is relative to the inner ring. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from leading in one direction (arrow A direction). That is, when the game ball is not held, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 from being increased from the ascending position to the descending position.

That is, while the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIGS. 141 and 142) by the rotational driving force of the driving means, the rotating member 7721 is displaced at a sliding speed corresponding to the rotational driving speed of the rotational driving means. The member 7710 is reciprocally displaced (sliding displacement) between the ascending position and the descending position.

143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. Note that FIG. 143 schematically shows a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 144 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is arranged in the descending position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed on the upper surface thereof so as to be able to hold the game ball. That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is arranged in the area where the game ball flows down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed so as to be able to receive the flowing game ball on the upper surface thereof. Note that FIG. 143 exemplifies a state in which the four game balls indicated by reference numeral T are held on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710.

In this case, in the state where the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavier) by the weight of the game ball to exceed the resistance due to the rotation of the load gear 7730. Can be made to. That is, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 (weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143) to rotate the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Can be preceded in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the ascending position to the descending position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the game ball is not held (see FIG. 141).

Further, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be made different according to the number of game balls held. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be changed (changed) not only depending on whether or not the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710, but also depending on the number of the game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

As described above, the displacement member 7710 is provided with a ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (end on the downwardly inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the force acted on the displacement member 7710 from the game ball is slid toward the descending position. It can act as a force to displace. That is, the applied force can be applied to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 in the direction leading in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721.

As a result, when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the flowing game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball is used to slide the displacement member 7710 in the descending position. The displacement rate of displacement can be made faster.

In this case, the flowing game balls have different flow directions and flow speeds. Therefore, the force (magnitude of kinetic energy) applied to the displacement member 7710 can be made different according to the difference in the flow state (flow direction and flow speed) of the game ball to be received. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 differs (changes) depending not only on whether or not the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball and the number of the game balls held, but also on the flow state of the game ball. Can be done). As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the rotation direction of the rotating member 7721 is unidirectional, it is not necessary to switch the driving direction of the driving means. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocally displaced by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time for switching the driving direction of the driving means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced because it does not require switching of the drive means.

In this case, by immediately displacementing the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced due to the reaction when the displacement member 7710 (the upper surface thereof or the ball receiving member 7713) drops the game ball received by the displacement member 7710. The rattling of the displacement member 7710 can be suppressed.

That is, when the game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is reduced by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the reaction due to the displacement of the ball receiving member 7713 exerts a force that displaces the displacement member 7710 downward to cancel the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710. be able to.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves in the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13 along the direction of gravity, and also includes a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include, for example, a game ball that collides with a nail, tulip, or an accessory and moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, or rolls a stage and then jumps out of the stage. An example is a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

Here, in the present embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 is not holding the game ball (see FIG. 141), the displacement member 7710 is slidably displaced toward the descending position. The outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is configured so as not to precede the inner ring in one direction (direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value and the displacement member 7710 is slidably displaced toward the descending position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is displaced with respect to the inner ring. It may be configured so as to precede in one direction (direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 becomes faster). That is, even when only the weight (own weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 becomes the inner ring. On the other hand, it may be preceded.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. On the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit 8650. FIG. 147 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the CXLVII-CXLVII line of FIG. 145.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged in the internal space of the upper plate 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 described later protrudes outward of the upper plate 8017. It is arranged in the state of being.

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8652 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651, and a shaft of the transmission gear 8652. It is mainly formed by including a shaft portion 8653 that is internally fitted into the hole, a one-way clutch OW1 in which an inner ring is externally fitted in the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 in which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is internally fitted. ..

The transmission gear 8651 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6. Therefore, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated by applying a rotational driving force to the drive motor KM6. As described above, the transmission gear 8651 is arranged with the transmission gear 8652 in a meshed state. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 8652 can be rotated via the transmission gear 8651.

The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a columnar shape, and its axial length is formed longer than the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotation operation portion 8654. As described above, one of the shaft portions 8653 is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. As a result, the driving force when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As described above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and a roller engaged between them. When the inner ring is rotated in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring and the inner ring is moved in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be non-transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation unit 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is arranged in a state in which a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof protrudes from the upper plate 8017. Further, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is internally fitted in the inner circle portion of the rotation operation portion 8654. That is, the inward tilt of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 is transmitted by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651, 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation unit 8654. Is rotated. On the other hand, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 are not transmitted, and the transmission of the rotational drive to the rotation operation unit 8654 is cut off.

Next, a case where the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. The cross section of FIG. 148 corresponds to that of FIG. 147.

As described above, the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates the rotation operation unit 8654 by rotating the drive motor KM6 to rotate the rotation operation unit 8654 and by making the rotation of the drive motor KM6 non-rotate. It is possible to form a mode in which the displacement is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, when the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction and the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 to operate the rotation operation unit. When a rotational force is generated in the 8654 in the same direction as the rotation A direction, the outer peripheral surface of the one-way clutch OW1 and the rotation operation unit 8654 are rotated in advance. That is, the rotation operation unit 8654 can be operated at a speed higher than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6 by the operation of the player.

Further, when the rotation operation unit 8654 is set to non-rotation (the drive motor KM6 is non-rotation), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotation A direction to rotationally displace the rotation operation unit 8654. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, not only the rotation operation unit 8654 forms a non-rotational or rotation state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also the rotation operation unit 8654 rotates from the stopped state by the operation of the player. And the rotation operation unit 8654 can be formed in a mode in which the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated at a higher speed from the rotation state by the operation of the player.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of modes in which the player can visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operation unit 8654, which can give the player an interest. Further, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654, it is possible to form a plurality of production modes of the pachinko machine 10, so that the effect can be increased, and the player can be given a hobby.

A sensor device or the like for measuring the number of rotations is arranged on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and it is possible to perform an effect that is changed based on the rotation speed and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654.

Next, the first link member 9431 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. The plate-shaped protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment includes an inclined surface 9431b1 formed by inclining the contact surface with the cam member 422. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that FIG. 149 (b) corresponds to a schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 56 (a).

The lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment is the same as the lower displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, the base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300, and the base member 410 thereof. A transmission member 420 arranged on the base member 410 and a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) that is displaced by transmitting a driving force from the transmission member 420 are provided. Further, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a link member 9430 that is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440 and is displaced by driving the transmission member 420, and is displaced by the displacement of the link member 9430. The lower displacement member 440 is displaced.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 according to the ninth embodiment is formed by being bent into a dogleg shape in front view, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 9431 has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (the side in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 149 (a)) and the other end side (the side in the direction of arrow U in FIG. A columnar connecting projection 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-shaped projection 9431b projecting at a position facing the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a columnar sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion. And prepare.

The plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is extended in a curved shape about the axis of the through hole 431a, and is projected toward the front side (front base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is set to be larger than the thickness (dimension in the arrow FB direction) of the cam member 422. Further, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the protruding tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is arranged with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149 (b))).

The cam member 422 is arranged in a displaceable state between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b and the projecting surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e facing each other. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps including the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other are larger than the above-mentioned distance X14. It is set large.

As a result, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) facing the projecting tip surface of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b when the first link member 9431 bends in the direction in which the above-mentioned distance X14 becomes smaller (arrow F direction). Can be brought into contact with. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from being sandwiched between the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b and the projecting surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e to regulate the displacement.

Further, the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b is provided with an inclined surface 9431b1 that projects toward the front side toward the cam member 422 on the side surface in the circumferential direction on the cam member 422 side (the side in the arrow L direction in FIG. 149 (b)). As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed so as to be inclined by approximately 45 degrees toward the protruding side (the side in the direction of arrow F).

As a result, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end portion of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b, the cam member 422 is placed on the back surface of the first link member 9431 (on the side in the direction of arrow F). It can be pressed (displaced) against the curved wall portion 411e, and the protruding tip surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 from swinging in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the position of the second displacement state.

In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed at the end portion of the cam member 422 at the contact portion with the inclined surface 9431b1. As a result, when the cam member 422 and the inclined surface 9431b1 come into contact with each other, the cam member 422 can be easily displaced to the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

Next, the general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 150. In the first embodiment, the case where the adhesive tape 154a is attached to the end of the decorative member 154 has been described in the general winning opening unit 150, but in the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is attached to the end of the decorative member 10154. It is affixed to the inside that separates a predetermined width from the part. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 150 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, the general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment is arranged in the game area (front of the base plate 60) of the game board 13 like the general winning opening unit 150 in the first embodiment, and flows down the game area. It is possible to change the route of the game ball to be played. Further, the general winning opening unit 10150 is the end on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the gravity direction in the front view (arrow B direction view) with respect to the game area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is placed along the part.

Further, the general winning opening unit 10150 has a main body portion 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and a first standing portion 152 erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end portion of the main body portion 151. (See FIG. 12) and the second erection portion 153 extending from the end of the first erection portion 152 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center side of the game area (FIG. 12 (FIG. 12). A) and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 (see FIG. 12A) formed on the front side of the main body 151.

As shown in FIG. 150, the general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decorative member 10154 arranged on the back surface of the main body 10151. The decorative member 10154 has an adhesive tape 10154a adhered to the main body 151 attached to the inside of the decorative member 10154 with a predetermined width from the end. As a result, a predetermined gap (space) is formed at the end of the decorative member 10154 by the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a between the main body 151 and the decorative member 10154. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from an angle equal to or greater than a predetermined angle (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)), the decorative member 60c It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary between the decorative member 10154 and the decoration.

More specifically, by forming an air layer between the decorative member 10154 and the main body 151, the inside of the main body 151 is reflected and the player side is seen from the end (inclined surface 151a) of the main body 151. It is possible to prevent the light L emitted from the light L from being affected by the decoration at the end portion of the decorative member 10154 (making it difficult for the wavelength of the light L to be changed). Further, the light that has passed through the inside of the adhesive tape 10154a and is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body 151 and emitted to the outside of the main body 151. When reflected toward the viewpoint, the influence of the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be reduced.

Therefore, the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player can be reduced, and when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 are decorated. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the boundary of. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 from a normal angle (for example, a viewpoint having a height substantially equal to the position substantially intermediate in the gravity direction of the game board 13), the decoration of the base plate is performed. The member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be easily visually recognized by the player as one decoration, and at a predetermined angle (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). When visually recognizing from the above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the decoration of the boundary portion and to make it difficult for the player to understand that the decoration is divided.

Next, the lower displacement member 11440 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 450 is irradiated with light by the control substrate 491 arranged on the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440 has been described, but the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment is the control substrate. The position of the game ball inside can be recognized by the player by the light emitted from 491. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 11440 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 11440 according to the eleventh embodiment. 152 (a) and 152 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 11440. In FIG. 152 (a), the outer shape of the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the control board 491 is shown by a chain line, and in FIG. 152 (b), the state in which the decorative member 11450 is removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b), the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment is the base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and rear of the base member 470. A case member 480 that covers the case member 480, a transmission mechanism 11460 that is displaceably arranged between the case member 480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member that is formed so as to cover the front and rear (arrow FB direction) of the case member 480. 11450 and are formed mainly.

The decorative member 11450 is formed in an outer shape imitating a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 11450 has a front side decorative portion 11451 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front case 481 and a back side decorative portion 11451 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 482. It is formed mainly with 452. In this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450.

The front side decorative portion 11451 is formed to have an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 in the front view, and is attached to the front case 481. As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) arranged on the back side of the front side decorative portion 11451 can be made invisible to the player. Further, the front side decorative portion 11451 includes a transmission portion 11451b formed of a light transmitting material inside in front view.

The transmission portion 11451b is formed over the entire range of positions facing the plurality of light emitting bodies 11491a arranged on the control board 491 to be described later, and can guide the light emitted from the plurality of light emitting bodies 11491a to the player side. It is said that. Further, the transmission portion 11451b is formed so that the front side (arrow F direction side) is curved toward the back side (arrow B direction side) toward the outer end portion in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, when the light incident from the back surface side of the transmitting portion 11451b passes through the inside of the transmitting portion 11451b and is emitted from the front side, it is easily diffused.

The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a transmission gear 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a drive motor KM2. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and is arranged so that the front side of the base member 470 can be slidably displaced, a transmission gear 465 rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464, and a base. A rack gear 476 having a tooth surface formed on the member 470 and meshed with the transmission gear 465, and a rack having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and displaceable on the front side of the movable rack 464 so as to be slidable. It mainly includes an 11466 and a ball receiving portion 467 that is rotatably arranged on one end side of the rack 11466.

The rack 11466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface and a rear end side (arrow B direction side) from the other end side (arrow L direction side) in the longitudinal direction. A shaft portion 466b projecting in a columnar shape, two sliding plates 466c projecting toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and a recess in the back surface from one end in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) to the other end. A recessed portion 466d (see FIG. 59) to be provided, and a shielding plate 11466e projecting upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a are provided.

The shielding plate 11466e is made of a non-light transmissive material, and can block the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a. Further, the shielding plate 11466e is set so that the upward projecting height (height in the arrow U direction) is higher than the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back surface side (position on the arrow U direction side). As a result, the shielding plate 11466e can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) with the displacement of the rack 11466 to block the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a.

The control board 491 is arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitting bodies 11491a capable of irradiating light on the front surface side. The plurality of light emitting bodies 11491a are arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower displacement member 11440, and are arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470. It is arranged above 467 (in the direction of arrow U). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball receiving portion 467 from blocking the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a.

Next, a state in which the game ball is thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467 will be described with reference to FIG. 153. 153 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, and FIG. 153 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 in the CLIIIb-CLIIIb line of FIG. 153 (a). ) Is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 in the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of FIG. 153 (a).

As shown in FIG. 153, when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the accepted game ball is arranged at a position overlapping the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitting body 11491a. As a result, the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467 can block the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a to the player side. As a result, the position of the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 11440 can be recognized by the player by the shadow formed by blocking the light.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the control board 491 is provided on the back surface side of the decorative member 11450 and can emit light toward the displacement region of the ball receiving portion 467, and the control board 491 is the ball receiving portion 467. A game ball arranged on the back side and received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 blocks the light emitted from the control board 491 and partially reduces the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450. The amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 located on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 and the light emitted from the decorative member 11450 at other positions are different from each other. By making the amount of light different from that of (darkening to form a shadow), the player can determine that the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion having the different light amount. Can be recognized by.

More specifically, when the control board 491 is arranged on the back side of the ball receiving portion 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the ball receiving portion 467 or the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 can be made darker than the other parts of the decorative member 11450. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is small (dark).

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape that receives the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and the light emitting body 11491a is arranged at a position higher than the center of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467. It is possible to make it difficult for the irradiated light to be applied to the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a casts a shadow on the outer shape of the rack 11466 that slides and displaces the ball receiving portion 467 that receives the game ball and the ball receiving portion 467, and a shadow is formed on the transmitting portion 11451b. Can be suppressed. As a result, since the shadow can be formed on the transmission portion 11451b only by the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced while the game ball is not received by the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from paying attention to the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is blocked by the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the ball receiving portion 12467 is arranged. The light emitted from the illuminant 11491a is shielded by the three pieces 12467e. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154 (b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion 12467. In FIG. 154 (a), a part of the ball receiving portion 12467 is shown by a chain line.

The lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is the base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and rear of the base member 470, similarly to the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment. It is mainly provided with a case member 480 that covers the case member 480 and a decorative member 11450 that is formed so as to cover the front and rear (arrow FB direction) of the case member 480. Further, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment includes a transmission mechanism 12460 having a ball receiving portion 12467c which is displaceably arranged between the case member 480 and the base member 470 and can be deformed by receiving a game ball. ..

As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in front view and a second piece 12467d connected to the first piece 12467c. , A third piece 12467e which is connected to the second piece 12467d and is arranged on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are portions for holding the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 12440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and are between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d facing each other. When the game ball is thrown, the second piece 12467d is displaced from the first piece 12467c in a direction away from each other, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are arranged in a U shape in front view. And the game ball can be held in the inner part of the U-shape.

The first piece 12467c is composed of a receiving piece 12467c4 forming an L-shape in front view, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and a receiving piece 12467c4 and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 12467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 12467c1 projecting to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 in between. And.

The receiving piece 12467c4 is a portion forming a side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and is formed in a crescent shape on the front side. , Is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

The connecting portion 12467c1 is projected from two positions at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 12467c5. Further, the connecting portion 12467c1 is a portion that connects the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e, which will be described later, and provides a connecting hole 12467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and is opened in a circular cross section. Be prepared.

The connecting hole 12467c2 is an opening into which the shaft portion 12467e3 projecting from the third piece 12467e, which will be described later, is inserted. In the connecting hole 12467c2, the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3 formed in the second piece 12467d, which will be described later, is inserted from the back surface side (arrow B direction side). Further, the shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side (front side (arrow F direction side)) of the connecting hole 12467c2. As a result, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the first piece 12467c is provided with a recess 12467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (side in the direction of arrow D) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recess 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (bottom) of the bottom surface where the game ball is held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. As a result, the game ball held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d is rolled inside the recess 12467c3.

The second piece 12467d is a portion forming the side surface of the other side (arrow L direction side) formed in a U shape in the front view by the receiving piece 12467c4 and the second piece 12467d of the first piece 12467c, and is a crescent moon in the front view. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4. Further, an insertion hole 12467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the connecting portion of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and the back side (arrow B direction side) to the front side (arrow F direction). It mainly includes a recessed portion 12467d2 that is recessed in a circular cross section toward the side).

In the second piece 12467d, the shaft portion 12467e3 of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3, and the connecting shaft 12467e4 of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is also displaced as well. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is also rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the second piece 12467d is arranged between the facing portions of the connecting portions 12467c1 projecting at two positions of the first piece 12467c, and is connected to the first piece 12467c. As a result, when the second piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the second piece 12467d is brought into contact with the side surface of the connecting portion 12467c1 on the opposite side to prevent the shaft portion 12467e3 from breaking.

The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole into which the connecting shaft 12467e4 of the third piece 12467e, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The third piece 12467e includes a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in front view, a shaft portion 12467e3 and a connecting shaft 12467e4 projecting from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (arrow F direction side). And.

The shielding plate 12467e1 is formed of a non-light transmissive material, and when arranged on the front side of the light emitting body 11491a, it can shield the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a. The light shielding of the light emitting body 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 12467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d as described above. Further, on the protruding tip surface of the shaft portion 12467e3, a hole into which a screw to be inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 can be screwed is formed from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3. Therefore, with the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3, the first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d, and the third piece 12467e are connected by fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of the shaft portion 12467e3. And the third piece 12467e can be made rotatable with respect to the first piece 12467c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2 of the second piece 12467d. As a result, when the second piece 12467d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c about the shaft portion 12467e3, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e can be displaced with the displacement of the second piece 12467d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail. 155 (a) and 155 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 in the CLVc-CLVc line of FIG. 155 (b). be. In addition, in FIG. 155 (a) and FIG. 155 (b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitting body 11491a are shown by a chain line. Further, FIG. 155 (a) shows a state before the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467 (before being held), and in FIG. 155 (b), the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467. The (held) state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the ball receiving portion 12467, in the state before the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d facing each other, the second piece 12467d is the first due to the load of the third piece 12467e. It is in a state of approaching the piece 12467c side, and the third piece 12467e is positioned below the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back surface side of the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

On the other hand, when the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the accepted game ball is formed on the receiving surface (front view U-shape) of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. The inner side surface) is rolled and guided to the recess 12467c3 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface. As a result, the second piece 12467d can be rotated around the shaft portion 12467e3 on the outer surface of the game ball in a direction away from the first piece 12467c. As a result, the third piece 12467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 12467d, can be arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back side of the ball receiving portion 12467.

Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be shielded by the shielding plate 12467e1 of the third piece 12467e. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be easily shielded only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, the position of the game ball received by the lower displacement member 12440 can be determined by the light emitting body 11491a. The player can be made to recognize the position of the shadow that blocks the light.

Further, in the second piece 12467d, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 12467e (see FIG. 154 (b)) is set on the opposite side of the connecting portion with the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e with the shaft portion 12467e3 in between. As a result, in a state where no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the load of the third piece 12467e can rotate the second piece 12467d toward the first piece 12467c. ..

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the second piece 12467d can be displaced to the receiving piece 12467c4 side of the first piece 12467c by the load of the third piece 12467e.

Further, the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 12467b by the operation of sliding displacement inside the lower displacement member 12440, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, and the lower displacement member 12440 is ejected. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 12467, in the structure in which the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the ball receiving portion 12467 slides, the ball receiving portion 12467 The rotation speed of the ball receiving portion 12467 around the shaft hole 467b is changed by the sliding speed of. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 12467, there is a problem that the discharging speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the direction in which the second piece 12467d is rotated by the load of the third piece 12467e and the rotation direction of the ball receiving portion 12467 about the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is ejected are different. Since the directions are set to be substantially the same, it is possible to apply a driving force when the second piece 12467d is displaced to the game ball emitted from the exit opening 471. Therefore, even if the force acting on the game ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 when the ball receiving portion 12467 is displaced and the game ball is discharged from the exit opening 471 is reduced, the speed of the ejected game ball can be maintained. can. As a result, the discharge speed of the game ball emitted from the ball receiving portion 12467 can be stabilized.

Next, the special winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158. In the first embodiment, the case where the throwing path of the game ball flowing into the inside of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 is switched by the first and second drive units 583 and 584 of the third path member 580 has been described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is adjusted by changing the facing interval of the throwing path of the special winning device 13550. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special winning apparatus 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. FIG. 156 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156 (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 156 (c) is a perspective view of FIG. 156 (c). It is sectional drawing of the special winning apparatus 13550 in the CLVIc-CLVIc line of a). FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device 13550.

As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment has a first path member 13560 arranged on the front side and a first path member 13560 arranged on the back side thereof. It includes a two-path member 13570.

The first path member 13560 is a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13, and projects from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). The first wall portion 13565 to be formed is mainly provided.

The front plate 13564 is a plate member formed between facing the second path member 13570, which will be described later, and serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball, and is formed of a light transmitting member. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 via the front plate 13564. Further, the front plate 13564 is located below the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c and the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c protruding toward the second path member 13570, and the second path member. It is provided with a third convex portion 13564d projecting on the 13570 side.

The first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are positive from the left-right outside (arrow LR direction outside) of the front plate 13564. The face plate 13564 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the center side in the left-right direction.

The third convex portion 13564d is located at the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and extends in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the throwing path of the game ball flowing down from the special prize device 13550 is different on the left and right at the substantially center position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the special prize device 13550. , The game ball flowing down from the left side of the front view of the special winning device 13550 is thrown to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), and the thrown game ball gives the player a specific game value (predetermined). A number of game balls will be paid out). On the other hand, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the front view of the special winning device 13550 is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning opening 64 is arranged below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (the arrow D direction side), whereby the special winning device 13550 is viewed from the left side in the front view. The flowing game ball can flow into the first winning opening 64.

The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special winning device 13550, and the connecting plates 13565a projecting to the left and right outward at the protruding tip portion are connected to the left and right first wall portions 13565, respectively. Prepare two places each.

The connecting plate 13565a is formed through a through hole 13565a1 for inserting a screw for fastening the special winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13. The special winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by the screw inserted through the through hole 13565a1.

The second path member 13570 is a plate-shaped base plate 13571 facing the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560, and the first path member 13560 from the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends of the base plate 13571. A fourth wall portion 13573, which is projected on the front plate 13564 side, is provided.

The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 13560 facing the front plate 13564, and the outer shape in front view is formed smaller than the outer shape of the front plate 13564. As a result, the front side of the base plate 13571 can be covered with the front plate 13564, so that it is difficult for the player to see the base plate 13571.

Further, the base plate 13571 is located below the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c protruding toward the first path member 13560, and is located on the front plate 13564 side. A sixth convex portion 13571d, which is projected from the above, is mainly provided.

The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are projected from the left-right direction outer side (arrow (LR direction outer side)) of the base plate 13571. It is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the center side of the base plate 13571.

The sixth convex portion 13571d is formed at a position facing the third convex portion 13564d described above, and is formed to have a length having a predetermined gap from the tip of the third convex portion 13564d. The gap between the third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d facing each other is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In the fourth wall portion 13573, two fastening holes 13573a for fastening the screw through which the first path member 13560 is inserted are bored in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573. As a result, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

Further, around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573, a shim member SI for adjusting the gap between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other is arranged.

The shim member SI is formed of a thin plate-shaped transparent material, which makes it difficult for the player to see it. Further, in the present embodiment, the shim member SI is arranged at the end on the left side of the front view, and the distance between the front plate 13564 on the left side of the front view and the base plate 13571 facing each other is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 13550 along the CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb line of FIG. 158 (a).

As shown in FIG. 158, in the special winning device 13550, a shim member SI is arranged at the end on the left side in the front view, and the distance L14 between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side in the front view is L14 (FIG. 158 (FIG. 158). (see a)) is set to be larger than the distance L15 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the right side of the front view (L14> L15).

The distance L14 is the distance between the left side (arrow L direction side) ends at the positions where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the distance L15 is the distance between the right end (side in the direction of the arrow R) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the interval L15 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball flowing down from above the special prize device 13550 can flow into the inside of the special prize device 13550 from any position in the left-right direction ( L14> L15> diameter of the game ball).

Further, the special winning device 13550 is divided into left and right on the downstream side by the third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK1 (see FIG. 158 (b)) on the upstream side of the special winning device 13550 is on the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the front view of the special winning device 13550 and on the right side of the front view. It flows into either one of the formed sub-pathways HK1. As described above, the game area on the downstream side of the special winning device 13550 is formed with a different throwing path at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the special winning device 13550. Therefore, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the game area is thrown to a specific winning opening, and the game ball thrown from the sub-path HK1 to the game area is sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13.

Further, the protruding dimensions of the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c of the front plate 13564 and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be substantially the same. That is, the protruding dimensions of the first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c protruding from the front plate 13564 toward the back surface side are set to be the same. Further, the protruding dimensions of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are set to be the same. Further, the protruding dimensions of the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion 13571b are set to be the same.

Further, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are arranged at positions having different heights in the vertical direction. That is, the first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c protruding from the front plate 13564 toward the back surface side are projected from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are projected from the same height. Further, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion 13571b are arranged at different heights, and the fourth convex portion 13571b is arranged below the first convex portion 13565b. Further, a lower side of the first convex portion 13565b projecting from two locations in the gravity direction is arranged at an intermediate position of the fourth convex portion 13571b projecting from two locations in the gravity direction.

As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 can be made to flow down while colliding with the first convex portion 13564b and the fourth convex portion 13571b or the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c in order. As a result, the game ball can flow down along the extending direction of the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c.

The distance dimension L16 (see FIG. 158 (a)) between the front plate 13564 and the fourth convex portion 13571b or the base plate 13571 and the first convex portion 13564b facing each other on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is determined by the shim member SI. The distance dimension L17 between the front plate 13564 and the fifth convex portion 13571c or the base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c on the right side of the front view of the special winning device 13550 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The distance L16 faces the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571 at the ends of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b on the fifth convex portion 13571c and the second convex portion 13564c side (arrow R direction side). It is the distance dimension between. Further, the distance L17 faces the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571 at the ends of the fifth convex portion 13571c and the second convex portion 13564c on the side of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b (arrow L direction side). It is the distance dimension between.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning opening 64 is arranged below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (the arrow D direction side), whereby the special winning device 13550 is viewed from the front left side. The flowing game ball can flow into the first winning opening 64.

Therefore, the game ball flowing into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the front right side (arrow R direction side) of the special winning device 13550 is easily brought into contact with the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c. The second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c are allowed to flow down along the extending direction so that they can be easily guided to the sub-path HK1 side. On the other hand, the game ball flowing into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the front left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 is less likely to collide with the first convex portion 13564b and the fourth convex portion 13571b. It becomes easy to be thrown to the sub-path HK1 as it is. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed into the special winning device 13550 can be changed.

In the present embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d (main path HK1 and sub-path). It is formed above (in the direction of arrow U) above the inflow port of the game ball with the SK6. Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main path SK1 can flow down to the sub-path HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls than the sub-path HK1 can flow down to the main path SK6.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other is adjusted by the shim member SI and is made non-parallel, and the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other is adjusted. The position of the game ball flowing down (the direction in which the game ball flows down) can be adjusted.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the angle of the nail struck on the front surface of the base plate 60 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is changed to adjust the direction in which the game ball is likely to flow down, the direction in which the game ball is likely to flow down inside the special winning device 13550. Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous before playing the game on the game machine, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the game machine.

Further, by simply changing the two directions (front-back direction (arrow FB direction)) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 in the opposite direction, the flow of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be made easier than the nail that can be adjusted in all directions with respect to the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60). As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed down in the direction intended by the adjuster.

The direction intended by the adjuster is, for example, the direction between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the secondary path HK1 side (arrow L direction side) on the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). A game ball that is made larger than the space between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 and flows down inside the special winning device 13550 flows down to the sub path HK1, or is on the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). ), The distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other is made larger than the distance between the opposite paths HK1 side (arrow L direction side) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570, and a special prize is awarded. A game ball flowing down the inside of the device 13550 flows down the main path SK6.

Further, with respect to the first path member 13560 arranged on the front side, the second path member 13570 arranged on the back side is moved in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) by sandwiching the shim member SI. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other. That is, since the second path member 13570 arranged on the far side from the player is moved in the front-rear direction, the first path member 13560 and the first path member 13560 are compared with the case where the first path member 13560 close to the player is displaced. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the distance between the two path members 13570 facing each other. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, the engaging member 14310 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 159. In the first embodiment, the case where the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed so as to project toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300 has been described. The operator 14315 in the 14th embodiment is formed so that the protruding tip surface is inclined toward the proximal end side. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 159 (a) is a rear view of the back case 300 according to the 14th embodiment, and FIG. 159 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the CLIXb-CLIXb line of FIG. 159 (a).

Similar to the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 14300 in the 14th embodiment is directed from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 302 to be erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

Further, the back case 14300 in the 14th embodiment is the engaging member 14310 arranged on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the back case 14300. It is mainly provided with a fixing member 320 which is arranged on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) and fixes the board box 100 (main control device 110).

As shown in FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 in the 14th embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 are extended in a direction parallel to each other. And the third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312.

In the first piece 14311, the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41 (a)). The engaging portion 316, which is formed as an engaging portion with and protrudes outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311, and two portions thereof. The recess 317 is recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 14311 from the substantially intermediate position of the engaging portion 316 of the rear case 300, and the bottom wall portion 301 side of the rear case 300 (rear side (arrow B direction)). A controller 14315, which projects toward the side)), is provided.

The operator 14315 is formed at the other end (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and its protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and at least. It is projected toward the back side of the back case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that can be grasped by an operator with a finger. As a result, the operator 14315 can be projected from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 14315) can be grasped and operated.

Further, the protruding tip surface of the operator 14315 is formed as an inclined surface 14315a that approaches the base end side of the operator 14315 toward the other side of the engaging portion 316 (the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311). As a result, when the operator operates the operator 14315 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction side), the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other. It is possible to reduce the force acting in the direction of releasing.

That is, the inclined surface 14315a can disperse the force with which the operator operates the operator 14315. As a result, it is possible to operate the operator 14315 from the back side of the back case 300 to make it difficult to disengage the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320. As a result, an operator who intends to replace the board box 100 illegally arranged on the fixing member 320 operates the operator 14315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

Further, the end portion of the inclined surface 14315a on the engaging portion 316 side is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back surface portion 301 of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. As a result, the hand of the operator who operates the operator 14315 for the purpose of disengaging the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315a. As a result, an operator who makes it difficult to operate the operator 14315 and tries to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 operates the operator 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300. It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back case 300.

Next, the engaging member 15310 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (a). In the first embodiment, the case where the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed so as to project toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300 has been described. The operator 15315 in the fifteenth embodiment is pivotally supported by the first piece 1531 of the engaging member 15310. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 according to the fifteenth embodiment. The cross section of FIG. 160 (a) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 159 (b).

The back case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment is the same as the back case 300 in the first embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 302 to be erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 5) is arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

Further, the back case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment includes an engaging member 15310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 15300. It is mainly provided with a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) that is arranged on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) and fixes the board box 100 (main control device 110).

As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 15311 and the first piece 15311 extending in a direction parallel to each other. The second piece 312 (see FIG. 41) and the third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 (see FIG. 41). (See FIG. 41).

In the first piece 15311, the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (FIG. It is formed as an engaging portion with 41 (a)), and is an engaging portion protruding outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. 316 (see FIG. 41) and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 15311 from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. It mainly includes an operator 15315 inserted through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300, and a bearing portion 15319 on which the operator 15315 is pivotally supported.

The bearing portion 15319 is projected from the first piece 15311 on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 15311 is connected. Further, the bearing portion 15319 is formed with a recess into which the columnar shaft member 15315c is inserted by inserting the operator 15315, which will be described later, in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction).

The operator 15315 is formed in a rod shape, and includes a through hole 15315b penetrating in the direction of gravity at the end on the first piece 15311 side, and a shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b.

Therefore, the operator 15315 is held in a state in which the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 15311 by being inserted into the recess of the bearing portion 15319. Further, the rotation shaft (shaft member 15315c) of the operator 15315 is arranged on the front side of the first piece 15311. As a result, the rotation of the operator 15315 in the state shown in FIG. 160 (a) in the upward direction (clockwise) can be regulated by being brought into contact with the other end of the first piece 1531. It is possible to allow leftward (counterclockwise) rotation.

Therefore, when the operator operates the operator 15315 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction side), the operator 15315 in the state shown in FIG. When rotating clockwise), the force acting in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to operate the operator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to make it difficult to disengage the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320. As a result, a player who intends to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 operates the operator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

Next, the engaging member 15310 according to the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (b). In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding operation of the engaging member 310 is performed by the actuator 315 has been described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the end portion of the first piece 16311 of the engaging member 16310 is operated. It is done in. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 according to the 16th embodiment. The cross section of FIG. 160 (b) corresponds to the cross section of FIG. 160 (a). Further, the back case 16300 in the 16th embodiment is the same as the back case 300 in the 1st embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 302 to be erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 5) is arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

Further, the back case 16300 in the 16th embodiment includes an engaging member 16310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 16300. It is mainly provided with a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) that is arranged on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) and fixes the board box 100 (main control device 110).

As shown in FIG. 160 (b), the engaging member 16310 according to the 16th embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 16311 and the first piece 16311 extending in a direction parallel to each other. The second piece 312 (see FIG. 41) and the third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 (see FIG. 41). (See FIG. 41). Further, the engaging member 16310 in the 16th embodiment can be slidably displaced by a finger inserted through the second opening 301d formed in the back case 300 from the back side.

In the first piece 16311, the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (FIG. The engaging portion 316 (see FIG. 41) is formed as an engaging portion with (see 41) and projects outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311. 41) and the recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 16311 from the substantially intermediate position of the two engaging portions 316. Be prepared.

As shown in FIG. 160 (b), in a state where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the other side of the first piece 16311 (the side in the L direction of the arrow). Is arranged horizontally outward with respect to the opening of the second opening 301d. Therefore, when the operator operates the engaging member 16310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction side), the engaging member 16310 is inserted through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300. It is possible to make it difficult to displace the engaging member 16310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320 with the finger. As a result, an operator who intends to replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 illegally operates the engaging member 16310 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

Next, the back case 17300 according to the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 161. In the first embodiment, the case where the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301d of the back case 300 has been described, but in the seventeenth embodiment, the second opening 301d of the back case 17300 has been described. The operator 315 protruding from the rear case is covered with a part of the rear case at a predetermined position. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

161 (a) is a rear view of the back case 17300 in the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 161 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 17300 in the CLXIb-CLXIb line of FIG. 161 (a).

As shown in FIG. 161 of the 17th embodiment, the rear case 17300 has a bottom wall portion 17301 having a substantially rectangular front view and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301 toward the front. And each of these wall portions 17301 and 302 forms a box shape in which one side (front side) is open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 17301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

Further, the rear case 17300 includes a protruding portion 301b projecting from two locations on the front side of the bottom wall portion 17301, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. A second opening 301d that opens at opposite positions and an lining portion 17301e that covers the back surface of the second opening 301d on the side of the first opening 301c (in the direction of the arrow R) are provided.

The lining portion 17301e is erected from the end of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). Further, the lining portion 17301e includes a bent portion 17301e1 in which the erected tip portion bends toward the inside of the opening of the second opening 301d in the rear view. As a result, the lining portion 17301e is formed in a box shape in which the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) and the opposite side (arrow L direction side) open.

Further, the standing distance of the lining portion 17301e (the distance from the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c to the front surface of the bent portion 17301e1) is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the operator 315 protruding from the bottom wall portion 17301c. .. Further, in the inverted portion 17301e, the dimension of the bent portion 17301e1 in the rear view in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be larger than the dimension in the left-right direction of the operator 315 in the rear view.

As a result, when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the operator 315 is inside the lining portion 17301e as shown in FIG. 161 (b). Is placed in. Therefore, when the operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction side), the operator 315 is grasped from the back side of the back case 17300. It can be made difficult. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being displaced in the direction in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged (in the direction of the arrow L). As a result, a worker (player) who tries to illegally replace the board box 100 arranged on the fixing member 320 operates the engaging member 310 from the back side of the back case 17300 to move the fixing member 320 to the back. It is possible to suppress the removal from the case 17300.

Next, the back case 18300 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging member 310 is slidably displaced in the linear direction (arrow LR direction) has been described, but the engaging member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment is relative to the back case 18300. It is rotationally displaced. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the rear case 18300 and the operation of the engaging member 18310 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. 162 (a) and 163 (a) are front views of the back case 18300 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 162 (b) and 163 (b) are rear views of the back case 18300. Note that FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b) show a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, and FIGS. 163 (a) and 163 (b) show the engaging member 18310. The state in which the engagement with the fixing member 18320 is disengaged is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the back case 18300 in the 18th embodiment is erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 18301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 18301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 18302, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 18301 and 18302. Further, the back case 18300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 18301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 18300 on the back side. It is provided with a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110).

A front view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 18301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is said that. Further, the bottom wall portion 18301 is located below the first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320 and the first opening 18301c (in the direction of arrow D), and is a projecting portion that projects toward the front side. 18301b and.

The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the engaged portion 18332 in the front view. As a result, after the accessory device (rotating unit 700) is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 can be arranged from the back side of the back case 18300 to the front side of the back case 18300. can.

The projecting portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports the engaging member 18310, which will be described later, and projects from the front surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 in a columnar shape. Further, a hole for screwing a screw is recessed in the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion 18301b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 18310 from coming out of the protruding portion 18301b by screwing a screw into the protruding portion 18301b while the engaging member 18310 is arranged in the rear case 18300.

The outer wall portion 18302 includes an opening 18302a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) on the side surface on the right side (arrow R direction side) in front view. The opening 18302a is formed on the rotation locus of the engaging member 18310, which will be described later. As a result, after the engaging member 18310 is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging member 18310 can be projected to the outside of the back case 18300 by rotating the engaging member 18310.

The fixing member 18320 is composed of an interposing member 18330 that engages with the engaging member 18310 described later, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposing member 18330.

The interposition member 18330 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and has a locking portion 18331 projecting from the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) and a rear case from the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side). An engaged portion 18332 that protrudes toward the 300 side and is formed in a frame shape, an insertion hole 333 that opens in a circular shape on the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface in the direction of arrow B) (see FIG. 39 (b)), and a back surface. It mainly includes a protrusion 334 protruding from the surface.

The locking portion 18331 is provided with an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 18301c described above. The protruding wall 18301c1 projecting into the bottom wall portion 18301 is engaged with the bottom wall portion 18301 by being inserted therethrough.

As a result, when the intermediate member 18330 (fixing member 18320) is arranged in the rear case 18300, the protruding wall 18301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 18331 of the intermediate member 18330 and the other side of the intermediate member 18330 (arrow L). The directional side) can be locked to the rear case 18300.

The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310, and the protrusion dimension toward the back case 18300 side (arrow F direction side) exceeds the engaging member 18310 arranged on the back case 18300. The distance dimension from the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the enclosed space to the front of the bottom wall portion 18301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engaging member 18310 to the front of the bottom wall portion 18301. Set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are arranged at overlapping positions in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The engaging member 18310 is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view, and is bent from one end of a second piece 18312 that is pivotally supported by a projecting portion 18301b of the rear case 18300 and the second piece 18312. It is composed of the first piece 18311 formed by the above.

The second piece 18312 is provided with a shaft support hole 18312a that is opened in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at an end opposite to the side on which the first piece 18311 is formed. The shaft support hole 18312a is a hole into which the projecting portion 18301b of the back case 18300 described above is inserted, whereby the engaging member 18310 can be arranged in a state of being pivotally supported inside the back case 18300.

The first piece 18311 extends in an arc shape about the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a described above. As a result, the displacement region of the first piece 18311 can be minimized when the engaging member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a. Further, the first piece 18311 has an engaging portion 18316 protruding from the shaft support hole 18312a on both sides in the radial direction at an end opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging portions 316 at the two locations. It is provided with a recess 18317 which is recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 18311 from a substantially intermediate position of the above.

The outer shape of the two engaging portions 18316 in front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape. Further, one engaging portion 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316 is directed toward the connecting portion side with the second piece 18312 from the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312, so that the first piece 18311 It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes outward in the radial direction of. The other engaging portion 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316 has a diameter of the first piece 18311 so as to go from the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion side with the second piece 18312. It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes inward in the direction.

The recess 18317 is formed by notching in the thickness direction of the first piece 18311, and from the end of the first piece 18311 on the side opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312, in the extending direction of the first piece 18311. It is recessed along the side toward the connecting side with the second piece 18312. Therefore, the end portion of the first piece 18311 is bifurcated. As a result, the end portion of the first piece 18311 on the side opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312 is made easier to elastically deform than the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging member 18310 is combined with the fixing member 18320. Can be easily engaged.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be described. As shown in FIG. 163, the interposing member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 are fastened and combined with screws inserted from the interposing member 18330 side before engaging with the engaging member 18310.

Further, the engaging member 18310 is arranged in a state of being pivotally supported by the projecting portion 18301b of the back case 18300 as described above, and the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is formed on the back case 18300. It is arranged so as to protrude from the opening 18302a.

The center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the rear case 18300 is located closer to the opening 18302a than the projecting portion 18301b of the rear case 18300, and gravity is applied when no external force is applied. A force is applied to the engaging member 18310 so that the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is rotated in the direction of protruding from the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300. As a result, when the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engaging member 18310 is projected to the outside of the rear case 18300, and the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged with each other. It is possible to prevent forgetting the match.

In the intervening member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 18320) in the fastened state, the protruding wall 18301c1 projecting from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposing member 18330. , The left side of the fixing member 18320 in the front view (the side in the direction of arrow L) is locked to the rear case 18300. In this case, the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320 is inserted inside the first opening 18301c, and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 faces the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310. It is arranged at the position where it is used.

Next, the operator who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320 attaches the engaging member 18310 (the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300 to the back surface. By pushing it inside the case 18300 (on the side in the direction of arrow R1) (see FIG. 163), the engaging member 18310 is rotated around the projecting portion 18301b.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 can be inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 18332. In this case, the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 is set to be larger than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged portion 18332, but the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end portion of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed inside the recess 18317, and the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 is set. The end portion of the first piece 18311 can be inserted inside the engaged portion 18332 so as to be smaller than the vertical opening size of the internal space of the engaging portion 18332.

Further, since the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted inside the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 is engaged in the engaged state. It is possible to prevent the joint member 18310 from being operated from the outside of the rear case 18300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being illegally operated and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an illegal board.

Next, the disengagement of the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the first opening 18301c is opened in a substantially L-shape in front view, and is recessed 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in an engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. However, it can be operated from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 1300 via the first opening 18301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 to the recessed side of the recess 18317 with a special tool or the like, the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 are engaged with each other. The match is released. In the disengaged state, the engaging member 18310 is displaced in the direction of pulling out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332 (in the direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is restored. , The engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 can be released.

The gap between the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 and the first opening 18301c is preferably formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person who removes the fixing member 18320 from the back case 300 can be made impossible to insert, and a special tool can be inserted. As a result, the board box 100 (main control device 110) can be replaced only by an operator having a dedicated tool, and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced by an unauthorized board box 100.

Next, a case where the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the fixing member 18320 will be described with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, and FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 164 (a) and FIG. 164 (b), the state in which the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the engaged portion 18332 is shown. Further, in FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b), a state in which a piece on the upper side of the outer frame 11 formed in a frame shape in a front view is removed is shown.

As described above, when the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 are incompletely engaged, the engaging member 18310 can be projected to the outside of the back case 18300 by gravity. In this case, the distance dimension LR1 from the end of the engaging member 18310 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13 to the right end (arrow R direction side) of the rear case 18300 (FIG. 164 (a)). (See) is set to be larger than the inner left-right direction dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164 (b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 on which the game board 13 is arranged. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged and the game board 13 is to be inserted inside the outer frame 11, the back side of the engaging member 18310 hits the front surface of the outer frame 11. Can be touched. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged, the game board 13 is suppressed from being arranged on the outer frame 11, and the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged with each other. You can suppress forgetting.

Next, the engaging member 19310 according to the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. In the 18th embodiment, the engaging member 18310 is arranged inside the outer frame 11 to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being illegally operated, but in the 19th embodiment, the engaging member 19310 is released. The rotation to is restricted to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being tampered with. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engaging member 19310 according to the 19th embodiment. FIG. 166 (a) is a front view of the rear case 18300, and FIG. 166 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one-way 19350 in the CLXVIb-CLXVIb line of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 165, the engaging member 19310 in the 19th embodiment is formed in a substantially L-shape in front view, and has a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis with respect to the back case 19300, and a second piece thereof. It is composed of a first piece 18311 formed by bending from one end of 19312.

The second piece 19312 is provided with a fitting hole 19312b that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end opposite to the side on which the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which the one-way 19350 described later is fitted, and is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer ring 19351 of the one-way 19350.

The one-way 19350 includes an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface formed on an outer peripheral surface, an outer ring 19351 formed in an annular shape surrounding the outer ring 19352, and a plurality of outer rings 19351 and inner rings 19352 arranged between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352. A spring 19353 and a roller 19354 are provided (see FIG. 166 (b)), and when the inner ring 19352 tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the outer ring 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 becomes high, which becomes a resistance. This is a cam-type clutch that transmits power to the outer ring and when the inner ring rotates in the other direction with respect to the outer ring 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 becomes low and slips to disconnect the power transmission. A detailed description of the one-way 19350 will be described later.

Further, the operator 19360 is inserted in the center of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350. The operator 19360 has an operation unit 19361 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the rear case 19300, and an insertion portion 19362 projecting from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation unit 19361. Mainly prepare.

The operation unit 19361 is a portion in which the operator operates the operator 19360 from the back side of the rear case 19300, is formed in a circular shape, and its outer shape is formed larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 19362, which will be described later, is inserted. .. Thereby, when the operator 19360 is arranged from the back side of the back case 19300, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 19361 from coming out to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 19300.

The insertion portion 19362 is formed in a columnar shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 19361, and is projected on the front side (arrow F direction side). Further, the insertion portion 19362 includes a protruding wall 19362a that protrudes in the radial direction on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The protrusion 19362a is an engaging portion that prevents the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 from idling with respect to the insertion portion 19362, and is inserted into the recess 19352a formed in the inner ring 19352. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotational force acting on the operator 19360 from being non-transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

Further, a concave portion recessed in a circular shape in the front view is formed on the protruding tip surface of the insertion portion 19362, and by screwing a screw into the concave portion from the front side to the back side, the one-way 19350 The operator 19360 can be connected to the device.

Next, the arrangement state of the back case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 will be described with reference to FIG. 166. The rear case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 toward the front, and the respective wall portions 19301 and 302. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. Further, the back case 19300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 19301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the back side of the back case 19300. It is provided with a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110).

A front view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 19301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 19301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is said that. Further, the bottom wall portion 19301 is located below the first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320 and the first opening 18301c (in the direction of arrow D), and opens in the front-rear direction and is inside. Is provided with an opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 19362 of the operator 19360 described above is inserted.

In the above-mentioned engaging member 19310, after the engaging member 19310 in a state where the one-way 19350 is introspected inside the fitting hole 19312b is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 10301, the operator 19360 is displayed from the back side of the back case 19300. The insertion portion 19362 is inserted into the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 through the opening of the rear case 19300, so that the insertion portion 19362 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 19301.

Next, the operation of the one-way 19350 will be described. As described above, the one-way 19350 is switched between a case where power transmission to the outer ring 19351 is permitted and a case where power transmission is cut off in the rotation direction of the inner ring 19352 in one direction and the other direction.

First, a case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring will be described. As shown in FIG. 166 (b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (arrow LK direction (see FIG. 166 (b))), between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. The roller 19354 is sandwiched, and the contact of the roller 19354 becomes a resistance, and the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring 19351. In this case, the rotation direction in one direction is set to the direction in which the engaging member 19310 is engaged with the fixing member 18320.

Next, a case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is cut off will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (arrow RK direction (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 19354 is displaced inward in the radial direction due to the resistance of contact with the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. As a result, the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354 becomes low, and the roller 19354 slides against the outer ring 19351 to cut off power transmission. In this case, the rotation direction in the other direction is set to the direction in which the engaging member 19310 is disengaged from the fixing member 18320.

Thereby, with the engaging member 19310 disposed on the back case 19300, the operator 19360 can be rotated to engage the engaging member 19310 with the fixing member 18320. Further, it is regulated that the operator 19360 is rotated from the state where the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged to release the engagement between the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 19310 (operator 19360) from being illegally operated and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an illegal board.

Next, the engaging member 20310 according to the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169. In the first embodiment, the case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted into the back base 720 of the rotating unit 700 has been described, but in the twentieth embodiment, the engaging member 20310 is the fixing member 320. When engaged with, the movement of the engaging member 20310 is restricted by being engaged with the engaging portion 20724a formed on the back base 20720 of the rotating unit 20700. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the engaging member 20310 and the rotating unit 20700 according to the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 20300 and the rotating unit 20700 according to the twentieth embodiment. 168 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 20310, and FIG. 168 (b) is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310.

The back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is the same as the back case 300 in the first embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 302 to be erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 5) is arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

Further, the back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment includes an engaging member 20310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 20300. It is mainly provided with a fixing member 320 which is arranged on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) and fixes the board box 100 (main control device 110). Further, in the back case 20300 according to the twentieth embodiment, the rotating unit 20700 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 20310 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 20300 in the 20th embodiment has a crank shape in the front view. The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312, and the ends of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312, which are formed in the same direction and extend in a direction parallel to each other, are separated from each other by the first piece 311 and the second piece. It is composed of a third piece 313 connected in a direction orthogonal to the extension direction of 20312.

The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are formed with sliding grooves 314 having long holes that are long in the extending direction, respectively, so that the engaging member 20310 can be the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312. Is slidable in the extension direction (arrow LR direction).

Further, the second piece 20312 includes a recess 20312c recessed in a side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. The recess 20312c is a recess into which the tip of the engaging portion 20724a of the back base 20720 of the rotating unit 20700, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the engaging portion 20724a.

More specifically, the recess 20312c has an engaging member having a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168 (a)) up to the end on the side opposite to the connecting side (arrow L direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313. The inside of the sliding groove 314 of the 20310 is set to be substantially the same as the dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168 (b)) in which the projecting portion 301b can slide. Further, the recess 20312c is recessed in a triangle having a right angle in front view, and the right-angled portion is set on the connecting side (arrow R direction side) of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313.

The rotating unit 20700 includes a front view rectangular rear base 20720 arranged on the right side of the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 (arranged in the R direction of the arrow, and the front surface of the rear base 20720). A rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) arranged on the side (arrow F direction side) is provided, and the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced via a light-transmitting center frame 86 arranged on the game board 13. Can be visually recognized by the player.

The back base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball cradle 710 and the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back surface side of the ball cradle 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back base 20720 includes an erection wall 20724 erected from the back.

The erection wall 20724 extends in a shape that surrounds the outer edge of the engaging member 20310 arranged in the back case 20300. Further, the erection wall 20724 is formed at a position facing the recess 20312c of the engaging member 20310, and includes an engaging portion 20724a at which the tip is inserted inside the recess 20312c.

The engaging portion 20724a is projected from the erection wall 20724 in the direction in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 (arrow R direction), and is erected in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. It is formed with a predetermined gap from the wall 20724. As a result, the rigidity of the engaging portion 20724a can be lowered, and the engaging portion 20724a can be easily elastically deformed. Further, it is possible to secure a region where the engaging portion 20724a can be elastically deformed by the amount of the gap between the erection wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

Further, the engaging portion 20724a is provided with a bent portion 20724a1 that bends toward the engaging member 20310 at the protruding tip portion, and the front view shape of the bent portion 20724a1 is formed into a triangular shape having substantially the same shape as the recess 20312c described above. Will be done. As a result, in the engaging member 20310, the bent portion 20724a1 is arranged inside the recess 20312c of the engaging member 20310 before engaging with the fixing member 320. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the engaging member 20310 to slide in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 168 (b)).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from vibrating with respect to the back case 20300 due to a force such as vibration or shaking and moving in the engaging direction (arrow R direction) with the fixing member 320. Therefore, before the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back case 20300, the position of the engaging member 20310 is displaced, and when the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back case 20300, the engaged portion of the fixing member 320 is engaged. It is possible to prevent the 332 from coming into contact with the engaging member 20310. In other words, when the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back case 20300, the engaging member 20310 is located in the displacement region when the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 167) of the fixing member 320 is arranged. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is not necessary to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengaging the fixing member 320, so that the workability when engaging the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engaging member 20310 and the rotating unit 20700 in a state where the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged will be described. FIG. 169 (a) is a rear view of the rotating unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310, and FIG. 169 (b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. In addition, in FIG. 169 (a) and FIG. 169 (b), the state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged with each other is shown. Further, in FIG. 169 (b), a part of the engaging member 20310 and the outer shape of the erection wall 20724 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 169, the operator 315 is operated from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 20300, and the engaging member 20310 is on the left side (arrow L) of the back case 20300 with respect to the bottom wall portion 301. When the rear case 20300 is displaced to the right side (arrow R direction side) with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 from the state of being arranged on the direction side), it is arranged inside the recess 20312c of the engaging member 20310. The bent portion 20724a1 is pushed out into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

Here, as described above, the recess 20312c has a distance dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168 (a)) to the end of the second piece 20312 on the side opposite to the connecting side with the third piece 313 (the side in the L direction of the arrow). However, since the inside of the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 20310 is set to be substantially the same as the dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168 (b)) in which the projecting portion 301b can slide, the engaging member 20310 is set to the fixing member 320. When displaced to a position where it engages with, the end of the engaging member 20310 on the side opposite to the connecting side (arrow L direction side) with the third piece 313 of the second piece 20312 becomes the bending portion 20724a1 and the engaging member. It is arranged at a position adjacent to the displacement direction of 20310 (direction of arrow LR). As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 20310 from being illicitly displaced in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member 320 (arrow L direction).

As in the first embodiment, the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 of the engaging member 20310 by hooking (engaging) the engaging portion 316 on the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320. Displacement in the direction of disengagement is regulated. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the back case 300, the engaging portion 332 and the engaging portion 316 are engaged with each other via the first opening 301c. There was a risk of being released illegally.

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member 320 is opposite to that of the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 20310 that engages with the fixing member 320. Since the side end can be brought into contact with the bent portion 20724a1 to regulate, an illegal object is inserted from the first opening 301c, and the engagement between the end of the engaging member 20310 and the bent portion 20724a1 is released. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally disengaged and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board. ..

The fixing member 320 and the engaging member 20310 are formed by removing the rotating unit 20700 arranged inside the back case 20300 (bottom wall portion 301) from the back case 20300, and then removing the end portion and the bent portion of the engaging member 20310. After disengaging the engagement member 20724a1, the end portion of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 20310 is elastically deformed, and the end portion of the engagement member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332 to bring the two together. Can be disengaged.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 20700 from the front side of the back case 20300, so that the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is illegally released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board.

Further, since the engaging member 20310 is formed by bending the shape in the front view into a crank shape as described above, an illegal object such as a wire or a wire inserted from the first piece 311 side is linearly second. It is possible to restrict the feeding to the end of the piece 20312. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal object inserted from the first piece 311 side from being accurately sent to the engaging portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally disengaged and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board. ..

Next, the rotating unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. In the first embodiment, the case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted into the back base 720 of the rotating unit 700 has been described, but in the 21st embodiment, the back base 21720 of the rotating unit 21700 has been described. By inserting the first piece 311 into the insertion portion 21724b formed, the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the engaging member 310 and the rotating unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 300 and the rotating unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment. 171 (a) is a rear view of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310, and FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotating unit 21700 in the CLXXIb-CLXXIb line of FIG. 171 (a).

The back case 21300 in the 21st embodiment is the same as the back case 300 in the 1st embodiment, from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 302 to be erected, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

Further, the back case 21300 in the 21st embodiment is the engaging member 310 arranged on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side) formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the back case 21300. It is mainly provided with a fixing member 320 which is arranged on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) and fixes the board box 100 (main control device 110). Further, in the back case 21300 according to the 21st embodiment, the rotating unit 21700 is arranged in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the rotating unit 21700 according to the 21st embodiment is located on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. ), And a rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) arranged on the front side of the rear base 21720, which has a rectangular shape for front view, and is arranged on the game board 13. The player can visually recognize the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via the transparent center frame 86.

The back base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball cradle 710 and the back side of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back side of the ball cradle 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back surface base 21720 includes an erection wall 21724 erected on the back surface thereof.

The erection wall 21724 is extended so as to surround the outer edge of the engaging member 310 in the state of being arranged in the back case 300. Further, the erection wall 21724 is a state in which the engaging member 310 is located at the left end (side in the direction of the arrow L) with respect to the back case 300 (a state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged). ), The insertion portion 21724b is provided so as to project toward the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 (in the direction of the arrow L).

The insertion portion 21724b extends from the upright wall 21724 in a direction parallel to the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) of the engaging member 310, and with the engaging member 310 in a state of being engaged with the fixing member 320. The dimensions are set so as to overlap in the direction of gravity (arrow UB direction). Further, a bent portion 21724b1 that bends to the back surface side (engaging member 310 side) is formed at the tip portion of the insertion portion 21724b, and the bent tip portion of the bent portion 21742b1 is in the front-rear direction (arrow F-) of the pachinko machine 10. In the B direction), the length is set so as to overlap with the engaging member 310.

Further, the width dimension of the insertion portion 21742b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is set to be smaller than the width dimension of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the insertion portion 21724b is in a state in which the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the recess 317 while the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the recess of the recess 317 from the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally disengaged and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 will be described. 172 (a) and 173 (a) are rear views of the rotating unit 21700 and the engaging member 310. 172 (b) and 173 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rear case 300 and the rotating unit 21700. In addition, in FIG. 172 (a) and FIG. 172 (b), the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged is shown, and in FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b), the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged. The state in which the joining member 310 is being engaged with the fixing member 320 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, in the engaging member 310, the end of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 from the state in which the engaging member 310 is disengaged from the fixing member 320. When inserted into the internal space of the portion 332, the end portion of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317. As a result, the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is made smaller than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the insertion portion 21724b.

Further, when the engaging portion 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged portion 332 (in the case of the position shown in FIG. 173 (a)), the end portion of the first piece 311 is a protruding tip portion of the insertion portion 21724b. It is placed in a position that exceeds it. In other words, the length dimension of the engaging portion 316 in the left-right direction is set to be larger than the interfacing dimension from the protruding tip portion of the insertion portion 21724b to the end portion of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Therefore, when the engaging portion 316 is extruded from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the end portion of the engaging member 310 on the first piece 311 side can be brought into contact with the bent portion 21724b1 of the inserting portion 21724b. .. In this case, the tip of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out to the front side (arrow F direction side) along the inclined surface of the bent portion 21724b1. As a result, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging portion 316 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, as described above, the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311 is increased. Also, since the width dimension of the insertion portion 21724b in the vertical direction is increased, the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the recess 317.

Therefore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 from being elastically deformed inside the recess of the recess 317. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally disengaged and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an illegal board. ..

The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are the end portion of the engaging member 310 and the back case by removing the rotating unit 21700 arranged inside the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) from the back case 21300. After disengaging the engagement member 310, the end portion of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 is elastically deformed, and the end portion of the engagement member 310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332 to obtain both of them. The engagement can be disengaged.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotating unit 21700 from the front side of the back case 21300, so that the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other in the back case 21300. It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being illegally released from the back side and being replaced with an illegal board.

Next, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 has been described, but in the 22nd embodiment, the engaging portion 22310 is recessed. The bent portion 22332a1 formed in the fixing member 22320 is engaged with the concave portion 22311a to be formed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The configurations of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176 (a). FIG. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. 175 (a) and 175 (b) are front views of the rear case 22300. FIG. 176 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 22300 in the CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa line of FIG. 175 (b). Note that FIG. 175 (a) shows a state in which the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are before engagement, and FIG. 175 (b) shows a state in which the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176 (a), the rear case 22300 according to the 22nd embodiment is directed from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 302 to be erected, and each of the wall portions 301 and 302 forms a box shape in which one side is open. Further, the back case 22300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the engaging member 22310 and the back side of the bottom wall portion 301. It is provided with a fixing member 22320 for fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110).

The engaging member 22310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and extends in a direction parallel to each other, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312, and the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312. It is composed of a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312.

Further, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 are formed with sliding grooves 314 having long holes long in the extending direction, respectively, whereby the engaging member 22310 can be the first piece 22311 and the second piece. The piece 312 is slidable in the extending direction (arrow LR direction).

The first piece 22311 includes a recess 22311a that is recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction side) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end opposite to the side to which the third piece 313 is connected. ..

The recess 22311a is a portion into which the bent portion 22332a1 formed in the fixing member 22320, which will be described later, is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. When the end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) of the piece 22311 is housed in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the fixing member 22320, it is formed at a position facing the 22332a of the fixing member 22320.

Further, the internal shape of the recess 22311a has a substantially right-angled triangular cross section, the right-angled portion is set on the end side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311, and the recessed bottom surface is the first. It is formed as an inclined surface that becomes deeper toward the back surface side (direction of arrow B) toward the end side of one piece 22311.

The fixing member 22320 is composed of an interposing member 22330 that engages with the engaging member 22310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the back surface side of the interposing member 22330.

The interposition member 22330 is formed in a box shape in which the front side (arrow F direction side) is open, and the locking portion 331 projecting to the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction side). The engaged portion 22332 that protrudes from the side surface of the rear case 22300 to the bottom wall portion 301 side (back surface side (arrow B direction side)) and is formed in a frame shape, and the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface on the arrow B direction side). It mainly includes an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39 (b)) that opens in a circular shape and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface.

The engaged portion 22332 is a portion into which an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 is inserted into the enclosed internal space, and the inner edge shape thereof is the first. It is set slightly larger than the outer shape of the piece 22311. Further, the engaged portion 22332 is formed in a frame shape from one side on the front side (arrow F direction side) in the insertion direction (arrow R direction side) of the engaging member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332. A protruding portion 22332a is provided.

The protrusion 22332a is provided with a bent portion 22332a1 that bends toward the front side (arrow F direction side) at the end of the tip, and the bent portion 22332a1 is inserted into the recess 22311a of the engaging member 22310 described above to engage. The joining member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged with each other. That is, the bent portion 22332a1 is formed at a position facing the recess 22311a in a state where the engaging member 22310 is inserted into the engaged portion 22332.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side with the engaging member 22310 sandwiched with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 22300. Will be done. Therefore, since the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301, an illegal member such as a wire or a wire can be separated from the first opening 301c. Is inserted, and it is possible to prevent the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 from being illegally disengaged.

Further, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be arranged between the bottom wall portion 301 and the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, the first piece 22311 formed on the bottom wall portion 301 is formed. 1 It is possible to prevent a wire, a wire, or the like illegally inserted from an opening such as the opening 301c from reaching the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 linearly. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal member (wire, wire, etc.) from being inserted through the opening of the bottom wall portion 301 and illegally disengaging the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 22332a is projected in the direction of inserting the engaging member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged portion 22332. Therefore, the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320. As a result, when an illegal member such as a wire or a wire is inserted from the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301, the insertion direction of the illegal member that reaches the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is set. It can be tilted diagonally with respect to the front surface of the bottom wall portion 301. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the force in the direction of disengaging the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 to be transmitted from the tip of the fraudulent member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illegal member from being inserted through the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301 and illegally disengaging the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Next, the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (b). In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the protrusion 22332a for engaging the engaging member 22310 is projected in the direction of inserting the engaging member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332 has been described. However, in the 23rd embodiment, the protrusion 22332a is provided. The protrusion 23332a is projected in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the engaged portion 23332 of the engaging member 23310. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 23300 according to the 23rd embodiment. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 176 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 176 (a). Further, as described above, in the 23rd embodiment, since the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the 22nd embodiment are only different in the engaging position, the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are engaged with each other. Since the parts other than the parts are the same as those of the 22nd embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The back case 22300 according to the 23rd embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 23301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 23301 toward the front. Each wall portion 23301 and 302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a (see FIG. 5) is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 5) is arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 through the opening 301a. 2) is visible.

Further, the back case 23300 in the 23rd embodiment includes an engaging member 23310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 23301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 23300. A fixing member 23320, which is arranged on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) and fixes the board box 100 (main control device 110), is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 176 (b), in the 23rd embodiment, the protruding direction of the protrusion 23332a protruding from the engaged portion 23332 as described above is the protrusion 22332a of the 22nd embodiment (FIG. 176 (a). ) Is set in the opposite direction (arrow L direction), and a bent portion 23332a1 that bends toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) is formed at the protruding tip of the protruding portion 23332a.

The engaging member 23310 is formed with a rectangular opening 23310b larger than the outer shape of the bent portion 23332a1 at a position facing the bent portion 23332a1. As a result, when the engaging member 23310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the bent portion 23332a1 is inserted inside the opening 23310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are brought together. Engage.

Further, in the bottom wall portion 23301 of the back case 23300 in the 23rd embodiment, a third opening portion 23301e is formed at a position facing the fixing member 23320. With the third opening 23301e, the operator can release the engaging portion between the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the back side of the bottom wall portion 23301. As a result, the work of removing the fixing member 23320 from the back case 23300 can be simplified.

Next, the back case 24300 according to the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. In the 18th embodiment, when the fixing member 18320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 18301, the case where the fixing member 18320 and the engaging member 18310 are disengaged has been described. However, in the 24th embodiment, the fixing member 24320 has been described. Is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301, the insertion portion of the engaging member 24310 into the fixing member 24320 is cut. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the rear case 24300 according to the 24th embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 24300 in the CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb line of FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 24300 in line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII of FIG. 177 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the rear case 24300 according to the 24th embodiment is erected from the outer edges of the bottom wall portion 24301 having a substantially rectangular shape in front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 302 to be formed, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 24301 and 302. Further, the back case 24300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the engaging member 24310 and the back side of the bottom wall portion 24301. It is provided with a fixing member 24320 for fixing the board box 100 (main control device 110).

A front view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 24301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 24301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible. Further, the bottom wall portion 24301 is located on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening 24301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 24320 and the first opening 24301c, and is located in the front-rear direction (arrow F-). It is provided with an opening (not shown) that opens in the B direction) and into which the insertion portion 24362 of the operator 24360, which will be described later, is inserted.

The engaging member 24310 mainly includes a second piece 24312 formed in a T shape in front view, and a first piece 24311 bent from an end portion of the second piece 24312 and extending in an arc shape. .. The second piece 24312 is provided with a through hole 24312d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a connecting portion of two orthogonal extension portions, and the distance from the through hole 24312d to the outside of the extension portion of the second piece 24312 is different. It is set to be almost the same.

The through hole 24312d is a portion into which the insertion portion 24362 of the operator 24360, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. As a result, the operator 24360 is rotationally operated, so that the engaging member 24310 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 24312d.

The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centered on the through hole 24312d, and projects from each end of the second piece 24312 in a direction of rotation (rotation to the left in the front view). Further, each first piece 24311 has an engaging portion 24316 protruding on both sides in the radial direction about the axis of the through hole 24312d at the protruding tip portion, and the protruding tip surface on the connecting side with the second piece 24312. A recess 24317, which is recessed toward the center, is provided.

The engaging portion 24316 is a portion to be engaged with the fixing member 24320 described later, and the protruding tip portion (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) of the first piece 24311 is elastically deformed by the recess 24317 to form the fixing member 24320. It can be engaged with the engaged portion 24332 formed in. A detailed description of the shapes of the engaging portion 24316 and the recess 24317 will be described later.

The operator 24360 is an operating member that transmits the operation from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to the engaging member 24310 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301. It includes an operation portion 24361 formed in a columnar shape and an insertion portion 24362 protruding coaxially with the operation portion 24361. The operation portion 24361 is formed in the bottom wall portion 24301, and the outer diameter is set to a dimension larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the entire operator 24360 from being displaced toward the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301.

The insertion portion 24362 is a portion to be inserted into the through hole 24312d of the engaging member 24310 as described above, whereby the rotational force input from the operating portion 24361 can be transmitted to the engaging member 24310.

The fixing member 24320 is composed of an intermediate member 24330 that engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 24310, and a shaft support member 340 arranged on the back surface side of the intermediate member 24330.

The interposition member 24330 is formed in a box shape in which the front side (arrow F direction side) is open. Further, the interposition member 24330 includes a housing portion 24335 which is formed in a box shape so as to project from the front and the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D) is open. The accommodating portion 24335 is a portion into which the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311) is inserted, and the lower open portion is the displacement of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 described above. It is placed on the trajectory. As a result, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated to accommodate the end portion of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335.

Further, the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is formed to be larger than the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 at one location. As a result, when the engaging member 24310 is cut as described later, the cut portion of the engaging member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335. In the present embodiment, the size of the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is set to be substantially three times the size of the engaging portion (tip portion of the first piece 24311) of the engaging member 24310, and the inside of the accommodating portion 24335. At least three or more engaging members 24310 can be accommodated in the space.

As shown in FIG. 178, the accommodating portion 24335 is opened on the lower side, and the stepped portion 24335a is projected from the opening portion in a stepped manner, and the engaging member 24310 is accommodated inside the accommodating portion 24335 in the stepped portion 24335a. The engaging portion 24316 of the above is engaged. As a result, when the engaging member 24310 is rotated, the tip end portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted inside the accommodating portion 24335, and the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 can be engaged with each other.

Further, in this case, the recessed depth SH3 of the recess 24317 (see FIG. 178) is the distance from the end of the first piece 24311 in the state of being accommodated and engaged in the accommodating portion 24335 to the lower end of the accommodating portion 24335. It is set smaller than the dimension SH4. Therefore, the recess 24317 formed in the engaged first piece 24311 is in a state of being accommodated inside the accommodating portion 24335. As a result, it is possible to prevent the end portion of the first piece 24311 from being elastically deformed and disengaged from the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320.

Therefore, in the 24th embodiment, the fixing member 24320 can be removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 by cutting the first piece 24311 protruding from the accommodating portion 24335 of the first piece 24331 inserted inside the accommodating portion 24335. can.

In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the accommodating portion 24335 to the tip end portion of the first piece 24311 is set to be larger than the above-mentioned distance dimension SH4. As a result, the cut portion of the first piece 24331 can be moved above the accommodating portion 24335, and another first piece 24311 is inserted from the open side (arrow F direction side) of the accommodating portion 24335 to form the step portion 24335a. Can be engaged with.

Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 is determined by the number of the remaining first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 or the number of the cut first pieces 24331 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335. be able to. As a result, when the fixing member 24320 is illegally removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 and the board box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an illegal board, the engaging member 24310 The number of the remaining first piece 24311 or the number of the cut first piece 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335 can make the operator recognize that the fixing member 24320 has been illegally removed.

Further, as described above, the engaging member 24310 utilizes the region on the side where the second piece 24312 is formed in a T shape in front view and the first piece 24311 is not formed (upper side of the T shape). The first piece 24311 can be inserted into the fixing member 24320 by rotating the engaging member 24310. Further, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 is made rotatable by using the cut region of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 is used as the fixing member 24320. Can be inserted. Thereby, the order of being accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335 of the first piece 24311 can be determined. Therefore, the operator can visually check the position of the uncut first piece 24311 and determine whether the fixing member 24320 is illegally released, so that the number of the first piece 24311 can be determined. It is possible to prevent the worker from overlooking the trace of fraud than when the worker counts.

Next, the game board 25013 according to the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 is adhered to the main body portion 151 has been described, but in the 25th embodiment, the decorative member 154 is adhered to the front side of the base plate 60. Will be done. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

179 (a) and 179 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 25013 according to the 25th embodiment. Note that FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional views of FIG. Further, in FIG. 179 (b), a state in which the general winning opening unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60 is shown.

The game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment. The game board 25013 is a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a base plate 60 thereof. The center frame 86 is provided in the opening portion formed in the above. In addition, the game board 25013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. Further, in the 25th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 25150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base plate 60.

As shown in FIG. 179, the general winning opening unit 25150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the 25th embodiment has a main body portion 151 arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60. , A first erection part 152 erected at the end of the main body 151, and a second erection part erected from the front of the main body 141 and one end connected to the first erection 152. It mainly includes 153, a decorative member 25154 arranged on the back side of the main body 151, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed on the main body 151.

The decorative member 25154 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting material, and is decorated with a pattern or characters (pictures) connected to the decorative member 60c arranged on the front side of the base plate 60. Further, the shape of the outer edge of the decorative member 25154 is formed to be slightly smaller than the shape of the inner edge of the recess 151b formed in the main body portion 151.

Further, the decorative member 25154 is provided with an adhesive tape 25154a to be adhered to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) at the end portion of the back surface of the decorative member 25154. As a result, the decorative member 25154 can be arranged by adhering to the base plate 60. Therefore, when the decorative member 25154 is arranged on the base plate 60, the operator can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front surface of the base plate 60 while visually recognizing the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to easily align the decorative positions of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 from being displaced from each other, and to give the player the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration. It can be made easy to see.

Further, since the decorative member 25154 is directly attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c), the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c are in the front-rear direction as compared with the case where the decoration is applied to the front side of the main body portion 151. The arrangement in (arrow FB direction) can be brought closer. As a result, it is possible to suppress a large displacement of the decoration of each of the decorative members 25154, 60c when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 25154 from an angle. As a result, the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily made visible to the player as one decoration.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, the concave dimension X1 of the concave portion 151b of the main body portion 151 is set to be smaller than the width dimension X2 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in which the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a are combined. Will be done. As a result, when the main body portion 151 is arranged from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 25154, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 25154 from coming into contact with the concave bottom surface 151b2 of the recess 151b. can.

Therefore, the back surface portion 151d forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recess 151b can be brought into contact with the front surface of the base plate 60, and a gap is formed between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60, making it difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60.

Next, the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 180. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the 26th embodiment, it is formed at the end of the main body 26151. The inclined surface 26151a is formed in an arcuate cross section that bulges outward. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

180 (a) and 180 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 26013 according to the 26th embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 180 (a) and 180 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 180A, when the player visually recognizes the game board 26013 from a position higher than usual (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). The line of sight is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line, and in FIG. The line of sight of is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

The game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 26013 is a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a base plate 60 thereof. A center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening portion formed in. In addition, the game board 26013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. Further, in the 26th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 26150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 180, the general winning opening unit 26150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment is a plate-shaped main body 26151 along the front surface of the base plate 60 and its main body 26151. A decorative member 154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body 26151 is provided.

The main body 26151 is made of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of the decorative member 154 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the main body portion 26151 has an inclined surface 26151a whose end portion in front view is inclined toward the back surface side and which bulges in an arcuate cross section, and a recess which is recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 26151 toward the front surface side. 151b and the like are mainly provided.

The inclined surface 26151a is set so that the inclination angle θ1 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the virtual line IL1 connecting the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body 26151 and the end on the back side is smaller than 45 degrees. Will be done. As a result, the incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body 26151 is incident on the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is larger than that when the inclination angle θ1 is set to be larger than 45 degrees. .. Therefore, when the light is emitted to the outside of the main body 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 from a position higher than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily visually recognized from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the positions of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c in the front-rear direction. Can be combined to make it easier to see as a decoration of 1. In this embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 26151a is formed in the shape of an arc-shaped cross section that bulges outward, the main body portion 26151 is moved in the horizontal direction toward the center side (lower side in FIG. 180 (a)) of the main body portion 26151. The angle of incidence is increased when the light traveling toward the surface is incident on the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a. Therefore, as the direction toward the center side of the main body portion 26151 (lower side in FIG. 180 (a)), the incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body portion 26151 is incident on the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. NS.

Therefore, the player is below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) through which the player passes through the inclined surface 26151a and the intermediate position between the connection point with the front surface surface and the rear end portion of the main body portion 26151. When the decoration on the side is visually recognized, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body 26151 can be easily brought closer to the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the base plate 60.

Further, the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b has a horizontal line HR1 whose end position passes through an intermediate position between a connecting point with a flat surface on the front side and an end portion on the back side of the main body portion 26151. It is set below (see FIG. 180A) and on the back side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) is visually recognized by the player through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body 26151. Can be easily brought closer to the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the base plate 60.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180A, even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than usual on the game board 26013, the base plate 60 is passed through the inclined surface 26151a. The decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 can be combined to make it easier for the player to see. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily visually recognized as one decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 26013, the main body due to the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a. Since the incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the portion 26151 is incident on the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is close to a right angle, it is possible to make it difficult to refract the light emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151. Therefore, the direction of the player's line of sight is suppressed from bending when passing through the inclined surface 26151a, and the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 are displaced in the front-rear direction. Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily visually recognized as one decoration.

Next, the game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the 27th embodiment, the end of the main body 26151 is formed. The inclined surface 27151a is formed in an arcuate cross section recessed inward of the main body 27151. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

181 (a) and 181 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 27013 according to the 27th embodiment. In addition, FIG. 181 (a) and FIG. 181 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 181 (a), when the player visually recognizes the game board 27013 from a position higher than usual (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the gravity direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). The line of sight is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 181 (b), when the player visually recognizes the game board 27013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having a height substantially equal to the position substantially intermediate in the gravity direction of the game board 27013). The line of sight of is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

The game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 27013 is a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and the base plate 60 thereof. A center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening portion formed in. In addition, the game board 27013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. Further, in the 27th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 27150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 181, the general winning opening unit 27150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 27013 in the 27th embodiment is a plate-shaped main body 27151 along the front surface of the base plate 60 and its main body 27151. A decorative member 154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body 27151 is provided.

The main body 27151 is made of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of the decorative member 154 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the main body 27151 has an inclined surface 27151a having an arcuate cross section in which the end portion in front view is inclined toward the back side and is recessed toward the inside of the main body 27151, and the main body 27151 from the back to the front side. It is mainly provided with a recess 151b which is recessed toward the surface.

The inclined surface 27151a is set so that the inclination angle θ2 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the virtual line IL2 connecting the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body 27151 and the end on the back side is larger than 45 degrees. Will be done. As a result, the protruding distance of the inclined surface 2751a to the outside can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the main body portion 27151 from becoming large.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 27151a is formed in a circular arc shape recessed inside the main body portion 27151, the player visually recognizes the decorative members 60c and 154 via the inclined surface 27151a. In this case, the recessed shape can expand the visible area of the decorations of the decorative members 60c and 154 via the inclined surface 27151a. That is, the light incident on the inclined surface 27151a from the decorative members 60c and 154 is refracted by the arcuate cross section recessed inward toward the inside of the main body 27151, and is focused toward the player's viewpoint. Can be done. As a result, the patterns and characters (pictures) visually recognized through the inclined surface 27151a can be reduced, and the connection of the decorative members 60c and 154 can be made difficult for the player to understand. As a result, the misalignment of the decorative members 60c and 154 can be obscured by the player, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Further, the decorative member 154 arranged inside the recess 151b has a horizontal line HR2 whose end position passes through an intermediate position between a connecting point with a flat surface on the front side and an end portion on the back side of the main body portion 27151. It is set above and on the back side of the inclined surface 27151a.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than usual on the game board 26013, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 The angle of incidence is increased when light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion of the above is incident on the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a. Therefore, the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decorative member 154 is easily refracted toward the viewpoint side of the player, so that the player can move the light from the normal position with respect to the game board 27013. When the general winning opening unit 27150 is visually recognized from a high position, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily visually recognized from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the positions of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154 and 60c in the front-rear direction. Can be combined to make it easier to see as a decoration of 1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 27013, it is decorated by the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a. Since the incident angle when the light traveling in the horizontal direction on the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 is incident on the outside of the main body 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a is approximated at a right angle, it is emitted to the outside of the main body 27151. It is possible to make it difficult to refract the light that is produced. Therefore, the direction of the player's line of sight is suppressed from bending when passing through the inclined surface 27151a, and the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 are displaced in the front-rear direction. Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be combined and easily visually recognized as one decoration.

Next, the game board 28013 according to the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a). In the first embodiment, the case where the inner surface of the end portion of the recess 151b recessed in the main body portion 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 is parallel to the plate thickness direction of the main body portion 151 has been described. The inner surface of the end portion of the recess 28151b in the embodiment is inclined inward toward the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 28013 according to the 28th embodiment. Note that FIG. 182 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 182 (a), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 28013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

The game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 28013 is a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a base plate 60 thereof. A center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening portion formed in. In addition, the game board 28013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. Further, in the 28th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 28150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the general winning opening unit 28150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment is a plate-shaped main body 28151 along the front surface of the base plate 60. And a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body 28151.

The main body 28151 is made of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of the decorative member 154 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the main body portion 28151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 28151b whose end portion is recessed from the back surface toward the front surface side of the main body portion 28151.

As described above, the inner side surface 28151b3 of the recess 28151b is located outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side) toward the end side of the main body portion 28151. It is formed with an inclination toward it. In this case, the inclination angle θ3 (see FIG. 182 (a)) of the inner side surface 28151b3 with respect to the front surface in the cross section of the recess 28151b is the inclination angle θ4 with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151 (FIG. 182). It is set smaller than (see (a)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the inclined surface 28151a of the main body portion 28151, the decorative member 60c is bent by passing through the main body portion 28151 and is visually recognized by the player. It is possible to bring the decorative position of the virtual image close to the decorative position of the real image when the decorative member 60c is visually recognized without going through the main body 28151. That is, the position of the decorative member 60c that is refracted and visually recognized by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body portion 28151 and the inner side surface 28151b3 of the recess can be positioned on the extension line of the player's line of sight. As a result, when the decorative member 60c is visually recognized by the player via the main body 28151, the misalignment of the decoration caused by the refraction of light can be suppressed, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Next, the game board 29013 according to the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). In the 28th embodiment, the case where the inclination angle θ3 of the inner side surface 29151b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the cross section of the recess 29151b is set smaller than the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60 has been described. In the 29th embodiment, the inclination angle θ5 of the inner side surface 29151b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the cross section of the recess 29151b is set to be larger than the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 29013 according to the 29th embodiment. Note that FIG. 182 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 182 (b), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 29013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

The game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 29013 is a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a base plate 60 thereof. A center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening portion formed in. In addition, the game board 29013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. Further, in the 29th embodiment, the general winning opening unit 29150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the general winning opening unit 29150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 29013 in the 29th embodiment is a plate-shaped main body 29151 along the front surface of the base plate 60. And a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body 29151.

The main body 29151 is made of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of the decorative member 154 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the main body portion 29151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 29151b whose end portion is recessed from the back surface toward the front surface side of the main body portion 29151.

As described above, the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b is located outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side) toward the end side of the main body portion 29151. It is formed with an inclination toward it. In this case, the inclination angle θ5 (see FIG. 182 (b)) of the inner side surface 29151b3 with respect to the front surface in the cross section of the recess 29151b is the inclination angle θ6 with respect to the base plate 60 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151 (FIG. 182). It is set larger than (see (b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 29151, the player is seen from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 via the inclined surface 151a. The light emitted from the viewpoint can be light emitted in a direction substantially orthogonal to the inclination of the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b. Therefore, when light is incident on the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, it is possible to suppress the refraction of the light. As a result, when light is incident on the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b, the light is refracted, so that the connecting portion of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be suppressed from being visually recognized from the upper side in the direction of gravity, and the decorative member 60c. And the decorative member 154 can be easily made visible to the player as the decoration of 1.

Further, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end portion of the decorative member 154, it is possible to absorb the dimensional error that occurs when the decorative member 154 is formed by the gap.

Next, the general winning opening unit 30150 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (a). In the 28th embodiment, the case where the inner side surface 28151b3 of the recess 28151b is formed to be inclined has been described, but in the 30th embodiment, the inner surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b bulges inward of the recess 28151b and has a circular cross section. It is formed by being curved in an arc shape. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 30013 is a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a base plate 60 thereof. A center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening portion formed in. In addition, the game board 30013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. Further, in the thirtieth embodiment, the general winning opening unit 30150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

FIG. 183 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 30150 according to the thirtieth embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 183 (a), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint having the same height as the substantially intermediate position in the gravity direction of the game board 30013) is a two-dot chain line. Illustrated in.

As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the general winning opening unit 30150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment is a plate-shaped main body portion 30151 along the front surface of the base plate 60. And a decorative member 154 arranged on the back surface side of the main body portion 30151.

The main body 30151 is made of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of the decorative member 154 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the main body portion 30151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 30151b whose end portion is recessed from the back surface side toward the front surface side of the main body portion 30151.

The inner side surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b is formed so as to be inclined outward from the recess bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recess opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction) toward the end side of the main body portion 30151. At the same time, it bulges in an arc shape in a cross section toward the inside of the recess 30151b. As a result, the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the recess 30151b can be easily directed in the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, when the decoration of the game board 30013 is visually recognized through the recess 30151b, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is suppressed from being visually recognized, and the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are used as one decoration for the player. It can be made easy to see.

Next, the general winning opening unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (b). In the first embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 151a is formed as a surface having a linear cross section has been described, but the inclined surface 31151a in the 31st embodiment includes a plurality of recessed portions 31151a1. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the general winning opening unit 31150 according to the 31st embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the 1st embodiment, and the game board 31013 is a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a base plate 60 thereof. A center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening portion formed in. In addition, the game board 31013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2) are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. Further, in the 31st embodiment, the general winning opening unit 31150 is arranged in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the general winning opening unit 31150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment is a plate-shaped main body 31151 along the front surface of the base plate 60. And a decorative member 154 arranged on the back side of the main body 31151.

The main body 31151 is made of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters, etc. (picture) of the decorative member 154 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the main body portion 31151 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a recess 151 b which is recessed from the back surface side of the main body portion 31151 toward the front surface side.

The inclined surface 31151a includes a plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 recessed in a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction. A plurality of the recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged side by side in the inclined direction of the inclined surface 31151a, and extend along the end portion of the main body portion 31151 in the front view. As a result, the light incident on the inside of the main body 31151 and emitted from the end (inclined surface 31151a) of the main body 31151 can be diffusely reflected. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the decoration that is visually recognized through the inclined surface 31151a in a blurred state.

Here, since the end portion of the decorative member 154 arranged on the main body portion 31151 is arranged on the back side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c It is possible to make the player visually recognize the connected portion of the above in a blurred state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of each decorative member, and it is possible to easily make the player recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjustment means to change the flow direction by adjusting the distance between the facing surfaces>
Next, the special winning device 32550 according to the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the thirteenth embodiment, the shim member SI is sandwiched between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 to adjust the facing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. Although described, the case where the facing distance between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the screw fastening position will be described in the 32nd embodiment. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the special winning device 32550 according to the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. FIG. 184 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device 32550 according to the 32nd embodiment. 185 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185 (b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 185 (c) is CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc of FIG. 185 (a). It is sectional drawing of the special winning apparatus 32550 in a line.

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the special winning device 32550 according to the 32nd embodiment has a first path member 32560 arranged on the front side and a second path member 32560 arranged on the back side thereof. It includes a two-path member 32570.

The first path member 32560 is formed from a non-light transmissive material. Further, the first path member 32560 projects from the front plate 32564 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the game area and from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). It is provided with a first wall portion 32565 to be formed.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, the player can make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 33550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

The first wall portion 32565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and the through hole 32565c penetrating in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and the second first wall portion 32565 face each other. A plurality of one-side protrusions 32565d which are juxtaposed on the surface and are projected in a triangular cross section are erected on the opposite surface side of the second wall portion 32566 from both the upper and lower ends of the first wall portion 32565. It mainly includes an upright portion 32565e.

The through hole 32565c is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 is inserted, and is formed at one location on each first wall portion 32565.

The one-side protrusion 32565d is a portion that is inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 described later to position the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, and is a portion in the front-rear direction (arrow F). It is juxtaposed in the −B direction) and extended in the vertical direction (arrow UD).

The upright portion 32565e is a portion that covers the one-side protrusion 32565d and makes the one-side protrusion 32565d invisible to the player, and is set to be larger than the protrusion distance of the one-side protrusion 32565d. As a result, the position where the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c is suppressed from being visually recognized, and the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is recognized by the player. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the pachinko machine 10 because it is judged to be disadvantageous.

The second path member 32570 is a plate-shaped base plate 32571 facing the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560, and the first path member 32560 from the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends of the base plate 32571. It is provided with a fourth wall portion 32573 projecting from the front plate 32564 side.

The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564 facing the front plate 32564, and is a member in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the base plate 32571 in the front view. The size is made smaller than the front plate 32564. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base plate 32571 from being visually recognized from the player side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the facing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and determining that the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

Further, the base plate 32571 is located below the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c protruding toward the first path member 32560 side, the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c, and is located on the front plate 32564. A sixth convex portion 32571d projecting to the side is provided.

The fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 32550, and are based from the lateral side (arrow LR direction outer side) of the base plate 32571. It is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the center side of the plate 32571. As a result, the game ball that flows down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and collides with the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c of the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c. It is possible to make it easier to flow down in the inclined direction.

The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed on the lower side of the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c described above, and is formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the base plate 32571. Further, the sixth convex portion 32571d is extended in the direction of gravity. As a result, the game ball guided by the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c is distributed to either the left or right side of the sixth convex portion 32571d by flowing down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 facing each other. ..

The two facing fourth wall portions 32573 are a plurality of other side recesses 32573c recessed inward in the facing direction on the outer side surfaces in the facing direction, and an adjusting hole 32573b penetrating in the facing direction. 32573d, which is formed inside the fourth wall portion 32573 in the opposite direction and surrounds the adjusting hole 32573b, is mainly provided.

A plurality of other side recesses 32573c are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the fourth wall portion 32573, and are extended in the gravity direction. Further, the other side recess 32573c is formed by being recessed in a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross section shape thereof is set to be substantially the same as that of the one side protrusion 32565d. Thereby, the one-side protrusion 32565d can be inserted into the other-side recess 32573c to position the first path member 32560.

The adjusting hole 32573b is a portion through which the tip of the screw through which the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above is inserted is inserted into the accommodating portion 32573d side. Further, the adjusting hole 32573b is formed in an elongated hole long in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), whereby the movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is permitted.

The accommodating portion 32573d is formed in a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the front, and both ends thereof are connected to the fourth wall portion 32573. Further, the accommodating portion 32573d extends from the front surface of the base plate 32571 to the front end portion of the fourth wall portion 32573. As a result, the screw plate 32590 for screwing the screw through which the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b are inserted can be accommodated in the space surrounded by the accommodating portion 32573d.

The screw plate 32590 is set to a dimension that can be inserted into the space formed by the accommodating portion 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is the front-rear direction dimension of the space formed by the accommodating portion 32573d (the dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). It is set to be smaller than the protrusion dimension to the front side of the fourth wall portion 32573). As a result, the screw plate 32590 can be inserted inside the accommodating portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

Further, the screw plate 32590 has a screw hole 32591 for screwing a screw through which a through hole 32565c and an adjustment hole 32573b are inserted, and two positions from both ends of the screw hole 32591 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A guide protrusion 32592 is provided so as to project toward the facing surface of the four wall portions 32573.

The screw holes 32591 are formed at two positions, and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. Further, the two screw holes 32591 are formed at positions where the distance dimension of one screw hole 32591 from the upper end and the distance dimension of the other screw hole 32591 from the lower end are the same. As a result, when the screw groove of either one of the screw holes 32591 is crushed, the screw can be fastened by using the other screw hole 32591 by turning the screw plate 32590 upside down.

The guide protrusion 32592 is provided with a predetermined amount of protrusions from both front and rear ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, and is provided with an inclined surface that is inclined toward the screw hole 32591 side. As a result, the tip of the screw through which the through hole 32565c and the adjusting hole 32573b are inserted can be guided to the screw hole 32591. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the screw hole 32591 is damaged, a new screw hole 32591 can be used by turning it upside down. In this case, since the position of the screw hole 32591 with respect to the tip of the screw tends to be misaligned, a configuration in which the tip of the screw is guided to the screw hole 32591 as in the present embodiment is particularly effective.

The method of adjusting the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 32550 configured as described above is first to be inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and screwed into the plywood 32590. Loosen the screw to be fitted. As a result, the movement of the first path member 32560 is permitted with respect to the second path member 32570.

Next, by elastically deforming the first wall portion 32565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, the one-side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570. Is pulled out from the other side recess 32573c, and then the elastic deformation of the first wall portion 32655 is returned at the adjusted position by adjusting the position in the front-rear direction, and the one side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other side recess 32573c again. As a result, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned) to the second path member 32570.

Finally, the adjustment of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is completed by re-tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and screwed into the screw plate 32590. ..

According to this, as described above, the one-side protrusion 32565d and the other-side recess 32573c are formed in a corresponding shape. Therefore, by temporarily fixing the one-side protrusion 32565d and then fastening the screw, the one-side protrusion 32565d can be moved to the other side. It can be pushed into the recess 32573c. Therefore, the one-side protrusion 32565d can be adjusted so that it is always at the same position at each position where it can be inserted into the other-side recess 32573c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variation in the flow of the game ball depending on the operator performing the adjustment, and it is possible to simplify the adjustment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 186 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550 in the CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb line of FIG. 186 (a).

As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out to the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. 185. In addition, the distance between the front plate 32564 on the left side and the base plate 32571 facing each other is wider than that on the right side. In this case, the game ball that flows down between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 facing each other is less likely to collide with the fourth convex portion 32571b on the left side, so that the game ball can easily flow down between the left side facing areas. .. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 facing each other can be easily discharged from the lower left side.

Next, the special winning device 33550 according to the 33rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 187. In the 32nd embodiment, the case where the position of the 2nd path member 32570 with respect to the 2nd path member 32570 is adjusted in a state where the first wall portion 32565 of the 1st path member 32560 is elastically deformed has been described. In the form, the first wall portion 33565 is variably connected to the front plate 32564. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 according to the 33rd embodiment, and FIG. 187 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 33550. Note that FIG. 187 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186 (c).

As shown in FIG. 187, the special winning device 33550 according to the 33rd embodiment has a first path member 33560 arranged on the front side and a second path member arranged on the back side of the first path member 33560. 32570 and.

The first path member 33560 includes a front plate 33564 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion 33565 pivotally supported at the left and right ends of the front plate 33564. ..

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, the player can make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 33550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

The holding portion 33564e is a member that holds the rod RD that pivotally supports the first wall portion 33565, which will be described later, and is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted into the inner portion formed in an annular shape. Further, the holding portions 33564e are formed at two positions separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the holding portions 33564e are coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, the holding portion 33564e formed on the lower side of the two holding portions 33564e is formed on the lower end portion of the front plate 33564 and the lower end side is closed. Thereby, when the rod RD is inserted into the inside of the holding portion 33564e from the upper side of the holding portion 33564e, it is possible to prevent the rod RD from falling off (pulling out) from the lower end of the holding portion 33564e.

The first wall portion 33565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c penetrating in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and two first wall portions 32565. A plurality of one-side projecting portions 32565d which are juxtaposed on the facing surfaces and projecting in a triangular cross section, and a second wall portion 32566 which is 2 from both ends above and below the first wall portion 32565 (in the direction of arrow UD). It mainly includes an upright portion 32565e erected on the facing surface side and a shaft-mounted support portion 33565f protruding on the front plate 33564 side in a ring-shaped cross section.

The shafted support portion 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD to be inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and the inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size in which the rod RD can be inserted. .. Further, the shafted branch portion 33565f is formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axis of the annular portion of the shafted branch portion 33565f is coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, in the two shafted support portions 33565f, a holding portion 33564e formed above the above-mentioned holding portions 33564e is arranged between them.

As a result, in the connection between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565, the holding portion 33564e and the shafted branch portion 33565f are arranged coaxially, and the holding portion 33564e and the shafted branch portion 33565f are connected from above. By inserting the rod RD, the first wall portion 33565 is arranged on the front plate 33564 in a rotatable state.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the front plate 33564 of the first path member 33560 is arranged non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the front plate 33564 On the other hand, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 can be changed and arranged.

That is, in the 32nd embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is arranged non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the first wall portion is arranged with respect to the front plate 32564. It is necessary to hold the 33565 in an elastically deformed state. Further, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564 to form the second path member 32570. It is necessary to pull out the one-side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other-side recess 32573c from the other-side recess 32573c. Therefore, there is a possibility that the connecting portion between the front plate 32564 and the first wall portion 32565 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 33rd embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated with respect to the front plate 33564, it is not necessary to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall It is possible to prevent the connecting portion with the portion 33565 from being damaged.

The method of adjusting the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 33550 configured as described above is first to be inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and screwed into the plywood 32590. Loosen the screw to be fitted. As a result, the movement of the first path member 33560 is permitted with respect to the second path member 32570.

Next, by rotating the first wall portion 33565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 33564, the one-side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 33560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 is formed. After pulling out from the other side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted, and at the adjusted position, the rotation of the first wall portion 33565 is returned and the one side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other side recess 32573c again. As a result, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570.

Finally, by re-tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and screwed into the screw plate 32590, the adjustment of the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is completed. ..

Next, the special winning device 34550 according to the 34th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 to 190. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the flow direction of the game ball is adjusted by adjusting the facing distance between the front and rear plates of the special winning device 13550 has been described, but in the 34th embodiment, the inside of the flow path is described. By changing the position of the protrusions that project toward it, the direction in which the game ball flows down can be adjusted. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special winning device 34550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188 (a) is a front view of the game board 34013 according to the 34th embodiment, and FIG. 188 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 34013 in the CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb line of FIG. 188 (a). FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013.

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the special winning device 34550 according to the 34th embodiment is arranged above the first winning opening 64 arranged in the game board 34013. Further, in the special winning device 34550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 arranged on the front side is arranged in the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 in the front view. ..

Further, the special winning device 34550 and the first winning opening 64 are arranged at positions separated by the diameter of the game ball in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550.

The special winning device 34550 has a first path member 34560 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second path member arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560. It includes 34570 and a fixture 34553 screwed onto the back side of the second path member 34570.

The first path member 34560 is a plate member formed between facing the second path member 34570, which will be described later, and serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, the player can make the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 34550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

Further, the first path member 34560 is formed in a plate shape and is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game area, and the front plate 34564 and the left and right ends to the back side (arrow) of the front plate 34564. It is provided with a first wall portion 34565 erected on the B direction side).

The front plate 34564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 32570, which will be described later, and is more than a base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 described later. Also, the outer shape in front view is formed large. As a result, the second path member 34570 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 can be made difficult to see on the front plate 34564. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second path member 34570 from being visually recognized from the player side. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 34570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the change.

The first wall portion 34565 is a portion to be fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13, and is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. As for the vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565, the dimension X3 between the front plate 34564 and the fourth convex portion 34571b of the base plate 34571 described later (see FIG. 188 (b)) is the diameter of the game ball. It is set to a value slightly larger than.

Further, the first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565 g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060 from the vertical tip portion, and a through hole 34565 g1 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565 g. NS. The through hole 34565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060 by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 34565g1 into the base plate 34060.

The second path member 34570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 34571 facing the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560, and a support portion 34579 projecting from the back surface side of the base plate 34571 in a columnar shape.

The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564 facing the front plate 34564, and is formed at a position separated from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined amount. Further, the base plate 34571 includes a fourth convex portion 34571b projecting toward the front plate 34564 side. As a result, it is possible to change the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 is caused to collide with the fourth convex portion 34571b and flow down.

The support portion 34579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 34570, and a columnar shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the shaft of the base plate 34571 (center of the base plate 34571). Further, in the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, a circular through hole 34060d is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 34579, and the support portion 34579 is inserted inside the through hole 34060d. As a result, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported by the base plate 34060.

A fastening hole 34579a is recessed in the protruding tip of the support portion 34579. The fastening hole 34579a is recessed coaxially with the shaft of the support portion 34579, and the inner peripheral surface is internally threaded. As a result, the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 inserted into the through hole 34060d from the back surface side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

The fixture 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the above-mentioned second path member 34570 to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and protrudes from the operation portion 34553a formed in a columnar shape and the front side of the operation portion 34553a. It is provided with a screw portion 34553b to be provided.

The operation unit 34553a is a portion gripped by an operator who arranges the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and is formed in an outer shape larger than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060. Further, the operation unit 34553a is set to an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060.

As a result, when the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a and the second path member 34570 is arranged in the base plate 34060, the fixture 34553 passes through the through hole 34060d in the base plate 34060. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from coming out to the front side.

The threaded portion 34553b is formed in a columnar shape coaxial with the axis of the operating portion 34553a, and the outer peripheral surface thereof is male-threaded. As described above, the screw portion 34553b is a portion screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, is set to an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and the through hole 34060d is inserted through the screw portion 345553b. Is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570.

According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the discharging position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550, the operator is formed on the base plate 34060 of the game board 13. A hand (arm) is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game board 13 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 34060 through the opening 60a (center frame 86), and the fixture 34553 The operation unit 34553a of the above is accessed.

Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570. As a result, the second path member 34570 is made rotatable about the support portion 34579, and the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b of the second path member 34570. When the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b is changed, so that the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550 is changed. The discharge position of the can be changed.

In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed in a circular shape in front view, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis thereof. Therefore, the second path member 34570 is rotated. In this case, it is possible to suppress a change in the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the second path member 34570 has been rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the game because it is judged to be disadvantageous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a change in the ejection position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (second path member 34570) is changed will be described. 190 (a) to 190 (d) are cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 34010 on the CXC-CXC line of FIG. 188.

As shown in FIG. 190, the fourth convex portion 34571b is formed so that the protruding shape in the front view is substantially V-shaped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the lower side, the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is thrown to the central portion along the inclination of the V-shape. It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball into the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), when the bent side of the V-shape is arranged on the upper side, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are placed on the left and right ends along the inclination of the V-shape. It can be easily thrown. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to flow into the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 190 (b), when the V-shaped bent side is arranged at either the left or right end, the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is inserted. It is possible to easily throw the ball along the slope on the upper side of the V-shape, and the game ball that is thrown to the lower side of the V-shape without colliding with the upper side of the V-shape is thrown along the slope on the lower side of the V-shape. Can be done. Therefore, the direction in which the game ball is thrown can be changed by the difference in the area where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V-shape and the lower side of the V-shape.

Although detailed description will be omitted, it is also possible to arrange the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b at a position other than the positions shown in FIGS. 190 (a) to 190 (d). For example, when the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees to the right in the front view from the position shown in FIG. 190 (a), the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 is along the V-shaped inclination. The game ball can be easily discharged from a position slightly shifted to the left side (arrow L direction side) from the upper side of the winning opening 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

Next, the special winning device 35550 according to the 35th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193. In the 34th embodiment, the case where the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b has been described, but in the 35th embodiment, the second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b. The position of the portion 35571b is changed. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special winning apparatus 35550 according to the 35th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192. FIG. 191 (a) is a front view of the game board 35013 in the 35th embodiment, and FIG. 191 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 35013 in the CXCIb-CXCIb line of FIG. 191 (a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special winning device 35550.

As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35550 according to the 35th embodiment is arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the first winning opening 64 arranged on the game board 35013. Further, in the special winning device 35550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 35560 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) is the same straight line in the front view as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64. It is arranged in a shape.

Further, the special winning device 35550 and the first winning opening 64 are arranged at positions separated by the diameter of the game ball in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550.

The special winning device 34550 has a first path member 35560 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second path member arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560. It includes a 35570 and a fixture 34553 screwed onto the back side of the second path member 35570.

The first path member 35560 is a plate member formed between facing the second path member 35570, which will be described later, and serves as a wall portion on the front side of the flow path of the game ball, and is formed of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, the player can make the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550 invisible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the flow direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550, and to prevent the player from stopping the game.

Further, the first path member 35560 stands on the front plate 34564, which is formed in a plate shape and is arranged on the front side of the game area, and on the back side (arrow B direction side) from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564. It is provided with a first wall portion 35565 to be installed.

The front plate 35564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of the game ball formed between facing the second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is a second path member described later. The outer shape in the front view is formed larger than that of the base plate 35571 of 35570. As a result, the second path member 35570 arranged on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560 can be made difficult to see on the front plate 35564. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second path member 35570 from being visually recognized from the player side. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 35570 is changed, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the change.

The first wall portion 35565 is a portion to be fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013, and the vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565 formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section is the front plate 35564. The dimension X4 between the base plate 35571 and the fourth convex portion 35571b (see FIG. 191B), which will be described later, is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565 g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60 from the vertical tip portion, and penetrates the bent portion 35565 g in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A through hole 35565 g1 is formed, and a recessed portion 35565 g2 is formed which is recessed from the back surface of the bent portion 35565 g toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

The through hole 35565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted through the through hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 35565 g2 is a portion that accommodates both the left and right (arrow LR direction side) ends of the base plate 35571 of the second path member 35570, which will be described later, inside, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565 g. , Is recessed in the central portion in the vertical direction of the bent portion 35565 g. As a result, when the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are housed inside the recessed portion 35565 g2, the left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portion 35365 g. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the position of the base plate 35571. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the game because it is judged to be disadvantageous.

Further, the recessed dimension of the recessed portion 35565 g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the plate thickness of the base plate 35571, and the separation distance X5 between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565 g (see FIG. 191 (b)) is set. , The width dimension X6 in the left-right direction of the base plate 35571 (see FIG. 191 (b)) is set to be larger. As a result, the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) can be displaced in the left-right direction. The displacement method of the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) will be described later.

The second path member 35570 is projected from the plate-shaped base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571 in a rectangular shape in the rear view. A support portion 35579 is provided.

The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in a gap between the first path member 35560 and the front plate 35564, and is formed at a position separated from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined amount. Further, the base plate 35571 includes a fourth convex portion 35571b projecting toward the front plate 35564 side (arrow F direction side). Thereby, the game ball flowing down between the base plate 35571 and the front plate 35564 facing each other can collide with the fourth convex portion 35571b to change the flowing down direction.

The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570, and a columnar shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the shaft of the base plate 34571 (center of the base plate 34571). Further, in the base plate 60 of the game board 34013, a long hole-shaped sliding hole 35060e that is long in the left-right direction is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 35579, and the support portion 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. NS. As a result, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

The sliding hole 35060e is set to have a width dimension in the lateral direction (arrow UD direction) substantially the same as the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) dimension of the support portion 35579, and the left and right sides of the support portion 35579. The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is set larger than the direction (arrow LR direction) dimension. As a result, the support portion 35579 inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e can be slidable in the longitudinal direction of the sliding hole 35060e.

Further, the support portion 35579 is provided with a fastening hole 35579a recessed at the protruding tip thereof. The fastening hole 35579a has a female screw on the inner peripheral surface, and the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. The protruding dimension of the support portion 34579 is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the second path member 35570 is used as a base by screwing the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 into the fastening hole 35579a. It can be fixed to the plate 60.

According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the discharging position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550, the operator is formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 35013. 1 Insert the hand (arm) from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game board 35013 to the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 through the opening 60a (center frame 86), and fix the fixture 34553. The operation unit 34553a of the above is accessed.

Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into the fastening hole 35579a of the second path member 35570. As a result, the second path member 35570 is made slidable in the left-right direction, and the second path member 35570 is slidably displaced to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b of the second path member 35570. When the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, so that the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 is changed. The discharge position of the can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a change in the ejection position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (second path member 35570) is changed will be described. 193 (a) to 193 (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 35013 on the CXCIII-CXCIII line of FIG. 191 (b). In addition, in FIGS. 193 (a) to 193 (c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193 (b) is used as a reference position, and in FIG. 193 (a), the second path member 35570 is in front of the reference position. The state of being displaced to the left side of the view is illustrated, and in FIG. 193 (c), the state of the second path member 35570 being displaced from the reference position to the right side of the front view (the side in the direction of arrow R) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 193, in the fourth convex portion 35571b, the protruding shape in the front view is formed in a substantially V shape, and the game ball flowing in from above the special winning device 35550 is centered along the V-shaped inclination. Guided to the portion (V-shaped bent portion).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571b is arranged above the first winning opening 64, it is discharged from below the special winning device 35550. It is possible to easily flow the game ball into the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (the position shown in FIG. 193 (b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b Since the bent portion of the character is arranged at a position shifted to the left or right from the upper part of the first winning opening 64, it is below the special winning device 35550 as compared with the case where the second path member 35570 is arranged at the reference position. The game ball discharged from the first winning opening 64 is less likely to flow into the first winning opening 64.

Next, the special winning device 36550 according to the 36th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 194. In the first embodiment, the first unit 551 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 is fastened to the second unit 552 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, and is fastened to the back side of the base plate 60. Although the case where the first unit 36551 is held in a urged state is described, in the 36th embodiment, the first unit 36551 is moved to the back surface of the base plate 60 by the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551. It is urged toward the side. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 194 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 36013 in the 36th embodiment, and FIG. 194 (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board 36013. Note that FIG. 194 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 194, the special winning device 36550 according to the 36th embodiment is a first unit that is slidably displaced from the inside of the first opening 60a in which the center frame 86 is arranged and is arranged in the base plate 60. It is formed from 36551.

The first unit 36551 is provided with a space in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can flow into the inside of the first unit 36551. Further, the first unit 36551 includes a fastening portion 36551b projecting from a side surface (back surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

The fastening portion 36551b is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted, is projected toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side), and is parallel to the back surface of the base plate 60. The tip of the protrusion is bent in the direction.

Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (arrow F direction side) on the side surface on the bending side thereof, and a plate thickness direction (arrow FB) on the bending tip side of the bulging portion 36551b2. A through hole 36551b1 penetrating in the direction) is provided.

Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X7 from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the front surface of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not mounted on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194 (b)). However, it is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60. Further, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 (FIG. 194) from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the bulging tip position of the bulging portion 36551b2 when the first unit 36551 is not mounted on the base plate 60. (B)) is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.

When a screw is fastened to the through hole 36551b1, the bulging portion 36551b2 pushes (urges) the force for fastening the screw to the back side (arrow F direction side) of the first unit 36551. It is a portion to be converted into the above, and is formed between the base end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

As a result, when the screw through which the fastening portion 36551b is inserted is fastened to the back surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 comes into contact with the back surface of the base plate 60, so that the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60 is divided. , The force of pushing the bent tip side toward the base plate 60 side with a screw can be converted into the force of pulling out the base end side of the bent portion toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 36551 and the front surface of the base plate 60.

As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 36551 is inserted to the base plate 60 from the front side, and the first unit 36551 can be formed larger by the amount of the fastening allowance. Further, in the 36th embodiment, the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 by using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened. Therefore, the first unit 36551 is slidably displaced to the base plate 60. It can be easily attached to the first opening 60a of the above.

Next, the special winning device 37550 according to the 37th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 195. In the first embodiment, the first unit 551 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 is fastened to the second unit 552 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, and is fastened to the back side of the base plate 60. Although the case where the first unit 37551 is held in a state of being urged toward the base plate 60 is described, in the 37th embodiment, the first unit 37551 is fastened by a screw inserted from the back surface side of the base plate 60, and the back surface of the base plate 60 is fastened. It is held in a state of being urged toward the side. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 195 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing the game board 37013 in the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 195 (b) is a sectional schematic view of the game board 37013. Note that FIG. 195 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 195, the special winning device 37550 according to the 37th embodiment is formed from the first unit 37551 arranged in front of the base plate 60.

The first unit 37551 is provided with a space in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can flow into the inside of the first unit 37551. Further, the first unit 37551 includes a plurality of annular convex portions 37551b projecting in an annular shape on the back surface side (side in the direction of arrow B).

The annular convex portion 37551b is a portion for screwing a screw inserted from the back surface side of the base plate 60, and a female screw is processed on the inner peripheral surface. In the present embodiment, the annular convex portion 37551b is formed at four locations on the back surface of the first unit 37551.

Further, a concave portion 37060d recessed in a circular shape is formed in the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551b. The concave portion 37060d is a portion for inserting the annular convex portion 37551b inward, and is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 37551b. Further, the recessing depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b.

Further, a through hole 37060d1 formed through the concave portion 37060d in a circular shape on the same axis is formed on the concave bottom surface of the concave portion 37060d. The through hole 37060d1 is a hole through which the tip of a screw screwed into the annular convex portion 37551b is inserted, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the concave portion 37060d. As a result, the screws can be fastened to the first unit 37551 arranged from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60.

In this case, as described above, the recessing depth of the concave portion 37060d is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b. Therefore, by screwing the screw into the annular convex portion 37551b, the annular ring is formed. The first unit 37551 can be arranged on the base plate 60 in a state where the convex portion 37551b (first unit 37551) is urged to the back surface side (arrow B direction side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 37551 and the front surface of the base plate 60.

As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw through which the first unit 37551 is inserted to the base plate 60 from the front side, and the first unit 37551 can be formed larger by the amount of the fastening allowance. Further, in the 37th embodiment, since the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the recess 37060d of the base plate 60, a space for throwing the game ball formed in the first unit 37551 can be accommodated accordingly. Can be made larger.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side depending on the game ball>
Next, the lower displacement member 38440 according to the 38th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. In the eleventh embodiment, a case where a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball accommodated in the lower displacement member 11440 by the light emitted from the control board 491 and the position of the game ball is recognized by the position of the shadow will be described. However, the lower displacement member 11440 in the 38th embodiment reflects the light emitted from the control substrate 491 on the outer surface of the game ball, and recognizes the position of the game ball at a position where the amount of light is increased. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 according to the 38th embodiment. FIG. 197 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, and FIG. 197 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line of FIG. 197 (a). Is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line of FIG. 197 (a). In FIG. 197 (a), a state in which the front side decorative member 38451 and the front case 38481 are removed is shown, and the LED 38483b arranged on the front case 38481 is shown by a chain double-dashed line. Further, in FIGS. 197 (b) and 197 (c), a state in which the front side decorative portion 451 is attached is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the 38th embodiment is the base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and the front-rear direction (arrow FB) of the base member 470. Direction) A case member 38480 that covers both sides, a transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably arranged between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 that is formed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 38480. Is mainly formed.

The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and is a front case 38481 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470 and the back surface. It mainly includes a back case 482 arranged on the side (the side in the direction of arrow B).

The front case 38481 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. Further, the front case 38481 is formed so as to have an opening 481a extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and a protrusion formed on the lower end surface on the back side (arrow B direction side). A bottom wall portion 481b, a shaft hole 481c penetrating the lower end portion in the front-rear direction, and an LED substrate 38483 disposed on the back surface side are mainly provided.

The LED substrate 38483 is a member that emits light inside the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481), and is arranged in a plate-shaped main body portion 38483a and a plurality of main body portions 38483a that irradiate light. It is provided with LED 38483b.

The main body portion 38483a is a base on which wiring for conducting electricity is laid through a plurality of LEDs 38483b, and extends in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) of the ball receiving portion 467. The plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the main body portion 38483a.

Further, each LED 38483b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes through the back side (arrow B direction side) of each LED 38483b. As a result, when the game ball is located on the back side of each LED 38483b, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball to irradiate the front side decorative portion 11451. Therefore, as described above, since the front side decoration portion 11451 includes the transmission portion 11451b capable of transmitting light, the light transmitted to the front side decoration portion 11451 reflected by the outer surface of the game ball is transmitted to the transmission portion 11451b. It can be emitted to the player side (arrow F direction side) through the light. Therefore, the amount of light that is visually recognized from the player side via the transmission portion 11451b can be increased in the portion reflected by the game ball as compared with the other portions. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, the player can be made to recognize the position of the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 38440.

In the present embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even when the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced, at least a part of the game ball can be irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be constantly irradiated to the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467.

Further, according to the 38th embodiment, the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the back case 482 arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the LED 38483b are preferably members having a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member constitutes a black color scheme. According to this, it is possible to suppress that the light emitted from the LED 38483b is reflected inside the case member 38480 (lower displacement member 38440) and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b of the front side decorative portion 11451. As a result, it is possible to increase the difference in the amount of light emitted between the front surface on which the game ball is arranged and the other front surface, and the player recognizes the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440. It can be made easier.

Next, the lower displacement member 39440 according to the 39th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the 38th embodiment, the case where the game ball reflects light to make the player recognize the position where the game ball is arranged has been described, but in the 39th embodiment, the ball receiving portion 39467 is arranged. Light is reflected by the reflective member to recognize the position of the game ball. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 according to the 39th embodiment. 199 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIGS. 199 (b) and 199 (c) are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement member 39440. Note that FIGS. 199 (b) and 199 (c) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 198 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the 39th embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and a case member 38480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 470. , A transmission mechanism 39460 displaceably arranged between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 arranged so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 38480.

The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member arranged on the front side of the base member 470, and meshes with the transmission gears 461, 462, 463, the drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and the transmission gear 463. Movable rack 464 having a tooth surface to be slidably arranged on the front side of the base member 470 so as to be slidable, and rotatably arranged on the movable rack 464, and in a state of being meshed with the rack gear 476. A rack 39466 having a transmission gear 465 and a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and arranged so that the front side of the movable rack 464 can be slidably displaced, and a rack 39466 rotatably arranged on one end side of the rack 39466. It is mainly provided with a ball receiving portion 39467 to be formed.

The rack 39466 is formed of a horizontally long rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b protruding from the other end side to the front side in a columnar shape, and a shaft portion 39466b protruding to the front side. It is mainly provided with two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466d which is recessed from one end to the other end on the back surface side.

The shaft portion 39466b is a protrusion inserted into the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a columnar shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held rotatably.

The ball receiving portion 39467 is connected to the first piece 39467c formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in the front view, the second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and the second piece 39467d. It includes a third piece 39467e arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are portions for holding the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 39440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and are between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d facing each other. When the game ball is thrown into the ball, the second piece 39467d is displaced from the first piece 39467c in a direction away from each other, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are arranged in a U shape in front view. And the game ball can be held in the inner part of the U-shape.

The first piece 39467c is composed of a receiving piece 39467c4 forming an L-shape in front view, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and a receiving piece 39467c4 and a leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 39467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 projecting to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 in between. And.

The receiving piece 39467c4 is a portion forming a side surface on the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, and is formed in a crescent shape on the front side. , Is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

The connecting portion 39467c1 is projected from two positions at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 39467c5. Further, the connecting portion 39467c1 is a portion that connects the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e, which will be described later, and provides a connecting hole 39467c2 that extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and is opened in a circular cross section. Be prepared.

The connecting hole 39467c2 is an opening into which the shaft portion 39467e3 projecting from the third piece 39467e, which will be described later, is inserted. In the connecting hole 39467c2, the shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3 formed in the second piece 39467d, which will be described later, is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side). Further, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side (arrow B direction side) of the connecting hole 39467c2. As a result, the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to the first piece 39467c.

Further, the first piece 39467c is provided with a recess 39467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (side in the direction of arrow D) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recess 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (bottom) of the side surfaces where the game ball is held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. As a result, the game ball held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d is rolled inside the recess 39467c3. As a result, the load of the game ball can easily displace the second piece 39467d with respect to the first piece 39467c.

The second piece 39467d is a portion forming a side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) formed in a U shape in front view by the receiving piece 39467c4 and the second piece 39467d of the first piece 39467c, and is a crescent moon in front view. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the first piece 39467c. Further, the second piece 39467d has an insertion hole 39467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction in the connecting portion of the first piece 39467c, and a circle from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side). It mainly includes a recessed portion 39467d2 that is recessed in the shape.

In the second piece 39467d, the shaft portion 39467e3 of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3, and the connecting shaft 39467e4 of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is also displaced as well. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is also rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c.

Further, the second piece 39467d is arranged between the facing portions of the connecting portions 39467c1 projecting at two positions of the first piece 39467c, and is connected to the first piece 39467c. As a result, when the second piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, the second piece 39467d can be brought into contact with the side surface of the connecting portion 39467c1 on the opposite side to prevent the shaft portion 39467e3 from breaking.

The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole into which the connecting shaft 39467e4 of the third piece 39467e, which will be described later, is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The third piece 39467e includes a reflector 39467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular front view, a shaft portion 39467e3 and a connecting shaft 39467e4 projecting from the reflector 39467e1 toward the back side (arrow B direction side). And.

The reflector 39467e1 is formed of a resin material and has an outer surface plated with a coating. As a result, when the reflector 39467e1 is irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b, the light can be reflected on the outer surface thereof. Further, the reflector 39467e1 is formed so as to be curved in an arc shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side) as a whole. As a result, when the light emitted from the front side is reflected, the light can be focused on a predetermined portion. The light shielding of the light emitter 11491a by the reflector 39467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 39467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d as described above. Further, on the protruding tip surface of the shaft portion 39467e3, a hole into which a screw to be inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 can be screwed is formed from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3. Therefore, with the shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3, the first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d, and the third piece 39467e are connected by fastening a screw to the insertion tip surface of the shaft portion 39467e3. And the third piece 39467e can be made rotatable with respect to the first piece 39467c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2 of the second piece 39467d. As a result, when the second piece 39467d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c about the shaft portion 39467e3, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Therefore, the third piece 39467e can be displaced with the displacement of the second piece 39467d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199, when the ball receiving portion 39467 receives a game ball between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, the accepted game ball is the first piece 39467c and the second piece. The receiving surface of 39467d (inner side surface formed in a U shape in front view) is rolled and guided to the recess 39467c3 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface. As a result, the second piece 39467d can be rotated around the shaft portion 39467e3 on the outer surface of the game ball in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. As a result, the third piece 39467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 39467d, can be displaced upward and placed on the light irradiation of the LED 38483b.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be reflected by the reflector 39467e1 of the third piece 39467e to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the lower displacement member 39440 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the transmission portion 11451b can be partially increased so that the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the lower displacement member 39440.

Further, in the second piece 39467d, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2, and the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the shaft portion 394673e from the connecting portion with the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e. As a result, in a state where no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e, the load of the third piece 39467e can rotate the second piece 39467d toward the first piece 39467c. ..

Therefore, when the game ball is ejected (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the second piece 39467d can be displaced to the receiving piece 39467c4 side of the first piece 39467c by the load of the third piece 39467e. Therefore, only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 39467, the amount of light reflected by the reflector 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress the reflection of light by the reflector 39467e1 due to the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467 or the like.

Further, the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of sliding displacement inside the lower displacement member 39440, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, and the lower displacement member 39440 is emitted. The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 39467, in the structure in which the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the ball receiving portion 39467 slides, the ball receiving portion 39467 is used. The rotation speed of the ball receiving portion 39467 centered on the shaft hole 467b is changed by the sliding speed of. Therefore, since the rotation speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 39467, there is a problem that the discharging speed of the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the 39th embodiment, the direction in which the second piece 39467d is rotated by the load of the third piece 39467e and the rotation direction of the ball receiving portion 39467 about the shaft hole 467b when the game ball is ejected are different. Since the directions are set to be substantially the same, it is possible to apply a driving force when the second piece 39467d is displaced to the game ball emitted from the exit opening 471. Therefore, even if the force acting on the game ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 when the ball receiving portion 39467 is displaced and the game ball is discharged from the exit opening 471 is reduced, the speed of the ejected game ball can be maintained. can. As a result, the discharge speed of the game ball emitted from the ball receiving portion 39467 can be stabilized.

Next, the first unit 40551 according to the 40th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200. In the first embodiment, the case where the game ball is notified when the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is clogged with the game ball has been described, but in the 40th embodiment, the game ball having a size other than the specified size is the main path. Fraud can be notified when passing through SK1. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment, and FIG. 200 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the CCb-CCb line of FIG. 200 (a). be. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 200 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 25.

As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the 40th embodiment has a first path member 560 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a back side (arrow B) of the first path member 560. A second path member 570 arranged on the directional side) and a third path member 40580 arranged on the back surface of the second path member 570 are mainly provided.

The third path member 40580 includes a first covering member 40581 arranged on the back surface of the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the second path member 570 and a lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second path member 570. The first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) arranged between the second lining member 582 (see FIG. 19) and the first lining member 40581 and the second lining member 582. And a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) arranged on the back surface of the second lining member 582.

The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a throwing path of a game ball that curves in a substantially U shape on the back surface side (arrow B direction side), and is a back surface side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. A curved portion 40581a connecting the above and a plate-shaped mounting portion 40581b connected to the lower side of the curved portion 40581a are mainly provided.

The curved portion 40581a is formed by being curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side are opened, and the first rolling portion 576 is arranged inside the curved portion 40581a. Will be done. Further, the curved portion 40581a is formed so that the width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) becomes smaller toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side), and the width dimension in the left-right direction in the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section. X10 (see FIG. 200 (a)) is formed to have a size of 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a game ball having a diameter 1.1 times or more the diameter of the specified game ball is thrown, the game ball can be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1).

Further, the curved portion 40581a is arranged inside the recess 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similarly to the curved portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the game ball stopped inside the curved portion 40581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17), and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (illegal).

Further, the curved portion 40581a includes an opening 40581a1 that opens in a curved portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a box-shaped accommodating portion 40581a2 that protrudes upward from the rear end of the opening 40481a1.

The opening 40581a1 is an opening for discharging a sphere having a diameter smaller than the diameter of the specified game ball from the main path SK1, and the opening dimension X15 (see FIG. 200 (a)) in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is large. It is formed to a size larger than 0.9 times the diameter of the game ball. The opening 40581a1 is formed on the back side of the curved portion 40581a which is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling portion 576, and sends the game ball passing through the main path SK1 to the opening 40581a1. be able to. As a result, when a game ball having a diameter smaller than the specified game ball by 0.9% or more is thrown, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main path SK1.

The accommodating portion 40581a2 is a box for accommodating the game ball discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed to have a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball discharged from the opening 40581a1 can be accommodated in the accommodating portion 40581a2, and the accommodated gaming ball can be detected by the detection device 86b3 to notify the pachinko machine 10 of an error (illegal). ..

In the 40th embodiment, the case where the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed in different sizes by 0.1 times with respect to a game ball having a specified diameter (11 mm) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The magnification of the size with respect to the game ball may be changed.

Next, the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202. In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j formed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1 and the main path SK3 move up and down (arrows) about the curved portion of the curved path WK1. The case where the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j in the 41st embodiment are formed in a substantially different shape in the UD direction) has been described. The same parts as those in the form are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 201 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 according to the 41st embodiment, and FIG. 201 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the CCIb-CCIb line of FIG. 201 (a). be. 202 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the CCIIa-CCIIa line of FIG. 201 (a), and FIG. 202 (b) is the first unit in the CCIIb-CCIIb line of FIG. 201 (a). It is a schematic cross-sectional view of 41551.

As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment is arranged on the front side of the first path member 41560 and on the back side of the first path member 41560. It is mainly provided with a two-path member 41570 and a third path member 580 (see FIG. 19) arranged on the back surface of the second path member 41570.

The first path member 41560 has a front plate 41564 formed in a plate shape along the front surface of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and a substantially U-shaped cross section opened on the upper side (arrow U direction side). The first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563, which are formed on the front plate 41564 and project from the upper side (arrow U direction side) end to the back side (arrow B direction side). (See FIG. 21), the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are projected so as to be continuous with the lower side (arrow D direction side), and a part of the front plate 41564 is end. A first wall portion 41565 extending along the portions, and two sets of second wall portions 566 and a second wall portion 566 formed below the first wall portion 565 and projecting from two locations at predetermined intervals. It mainly includes three wall portions 567 (see FIG. 21).

The front plate 41564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow path of the game ball formed between the second path member 41570 and the third path member 580, which will be described later. It is formed from a transparent member. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551 through the front plate 41564.

Further, the front plate 564 has a first convex portion 41564b, a second convex portion 41564c, and a third convex portion 41564d projecting at positions facing the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later, respectively. Will be done.

The second path member 41570 is projected from the plate-shaped base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560 and the front surface (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 41571 toward the first path member 41560 side. The fourth wall portion 573 (see FIG. 21), the fifth wall portion 574 (see FIG. 21) projecting downward from the fourth wall portion 573 at a predetermined distance, and the fifth wall portion thereof. It is mainly provided with a sixth wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21) projecting downward from the portion 574 at a position separated by a predetermined distance.

The base plate 41571 is provided with a first recess 41571h, a second recess 41571i, and a first recess 41571h, a second recess 41571i, which are recessed in a throwing path (main path SK2, curved path WK1 and main path SK3) of a game ball formed between facing the front plate 41564. It is provided with 3 recesses 41571j.

The first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are formed by being recessed in a curved shape toward the back surface side. Further, the opposing dimensions of the first concave portion 41571h and the first convex portion 41564b, the opposing dimensions of the second concave portion 41571i and the second convex portion 41564c, and the opposing dimensions of the third concave portion 41571j and the third convex portion 41564d are Each is set to the same facing dimension L19 (see FIG. 201 (b)).

Further, the facing dimension L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than the facing dimension L20 (see FIG. 201 (b)) on the back surface of the front plate 41564 and the front surface of the base plate 571. Is set to. As a result, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d is placed in the first concave portion. The rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball may be slowed down by bringing the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d. can.

Further, the protrusion dimensions of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d toward the base plate 41571 are set to be the same. Further, the projecting tip surfaces of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d face each other with the front surface of the base plate 41571 excluding the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j. The distance dimension L21 between them (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d is first convex. It can collide with the portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d. As a result, the rolling (flowing) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

The first recess 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2, and is recessed long along the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK2. As a result, when the game ball thrown inside the first recess 41571h is thrown inside the first recess 41571h, it is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the first recess 41571h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 from stopping due to contact with the first recess 41571h.

The first convex portion 41564b projecting from the surface facing the first concave portion 41571h is extended in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first concave portion 41571h. As a result, when the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown is brought into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball can be easily thrown inside the first concave portion 41571h.

The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1 and is recessed long along the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Further, the second recess 41571i is formed into an elliptical shape that is long in the vertical direction in the front view, and the intermediate position of the elliptical shape in the vertical direction is set to the intermediate position in the horizontal direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the vertical direction. Further, the curved center of the second recess 41571i on the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse is arranged on the throwing locus of the center of the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown. Therefore, the second recess 41571i is recessed above the throwing locus of the game ball thrown from the main path SK2, so that even if the game ball is thrown at a relatively high speed in the main path SK2, The center of the game ball can be passed through the front side of the second recess 41571i. As a result, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 can be thrown inside the second recess 41571i to facilitate the slowdown of the speed of the game ball, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from going wild on the curved path WK1.

The second convex portion 41564c projecting from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is formed by being bent in a substantially L shape in front view. Further, the second convex portion 41564c is set so that the bent portion is on the front side of the bending center on the upper side of the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i in the front view. Further, the bent portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c extends in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1, and the bent portion on the other side is the throwing portion of the game ball on the main path SK2. It extends in the direction orthogonal to the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 is brought into contact with the second convex portion 41564c on the other side and thrown inside the second concave portion 41571i, and is sent to the second convex portion 41564c on the one side. It is possible to easily reduce the throwing speed of the game ball that is brought into contact with the ball and is thrown on the curved path WK11. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown to the curved path WK1 from going wild, and to smoothly throw the game ball.

The third recess 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is recessed in an elliptical shape long in the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK3. As a result, when the game ball thrown inside the third recess 41571j is thrown inside the third recess 41571j, it is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the third recess 41571j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 from stopping due to contact with the third recess 41571j.

Further, in the third recess 41571j, the bending center of the upstream end of the throwing path of the game ball is set to the lower side of the center position in the left-right direction of the second recess 41571i. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down inside the second recess 41571i of the curved path WK1 can be easily received by the second recess 41571i, and the game ball can be easily sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

The third convex portion 41564d projecting from the surface facing the third concave portion 415671j is formed by being bent in a substantially L shape in front view. Further, the bent portion of the third convex portion 41564d is set on the front side of the bending center of the upstream end portion of the third concave portion 41571j in the front view. The bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d extends in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK3, and the bent portion on the other side is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. It is extended in the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is brought into contact with the third convex portion 41564d on the other side and thrown inside the third concave portion 41571j, and is sent to the third convex portion 41564d on one side. It is possible to reduce the throwing speed of the game ball that is brought into contact with the ball and throws the main path SK3. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK1 from going wild, and to smoothly throw the game ball.

Next, the game board 42013 according to the 42nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206. In the first embodiment, the other end side of the board box 100 (main control device 110) arranged in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 by a screw inserted from the back side of the board box 100. Although described, the case where the second engaging member 42370 arranged in the back case 42300 is engaged with the substrate box 42100 will be described in the 42nd embodiment.

First, the overall configuration of the back case 42300 according to the 42nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. FIG. 203 is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 42300 according to the 42nd embodiment. FIG. 204 (a) is a front view of the rear case 42300, and FIG. 204 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 42300 in the CCIVb-CCIVb line of FIG. 204 (a). The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the back case 42300 according to the 42nd embodiment is erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 42301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four sides of the bottom wall portion 42301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 42302, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 42301 and 42302.

Further, the back case 42300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the back side of the back case 42300. It is provided with a fixing member 320 for fixing one end side of the board box 42100, and a second engaging member 42370 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301 and fixing the other end side of the board box 42100.

A front view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 42301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible. Further, the bottom wall portion 42301 has a first portion that is projected in a columnar shape on the front side and is opened at a position opposite to the protruding portion 301b inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320. The opening 301c, the second opening 301d that opens at a position facing the engaging member 310, and the second engagement that is projected in a columnar shape on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 42301, and will be described later. A second projecting portion 42301f inserted into the sliding groove 42372 of the member 42370 and a second projecting portion 42301f penetrating in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) above the second projecting portion 42301f (arrow U direction). It is provided with 3 openings 42301 g.

The second projecting portion 42301f is a protrusion that defines the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370, and is formed side by side at two positions in the gravity direction. Further, the outer diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f is set to a dimension slightly smaller than the groove width in the lateral direction of the sliding groove 42372 of the second engaging member 42370, which will be described later. Further, the two second projecting portions 42301f are set to have a dimension in which the distance between the centers of the two protrusions 42301f is smaller than the groove width in the longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 42372. As a result, the second protrusions 42301f at two locations can be inserted and arranged inside the sliding groove 42372.

The third opening 42301g is an opening into which the projecting portion 42118 of the substrate box 42100, which will be described later, is inserted, and is opened with a size larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 42118 in the front view. Further, the third opening 42301 g disengages the engaging member 310 from the fixing member 320 in a state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204A). It is formed at a position adjacent to the direction (arrow L direction). As a result, it is possible to make it impossible to disengage the engaging member 310 from the fixing member 320 in a state where the projecting portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. A detailed description of the positional relationship between the projecting portion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be described later.

The outer wall portion 42302 includes a second opening portion 42302b that opens in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the side surface on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in front view. The second opening 42302b is an opening through which an end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in the displacement region of the second engaging member 42370. As a result, the second engaging member 42370 can be displaced.

The outer shape of the board box 42100 in front view is formed into a horizontally long rectangular rectangle, and the main control device 110 is arranged inside. Further, the substrate box 42100 has a bearing portion 117 (see FIG. 206 (a)) projecting from one end side (arrow R direction side) and a projecting portion projecting from one surface on the front side of the substrate box 42100. 42118 and.

As described above, the projecting portion 42118 is a portion to be inserted into the third opening 42301 g of the rear case 42300, and the rear case 42300 is in a state where the front surface of the board box 42100 and the back surface of the rear case 42300 are parallel to each other. The length is set so that the opening 42118a, which will be described later, is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 42301. Further, the projecting portion 42118 is provided with an opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity, and is arranged in a state in which a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted inside the opening 42118a. As a result, the substrate box 42100 can be prevented from rotating about the fixing member 320, and the substrate box 42100 can be arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 42300 in a non-displaceable state.

Further, the third opening 42301g into which the projecting portion 42118 is inserted is engaged in a state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged as described above (the state shown in FIG. 204A). Since the member 310 is formed at a position adjacent to the fixing member 320 in the direction of disengagement (arrow L direction), the projecting portion 42118 is arranged at a position adjacent to the engaging member 310. Further, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204 (b)) of the protruding portion 42118 into the third opening 42301 g is the separation distance Y7 between the front surface of the engaging member 310 and the front surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 (FIG. 204 (b)). ) Is set larger than (see). As a result, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), the engaging member 310 and the projecting portion 42118 are arranged at overlapping positions in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

Therefore, in a state where the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118, the engaging member 310 is disengaged from the fixing member 320 (the protruding portion 42118 is arranged). Displacement in the direction) is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being illicitly disengaged from the fixing member 320 in a state where the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, and the board box 42100 (main control device). It is possible to prevent 110) from being exchanged for an unauthorized board.

Further, the opening 42118a of the projecting portion 42118 is opened in the direction of gravity, and the second engaging member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced and inserted in the direction of gravity. Therefore, since the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the second engaging member 42370 and the displacement direction (horizontal direction) of the engaging member 310 are set in the orthogonal direction, the engaging member 310 is impossible due to the player's fraud. It is possible to easily receive the force when the operation is performed by the second engaging member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a. As a result, when the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by the player's fraud, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being disengaged from the fixing member 320.

The second engaging member 42370 faces downward (arrow D direction) from the plate member 42371 formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular rectangular plate in the front view and the end portion of the plate member 42371 on the upper side (arrow U direction side). 42374 recessed portion to be recessed, and 42373 second engaging portion projecting to the outside in the horizontal direction (direction of arrow LR) of the upper end (arrow U direction side) end of the plate member 42371, and recessed. A sliding groove 42372 that is opened in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at a position below the setting portion 42374 is mainly provided.

As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for displaceably disposing the second engaging member 42370, and is opened long in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). Further, the width dimension of the sliding groove 42372 in the lateral direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the second projecting portion 42301f arranged inside the sliding groove 42372. Therefore, when the second projecting portion 42301f is inserted into the sliding groove 42372 as described above, the sliding direction of the second engaging member 42370 is defined as the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372.

The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for easily elastically deforming the upper end portion of the plate member 42371, and is recessed downward and cut out in the front-rear direction. As a result, the rigidity of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371 can be lowered to facilitate elastic deformation.

The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end portion of the opening 42118a of the protruding portion 42118 described above, and is projected from both side surfaces in a direction perpendicular to the notch direction of the recessed portion 42374. The separation distance X12 (see FIG. 204 (a)) of the end portions of the protrusions on both sides is set to be larger than the opening dimension X13 (see FIG. 204 (b)) of the opening 42118a in the left-right direction. As a result, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging portion 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, so that the second engaging portion 42373 becomes the opening 42118a. It is possible to prevent the person from getting out of the room.

The second engaging portion 42373 is formed so as to project outward in the horizontal direction from the upper side to the lower side of the plate member 42371. As a result, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging member 42373 is brought into contact with the inside of the opening 42118a, and the upper side of the plate member 42371 is easily elastically deformed. be able to.

Further, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a (the engaging portion 42373 is engaged with the projecting portion 42118), the lower end portion is the second opening of the outer wall portion 42302. It is arranged inside the portion 42302b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second engaging member 42370 from being operated from the outside of the back case 42300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 42100 (main control device 110) from being illegally disengaged from the second engaging portion 42373 and the projecting portion 42118 and being replaced with an illegal board.

Next, a method of arranging the substrate box 42100 on the back case 42300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. FIG. 205 (a) is a front view of the rear case 42300, and FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 42300 in the CCVb-CCVb line of FIG. 205 (a). Note that FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b) show the state after the board box 42100 is arranged on the back case 42300, and FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b) show the back case 42300. The state before the substrate box 42100 is arranged is shown in the figure.

Similar to the first embodiment described above, the substrate box 42100 in the 42nd embodiment is first arranged with the fixing member 320 engaged with the engaging member 310 and one side arranged on the back side of the back case 42300. ..

As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b), when the engaging member 310 is in a state before engaging with the fixing member 320 (before displacement), the tip of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is , Is arranged on the front side of the third opening 42301 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the projecting portion 42118 of the substrate box 42100 from being inserted into the inside of the third opening 42301 g before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the substrate box 42100 from being arranged in the back case 42300 only by engaging the projecting portion 42118 and the second engaging member 42370.

Next, the substrate box 42100 is rotated around the connecting portion between the fixing member on one side and 320 on the other side, and the projecting portion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301 g of the rear case 42300. As a result, the projecting portion 42118 is arranged at a position where it can engage with the second engaging member 42370.

The second engaging member 42370 is inserted inside the third opening 42301g before being inserted, and the lower side is inserted through the second opening 42302b and arranged outside the back case 42300 (FIG. 205 (a)). reference). As a result, the operator who arranges the substrate box 42100 in the back case 42300 operates the second engaging member 42370 from the outside of the back case 42300, and the second engaging member 42370 is inside the third opening 42301 g. Can be inserted into.

Further, since the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370 is set to the direction of gravity, the second engaging member 42370 is arranged at the lower end portion by the action of gravity in the state before insertion inside the third opening 42301 g. .. As a result, when the projecting portion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301 g of the rear case 42300, it is possible to prevent the projecting portion 42118 from colliding with the second engaging member 42370. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

Further, if the second engaging member 42370 is forgotten to be engaged with the projecting portion 42118, the second engaging member 42370 can be arranged outside the rear case 42300, so that the operator is not in a normal state. Can be easily recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to engage the second engaging member 42370 with the projecting portion 42118.

Next, the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 206 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the CCVIb-CCVIb line of FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206, an erection member 42060f is arranged on the back surface of the base plate 42060 in the 42nd embodiment. The erection member 42060f is erected toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 42060, and the erection tip position is set to be the same plane as the bottom wall portion 42301 of the back case 42300. .. Further, the erection member 42060f is arranged on the lower side of the second engaging member 42370 and on the outer side of the back case 42300. As a result, when the back case 42300 is arranged on the game board 42013 in a state where the second engaging member 42370 and the projecting portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged, the standing member 42060f is placed on the second engaging member 42370. It can collide with the lower side. As a result, the back case 42300 is arranged on the base plate 42060 in a state where the second engaging member 42370 and the projecting portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged, or when the board box 42100 is forgotten to be arranged on the back case 42300. It can be suppressed from being installed.

In this embodiment, the erecting member 42060f is provided with a light emitting substrate that illuminates the inside of the back case 42300. As a result, the erection member 42060f can be used as both a portion that irradiates light and a portion that suppresses the engagement between the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the base plate 42060 from becoming large.

Next, the back case 43300 according to the 43rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211. In the first embodiment, the case where the engaged portion 332 is formed on the fixing member 320 has been described, but the engaged portion 43101 in the 43rd embodiment is the substrate box 43100 pivotally supported by the fixing member 43320. Is formed in. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the back case 43300 according to the 43rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211. FIG. 207 is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 43300 according to the 43rd embodiment. FIG. 208 (a) is a front view of the back case 43300, and FIG. 208 (b) is a rear view of the back case 43300. 209 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 43300 in the CCIXa-CCIXa line of FIG. 208 (b), and FIG. 209 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 43300 in the CCIXb-CCIXb line of FIG. 209 (a). It is a figure. Note that FIGS. 208 and 209 show a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the substrate box 43100 (engaged portion 43101) are engaged.

As shown in FIGS. 207 to 209, the rear case 43300 according to the 43rd embodiment is erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 43301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four pieces of the bottom wall portion 43301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 18302, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 43301 and 18302. Further, the back case 43300 is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 43301 (the box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 43300 on the back side. A fixing member 43320 for fixing (shafting) the board box 43100 (main control device 110) is provided.

A front view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 43301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 43301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is said that. Further, the bottom wall portion 43301 is located below the first opening 43301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 43320 and the first opening 43301c (in the direction of arrow D), and is a projecting portion that projects to the front side. 18301b and.

The projecting portion 18301b is a protrusion that pivotally supports the engaging member 18310, and is projected in a columnar shape from the front surface of the bottom wall portion 43301, as in the 18th embodiment. Further, a hole for screwing a screw is recessed in the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion 18301b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 18310 from coming out of the protruding portion 18301b by screwing a screw into the protruding portion 18301b while the engaging member 18310 is arranged in the rear case 18300.

The center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the rear case 43300 is located closer to the opening 18302a of the outer wall portion 18302 than the protruding portion 18301b of the rear case 43300. As a result, in a state where no external force is applied, the force that causes the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 to rotate in the direction of protruding from the opening 18302a of the rear case 43300 is the engaging member 18310. Is acted on. Therefore, when the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 43320 is incomplete, the engaging member 18310 is projected to the outside of the rear case 43300 to engage the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 43320. You can prevent forgetting.

The first opening 43301c is an opening for inserting the engaged portion 43101 of the substrate box 43100, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the engaged portion 43101 in the front view. As a result, the accessory device (after arranging the rotating unit 700, the engaged portion 43101 of the board box 43100 can be arranged from the back side of the back case 43300 to the front side of the back case 43300 inside the back case 43300. can.

Further, a protruding wall 43301c1 for engaging a locking portion 331 formed on one side (arrow R direction side) of the fixing member 43320, which will be described later, is engaged with the edge portion of the first opening 43301c (FIG. 209 (a)). (See) and the second protrusion 43301c2 (see FIG. 209 (a)) for engaging the second locking portion 43336 formed on the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 43320, which will be described later. Be thrust.

The protrusion tip portions on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion 43301c1 and the second protrusion 43301c2 are bent in opposite directions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 43320 from being shaken and disengaged from the fixing member 43320 in a state where the fixing member 43320 described later is engaged with the protrusion 43301c1 and the second protrusion 43301c2.

As described in the 18th embodiment, the projecting portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports the engaging member 18310, and is projecting in a columnar shape from the front surface of the bottom wall portion 43301. Therefore, the engaging member 18310 is arranged on the back case 43300 in a state where it can rotate about the center of the projecting portion 18310b.

The fixing member 43320 is composed of an intermediate member 43330 that engages with the bottom wall portion 43301 of the back case 43300, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intermediate member 43330.

The interposition member 43330 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and has a locking portion 331 projecting from the side surface on one side (arrow R direction side) and a box-shaped bottom surface (side surface on the arrow B direction side). An insertion hole 333 that opens in a columnar shape (see FIG. 39 (b)), a protrusion 334 protruding from the back side (see FIG. 39 (b)), and one side from the inner surface of the other side (arrow L direction side). It mainly includes a second locking portion 43336 that projects toward it.

The locking portion 331 is provided with an opening for engaging one side (arrow R direction side) of the fixing member 43320 with the bottom wall portion 43301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 43301c described above. The protruding wall 43301c1 projecting from the wall is inserted. As a result, when the interposing member 43330 (fixing member 43320) is arranged in the back case 43300, the protrusion 43301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 331 of the interposing member 43330 and one side of the interposing member 43330 (arrow R). The directional side) can be locked with respect to the rear case 43300.

As described above, the second locking portion 43336 is a protrusion for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 43320 with the second protruding wall 43301c2 formed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 43301. In front view, it is formed at a position overlapping the bent portion of the tip of the second protrusion 43301c2. Further, when the second locking portion 43336 is engaged with the second protrusion 43301c2 (the state shown in FIG. 209 (a)), the second locking portion 43336 is on the front side of the bent portion of the tip of the second protrusion 43301c2. Be located. As a result, it is possible to prevent the other side of the fixing member 43320 from moving to the back side.

Further, the front surface of the second locking portion 43336 is inclined toward the back surface side from the projecting base end side (the other side of the fixing member 43320) toward the projecting tip side (one side of the fixing member 43320). Thereby, when the second locking portion 43336 is engaged with the second protruding wall 43301c2, the protruding tip of the second protruding wall 43301c2 can be easily slid along the front surface of the second locking portion 43301c2. Therefore, the fixing member 43320 can be engaged with the back side of the back case 43300 (bottom wall portion 43301).

The fixing member 43320 inserts the protruding wall 43301c1 of the bottom wall portion 43301 inside the opening of the locking portion 331 on one side, and then inserts the second locking portion 43336 on the other side into the bottom wall portion 43301 side (front side). ), And the second locking portion 43336 is moved to the front side of the bent tip of the second protruding wall 43301c2 of the bottom wall portion 43301 while elastically deforming the other side of the fixing member 43320. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 43301).

The substrate box 43100 is formed in a rectangular shape having a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main control device 110 is arranged inside. Further, the substrate box 43100 includes a bearing portion 117 projecting from one end side (arrow R direction side) and an engaged portion 43101 projecting from the front surface of the substrate box 43100.

The engaged portion 43101 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310 as described above, and the substrate box 43100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 44300 (FIGS. 208 (a) and 208 (b). ), The protrusion dimension toward the back case 43300 side (arrow F direction side) is set to a dimension exceeding the front surface of the engaging member 18310 arranged on the back case 43300. Further, the engaged portion 43101 includes an opening 43101a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view on the front side of the bottom wall portion 43301 of the back case 43300.

Further, the engaged portion 43101 is in a state in which the substrate box 43100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 43300 (a state in which the substrate box 43100 is engaged with the engaging member 18310 (state shown in FIG. 209 (a)). ), It is formed at a position horizontally adjacent to the other side of the fixing member 43320. As a result, when the fixing member 43320 is forcibly pulled toward the back side due to the player's fraud, the other side of the fixing member 43320 is in the direction of disengaging the engagement between the second locking portion 43336 and the second protrusion 43301c2. Elastic deformation can be suppressed. On the other hand, in a state where the board box 43100 is not arranged on the back side of the back case 43300 (a state in which the board box 43100 is not engaged with the engaging member 18310 (a state shown in FIG. 210 (a))), the substrate box 43100 is covered. Since the engaging portion 43101 can be arranged at a position away from the other side of the fixing member 43320, the fixing member 43320 can be easily engaged with the engaged portion 43101 (or the fixed b diagram 43320 is engaged with the engaged portion 43320). It can be removed from 43101).

The opening 43101a is formed by opening at a position corresponding to the displacement region of the engaging member 18310 excluding the engaging portion 18316. As a result, the engaging member 18310 can be inserted inside the opening 43101a to engage the engaged portion 43101 with the engaging member 18310.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the substrate box 43100 will be described with reference to FIG. 210. 210 (a) and 210 (b) are cross-sectional views of the rear case 43300. It should be noted that FIGS. 210 (a) and 210 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional views of FIG. 209 (a), and are in the order of FIGS. 210 (a), 210 (b) and 209 (a). The transition state when engaging the member 18310 with the substrate box 43100 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a), when engaging the engaging member 18310 and the substrate box 43100, first, as described above, the intermediate member 43330 and the shaft support member 340 are fastened (integrally). The fixed member 43320 in the state (fixing member 43320 in the state shown in FIG. 207) is engaged with the back side of the back case 43300 (bottom wall portion 43301).

Next, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), the other side opposite to the one on which the bearing portion 117 of the board box 43100 is formed is pressed toward the back side of the back case 43300 to form the board box 43100. The substrate box 43100 is rotated with respect to the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 43320) about a caulking metal fitting (not shown) that connects the shaft support member 340. As a result, the front surface of the board box 43100 is arranged at a position substantially parallel to the back surface of the rear case 43300, and the opening 43101a of the engaged portion 43101 is passed through the first opening 43301c of the rear case 43300 to the bottom wall portion 43301. The opening 43101a is arranged in the displacement region of the engaging member 18310 while being arranged on the front side of the.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 209 (a), the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 is rotationally displaced toward the opening 43101a to rotate and displace the engaging member 18310 to one side (engagement) of the engaging member 18310. The end portion (on the side of the portion 181316) can be inserted into the opening 43101a while being elastically deformed and arranged at a position via the engaged portion 43101.

Finally, the other end on the side opposite to the one on which the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 43100 is formed is directed toward the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300 and is on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the substrate box 43100. ) And fix it with the screw fastened to the back case 43300. As a result, the substrate box 43100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 43300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state. The work of fastening the other side of the board box 43100 to the back side of the back case 43300 with screws may be performed before engaging the engaging member 18310 with the engaged portion 43101.

According to the back case 43300 assembled as described above, since the engaged portion 43101 with which the engaging member 18300 is engaged is formed on the substrate box 43100, the substrate box 43100 is attached to the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 43320). If the board box 43100 is not pivotally supported (the board box 43100 is forgotten to be arranged), the engaging member 18300 cannot be engaged.

Further, as described above, in the engaging member 18300, in a state where no external force is applied, the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 protrudes from the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300 due to gravity. A gravitational force is applied to the engaging member 18310. Therefore, if the board box 43100 is forgotten to be arranged, the fixing member 43320 and the board box 43310 are arranged on the bottom wall portion 43301 of the back case 43300 by locating the engaging member 18310 on the outside of the back case 43300. It is possible to make the operator aware of the abnormality (forgot to arrange the board box 43100). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the board box 43100 (main control device 110) that controls the pachinko machine 10, the board box 43100 is arranged in a post-process (for example, at the time of operation check) of the assembly process. You can easily discover that there is nothing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being introduced into a store (for example, a pachinko parlor) due to a defect (a state in which parts are forgotten to be attached).

Further, as in the 18th embodiment, when the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 43101 are incompletely engaged, the engaging member 18310 is projected to the outside of the back case 18300. , Distance dimension LR1 from the end of the engaging member 18310 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13 to the right end (arrow R direction side) of the rear case 43300 (see FIG. 164 (a)). Is set to be larger than the inner left-right direction dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164 (b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 on which the game board 13 is arranged. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from being arranged on the outer frame 11. As a result, it is possible to notice that the pachinko machine 10 has forgotten to arrange the board box 43100 before the pachinko machine 10 is assembled and the operation is checked. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of forgetting to arrange the board box 43100. It is possible to prevent electricity from being passed through the machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent other substrates and electrical components from failing due to forgetting to arrange the substrate box 43100.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, when the engaging member 18310 is not engaged with the engaged portion 43101 due to factors such as resistance due to contact with the protruding portion 18301b serving as the rotation axis, the engaging member 18310 is engaged. The case where the joining member 18310 is stopped at the engaging position with the engaged portion 43101 will be described. 211 (a) and 211 (b) are cross-sectional views of the rear case 43300. It should be noted that FIGS. 211 (a) and 211 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional views of FIG. 209 (a). Further, FIGS. 211 (a) and 211 (b) show a state before the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 43101 of the substrate box 43100 are engaged with each other, and FIGS. 211 (a) and 211 (b) show. The state in which the substrate box 43100 is displaced in the order of (b) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a), when the engaging member 18310 is not engaged with the engaged portion 43101 due to factors such as resistance due to contact with the protruding portion 18301b serving as the rotation axis, the engaging member 18310 is engaged. When the mating member 18310 is stopped at the engaging position with the engaged portion 43101, the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 (the end on the side in the L direction of the arrow in FIG. 211 (a)) becomes the engaged portion. It is arranged on the displacement locus (virtual line A shown in FIGS. 211 (a) and 211 (b)) of the protruding tip portion on the side surface of the 43109 on the bearing portion 117 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), when the substrate box 43100 is rotated with respect to the fixing member 43320, the side surface of the engaged portion 43109 on the bearing portion 117 side is the first piece of the engaging member 18310. It can be brought into contact with the tip end face of 18311.

In this case, the displacement direction of the engaged portion 43109 and the displacement direction when the engaging member 18310 is disengaged are set to be substantially the same. As a result, the force for rotating the substrate box 43100 toward the bottom wall portion 43301 of the back case 43300 can be used for the force for pushing back the engaging member 18310 via the engaged portion 43101.

Here, since the engaged portion 43101 that engages with the engaging member 18310 is formed on the board box 43100 (an expensive component), it is necessary to replace the board box 43100 when the engaged portion 43101 is damaged. , There was a risk that the manufacturing cost would increase.

Further, when the engaging member 18310 is not engaged with the engaged portion 43101 due to factors such as resistance due to contact with the protruding portion 18301b serving as the rotation axis, the engaging member 18310 is engaged. When stopped at the engaging position with the portion 43101, the engaging member 18300 is displaced from the back side of the bottom wall portion 43301 of the back case 43300 to the front side of the bottom wall portion 43302 in the displacement region of the engaged portion 43101. Be arranged. Therefore, when the substrate box 43100 is displaced, the engaged portion 43101 may collide with the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 43101 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 43rd embodiment, when the fixing member 43320 is arranged on the bottom wall portion 43301 of the back case 43300, the engagement member 18300 is arranged at a predetermined position (a part of the engaging member 18310 is on the back surface). When not arranged at the position protruding from the opening 18302a of the case 43300), the engaging member 18300 is set to a predetermined position by utilizing the force of moving the substrate box 43100 toward the back side of the bottom wall portion 43301 of the back case 43300. It can be displaced to a position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaged portion 43101 of the substrate box 43100 from being damaged.

Next, the back case 44300 according to the 44th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. In the first embodiment, the case where the movement of the engaging member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted into the back base 720 of the rotating unit 700 has been described, but in the 44th embodiment, the engaging member 44310 is the fixing member 320. The movement of the engaging member 44310 is restricted by being engaged with the projecting portion 44102 projecting from the substrate box 44100. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the back case 44300 according to the 44th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. FIG. 212 is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 44300 according to the 44th embodiment. 213 (a) is a front view of the rear case 44300, and FIG. 213 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 44300 in line CCXIIIb-CCXIIIb of FIG. 213 (a). In FIGS. 213 (a) and 213 (b), a state in which the engaging member 44310 and the substrate box 44100 (protruding portion 44102) are engaged with each other is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 212 and 213, the back case 44300 according to the 44th embodiment is erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four pieces of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 302, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 301 and 302. Further, the back case 44300 includes an engaging member 44310 arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (arrow F direction side)) and the back case 44300 (bottom wall portion 301). A fixing member 44320, which is arranged on the back side of the box and fixes (shafts) the board box 44100 (main control device 110), is provided.

The engaging member 44310 has a crank-like outer shape when viewed from the front, and extends in a direction parallel to each other, the first piece 44311 and the second piece 312, and the first piece 44311 and the second piece 312. It is composed of a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 44311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the second piece 312. Further, a sliding groove 314 is formed in each of the first piece 44311 and the second piece 312.

The first piece 44311 has an end portion on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected as an engaging portion with the fixing member 44320 described later. An engaging portion 316 that is formed and projects outward on both sides in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 44311, and the engaging portions 316 at the two locations. From the substantially intermediate position toward the recess 44317 recessed in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the first piece 311 and the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 44300. It includes a protruding operator 315.

The recess 44317 is formed by notching the first piece 44311 in the thickness direction (arrow FB direction), and is formed from one side (arrow R direction side) end of the first piece 44311 to the other side (arrow L direction side). ) Is recessed. Therefore, one side of the first piece 44311 is bifurcated. As a result, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 44311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 44311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 44310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 44320. The method of engaging the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 is the same as the method of engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

Further, the concave portion 44317 is formed on the concave bottom surface recessed toward the other side (arrow L direction side), and the third piece 313 side (arrow L direction side) toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (arrow B direction side). ) Is provided with an inclined surface 44317a.

The inclined surface 44317a is a surface for sliding the protruding portion 44102 when the protruding tip of the protruding portion 44102 of the substrate box 44100, which will be described later, comes into contact with the inclined surface 44317a, and the substrate box 44100 is on the back side of the bottom wall portion 301. An angle of 45 degrees or less in the direction opposite to the sliding direction when the engaging member 44310 is engaged with the fixing member 44320 with respect to the moving direction (arrow FB direction) of the projecting portion 44102 when it is arranged in It is formed with an inclination (acute angle). As a result, when the tip of the projecting portion 44102 of the substrate box 44100 comes into contact with the projecting portion 44102, the projecting portion 44102 can be easily slid and displaced along the inclined surface 44317a.

The fixing member 44320 is composed of a back case 44300 and a separate member. As a result, the substrate box 44100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 44320 having a smaller outer shape than the rear case 44300. Therefore, the substrate box 44100 can be fixed as compared with the case where the fixing member 44320 is integrally formed with the rear case 44300. It can be easily arranged. As a result, the board box 44100 can be easily arranged in the back case 44300 in a state where the board box 44100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 44320.

The fixing member 320 is composed of an interposing member 330 that engages with the engaging member 44310 described above, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the interposing member 330. As a result, the shaft support member 340 can be used as a diversion product having the same shape as the fixing member of another gaming machine. Further, the shaft support member 340 is caulked and fastened to the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 44100 (main control device 110) described later. The substrate box 44100 is held in a rotatable state with respect to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with a caulking metal fitting.

The outer shape of the board box 44100 in front view is formed into a horizontally long rectangular rectangle, and the main control device 110 is arranged inside. Further, the substrate box 44100 includes a bearing portion 117 projecting from one end side (arrow R direction side) and a projecting portion 44102 projecting from the front surface of the substrate box 44100. The projecting portion 44102 of the substrate box 44100 is formed of an elastically deformable resin material, and can be elastically deformed when it comes into contact with the engaging member 44310 as described later.

The projecting portion 44102 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 44310 as described above, and the substrate box 44100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 44300 (FIGS. 213 (a) and 213 (b)). The protrusion dimension toward the rear case 44300 side (arrow F direction side) is set to a dimension exceeding the front side (arrow F direction side) of the engaging member 44310 arranged on the rear case 44300. A bent portion 44012a that bends toward the third piece 313 side (arrow L direction side) of the engaging member 44310 is provided at a tip portion beyond the front side of the joining member 44310.

Further, in the protruding portion 44102, when the substrate box 44100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 44300 and the engaging member 44310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the base end side excluding the bent portion 44102a is It is arranged inside the recess 44317 of the engaging member 44310, and is arranged at a position adjacent to the recessed bottom surface (inclined surface 44317a) of the recess 44317. Therefore, the bent portion 44102a can be arranged at a position overlapping with the engaging member 44310 in the front view.

As a result, the board box 44100 is rotated around the caulking metal fitting (the portion axially supported by the support portion 342) in a state where the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged, and the board box 44100 (main control device 110) is rotated. ) Can be prevented from being replaced with an invalid board box.

Further, the width dimension of the projecting portion 44102 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension of the recess 44317 of the engaging member 44310 in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first piece 44311 of the engaging member 44310 from being elastically deformed inside the recess 44317 from the state in which the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 from being illegally disengaged and the board box 44100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 44320 from being replaced with an illegal board. ..

In the 44th embodiment, after the board box 44100 is arranged on the back side (position shown in FIG. 213 (b)) of the back case 44300, the operator 315 is inserted between the back case 44300 and the board box 44100. By operating, the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged with each other. As a result, the bent portion 44102a can be arranged on the front side of the engaging member 44310 without the protruding portion 44102 of the substrate box 44100 and the engaging member 44310 coming into contact with each other.

Next, a case where the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged with each other before the substrate box 44100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 44300 will be described with reference to FIG. 214.

FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (c) are cross-sectional views of the rear case 44300. It should be noted that FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (c) correspond to the cross-sectional views of the rear case 44300 in FIG. 213 (b). Further, FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (c) show a transition state when the substrate box 44100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 44300 in a state where the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged. Are shown in order.

As shown in FIG. 214 (a), in the state before the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged (the state in which the engaging member 44310 is arranged in the L direction of the arrow), the engaging member 44310 is a substrate box. It is located outside the displacement region of the protrusion 44102 of the 44100. Therefore, in a state where the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are not engaged, the substrate box 44100 is rotated around the caulking metal fitting (the portion pivotally supported by the support portion 342) without contacting the engaging member 44310. It can be arranged on the back side of the back case 44300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214 (b), in the state where the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged (the state in which the engaging member 44310 is arranged in the direction of the arrow R), the engaging member 44310 is The position is set so as to overlap the displacement region of the projecting portion 44102 of the board box 44100.

Here, the board box 44100 is a component including the main control device 110 and the like, and is more expensive than other components (for example, the fixing member 44320). Therefore, in a state where the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged, the board box 44100 rotates around the caulking metal fitting (the portion axially supported by the support portion 342) and is arranged on the back side of the back case 44300. At that time, the projecting portion 44102 may come into contact with the engaging member 44310 and the substrate box 44100 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 44th embodiment, since the engaging member 44310 includes the inclined surface 44317a in the recess 44317, the tip end portion of the projecting portion 44102 abuts on the inclined surface 44317a as shown in FIG. 214 (c). Can be made to. As a result, the substrate box 44100 is elastic in the direction in which the projecting portion 44102 is inclined toward the front side of the inclined surface 44317a (arrow R direction side) by utilizing the force of pushing the substrate box 44100 toward the front side (arrow F side direction side). It can be transformed. Therefore, the tip of the projecting portion 44102 can be displaced to the front side along the inclined surface 44317a while elastically deforming the projecting portion 44102. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 44100 from being damaged due to the protrusion 44102 coming into contact with the engaging member 44310.

Further, a part of the elastic recovery force of the projecting portion 44102 when the projecting portion 44102 is slid along the inclined surface 44317a is in a direction of disengaging the engaging member 44310 from the fixing member 44320. It acts in the direction of arrow L). Therefore, when the engagement between the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 is incomplete, the engagement between the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 can be released. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) from being assembled in a state where the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are incompletely engaged.

When the bent portion 44102a is displaced beyond the front side of the engaging member 44310, the projecting portion 44102 returns its elastic deformation and is arranged at the positions shown in FIGS. 213 (a) and 213 (b). Will be done.

Next, the back case 45300 according to the 45th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217. In the 18th embodiment or the 43rd embodiment, the case where the engaging member 18310 is engaged with either the fixing member 18320 or the substrate box 43100 has been described, but the back case 45300 in the 45th embodiment has been described. The engaging member 18310 is engaged with both the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the back case 45300 according to the 45th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216. FIG. 215 is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 45300 according to the 45th embodiment. 216 (a) is a front view of the back case 45300, and FIG. 216 (b) is a rear view of the back case 45300. 217 (a) is a front view of the back case 45300, and FIG. 216 (b) is a rear view of the back case 45300. In addition, in FIG. 216 (a) and FIG. 216 (b), the state in which the engaging member 18300 is engaged with the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100 is shown, and in FIGS. 217 (a) and 217 (b), the engaging member 18300 is engaged. The state in which the joining member 18300 is engaged only with the fixing member 320 (not engaged with the substrate box 45100) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 215 to 217, the back case 45300 according to the 45th embodiment is erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 45301 having a substantially rectangular front view and the four pieces of the bottom wall portion 45301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall portion 18302, and is formed in a box shape in which one side (front side) is opened by each of the wall portions 45301 and 18302. Further, the back case 45300 includes an engaging member 18310 arranged on the front side (box-shaped open side (arrow F side direction side)) of the bottom wall portion 45301 and a back case 45300 (bottom wall portion 45301). ), And a fixing member 320 for fixing (shafting) the board box 45100 (main control device 110).

A front view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 45301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 45301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. Will be done. Further, the bottom wall portion 45301 is located below the first opening 45301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 45320 and the first opening 45301c (in the direction of arrow D), and is a projecting portion that projects toward the front side. 18301b and.

The projecting portion 18301b is a protrusion that pivotally supports the engaging member 18310, and is projected in a columnar shape from the front surface of the bottom wall portion 45301, as in the 18th embodiment. Further, a hole for screwing a screw is recessed in the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion 18301b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 18310 from coming out of the protruding portion 18301b by screwing a screw into the protruding portion 18301b while the engaging member 18310 is arranged in the rear case 18300.

The center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the back case 45300 is located closer to the opening 18302a of the outer wall portion 18302 than the protruding portion 18301b of the back case 45300. As a result, in a state where no external force is applied, the force that causes the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 to rotate in the direction of protruding from the opening 18302a of the rear case 45300 is the engaging member 18310. Is acted on. Therefore, when the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 45320 is incomplete, the engaging member 18310 is projected to the outside of the back case 45300, and the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 45320 are engaged with each other. You can prevent forgetting.

The first opening 45301c is an opening for inserting the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 and the engaged portion 45101 of the substrate box 45100 described later, and corresponds to the two engaged portions 332 and 45101. A long horizontal opening is made at the position. As a result, the accessory device (after the rotating unit 700 is arranged, the engaged portion 45101 of the board box 45100 can be arranged from the back side of the back case 45300 to the front side of the back case 45300. can.

Further, a protrusion 45301c1 for engaging the locking portion 331 formed on one side (arrow R direction side) of the fixing member 45320 is projected from the edge of the first opening 45301c. The tip of the protrusion 45301c1 is bent in the direction opposite to the displacement direction (arrow L direction) (arrow R direction) when the engaging member 18310, which will be described later, is engaged with the engaged portion 45101. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 is engaged with the engaged portion 45101, the engaging portion 45101 is pressed against the engaging member 18310, so that the fixing member 45320 moves in the displacement direction of the engaging member 18310. , It is possible to prevent the protruding wall 45301c1 from coming out from the opening of the locking portion 331. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rear case 45300 from being disengaged from one side of the fixing member 45320 (the side in the direction of the arrow R).

As described in the 18th embodiment, the projecting portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports the engaging member 18310, and is projecting in a columnar shape from the front surface of the bottom wall portion 45301. Therefore, the engaging member 18310 is arranged on the back case 45300 in a state where it can rotate about the center of the projecting portion 18310b.

The outer shape of the board box 45100 when viewed from the front is formed into a horizontally long rectangular rectangle, and the main control device 110 is arranged inside. Further, the substrate box 45100 includes a bearing portion 117 protruding from one end side (direction side in the direction of the arrow R) and an engaged portion 45101 projecting from the front surface of the substrate box 45100.

The engaged portion 45101 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310 in a state where the tip on one side is inserted inside the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320, and the substrate box 45100 is a rear case 45300 (bottom). In the state of being arranged on the back side of the wall portion 45301) (position shown in FIG. 216 (a)), the engaging dimension in which the protrusion dimension toward the back case 45300 side (arrow F direction side) is arranged on the back case 45300. The dimensions are set to exceed the front surface of the member 18310. Further, the engaged portion 45101 includes an opening 45101a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in the front view on the front side of the bottom wall portion 45301 of the back case 45300.

The opening 45101a is an opening for inserting the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 inward, and is opened at a position corresponding to the displacement region of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 excluding the engaging member 18316. It is formed. As a result, the engaging member 18310 can be inserted inside the opening 45101a to engage the engaged portion 45101 and the engaging portion 45310.

Further, the engaged portion 45101 is arranged at a position different from the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 in the displacement direction when the engaging member 18310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 at a predetermined distance. .. Thereby, after the engaging member 18310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the engaged portion 332 of the engaged portion 45101 and the engaging member 18310 can be engaged with each other.

The distance between the engaged portion 45101 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is set to be equal to or greater than the length dimension of the engaging portion 18316 in the displacement direction of the engaging member 18310. As a result, the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 can be arranged between the two engaged portions 332 and 45101 in the front view (see FIG. 217 (a)). As a result, the engaging member 18310 can be engaged with the fixing member 320 and can be maintained in a state of being disengaged from the substrate box 45100.

As a result, the substrate box 45100 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the fixing member 320 while the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 18310 are engaged with each other and the fixing member 320 is arranged on the back side of the back case 45300. can.

According to the back case 45300 configured as described above, when the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100 are arranged in the back case 45300 (bottom wall portion 45301), the board box is first as shown in FIG. 217. The engaging member 18310 is rotated while the fixing member 320 in which the 45100 is connected by the caulking metal fitting is arranged on the back surface of the back case 45300 (bottom wall portion 45301), and the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 is fixed to the fixing member 320. Engage with the engaged portion 332 of. As a result, the substrate box 45100 can be supported by the fixing member 320 in a non-engaged state with the engaging member 18310.

Therefore, the substrate box 45100 can be rotated around the caulking metal fitting (the portion axially supported by the support portion 342) at the position on the back side of the back case 45300 (bottom wall portion 4531). Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the connection of the wiring to the board box 45100 (main control device 110).

Next, as shown in FIG. 217, after rotating the board box 45100 toward the back case 45300 and arranging the front surface of the board box 45100 at a position parallel to the back surface of the back case 45300 (bottom wall portion 45301). , The engaging member 18100 is rotated toward the engaged portion 45101 side (arrow L direction side) of the substrate box 45100. As a result, the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18100 can be inserted inside the opening 45101a of the engaged portion 45101. As a result, the board box 45100 can be fixed to the back side of the back case 45300.

Therefore, in the 45th embodiment, the engaging member 18300 can have a role of fixing the two members, the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100, to the back side of the back case 45300. As a result, the board box 45100 can be attached to the back side of the back case 45300 without fixing the other side (arrow L direction side) opposite to the bearing portion 117 side of the board box 45100 to the back side of the back case 45300. It can be fixed to and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the engaging portion (engaging portion between the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 45101) for fixing the other side (arrow L direction side) of the rear case 45300 to the rear case 45300 is the rear case 45300. It can be arranged between the bottom wall portion 45301 and the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) facing each other. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the engaging portion of the board box 45100 from the outside of the back case 45300 and the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 45100 from being illegally disengaged and the board box 45100 (main control device 110) from being replaced by an illegal main control device.

To remove the board box 45100 from the back case 45300 in the 45th embodiment, the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the back case 45300 are disassembled from the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) in an integrally assembled state. After that, each accessory device (for example, the rotating unit 700) arranged inside the back case 45300 (front side of the bottom wall portion 45301) is removed. As a result, the engaging portion between the engaging member 18310 and the substrate box 45100 can be accessed, and the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 is elastically deformed so that the substrate box 45100, the fixing member 320, and the engaging member 18310 are joined to each other. The engagement can be disengaged.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In the first embodiment, in order to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position, the drive motor KM2 is driven, but the third position to the second position or the first position is followed. The drive for retracting to one position may be driven by an urging spring. For example, an urging spring is arranged between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470 so that an elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the payout operation, the drive of the drive motor KM3 is turned off, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the second position or the second position by the urging force of the urging spring. It can be displaced to one position side.

Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced by using the time until the driving force of the driving motor KM2 is switched at the third position, so that the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. It is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the operation.

That is, when the game ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the discharged game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force that displaces the base member 470 downward by the reaction due to the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is applied to cancel the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where two engaging protrusions 882 that regulate the rotation of the rotating body 800 are formed on the side surface of the rotating body 800 at a predetermined interval has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, a plurality of them may be continuously provided on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotating body 800 can be restricted from rotating by an external force when the lid member 770 is opened.

In the first embodiment, the case where the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831 has been described, but the opening 831 is on the opposite side of the communication hole 881b of the rotating body 800. It may be formed on the side surface of. That is, openings may be formed on both side surfaces of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, one of which may be the inlet of the sphere and the other of which may be the outlet of the sphere. In this case, since the ball throwing path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (rotating body 800) can be used as the throwing path, especially when there is no placement space on the back side of the game board 13. , The throwing route can be secured without increasing the size of the game board 13.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 800 is formed in a columnar shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof may be used as a shape. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be complicated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the effect is switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 is formed so as to be operable by the player has been described, but a push-type button may be provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654. In this case, the player can perform not only the operation of applying the rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654, but also the operation of pressing the push button or the operation of combining the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the rotation operation unit 8654. .. As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of operation modes of the rotation operation unit 8654, which can give the player an interest.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are in mesh with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a torque limiter or the like that blocks the transmission of the driving force when an overload is applied may be provided between the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotating state, the transmission of the driving force of the rotation from the drive motor KM6 can be blocked, and the continuation of the rotation of the rotation operation unit 8654 can be suppressed. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when the player inputs a rotation in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction to the rotation operation unit 8654.

Further, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654, when the player's finger or clothes is sandwiched between the rotation operation unit 8654 and the upper plate 8017 on the rotation direction side, the rotation is stopped. It is possible to prevent the player's fingers and clothes from being further pinched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being caught between the rotation operation unit 8654 and the upper plate 8017 and being injured.

In the eighth embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 is set to the A direction, but the rotation direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the player can be made to perform the movement accompanying the production of the gaming machine, and the production effect can be improved. For example, by tapping the rotation operation unit 8654 with the left hand so as to rotate to the right, it is possible to produce an effect such as tapping (slap) a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the substrate box 100 is arranged on the fixing member 320, and the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engaging member 310 to prevent the substrate box 100 from being replaced with an illegal substrate. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other members (for example, the third symbol) can be provided as long as they are arranged on the fixing member 320 and have an effect of suppressing unauthorized removal. It may be a display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting an illegal input such as an illegal radio wave or vibration).

In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j formed in the first unit 551, and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are formed. The case where they are formed at positions facing each other has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are formed in the first concave portion 571h, the first concave portion 571h, and the third convex portion 564d. The first concave portion 571h is arranged upstream of the two concave portions 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and the flowing game ball is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d. , The second recess 571i and the third recess 571j may be formed so as to be accepted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the thickness dimension of the decorative member 154 is made smaller than the recessed depth of the recess 151b of the main body 151 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative member 154 may be formed of an elastically deformable material and may be formed thicker than the recessed depth of the recessed 151b of the main body 151. In this case, the main body portion 151 can be arranged in a state of being in contact with the base plate 60 by compressing and elastically deforming the general winning opening unit 150 when it is arranged on the base plate 60.

In the first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is arranged at the position of the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 applied from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 act in a direction of canceling each other. The case has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end portion of the cam member 422 and the plate-shaped projection 431b abut may be set in the direction from the abutting point toward the axial center of the shaft portion 422a. .. According to this, it is possible to suppress the action of the force in the direction of rotation about the shaft portion 422a on the cam member 422.

In the first embodiment, the case where the other end side of the board box 100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 300 by screws has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the other end side of the board box 100 may be fixed by a sealing tool that cannot be removed when engaged with the back case 300. More specifically, a columnar sealing tool through which openings formed at the other end side of the back case 300 are inserted into the insertion portions recessed at a plurality of places on the back side of the back case 300 is inserted. By engaging the insertion portion and the sealing tool, the substrate box 100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

When removing the board box 100, the other end side of the board box 100 can be removed from the back case 300 by cutting the engaging portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool. Further, when the other end side of the board box 100 is arranged in the back case 300 again, a new sealing tool is inserted through the unused opening of the board box 100, and the unused insertion portion of the back case 300 is inserted. The other end side of the board box 100 can be arranged on the back case 300 by engaging with.

In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view is formed to be larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end portion of the decorative member 154 overlaps the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction. Although the case where the arrangement is performed in a state has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

In this case, by forming the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 from the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed of a single sheet. By cutting the decorative member 154 from the sheet, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c can be formed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form the decorative member 154 in a separate process, the yield when forming the decorative member 154 can be improved.

When the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in the front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the second opening 60b to form the decorative member 154. It is preferable to arrange the front surface with the decorative member 60c on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c coincide with each other in the front-rear direction in the front view, the player can recognize the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, which is projected from the inner surface of the front side (arrow F direction side) of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 551 toward the back side (arrow B side direction side), The first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the second concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k are formed and are recessed toward the back side on the inner surface of the back side of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 511. Although the case where the third recess 571j is provided has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, even if the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j and the first concave portion 571h, the second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k are formed on the inner surfaces on the opposite sides in the front-rear direction in the front view. good.

Further, a recess may be formed on the inner surface on the front side at a position facing the second recess 571i so as to be recessed toward the front image. In this case, the throwing space can be increased by the amount that the recess is provided in the throwing space of the curved path WK1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from becoming too slow on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the curved path WK1.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 9431b1 projects toward the front side toward the cam member 422 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed as an inclined surface in which the amount of protrusion toward the front side is reduced toward the cam member 422.

In this case, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end portion of the cam member 422 abuts on the plate-shaped protrusion 9531a, the cam member 422 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 from swinging in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the position of the second displacement state.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the case where the light emitting body 11491a is formed at a position higher than the center of the game ball accepted by the ball receiving portion 467 (in the direction of arrow U) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting body 11491a may be arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, it is preferable that the height position of the transmission portion 11451b is formed from the center of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 to the upper side of the center.

According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is blocked by the game ball, the shadow of the game ball formed on the transmitting portion 11451b is formed in a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game ball. can. As a result, the roundness of the game ball can be formed in the shadow formed on the transparent portion 11451b, so that the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467.

In the twelfth and 39th embodiments described above, the case where the displacement of the third piece 12467e and 39467e is performed by the load of the game ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sensor for detecting that the game ball has passed is attached to the ball receiving portions 12467 and 39467, and the third piece 12467e, due to the detection of the game ball by the sensor, The 39467e may be displaced independently. According to this, since it is not necessary to displace the second pieces 12467d and 39467d by the load of the game ball, the reliability of the displacement of the ball receiving portions 12467 and 39467 can be improved. In this case, a driving device that independently displaces the third piece 12467e and 39467e is arranged in the ball receiving portion 12467 and 39467.

In the twelfth and 39th embodiments, the case where the rotation axis when the third piece 12467e and 39467e are rotationally displaced is formed in the first piece 12467c and 39467c has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e may be inserted into the openings formed in the rack 466, and the third pieces 12467e and 39467e may be rotationally displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, since the distance between the rotating shaft and the connecting portion between the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased, the displacement amount of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e with respect to the displacement amount of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased. .. As a result, the shielding plate 12467e1 of the third piece 12467e can be easily arranged on the front side of the light emitting body 11491a. In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed in an elongated hole into which the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the first path member 13560 is the first. The two-path member 13570 may be moved in the front-rear direction. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front surface of the base plate 60 (game board 13) prevents the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the first, tenth, and twenty-fifth embodiments described above, the case where the decorative members 154, 10154, 25154 are attached by the adhesive tapes 154a, 10154a, 25154a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, An adhesive composed of a liquid material may be used.

In the thirteenth, 32nd, 33rd, 34th, and 35th embodiments, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 arranged on the front side are formed of a non-light transmitting material. Although the case where the space between the 1-path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the 2nd path member 13570, 32570, 34570 is difficult to be recognized by the player has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 is formed with an opening that is opened in a slit shape having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560. A game ball flowing down between the second path member 13570, 32570, and 34570 may be made visible to the player through the opening. In this case, the distance to the adjacent openings of the plurality of slit-shaped openings is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize the game ball flowing down between the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 through the opening.

Further, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 are formed with openings that are opened in a circle smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second. A game ball flowing down between the path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 may be made visible to the player through the opening. In this case, the width dimension of the plurality of openings adjacent to each other is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the opening of the opening can be made smaller than that in the case where the opening is formed in a slit shape, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member are passed through the opening. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the distance between the opponents of 13570, 32570, and 34570.

In the above 18th embodiment, the case where the portion (engaged portion 18332) to which the engaging member 18310 is engaged is formed on the fixing member 18320 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaged portion 18332 to which the engaging member 18310 is engaged may be formed on the substrate box 100 that is caulked and fixed to the fixing member 18320.

In this case, when the board box 100 is not arranged in the back case 18300, the engaging member 18310 cannot be arranged inside the back case 18300, and the engaging member 18310 is placed outside the back case 18300 by its own weight. It can be in a protruding state.

As a result, when the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 is hooked on the outer frame 11 when the game board 18013 is arranged on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164 (b)). ), It is possible to make the operator notice that the board box 100 has been forgotten to be attached.

In the 21st embodiment, the insertion portion 21724b of the rotating unit 21700 arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 is inserted inside the recess 317 of the engaging member 310. Although the case of preventing the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the insertion portion 21724b to be inserted inside the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 may be formed in the substrate box 100 arranged in the fixing member 320.

In this case, the insertion portion 21724b is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 through an opening formed in the fixing member 320. Further, the insertion portion 21724b is formed at a portion where a shaft for caulking and fixing to the fixing member 320 is inserted. As a result, when the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 100 is cut and illegally removed from the back case 21300, the insertion portion 21724b can be left inside the recess 317 of the engaging member 310. As a result, it can be difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300.

Therefore, when replacing the fixing member 320, it is necessary to correctly (cut the crimped portion) the caulked portion between the substrate box 100 and the fixing member 320. This makes it difficult to illegally remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300, so that it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed and replaced with an illegal board box.

In the 42nd embodiment, the case where the light emitting substrate that irradiates light is arranged on the upright member 42060f has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the driving member arranged on the base plate 42060. It may be formed as a control board for controlling the ball or a passage for throwing a game ball.

In the 43rd embodiment, the engaged portion 43101 with which the engaging member 18310 is engaged is formed on the bearing portion 117 side of the substrate box 43100, and the other side opposite to the bearing portion 117 side is screwed to the back case. Although the case of disposing is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging member 18310 is arranged on the front side of the other side of the substrate box 43100 (in the left-right direction (opposite side in the arrow LR direction) from the 43rd embodiment), and the engaged portion 43101 is placed on the bearing of the substrate box 43100. It may be formed on the other side opposite to the portion 117 side, and the fastening of the back case 43300 and the board box 43100 with screws may be eliminated.

According to this, one side of the substrate box 43100 on the bearing portion 117 side can be engaged with the protruding wall 43301c1 of the rear case 43300 and the locking portion 331 of the fixing member 43320, and the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 43100. The other side opposite to the side can be engaged with the engaging member 18310 and the board box 43100. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten one side of the substrate box 43100 on the bearing portion 117 side and the other side on the opposite side, so that the number of work steps can be reduced accordingly.

In the 45th embodiment, the case where the engaging member 18310 is engaged with both the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging members 18310 may be arranged at two locations in front of the bottom wall portion 45301 of the back case 45300, and the respective engaging members 18310 may be engaged with the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100.

In the 45th embodiment, the case where the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted into the openings formed in the engaging portion 332 and 45101 of the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, a portion to be inserted into the opening of the engaged portion 332 and a portion to be inserted into the opening of the engaged portion 45101 may be separately formed on the engaging member in 18310.

According to this, the engaging member 18310 that engages with the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100 can be formed from one member, and the engagement position between the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100 can be provided with a degree of freedom. That is, it is not necessary to bring the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 and the engaged portion 45101 of the substrate box 45100 close to each other, and the degree of freedom in designing the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100 can be improved.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A displacement member formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the first direction and movable to move the game ball in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and a game from outside the orbital region of the displacement member to the orbital region of the displacement member. In a game machine provided with a regulating means for restricting the throwing of a ball, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The game machine A1.

Here, a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in the first direction from the reference position and a game ball movably formed in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and an orbital region of the displacement member from outside the orbital region of the displacement member. A gaming machine provided with a regulating means for regulating the throwing of a gaming ball to the ball is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of gaming balls from being thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member by the regulation of the regulating means. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if a malfunction occurs in the regulating means due to, for example, sticking or wear, there is a risk that a specified number or more of gaming balls will be thrown toward the trajectory region of the displacement member. In this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the number of game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, a game ball exceeding a specified number may enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and be bitten into the movable portion, resulting in damage. Alternatively, there is a risk that the number of game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, the trajectory region of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the regulating means and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the orbital area of the displacement member is expanded, and the amount of game balls exceeding the specified number is used as the orbital area. Can be accepted. As a result, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the drive mechanism portion of the displacement member and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, problems caused by the game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented. It can be difficult to occur.

The gaming machine A1 includes a passage member formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass and whose downstream side communicates with the trajectory region of the displacement member, and the regulating means regulates the passage of the game ball in the passage member. Characteristic gaming machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, a passage member formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass and whose downstream is communicated with the track region of the displacement member is provided, and the regulating means is the game in the passage member. Since the passage of balls is restricted, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the regulating means and a specified number or more of game balls are thrown, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is transferred to the displacement member via the passage member. The ball can be reliably thrown into the orbital region. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems caused by the number of game balls exceeding the specified number.

In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to receive and hold a predetermined number of gaming balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the gaming ball in the second direction from the reference position. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable by a distance exceeding the above.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to receive and hold a predetermined number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and is formed to be second from the reference position. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced in the direction by at least a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball, after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the second direction to increase the specified number. The excess game ball can be sent to the track region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction.

In this case, since the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be sent to the orbital region, the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number are separated. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, the operation of discharging only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls is performed. It will be possible.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is displaced in the first direction and is formed so that its posture can be changed when it reaches a predetermined position.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the displacement member is displaced in the first direction and is formed so that the posture can be changed when it reaches a predetermined position. Therefore, a predetermined number of games can be played up to the predetermined position. It is possible to easily maintain the state in which the displacement member holds the ball and prevent the game ball from falling off from the displacement member. On the other hand, when the ball reaches a predetermined position, the game ball is utilized by changing the posture of the displacement member. Can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

The gaming machine A4 includes a recess that is recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member is recessed in the recess when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The gaming machine A5 is provided with a protrusion to be engaged, and the posture is mutably formed by engaging the protrusion with the recess.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a recess recessed in the track region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Since a protrusion that is engaged with the recess is provided and the posture can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess, the structure for changing the posture of the displacement member can be simplified.

In the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is projected from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion hits the lower half surface of the gaming ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being touched.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, the protrusion is projected from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion is sent to the orbital region of the displacement member. Since it is formed so as to be in contact with the lower half surface (that is, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number), when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is placed on the lower half surface at the protrusion. You can move it while pressing it. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the amount of game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

Further, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls sent to the orbital region of the displacement member (the number of game balls exceeding the specified number). The distance between the specified number of game balls and the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be secured by the amount of the protrusion length of the portion. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, it is possible to easily discharge only the number of game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

Furthermore, since the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the recess and the role of moving the game ball while pushing the lower half surface thereof are also used for the protrusion, the number of parts is reduced by that amount, and the product is manufactured. Cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the recess is smaller in size in the first direction than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball sent to the orbital region of the displacement member. (That is, a game ball exceeding a specified number) can easily pass through the recess when it is moved with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the amount of game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

In any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected in the orbital region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction at a height lower than the radius of the game ball and more than the recess. When a game ball having a wall portion located on the first direction side and being thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is moved to the wall. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the displacement member is brought into contact with the portion and the posture change of the displacement member is regulated.

According to the game machine A8, in any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball and is recessed in the orbital region when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction. A wall portion located on the first direction side of the displacement member is provided, and when a game ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball becomes a wall portion. Since the displacement member is in contact with the displacement member and the posture change of the displacement member is regulateably formed, only the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is maintained while the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls. It can be easily discharged from the orbital area.

That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the protrusion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved. The lower half surface can be brought into contact with the wall portion so that the game ball can easily get over the wall portion. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. The change in posture can be regulated, and the specified number of game balls held by the displacement members can be prevented from falling off. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, it is possible to easily discharge only the number of game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

On the other hand, when a game ball (that is, a game ball exceeding a specified number) is not thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member, the game ball is not interposed between the wall portion and the displacement member, so that the protrusion is recessed. By engaging, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge a predetermined number of game balls (that is, game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by utilizing the change in the posture of the displacement member.

The gaming machine A9, wherein in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the regulating means is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the regulating means is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the regulating means is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. The throwing of the game ball into the orbital region of the member can be regulated or allowed. That is, since the regulation or tolerance of the throwing of the game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, depending on the sensor device for detecting the position of the regulating means and the detection result of the sensor device. It is possible to eliminate the need to control the driving means for driving the regulating means or each of these means, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability of the operation.

In the gaming machine A9, the regulating means allows the gaming ball to be thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. Characteristic gaming machine A10.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, the regulating means interlocks with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position to the second direction, and the game ball of the displacement member to the orbital region. Since the ball is allowed to be thrown, the game ball can be reliably thrown to the orbital region of the displacement member and the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the base member in which the displacement member is displaceably arranged and the end portion of the base member on the first direction side are arranged below the vertical direction and above the vertical direction. The gaming machine A11 is provided with a recovery member having an opening in the slingshot.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A10, the displacement member is displaceably arranged, and the base member is arranged vertically below the end portion on the first direction side of the base member. Along with this, a recovery member having an opening in the vertical direction is provided, so that the game balls are moved along with the movement of the displacement member in the first direction and discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member (that is, the amount exceeding the specified number). The game ball) can be received and collected from the opening of the collection member.

In the game machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovered member is at least the first in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A game machine A12 characterized in that it is formed in a size located below the end in the vertical direction on the directional side.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of the game machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the displacement position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced to at least the retracted position or the displaced position. Since it is formed in a size located vertically below the end on the first direction side of the base member, it is discharged from the track region of the displacement member regardless of whether the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displacement position. The game balls to be played (that is, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number) can be received and collected from the opening of the collection member.

In any of the gaming machines A5 to A8, the gaming machine A13 is provided with an insertion member that regulates the engagement of the protrusion with the recessed portion by being inserted into the recessed space of the recessed portion. ..

According to the game machine A13, since any of the game machines A5 to A8 includes an insertion member that regulates the engagement of the protrusion with the recess by being inserted into the recessed space of the recess, the displacement member. It is possible to prevent the posture of the displacement member from being changed when the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member due to the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, it is possible to easily discharge only the number of game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region.

The game machine A13 includes a base member that is displaceably formed between the retracted position and the displaced position and the displaced member is displaceably arranged, and the insertion member displaces the base member at the retracted position. The gaming machine A14 is characterized in that it is inserted into the recessed space of the recess and is separated from the recessed space of the recess when the base member is displaced to the displacement position.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effect of the game machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Along with this, when the number of game balls exceeding the specified number is discharged from the orbital region of the displacement member, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls by suppressing the change in the posture of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess, so that the protrusion is engaged with the recess as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. By being combined, the posture of the displacement member can be changed, and a specified number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
The flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. In a game machine provided with a distribution means for distribution, a game machine provided with a displacement member which is formed to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the first branch passage, and the displacement member is displaced in contact with the distribution means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the sorting means is displaced and the sorting destination is switched.

Here, the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the game balls that have flowed down the flow-down passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one by one, the game balls that flow down the flow-down passage are different. It is evenly distributed (that is, half each) to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage cannot be changed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and receives a game ball from the first branch passage is provided, and the displacement member is displaced in contact with the distribution means, so that the distribution member is distributed. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

According to the gaming machine B1, the distribution means can be displaced by using the displacement of the displacement member, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displace the distribution means. can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the sorting means is controlled by using the position detection by the sensor device or the drive by the driving means, the reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means is lowered due to the malfunction due to the detection failure or the control failure. However, according to the gaming machine B1, the distribution destination by the distribution means can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives the game ball from the first branch passage, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the first branch can be obtained. The game balls distributed in the passage can be reliably received by the displacement member.

The gaming machine B1 includes an urging means that applies an urging force to the distribution means to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the displacement member. Displaces the sorting means in a direction opposite to the direction of the urging force, so that the sorting destination by the sorting means is switched to the first branch passage or the other of the second branch passage, and the urging means is used. The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is returned to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage by the urging force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, an urging force is applied to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. Since the force means is provided, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being inadvertently switched. In this case, the distribution means is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member, and after the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before the switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging means. It can be unnecessary that the member is in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member can be increased.

In the gaming machine B2, the urging means applies an urging force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the urging means applies an urging force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage, so that the displacement member. In a state where the pachinko ball cannot be received, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage.

In the gaming machine B3, a base member is provided that is displaceably formed between the first position and the second position and the displacement member is arranged, and the base member is arranged at the first position. In a state where the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage and can come into contact with the distribution means, and the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement The gaming machine B4, wherein the member cannot receive the gaming ball from the first branch passage and cannot contact the sorting means.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, a base member formed so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position is provided, and the displacement member is arranged on the base member. It is possible to form a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the first position and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member arranged at the second position. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is arranged at the second position, the displacement member cannot receive the game ball from the first branch passage, but in such a state, the displacement member cannot contact the distribution means. Therefore, in a state where the displacement member cannot receive the game ball (a state in which the base member is arranged at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage.

The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that a second base member formed as a member separate from the base member is provided, and the distribution means is arranged on the second base member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, a second base member formed as a member separate from the base member is provided, and the distribution means is arranged on the second base member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the base member.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed so as to be at least displaceable at a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In this state, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in a state where the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed so as to be at least displaceable between the switching position and the receiving position set at a position different from the switching position. When the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member moves the game ball from the first branch passage. Since it is possible to receive and the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, so that the displacement member. There is a risk that the game balls will be distributed to the first branch passage in excess of the specified number that can be received. If a means for regulating the inflow of the game ball into the first branch passage is separately provided, the structure becomes complicated, the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, and after the specified number (or less than the specified number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down to the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage. Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-mentioned means, it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

In the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of protrusions or recesses projecting or recessing in the inner wall surface thereof, and is a resistance that imparts resistance to the gaming ball passing through the first branch passage. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being provided with means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed in the inner wall surface thereof, and passes through the first branch passage. Since the resistance means for imparting resistance to the gaming ball is provided, the speed of the gaming ball passing through the first branch passage can be slowed down. Therefore, the time required for the displacement member to be displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened by that amount, so that the displacement member can reliably receive the game ball. Further, the output of the drive means can be reduced by the amount that the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be slowed down, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine B6 or B7, the distribution means includes a first infestation portion and a second infestation portion that are formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage according to the displacement of the distribution means. The 1 infestation portion is formed so that the game ball flowing down the downflow passage can be distributed to the 2nd branch passage by projecting into the 1st branch passage, and the 2nd infestation portion is formed from the 1st infestation portion. Is also located on the downstream side of the first branch passage, and by projecting to the first branch passage, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first infestation portions thereof. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when one of the second haunting portion protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6 or B7, the distribution means is formed to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage according to the displacement of the distribution means. A second infestation portion is provided, and the first infestation portion is formed so that a game ball flowing down the flow-down passage can be distributed to the second branch passage by projecting into the first branch passage, and the second infestation portion is formed by the first infestation portion. It is located on the downstream side of the first branch passage from the infestation part, and by projecting to the first branch passage, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be regulated, and the first infestation part is formed. And, in the state where one of the second infested portions protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted to the outside of the passage of the first branch passage, so that the distribution means is displaced according to the displacement of the displacement member. Therefore, only the specified number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, the first state in which the first infestation portion protrudes to distribute the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to the second branch passage, and the first infestation portion retracts to cause the game ball to flow down the down-flow passage. A second state in which the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, a third state in which the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is regulated (the game balls are stored) by projecting the second infestation portion, and a third state. 2 By retracting the haunting portion, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game ball stored in the first branch passage is allowed to flow down and be received by the displacement member. Only a number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine B8, since the distribution means includes the first infestation portion and the second infestation portion, that is, is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution means (first infestation portion and second infestation portion). (Structure for operating and exerting those functions) can be simplified. Further, in the state where one of the first infested portion and the second infested portion protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted to the outside of the passage of the first branch passage, so that two positions (switching positions) of the displacement members are obtained. And the receiving position), it is sufficient if the sorting means is also formed so as to be displaceable at two positions. That is, by displacing the sorting means at two positions, the above-mentioned first to fourth states can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution means and the structure of displace the distribution means according to the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the distribution operation of the game ball can be improved accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
The flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting, characterized in that it is located on the downstream side of the sorting means and is provided with a flow state changing means for regulating or allowing the flow of a game ball in the first branch passage. Game machine C1.

Here, the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage. A gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223176). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage is only distributed to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, it is insufficient to give the player an interest. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, it is located on the downstream side of the sorting means and is provided with a flow state changing means that regulates or allows the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage. Can be given.

That is, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the operation of the flow state changing means, the game balls are stored in the first branch passage, and the flow of the game balls in the first branch passage is allowed. , The game ball stored in the first branch passage can be flowed down (opened). As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is performed. , The action of causing the stopped (stored) game ball to flow down (open) can be formed. As a result, the player can be given a hobby.

In the gaming machine C1, the first branch passage is provided in a state in which the distribution means and the flow state changing means are integrally formed, and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage. In a state where the flow of the game ball in the above is regulated by the flow state changing means and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being tolerated.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, an integral member in which the sorting means and the flow-down state changing means are integrally formed is provided, so that the sorting means and the flowing-down state changing means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of operation. That is, when the sorting means and the flow-down state changing means are formed separately, the two parts are formed, which complicates the structure for operating the two parts and lowers the reliability of the operation. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the sorting means and the flow state changing means can be formed as one component, the structure can be simplified by that amount, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability of operation can be improved. Can be planned.

Further, in this case, if the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage by the operation of the integrated member, the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first When the game balls are stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow of the game balls in the first branch passage is allowed by the flow state changing means and stored in the first branch passage. It is possible to let the game ball that has been played flow down (open). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage. Not only can the stopped (stored) game ball flow down (open) motion, but these storage and release actions can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution motion.

In the game machine C2, the integrated member is formed so as to be displaceable in the first state position and the second state position, and in a state where the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the sorting means is the first. The flow state changing means was arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage was restricted, and the integrated member was displaced to the second state position. In the state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed. The game machine C3.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the integral member is formed so as to be displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and in the state where the integral member is displaced to the first state position. , The distribution means is arranged at the position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at the position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is restricted, and the integrated member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distribution means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is arranged at a position where the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed. Is displaced at two positions (first state position and second state position) to distribute the game ball flowing down the flow passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and to the first branch passage. It is possible to form an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the flow of the distributed game balls and an operation of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (open), and these storage and opening operations can be performed. , Can be formed alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of operation.

In the gaming machine C3, the integrated member is rotatably formed, and at least the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and the gaming ball is projected to the first branch passage. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it is formed in an arcuately curved shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member while restricting the flow of the machine.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the integral member is formed rotatably, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and the first branch passage is formed. By protruding to, the flow of the game ball is restricted, and the shape is curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the integrated member. Therefore, the inner wall of the first branch passage is used for the appearance of the flow state changing means. The area of the hole to be opened can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is arranged in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow-down state is changed to the first branch passage. In the initial state where the means starts to protrude (that is, only the tip side of the flow state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the flow state changing means can easily regulate the flow of the gaming ball. It can be arranged in the direction, and it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage.

Further, in a state where the flow-down state changing means is projected to the first branch passage to the maximum and the flow-down of the game ball is restricted, the game ball can be stably held by the recess of the flow-down state changing means, so that the game ball can be suppressed from rampaging. ..

In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the integrated member is provided with an urging means for urging the integrated member in a direction in which the flow state changing means projects in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage, and the flow state changing means is described as described above. The gaming machine C6, wherein the distance to the rotation axis of the integral member is made larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4 or C5, an urging means for applying an urging force to the integrated member to urge the flow state changing means to project in the direction of projecting to the first branch passage is provided. Therefore, by utilizing such urging force, it is possible to easily maintain the integrated member in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage (that is, the first state position).

In this case, in the game machine C6, the distance from the flow-down state changing means to the rotation axis of the integrated member is made larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member, so that the flowing game balls collide. And, because the distance from the rotation axis is large, even if the same impact force is applied, the flow-down state changing means is likely to be absorbed, but the urging direction of the urging means is such that the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. By setting the direction to be the same, it is possible to suppress the immersion of the flow-down state changing means by the amount of the urging force.

In the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in a direction in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage due to its own weight.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in the direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage due to its own weight. The member can be easily maintained in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means projects into the first branch passage (that is, the first state position). Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the immersion of the flow state changing means by the amount of its own weight.

Further, even if the urging means falls off, the integrated part is maintained in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage due to its own weight, and the game ball flows down into the first branch passage. Can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that, in a state where a predetermined number of gaming balls are stored in the branch passage, the gaming balls flowing down the flow-down passage are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second branch passage.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is the flow state changing means. In a state where a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are formed so as to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that more than the specified number of game balls flow down. When flowing down the aisle, it is possible to prevent the number of game balls exceeding the specified number from staying in the flowing down aisle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of setting the distribution destination as the second branch passage) from being hindered by the game ball stuck in the flow passage.

In the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the flow-down passage on the side facing the second branch passage has the game balls flowing down the flow passage at the end of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage. The gaming machine C9 is formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of the gaming ball on the side of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the inner wall on the side facing the second branch passage in the flow passage has a specified number of game balls flowing down the flow passage stored in the first branch passage. Since it is formed so that it can be guided to the side surface of the second branch passage side of the last game ball among the game balls, the game ball flowing down the flow passage is made to collide with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls. After that, it can be easily flowed down to the second branch passage.

The last game ball out of the specified number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (opposite side to the flow state changing means). When the specified number is 1, the game ball at the end means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the flow direction of the downstream end of the flow passage is formed in a direction different from the flow direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8 or C9, the flow direction at the downstream end of the flow passage is formed in a direction different from the flow direction at the upstream end of the first branch passage. When the flowing game ball collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball is set in the first branch passage. It can be made different from the flow direction at the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trailing game ball from jumping out from the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of collision.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance position is the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the flow-down passage. A gaming machine C11 characterized in that it is an inner wall on an extension of the above.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of either of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance position thereof is changed to the flow-down position. Since it is an inner wall on an extension line in the flow direction at the downstream end of the passage, the distribution means can be projected at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the downstream end of the flow passage. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the sorting means to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage until the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to more reliably switch the distribution destination by the distribution means.

In the gaming machine C11, the distribution means distributes a game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to the second branch passage by projecting into the flow-down passage or the first branch passage. The gaming machine C12 characterized in that the protruding direction of the means is set in the direction direction at the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect of the game machine C11, the distribution means distributes the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to the second branch passage by projecting into the flow-down passage or the first branch passage. Therefore, since the protruding direction of the distribution means is set to face the upstream end of the second branch passage, when the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down passage comes into contact with the distribution means in the middle of the protrusion operation. Can push the game ball into the second branch passage with the protruding operation of the distribution means. As a result, distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the gaming ball is formed so as to be able to roll on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine C13 is characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the gaming ball is formed on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. The flow state changing means is formed so as to be rollable and can appear and disappear from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into the first branch passage. It is possible to shorten the time required for the flow of the ball to be regulated. As a result, when the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage and the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow state changing means of the flow state changing means is regulated by the flow of the game ball. You can easily make the protrusion in time.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and at least in a state of maximally projecting to the first branch passage, in a protruding direction. The gaming machine C14, characterized in that a force component is acted on from the gaming ball to the flow state changing means.

According to the gaming machine C14, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed so as to appear and disappear with respect to the first branch passage, and protrudes at least in a state of maximally projecting to the first branch passage. Since the force component in the direction of movement is acted on from the game ball to the flow state changing means, when the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is regulated, the flow is caused by the impact when the game ball collides. It is possible to suppress the immersion of the state changing means. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate the flow of the game ball.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displaceable member displaceable on the base member, a group associated with the displacement of the displacement member. The gaming machine D1 comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of a member.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member, a base member displaceable on one side of the base member, and a displacement member displaceable on the base member is known (for example,). , Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between the overhanging position where the base member is projected to the game area and visible to the player and the evacuation position where the base member is retracted from the game area, the base member is displaced. It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in the state of being arranged at the overhanging position.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since one side of the base member is displaceably arranged on the base member, when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles with respect to the base member with one side as a fulcrum. There was a problem that it was easy to occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the suppression means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

The reaction force associated with the displacement of the displacement member is, for example, one generated by a change in the center of gravity due to the displacement of the displacement member, or an inertial force generated by an increase or decrease in the displacement speed of the displacement member (change in acceleration). Examples thereof include those generated by the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and the game ball is ejected.

In the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably arranged on the base member, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the arrangement member is formed. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable when the gaming ball is ejected from the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceable on the base member, and the displacement member is formed so that the gaming ball can be held and ejected. Since the displaced member is formed so as to be displaceable when the gaming ball is ejected from the displaced member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when the game ball is launched from the displacement member, the position of the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball. When a configuration in which the installation member is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity. Further, when the game ball is launched from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction due to the launch of the game ball. For example, the arrangement member is displaced in a direction that cancels the reaction caused by the launch of the game ball. When adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to the reaction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member when the displacement member is displaced.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, the reverse member is displaced with at least a displacement component that is in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Therefore, the change in the position of the center of gravity of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be reduced by the displacement of the reverse member. As a result, rattling of the base member due to a change in the position of the center of gravity can be suppressed.

If the configuration is such that the displacement of the reverse member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, at least a part of the inertial forces of both can be canceled out. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

The gaming machine D2 or D3 is characterized by comprising a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposition member or (and) the reverse member to displace the displacement member or (and) the reverse member. Gaming machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2 or D3, a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the displacement member or (and) reverse member to displace the displacement member or (and) reverse member. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for displacing the disposing member or / or the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the disposing member or / or the reverse member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced accordingly, and the rattling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the arrangement or / or the reverse member can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, the position of the displacement member is detected by a sensor device and arranged according to the detection result. It is possible to eliminate the need for control to drive the member or (and) reverse member by the driving means, thereby reducing the product cost, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or (and) reverse member with respect to the displacement member. Can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts the displacement from the second position, and the displacement member starts the displacement from the first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the displacement is started from the first position at least in a state where the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximized, so that the base member tends to rattle due to the influence of the inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts the displacement from the second position and one side of the base member from the second position. A mode in which displacement is started from a first position close to is formed so as to be formed, and at least a state in which the base member is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member projects into the game area and is displayed by the player. At the visible overhang position), the displacement is started from the first position, so that the rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is a position closer to one side of the base member than the second position, by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the displacement member, the weight of the displacement member can be set as the base. The member can be kept close to the fulcrum when the member rattles with respect to the base member, and the influence of the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be made less likely to act on the base member. As a result, rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine D5 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is disposed on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, a pinion gear arranged on the base member and a rack member on which a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear is formed are provided, and the rack member is provided with a displacement member. When starting the displacement of the displacement member from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is one side of the base member (the base member is relative to the base member). It can be kept close to the fulcrum when rattling. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state.

The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction away from one side of the base member, so that the displacement member is in the first position. In the state of being arranged in, the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member is based on the portion on the rack gear side where the pinion gear is meshed after the displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be made closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member rattles with respect to the base member), and as a result, when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state. It is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the base member.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the base member is provided with a support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure. The displacement member is formed so that the game ball can be held and ejected, and the drive mechanism is a regulatory means for regulating the displacement of the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D7, a support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member to the base member and a base member supported by the support structure are driven. The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is such that the base member is displaced in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the regulating means for regulating is provided, it is possible to prevent the base member from being displaced with respect to the base member due to the reaction. As a result, the occurrence of rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player, a displacement member that is rotatably arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is provided. Characteristic gaming machine E1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating cylinder member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this gaming machine, the rotating cylinder member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof is made visible to the player by rotating the rotating cylinder member or stopping the rotating cylinder member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form an effect mode in which the player can visually recognize the display on the outer peripheral surface as the rotating body member rotates or stops, the effect of the effect is small. There was a problem that was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member displaceablely arranged on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, the display of the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the rotating cylinder member rotates or stops. Since it is possible to form an effect mode in which the displacement member is displaced in addition to the effect mode to be visually recognized, it is possible to give a change to the effect mode and enhance the effect.

The rotating cylinder member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut in a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member does not have to be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between at least the first position and the second position, and at the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is formed by the displacement member. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be reduced, and the space required for the rotating body member to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating cylinder member, so that the displacement of the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player, and the effect is produced. Can be enhanced. Further, for example, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member arranged at the first position, and the displacement member is arranged (displaced) at the second position when the rotation of the rotating body member is stopped. A portion (displacement member) that has been visually recognized as the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member can be formed so as to project outward in the radial direction of the rotating cylinder member, which can enhance the interest.

In the game machine E2, a light emitting means for emitting light is provided, the rotating body member is formed having an internal space, the light emitting means is arranged in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that when it is displaced to a position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is opened and the internal space is communicated to the outside.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, a light emitting means for emitting light is provided, the rotating cylinder member is formed having an internal space, and the light emitting means is arranged in the internal space. When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is opened and the internal space is communicated to the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside and the displacement member. Is displaced to the first position, so that the emission to the outside can be blocked. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3 includes a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the rotating body member and the displacement member. ..

Here, in order to form the rotating cylinder member so as to be rotatable and to displace the displacement member on the rotating cylinder member, a driving means is required for each of the rotating cylinder member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulky. Further, when the driving means for displace the displacement member is mounted on the rotating cylinder member, the weight of the rotating cylinder member increases, so that it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating cylinder member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the rotating body member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to rotate the rotating body member and displace the displacement member by also using the driving means of 1. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displace the displacement member on the rotating cylinder member, the weight of the rotating cylinder member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating cylinder member can be smoothly started or stopped.

In the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmitting means includes a rotating side transmitting means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating body member and the driving means. The displacement-side transmitting means for transmitting the rotational driving force to the displacement member and the rotational driving force to be transmitted to one of the rotational-side transmitting means or the displacement-side transmitting means according to the rotation direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means. The gaming machine E5 is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other side.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed so as to be able to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmitting means transmits the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating cylinder member. The means, the displacement side transmitting means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the rotational driving force to be transmitted to either the rotating side transmitting means or the displacement side transmitting means according to the rotation direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means. Since it is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other, it is possible to switch the drive target (rotating body member or displacement member) to be driven by the rotational driving force only by switching the rotational direction of the driving means. That is, it is possible to switch between the rotation of the rotating cylinder member and the stop of the rotation and the displacement of the displacement member and the stop of the displacement according to the rotation direction of the drive means, and the structure can be formed while making it possible to form a plurality of modes. Can be simplified.

In the game machine E5, the rotary-side transmission means is a gear train forming a part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotary driving force of the drive means to the rotary cylinder member, and one of the gear trains. A game machine E6 characterized by being provided with a load gear to be meshed with each other.

Here, in a structure in which the drive target (rotating body member or displacement member) is switched according to the rotation direction of the drive means by using the one-way clutch mechanism, when the transmission of the drive force from the drive means is cut off, It becomes a state in which it can freely rotate or displace in the direction driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, when the driving target of the driving means is switched from the rotating body member to the displacement member and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body member becomes a rotatable state and continues to rotate due to the inertial force (rotation). There is a risk of being

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the rotating side transmitting means is a gear train forming a part or all of the transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the rotating body member. And a load gear that is meshed with one of the gears in the gear train, so even if the transmission of rotational driving force from the drive means is interrupted, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is provided. ) Can be used to prevent the rotating body member from continuing to rotate.

The gaming machine E5 or E6 is provided with a reverse rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the driving means. ..

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E5 or E6, the reverse rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the driving means is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating body member from rotating in the reverse direction due to, for example, a bias in the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body member or a collision of a game ball.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is opened and the internal space is opened. The gaming machine E8, which is characterized in that the is communicated with the gaming area.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is formed. Is opened and the internal space is communicated with the game area, so that the game ball flowing down the game area flows into the internal space of the rotating body member, or the game ball in the internal space of the rotating body member flows out to the game area. Can be made to. Further, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is closed, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball between the internal space and the game area can be blocked. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game. A gaming machine E9 characterized in that it overhangs an area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the side opposite to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the rotating body member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9, the displacement member is tilted downward from the other side toward the one side when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface thereof is tilted downward from the other side toward one side, so that the gaming area is affected. After receiving the flowed game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) to the internal space of the rotating body member along the downward inclination of the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space of the rotating body member by using the displacement member.

The gaming machine E9 or E10 is characterized in that the gaming machine E11 is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the overhanging displacement member is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member. Interference with other members around the rotating body member can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is the said. A gaming machine E12 characterized in that the rotation of the rotating cylinder member is regulated when it is projected to the gaming area.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the displacement member of the rotation regulating member is displaced to the second position. , When the other side of the displacement member is extended to the game area, the rotation of the rotating body member is restricted. Therefore, the rotating body member is rotated while the displacement member is extended and is located on the rotation locus. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with other members. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player, the rotating body member externally forms an internal space formed inside the rotating body member and the internal space thereof. The gaming machine F1 is provided with a communication port formed so that the gaming ball can pass through the gaming machine F1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating cylinder member which is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is visibly arranged by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this gaming machine, the rotating cylinder member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface thereof is visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating cylinder member or stopping the rotating cylinder member. be able to. However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the rotation body member is insufficiently utilized because it is only used as a member for holding a display for the player to visually recognize on the outer peripheral surface thereof. rice field. That is, since the rotating body member needs to hold a display that can be visually recognized by the player, it is formed to be relatively large. Therefore, while the space occupied by the rotating cylinder member is large, the portion other than the outer peripheral surface thereof is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the rotating body member includes an internal space formed inside the body member and a communication port formed so that the game ball can pass through the internal space while communicating the internal space to the outside. , The game ball flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body member, which is regarded as a dead space, can function as a storage space or a throwing passage for the game ball, and the rotating body member can be utilized accordingly.

The communication port may be formed at only one place of the rotating cylinder member, or may be formed at two or more places. When the communication port is formed at only one place, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up and down according to the rotation position of the rotating cylinder member, so that the game ball flows into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward). At the same time, the game ball can flow into the internal space, and when the communication port faces downward, the game ball in the internal space can flow out).

Further, the rotating cylinder member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut in a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member does not have to be a peripheral surface, but may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. One of the communication port or the second communication port is an inflow port for the game ball to flow in from the outside to the internal space, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is an outflow port for the game ball to flow out from the internal space to the outside. Can be. That is, the rotating body member can be used as a throwing passage for the game ball without rotating the rotating body member (while maintaining the stopped state). In addition, in a state where the rotating body member is rotating, such a rotating body member may be utilized as a ball throwing passage.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, and is formed as an inflow port for flowing a game ball flowing down the game area into the internal space, and the second communication port is formed. The gaming machine F3 is formed on an end surface of the rotating body member in the direction of the rotation axis, and is formed as an outlet for flowing out a gaming ball from the internal space to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member and is formed as an inflow port for the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space. The second communication port is formed on the end face of the rotating body member in the direction of the rotation axis, and is formed as an outlet for flowing out the game ball from the internal space to the game area. The inflow can be easily made visible to the player, and the game ball can be discharged while the rotating body member is maintained in the stopped state.

That is, where the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the first communication port (inflow port) is formed on the outer peripheral surface thereof, so that the inflow of the game ball can be visually recognized by the player. It can be made easy. On the other hand, when the second communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space when the rotating body member is displaced to the rotation position where the communication port is upward. Since the second communication port (outlet) is formed on the end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotation position of the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member displaceable on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is displaced. The gaming machine F4 is shielded by a member, and when the displacement member is displaced to a second position, the communication port is opened.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member displaceable on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating cylinder member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is shielded by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow and outflow of the game ball through the communication port is blocked and allowed. You can switch.

In the gaming machine F4, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and the displacement member is located at the second position. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that when it is displaced, the other side, which is opposite to the one side, projects into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the side opposite to the one side. Since the other side is projected to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the internal space of the rotating cylinder member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the displacement member is characterized in that one side thereof is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body member with respect to the other side.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of the game machine F5, one side of the displacement member is located on the front side in the rotation direction of the rotating body member with respect to the other side, so that when the rotating body member is rotated, the displacement member is located. Even if the displacement member interferes with the member arranged around the rotating body member, the force generated by the interference can be applied in the direction of closing (displace to the first position) the displacement member. That is, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with other members and projecting (displaced to the second position) when the rotating cylinder member rotates. In addition, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with another member and hindering the rotation of the rotating cylinder member.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the base member in which the rotating body member is rotatably arranged, and the rotating body member supported by the base member and arranged in the internal space of the rotating body member. On the other hand, the gaming machine F7 is provided with a fixing member that is non-rotating.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F6, the base member in which the rotating body member is rotatably arranged, and the internal space of the rotating body member while being supported by the base member. Since it is provided with a fixing member that is arranged in the center and is non-rotating with respect to the rotating body member, the game ball that has flowed into the internal space is held by the fixing member or rolled on the fixing member toward the outlet. It is possible to prevent the game ball from rampaging in the internal space or being hindered from rolling and staying in the internal space as the rotating body member rotates.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6 is provided with a displacement setting means that regulates or allows the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotation position of the rotating body member is provided. It is possible to prevent the displaced displacement member from interfering with other members around the rotating body member.

In the game machine F5 or F6, a rotation regulating means for restricting the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the rotation regulating member is such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member moves to the gaming area. The gaming machine F9, characterized in that the rotation of the rotating cylinder member is restricted when it is overhanging.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F5 or F6, a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating body member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the displacement member is displaced. When the other side overhangs the game area, the rotation of the rotating body member is restricted. Therefore, the rotating body member is rotated with the displacement member overhanging, and the other member located on the rotation locus thereof. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with the displacement member. Further, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotating body member due to the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the game machine F3, the light emitting means formed so as to be able to emit light and arranged in the internal space of the rotating cylinder member, and the second communication port formed on the end surface of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction. The gaming machine F10 is provided with an opening formed on the end surface opposite to the end surface to be formed, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, an opening is formed in the end face of the rotating cylinder member in the rotation axis direction and opposite to the end face on which the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is possible to easily secure the space that can be used for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed out through the second communication port, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line can be facilitated. Further, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated as much as possible, it is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball that rolls the internal space to the second communication port and the electrical connection line.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
From a lining position that includes a first member and a second member that are displaceably formed and the first member invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member, and a state in which the first member is arranged at the lining position. In a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retractable position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member, the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is displaced. The gaming machine G1 characterized in that the displacement of the game machine is regulateably formed.

Here, a state in which a first member and a second member formed so as to be displaceable are provided, and the first member is arranged at an lining position that invisiblely covers at least a part of the second member and a lining position thereof. There is known a gaming machine formed so as to be displaceable from a retracted position that reduces an area that invisiblely covers the second member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by arranging the first member in the lining position and displacementing the first member to the retracted position from the state where the second member is invisible to the player. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the effect.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second member is formed so as to be displaceable, the first member is displaced to the retracted position, and when the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. There is a risk of Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated in the state of being displaced to the retracted position, so that the player can keep the second member in an appropriate state. It can be visually recognized and the effect of production can be ensured. That is, when the effect of moving the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member is performed, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which must be performed for the effect, is applied to the second member. It is used as a means to regulate displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the second member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the second member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation. Can be enhanced. That is, it is not necessary for the second member to have a shape whose center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and for example, a shape asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the effect of the second member can be enhanced. .. On the other hand, if the position of the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this way, the second member may rotate (rotate) around the center of rotation due to its own weight. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It can be done and the effect can be secured.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 includes a displacement member displaceably arranged on the second member, and the displacement member is formed displaceably in a state where at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. The gaming machine G3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, a displacement member displaceable is provided on the second member, and at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. Since it is formed so as to be displaceable in the state, when the effect of displacement the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member is performed, the effect of the effect is further enhanced by further displacement of the displacement member. Can be done. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move with the displacement, and the second member may rotate (rotate). Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It can be done and the effect can be secured.

In the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is arranged so as to be visible to the player, and one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the one side is rotatably supported. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the other side opposite to the one is formed so as to be able to project into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is arranged so that the player can see it, and the displacement member can rotate on one side to the outer peripheral surface of the second member. Since the other side opposite to one side is formed so as to be able to project into the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the second member, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily flowed into the inflow port by using the displacement member. .. In this case, if the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the second member may be rotated by the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is particularly effective that the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so that the displacement of the second member can be regulated, whereby the displaced member is projected to a predetermined position in the game area. Can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the lining position, and outside the area of the gaming area at the retracted position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, the first member is arranged in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the lining position, so that the game flows down the gaming area. It is possible to prevent the sphere from colliding with the second member and causing the second member to rotate. In particular, when the rotation position of the second member is a rotation position that directs the displacement member toward the game area side, the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tension). Can be suppressed.

Further, since the first member is arranged outside the area of the game area at the retracted position, it is possible to secure a space for the displaced member to project to the game area due to the displacement of the first member to the retracted position. .. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the game area side (player side) by that amount, and the displacement member can be easily visually recognized by the player.

In the gaming machine G5, the first member is rotatably formed around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A game machine G6 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5, the first member is rotatably formed around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member. Since it is formed in a plate shape that curves along the above, the space required for displacement between the lining position and the retracting position can be suppressed. Therefore, a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. Further, by forming the first member in a curved shape in this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the game area from being stopped on the first member arranged at the lining position, and smoothly. It can be made to flow down.

A gaming machine G7 characterized in that any of the gaming machines G3 to G6 includes a driving means for generating a driving force and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the second member and the displacement member. ..

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and to displace the displacement member on the second member, a driving means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulky. Further, if the driving means for displacementing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the weight of the second member increases, so that it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means are applied to the second member and the displacement member. Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, it is possible to rotate the second member and displace the displacement member by also using the driving means of 1. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation of the second member can be smoothly started or stopped.

The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the gaming machine G7 includes a connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the displacement member with the displacement of the first member.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, a connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the first member with the displacement of the displacement member is provided, so that the displacement member is displaced. The driving means for causing the displacement can also be used as the driving means for displacementing the first displacement member. In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving forces of different driving means, if a control failure occurs, the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other. Since one member can be mechanically connected and their displacements can be synchronized, interference between the displacement member and the first member can be reliably suppressed.

<Concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the transmitting means is used. , The first member, the second member located closer to the displacement member in the driving force transmission path than the first member, and the engaging member disposed between the first member and the second member. When the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member, and the driving force is transmitted. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced ahead of the first member in the one direction.

Here, a gaming machine including a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the transmission state of the driving force by the transmitting means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant. Therefore, when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member is also constant. It is displaced at the displacement speed, and it is not possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

Although the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the drive speed of the drive means, the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections. In order to obtain the speed, it is necessary to arrange a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device, which leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. .. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, resulting in a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the transmission means includes the first member, the second member located closer to the displacement member in the transmission path of the driving force than the first member, and the first member and the second member thereof. It is provided with an engaging member disposed between the members, and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member. As the driving force is transmitted, the transmission of the driving force is cut off, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced ahead of the first member in one direction. Therefore, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. Therefore, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, the second member can be preceded by the first member in one direction regardless of the driving state of the driving means. Therefore, for example, in the entire displacement section of the displacement member, The driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed, and it is not necessary to increase or decrease the driving speed of the driving means in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (that is, depending on a predetermined section or another section). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, the energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, according to the gaming machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engaging member is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. The displacement member can be in a stopped state (non-driving state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driving state can be used as a driving force for driving another member. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, the two members, the displacement member and the other member, can be displaced respectively.

The transmission means is formed so that when the first member is displaced with respect to the two members in the other direction, the engaging member is disengaged and the transmission of the driving force is cut off. It may be what is done.

In the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation. In the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member causes the second member to move in one direction. A game machine H2 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in a direction of displacement.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed and the position of the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation. Since the two members are formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement in one direction, the weight of the displaced member can be used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. .. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, when the displacement member is repeatedly formed to rotate 360 degrees around its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in another section. A mode in which the speed is faster than the displacement speed (rotation speed), that is, a rotation mode in which the rotation speed is increased or decreased during one rotation can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body portion that is rotationally driven by the second member, a crank member that protrudes from the main body portion and has a pin portion that is eccentrically located from the rotation center of the main body portion. A sliding groove through which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side, and an arm member whose intermediate portion is rotatably supported is provided, and the other end side of the arm member is displaced. A gaming machine H3 characterized in that it is connected to a member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H2, the transmission means is projected from the main body portion rotationally driven by the second member and the main body portion thereof, and is positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. Since a crank member having a pin portion and an arm member in which a sliding groove into which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed on one end side and an intermediate portion is rotatably supported, the arm member is provided. By rotationally driving the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end side of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating operation of the other end side of the arm member. .. That is, the displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive means.

In the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position according to the reciprocating operation on the other end side of the arm member, and is displaced from the first position to the second position. In the middle of the displacement and during the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member is such that the second member is subjected to the other. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the second member is displaced from the direction of displacement in the direction to the direction of displacement of the second member in the one direction.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position with the reciprocating movement of the other end side of the arm member, and the first position. During the displacement from the second position to the second position and during the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member determines the second member. Since the direction of displacement in the other direction is changed to the direction of displacement of the second member in one direction, when the displacement member is reciprocated, even if it is displaced in any direction, it starts from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, the displacement member reciprocates between the overhanging position (first position), which is a position where the displacement member is visibly extended from the player, and the retracting position (second position), which is the overhanging position or retracted position. In the case of operation, when the displacement member is projected from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle to vigorously move the displacement member. It is possible to overhang to the overhanging position, and when retracting the displacement member from the overhanging position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until the middle, and the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle. Then, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable, and in the predetermined section, the displacement member is tilted downward in the direction of the slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member makes the second member. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement in one direction.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slidable, and in a predetermined section, the displacement member is weighted by being tilted downward in the direction of the slide displacement. Since the sword is formed so as to be able to act in a direction that displaces the second member in one direction, the weight of the displaced member is used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

A gaming machine H6, wherein in any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the gaming ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the game ball in at least a predetermined section, so that the displacement member holds the game ball. In the state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be further increased. Further, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made different depending on whether the displacement member holds the game ball, the game ball is not held, or the number of the game balls held. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area, and at least in the predetermined section, the game ball when the receiving portion receives the game ball. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that a force acting on the displacement member is formed so as to be able to act in a direction in which the second member is displaced in one direction.

According to the game machine H7, in any of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area, and when the receiving portion receives the game ball at least in a predetermined section. Since the force acting on the displacement member from the game ball is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement of the second member in one direction, the kinetic energy of the game ball when the receiving portion receives the game ball. Can be used to increase the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section. In addition, the force applied to the displacement member differs depending on whether the receiving portion receives the game ball, does not receive it, or receives the game ball according to the flow velocity (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to give a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball that moves in the front surface of the game board along the direction of gravity, but also includes the game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include, for example, a game ball that collides with a nail, tulip, or an accessory and moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, or rolls a stage and then jumps out of the stage. An example is a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train that forms a part or all of the driving force transmission path, and a load gear that is meshed with one of the gears in the gear train. A game machine H8 characterized by.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6 or H7, the transmission means meshes with a gear train forming a part or all of the driving force transmission path and one of the gear trains. Since the load gear is provided, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the game ball is received by the receiving portion in a predetermined section, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. The second member is displaced ahead of the first member in one direction (that is, the displacement velocity of the displacement member in a predetermined section is made faster than the displacement velocity of the displacement member in the other section). If the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is used to move the second member to the first member. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in one direction in advance (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is increased).

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving portion does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving part receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section is set higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. It is possible to easily form an aspect of speeding up.

<Concept of the invention using the back case 300 as an example>
A game board (base plate 60), a back member (back case 300) arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member (fixing member 320) arranged on the back side of the back member. In the gaming machine to be provided, a displacement member that is arranged between the facing spaces from the game board to the back surface member and can be operated from the outside between the facing spaces from the game board to the back surface member on the back side of the game board. The fixing member includes (engaged member 310), and at least a part thereof is arranged on the front side of the back surface member, and includes a protruding portion (engaged portion 322) that engages with the displacement member. The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the protruding portion and the displacement member are engaged with each other and the fixing member is arranged on the back surface member.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a game board, a back member arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member arranged on the back side of the back member has been known (for example, special feature). Kai 2004-33603). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by a screw inserted from the front side of the back member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member from being removed from the back side of the game board.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the steps of arranging the fixing member on the back member and fastening the fixing member to the back member are the work from the back side of the back member and the work from the front side of the back member. The work is done from the opposite direction. Therefore, when arranging the fixing member on the back member, after arranging the fixing member on the back side of the back member, the fixing member wraps around to the front side of the back member, or the back member is inverted and the front side of the back member. It is necessary to fasten the screws from. Therefore, there is a problem that the number of work steps for arranging the fixing member on the back surface member increases.

On the other hand, in the game machine I1 The fixing member is provided with a protruding portion in which at least a part thereof is arranged on the front side of the back surface member and engages with the displacement member. Therefore, the fixing member can be arranged on the back member by working in one direction from the back side of the back member. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the step of wrapping around to the front side or reversing the back member after working from the back side. As a result, the number of work steps for arranging the fixing member on the back surface member can be reduced.

Further, since the engaging portion between the protruding portion and the fixing member is located on the front side of the back member, the engaging portion between the protruding portion and the fixing member is accessed from the outside between the game board and the back member facing each other. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion and the fixing member from being illegally disengaged.

The gaming machine I1 includes a first member (rotating unit 700) arranged between the gaming board and the back surface member, and the displacement member is arranged on the back surface side of the first member. Characteristic gaming machine I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, a first member arranged between the gaming board and the back member is provided, and the displacement member is provided on the back side of the first member. Since it is arranged, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be arranged between the back surface member and the first member facing each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally disengaged and the fixing member from being illegally replaced (for example, being replaced with an illegal fixing member).

Further, in recent gaming machines, the first member (role device or the like) arranged between the gaming board and the back surface member tends to be enlarged. Therefore, in a conventional gaming machine in which a fixing member is fastened with a screw from the front side of the back member, when the enlarged first member is arranged in front of the fixing member or at a position close to the fixing member, When the fixing member is fastened with screws from the front side of the back member, the first member becomes an obstacle. Therefore, it is difficult to fasten the fixing member with a screw inserted from the front side of the back member and dispose the fixing member on the back member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I2, since the displacement member is arranged on the back side of the first member, the displacement member is arranged from the gaming board in a state where the first member is arranged between the gaming board and the back member. The displacement member can be engaged with the fixing member by operating the displacement member from the outside between the facing members to the back surface member. Therefore, the fixing member can be arranged on the back surface member without being disturbed by the first member arranged between the game board and the back surface member.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to a plane facing the back surface member and the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface between the back member and the gaming board, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the back surface is displaced. The amount of displacement of the member and the game board in the opposite direction can be set to zero. As a result, it is possible to secure a space between the displacement member and the game board facing each other.

In any of the game machines I1 to I3, the back member is a bottom wall portion (bottom wall portion 301) facing the game board and a side wall erected on the game board side from the edge portion of the bottom wall portion. A box-shaped portion (outer wall portion 302) and an opening (second opening 301d) are formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is the opening. The gaming machine I4 is provided with an operator (operator 315) that is inserted into the portion and protrudes from the inside of the back surface member to the outside.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I3, the back member is erected from the bottom wall portion facing the game board and the edge portion of the bottom wall portion to the game board side. It is formed in a box shape including a side wall portion, an opening is formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is inserted through the opening and protrudes from the inside of the back surface member to the outside. Since the operator is provided, the displacement member can be displaced by operating the operator from the outside of the back member (outside the facing space between the game board and the back member). As a result, it is possible to easily displace the displacement member arranged between the facing space between the game board and the back surface member and the facing space between the game board and the back surface member. As a result, the efficiency of the work of engaging the displacement member with the fixing member can be improved.

The gaming machine I4 is characterized by comprising an urging means for urging the displacement member in a direction of disengagement with the fixing member in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged. Game machine I5.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, when the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged, the displacement member is urged in the direction of disengaging the fixing member. Since the force means is provided, when the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged, or when the displacement member and the fixing member are not fully engaged, the displacement member is engaged with the fixing member. It can be displaced in the direction of release. Therefore, the operator can determine whether or not the displacement member and the fixing member are properly engaged at the position where the operator projecting to the outside of the back surface member is arranged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member and the fixing member from being forgotten to be engaged.

The urging means includes a form in which a spring, rubber, or the like is arranged between the displacement member and the back surface member to urge the displacement member in the direction of disengagement with the fixing member, or the weight of the displacement member itself. An example is a form in which the displacement member acts in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member.

In the gaming machines I1 to I5, the fixing member is connected to a support member (shaft support member 340) arranged on the back surface of the back member and the support member, and is connected to the support member to control the gaming machine (board). A gaming machine I6 including a box 100), wherein the protruding portion is formed on the substrate member.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the fixing member is connected to a support member arranged on the back surface of the back surface member and the support member, and the player is given a predetermined game. Since the board member is provided with a board member for which a lottery is performed to give value and the protrusion is formed on the board member, the displacement member can be tilted to the fixed member when the board member is not connected to the support member. It disappears. Therefore, if the arrangement of the substrate member that performs the control required for the gaming machine is forgotten as compared with the support member for connecting the back surface member and the substrate member, the displacement member is displaced and engaged. Can be suppressed. As a result, when the worker who disposes of the board member forgets to dispose of the board member, the worker can be made aware of the forgetting to attach the board member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board member from being sent to the subsequent process of the assembling process of the gaming machine in a state where the board member is forgotten to be attached.

In the game machine I6, the substrate member is rotatably connected to the support member, and the protrusions are arranged at different positions in the radial direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member. By rotating the member with respect to the support member, the member can be displaced between the first position arranged on the front side of the back member and the second position arranged on the back side of the back member. The displacement member is set so as to be slidable in a direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member toward the protrusion when the protrusion is arranged at the i-first position. I7.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of the game machine I6, the substrate member is connected to the support member in a rotatable state, and the protruding portion is located at a position different in the radial direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member. By being arranged and rotating the substrate member with respect to the support member, the displacement is possible between the first position arranged on the front side of the back member and the second position arranged on the back side of the back member. When the protruding portion is arranged at the first position, the displacement member is set so that it can be slidably displaced in the direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member toward the protruding portion, so that the substrate member rotates with respect to the support member. Displace the protrusion from the second position side to the first position when the displacement member is displaced to a position where it engages with the protrusion before it is displaced and the protrusion is placed in the first position. Therefore, the protruding portion can be brought into contact with the displacement member.

In this case, since the displacement member is set so that it can be slidably displaced in the direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member toward the protrusion, the force with which the protrusion is in contact is released from the engagement between the displacement member and the protrusion. It can act on the displacement member in the direction. Therefore, when the projecting portion is in contact with the displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member by the force of contact with the projecting portion. Therefore, the displacement member can be displaced in the direction of disengaging the engagement with the projecting portion. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the operator who disposes the fixing member on the back surface member to recognize that the displacement member and the fixing member are engaged, and it is possible to prevent the displacement member and the fixing member from being disengaged. can.

Further, when the projecting portion comes into contact with the displacement member, the displacement member is released in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member, so that the displacement member or the fixing portion is fixed when the projecting portion comes into contact with the displacement member. It is possible to prevent the member from being damaged.

In any of the gaming machines I4 to I7, an outer frame (outer frame 11) formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the gaming board and the back member is provided, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the gaming board and the back member. In a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged with each other, the operator is arranged on the outside between the opposite sides from the game board to the back member. A game machine I8 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I4 to I7, an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the gaming board and the back member is provided, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the gaming board. And, it is formed to be substantially the same as the outer outer shape of the back member in the front view, and when the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged, the operator is arranged on the outside between the opposite sides from the game board to the back member. When the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged with each other, if the gaming board and the back surface member are housed in the outer frame, the operator can be brought into contact with the outer frame. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board and the back member from being housed in the outer frame. Therefore, when the fixing member is forgotten to be arranged on the back surface member, or when the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged, the operator can be made aware of the forgetting (abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being housed in the outer frame in a state where the fixing member is forgotten to be arranged on the back surface member or the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged.

In any of the gaming machines I4 to I8, the gaming machine I9 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of disengaging the displacement member and the fixing member. ..

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I4 to I8, a suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of disengaging the displacement member and the fixing member is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in the direction of disengagement from the fixing member by operating the operator. As a result, the operator can be used to prevent the displacement member and the fixing member from being disengaged from each other.

As a means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of disengaging the displacement member and the fixing member, the operator is pivotally supported in the direction of disengagement. , A form in which the protruding tip of the operator protrudes in a direction in which the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged, and a form in which the operator is arranged between the displacement member and the fixing member. Etc. are exemplified.

In any of the game machines I1 to I9, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion projecting from the elastic piece, and the fixing member is a displacement of the displacement member. The accommodating portion that opens into the region and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member is provided, and the accommodating portion includes a second projecting portion that projects into the displacement region of the first projecting portion, and the second projecting portion is provided. The protrusion is displaced in one direction so that the elastic piece can be displaced in contact with the first protrusion, and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction. The gaming machine I10, characterized in that the displacement member and the fixing member are brought into contact with one member so as to be engaged with each other.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I9, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion projecting from the elastic piece. The fixing member includes an accommodating portion that opens in the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, and the accommodating portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes into the displacement region of the first protrusion. In the second protrusion, the displacement member is displaced in one direction so that the elastic piece can be displaced in contact with the first protrusion, and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction. Since the displacement member and the fixing member can be engaged with each other by contacting the member, the displacement in one direction of the displacement member can be allowed and the displacement of the displacement member in the other direction can be regulated by the second protrusion. .. Thereby, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the displacement member in both the engaging direction with the fixing member and the falling direction.

In the gaming machine I10, the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, the elastic piece fits into the accommodating portion. The gaming machine I11, characterized in that the machine is accommodated.

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I10, the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged with each other, the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating the elastic piece. Since the elastic piece is accommodated in the accommodating portion, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the elastic piece from the outside of the accommodating portion in a state where the displacement member and the fixing member are engaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic piece from being elastically deformed by being operated from the outside of the accommodating portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally disengaged. In this case, the fixing member can be removed from the back surface member by cutting the displacement member (base end portion of the accommodating portion) located outside the accommodating portion.

In the gaming machine I11, the displacement member includes a plurality of the elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating a plurality of the elastic pieces. Machine I12.

According to the game machine I12, in addition to the effect of the game machine I11, the displacement member is provided with a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set in a space having a size capable of accommodating a plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the displacement member (the base end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the accommodating portion is cut and the fixing member is removed from the back member, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) is placed inside the accommodating portion. The displacement member (elastic piece) that has not been cut in that state can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion. Therefore, since the displacement member (elastic piece) cut inside the accommodating portion can be accommodated and left, the number of the displacement members accommodated in the accommodating portion and the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member are compared. Therefore, when the fixing member is illegally removed and changed to an illegal fixing member, the number of the fixing member is different, so that the operator can detect that the gaming machine has been illegally used.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I12, the first member regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of disengagement with the fixing member when the displacement member engages with the fixing member. The gaming machine I13, characterized in that it is provided with a regulatory means for the displacement.

According to the game machine I13, in addition to the effects of the game machines I1 to I12, when the displacement member engages with the fixing member, the regulation that regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of disengaging the fixing member. Since the means is provided, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the displacement member when a force acts in the direction of disengaging the displacement member and the fixing member due to improper operation. Therefore, when a force acts in the direction in which the displacement member disengages the fixing member due to fraud, it is possible to prevent the force from concentrating on the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member, which is fraudulent. It is possible to prevent the displacement member or the fixing member from being damaged by the force input by.

Further, since the first member includes the regulating means, when the fixing member is removed from the back member, the restriction of the displacement of the displacement member by the regulating means can be released by removing the first member from the back member. In this case, by removing the first member, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be accessed, so that the work efficiency when removing the fixing member from the back member can be improved.

Examples of the regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member include a form in which a protrusion is arranged inside the engaging recess to regulate the elastic deformation of the displacement member, a form in which the protrusion is engaged with the displacement member, and the like.

<About the concept of the invention using the general winning opening unit 150 as an example>
A base member having a gaming area on the front side, a first decorative means for forming a decoration on the front surface of the base member, and a second decorative means for forming a decoration continuous with the decoration of the first decorative means in front view. The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the first decorative means and the second decorative means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction in front view.

Conventionally, a base member having a gaming area on the front side, a first decorative means which is arranged in front of the base member and a decoration is formed on the front surface, and a first decorative means which is arranged in front of the first decorative means. A gaming machine is known that includes one member and a second decorative means that is arranged in front of the first member and is formed with a decoration continuous with the decoration of the first decorative means in a front view (for example,). JP-A-2007-000195). According to this gaming machine, the design of the base member can be ensured by allowing the player to visually recognize the decorations of the first decorative means and the second decorative means as one decoration.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the first decorative means is arranged in front of the first member, the second decorative means is separated from the first decorative means by the thickness of the first member. It is placed in a distant position. Therefore, depending on the position (direction of the line of sight) at which the player visually recognizes the base member, the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means are visually recognized by being shifted by the thickness of the first member, and the base. There was a problem that the design of the member was deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the first decorative means and the second decorative means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction in the front view, so that the first decorative means and the second decorative means are used. The front-rear separation distance can be reduced. As a result, when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means It is possible to prevent the image from being misaligned and visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration, and the design of the base member can be improved.

Further, the first decorative means may be any as long as the decoration is formed. For example, a seal member having the decoration printed on the plate-shaped member is attached to the front surface of the base member, or the decoration is provided on the front surface of the base member. Is to be printed.

When the second decorative means is attached (adhered) to the front of the first decorative means, the operator may attach (adhere) the second decorative means while visually recognizing the decoration of the first decorative means. can. Therefore, the worker can easily attach the second decorative means to the first decorative means at a position where the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means are continuous. Therefore, the workability of the worker who attaches the second decorative means to the first decorative means can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the front member is provided with a front member formed of a light-transmitting material, formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape in the front view of the second decorative means, and arranged in front of the second decorative means. The member is provided with a recess that is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the recessed dimension of the recess is larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that it is set to a large value.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the outer shape is formed from a light-transmitting material and has a larger outer shape than the outer shape in the front view of the second decorative means, and is arranged in front of the second decorative means. The front member is provided with a recess that is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means on the surface facing the second decorative means, and the recessed dimension of the recess is the second decorative means. Since the value is set to be larger than the thickness dimension of, the front member can be arranged on the base member with the second decorative means housed in the recess. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second decorative means from falling off between the base member and the front member.

Further, since the recessed dimension of the recess is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front member and the first decorative means. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from being caught between the front member and the first decorative means, making it difficult to see the decoration of the first decorative means.

The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the inner side surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is arranged by adhering to the recessed bottom surface of the recess. Amusement machine J3 to play.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the inner side surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is adhered to the recessed bottom surface of the recess. Since it is provided, the second decorative means can be positioned and arranged with respect to the front member by disposing the second decorative means along the concave portion of the front member. As a result, when the front member is arranged in front of the first decorative means, it is possible to prevent the second decorative means from being sandwiched between the edge of the front member and the facing of the first decorative means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first decorative means and the front member, and dust or dirt is sandwiched between the front member and the first decorative means to visually recognize the decoration of the first decorative means. It can be suppressed that it becomes difficult.

In the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that projects from a surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by being inserted into the opening.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, the front member is provided with a protrusion protruding from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member is an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by providing the portion and the protrusion being inserted into the opening, it is possible to prevent the front member from being displaced with respect to the first decorative means. Further, the second decorative means is positioned with respect to the front member by the recess of the front member. Therefore, by positioning the front member with respect to the first decorative means, it is possible to prevent the first decorative means and the second decorative means from being displaced from each other. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

In the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, and the second decorative means is formed with a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine J5 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, and the second decorative means is formed with a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the protrusion is inserted into the hole, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be simplified. That is, if the second decorative means is simply arranged inside the concave portion of the front member, it is necessary to arrange the edge portion of the second decorative means along the concave portion, whereas the protrusion is provided on the second decorative means. By forming the through hole to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be determined only by inserting the protrusion into the through hole. As a result, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be simplified.

Further, since the protrusion for positioning the front member is inserted into the through hole of the second decorative means with respect to the first decorative means, the second decorative means and the first decorative means are positioned at the same portion (projection). Therefore, the accuracy of positioning between the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that inclines toward the first decorative means side toward the outer edge in front view, and the edge of the second decorative means is provided on the back side of the inclined portion. A gaming machine J6 characterized in that a portion is arranged.

Here, in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize both the decorations of the first decoration means and the decorations of the second decoration means as one decoration, it is necessary to suppress the misalignment of the two decorations. However, when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the positions of both decorations are displaced in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decorative means, so that the first decorative means or the first decorative means or the first. (2) There is a problem that when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the decorative means, the front-rear positional deviation may be recognized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member is provided with an inclined portion that is inclined toward the first decorative means side toward the outer edge in the front view, and is inclined. Since the edge portion of the second decorative means is arranged on the back side of the portion, the misalignment of the decoration due to the different arrangement of the second decorative means and the first decorative means in the front-rear direction is caused by the inclined portion of the front member. The refraction of light can make it difficult for the player to recognize.

More specifically, the light that is reflected by the decoration of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, passes through the inside of the front member, and is emitted from the inclined portion is inclined in the passing direction with respect to the front of the base member. When the angle is made smaller than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the inclination angle in the light emission direction from the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is the base. It is made smaller than the inclination angle in the light passing direction with respect to the front surface of the member. Therefore, the connecting portion between the first decorative means and the second decorative means from the direction of the intersection angle smaller than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. The passing direction of the light visually recognized by the player can be brought closer to the overlapping direction of the first decorative means and the second decorative means. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative means and the second decorative means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the front-back positional deviation.

In the gaming machine J6, the second decorative means includes an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, and the inclined portion and the second decorative means are at least. A gaming machine J7 characterized in that the non-adhesive surface is provided at opposite positions.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the connecting portion of the decoration between the first decorative means and the second decorative means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the front and rear of the first decorative means and the second decorative means There is a risk that the player will recognize the misalignment of the decoration in the direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J7, in addition to the effect of the game machine J6, the second decorative means includes an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member. Since the non-adhesive surface is provided at least at a position where the inclined portion and the second decorative means face each other, a gap is formed between the second decorative means and the front member (inclined portion) on the non-adhesive surface to form a gap between the inclined portion and the front member (inclined portion). It is possible to totally reflect the light passing through the non-adhesive surface. Thereby, when the player visually recognizes the second decorative means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the player can not visually recognize the decoration of the end portion of the second decorative means. .. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decorative means and the second decorative means through the inclined portion from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, it is difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the second decorative means. , It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the misalignment of the decorations in the front-rear direction between the first decorative means and the second decorative means.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which the outer edge of the cross section in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in the front view is curved convexly toward the outer edge of the front member. The gaming machine is characterized in that the end portion of the second decorative means is arranged on the central side of the front member in a front view rather than a substantially intermediate position of a straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions. J8.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect of the game machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion has an outer edge of a cross section in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in the front view and is convex toward the outer edge of the front member. Since the end portion of the second decorative means is arranged on the center side of the front member in the front view, rather than the substantially intermediate position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions, which are formed in an arc shape curved in a shape. When the first decorative means and the second decorative means are visually recognized from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, the refraction of light due to the curvature of the inclined portion causes the center of the front member. The direction of the light passing through the side can be brought closer to the direction in which the first decorative means and the second decorative means overlap.

Further, since the end portion of the second decorative means is arranged on the central side of the front member from the substantially intermediate position of the straight line connecting the end portions of the inclined portions, the first decorative means and the second decorative means can be used. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the positional deviation of the above in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward in front view toward the first decorative means side, and the second inclined portion is the base. The gaming machine J9 is characterized in that the inclination angle with respect to the front surface of the member is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward in the front view toward the first decorative means side, and the second Since the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is set to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the decoration of the first decorative means visually recognized through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion (the inclined portion). The position of the virtual image) can be brought closer to the position of the decoration (real image) of the first decorative means that is visually recognized without passing through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion. As a result, when the first decorative means is visually recognized through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decorative means from becoming difficult to be visually recognized due to the refraction of light due to the passage of the front member.

<About the concept of the invention using the special winning device 550 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a game board having a game area on the front side and a path unit arranged on the game board and having a path for guiding the throwing of a game ball flowing down the game area, the path unit is a path unit. The first path for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in the front view, and the game ball thrown from the first path in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the first path. A second path for throwing a ball to the other side and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path are provided, and the third path is on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that a guiding means for sending a gaming ball to at least one of the above is provided on at least one inner wall on the front side or the back side of the gaming board.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a path unit arranged on the gaming board and having a path for guiding the throwing of a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area has been known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, a game ball that has flowed into a guide path formed in a path unit is guided (rolled) along the route of the guide path, thereby making the game ball roll (flow down). Can be given.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to secure a throwing distance of the game ball at a predetermined distance inside the path unit, a first path for throwing the game ball to one side with respect to the game board, and a first path thereof. When a second path for throwing a game ball thrown from one path to the other side of the game board and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path are formed, the first path is formed. Since the speed of the gaming ball rolling around is maximized at the portion communicating with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), the gaming ball is placed on the inner wall of the third path where the direction of throwing is changed. It collides and becomes easy to bounce. Therefore, there is a risk that the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the third path returns to the first path, or swings (shake) in the throwing direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path inside the third path. Therefore, since the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path sways in the third path, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball thrown in the third path in a certain direction, and the third path. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the route.

In this case, by lengthening the path of the third path, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the first path is smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second path, and the game ball passing through the third path. However, since the third path is formed to be long, the size of the entire path unit becomes large by that amount, and it becomes impossible to secure a space for arranging the path unit on the game board.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the path unit has a first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in the front view, and a game ball thrown from the first path. The third path includes a second path for throwing a ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guidance direction of the first path, and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path. Since the guide means for throwing the game ball to at least one of the front side or the back side of the game board is provided on the inner wall of at least one of the front side or the back side of the game board, the game ball passing through the third path is provided. It can be moved to the front side or the back side (front-back direction of the game board in front view). By moving the game ball on the front side or the back side, the game ball that has rolled and accelerated on the first path can be slowed down on the third path, and the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the third path is the third. It is possible to prevent the ball from returning to the first path or swinging (shaking) in the throwing direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path in the third path. As a result, the line of sight of the player can follow the game ball thrown from the third path in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third path.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in the front view) with respect to the game board in the front view, the third path connecting the first path and the second path can be suppressed accordingly. It is not necessary to lengthen the path to suppress the swinging of the game ball, and the path of the third path can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be housed in a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

As a guiding means for guiding the game ball, the rolling direction of the game ball is switched due to unevenness, or a displacement member is arranged at the switching portion of the path, and the game ball is guided to the second path by the displacement of the displacement member. The method of doing is exemplified.

In the gaming machine K1, the guiding means is composed of a concave portion recessed in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side and a convex portion protruding in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the guiding means includes a recess formed in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side and an inner wall of either the front side or the back side. Since the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other, the gaming ball is partially displaced in the middle of the path of the third path to form the gaming ball. The throwing speed of the ball can be slowed down. Therefore, the route of the third route can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be easily accommodated in a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the horizontal separation dimension from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2, the horizontal separation dimension from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. , The gaming ball that flows down the third path and is thrown to the guiding means can be easily brought into contact with the convex portion of the guiding means. As a result, the game ball that flows down the first path and is thrown into the third path can be brought into contact with the convex portion, and its rolling speed can be easily slowed down. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that collides with the inner wall of the third path from returning to the first path or swinging in the third path in a direction different from the throwing direction of the third path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the third path.

In the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the gaming board. Machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2 or K3, a convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and a concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the gaming board. Therefore, the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the inside of the route unit through the front surface of the route unit, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball thrown inside the route unit. Further, since the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side of the route unit, it is possible to prevent the guide means from protruding to the front of the route unit. Therefore, the route unit is arranged on the player side accordingly. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the path unit.

More specifically, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit needs to be larger than the recessed depth of the recess. Therefore, as the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit increases, it becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball thrown on the back side thereof. Further, when the concave portion is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to bend the plate on the front side of the path unit along the shape of the concave portion. It is necessary to have a space from the glass plate forming the front surface of the area, and it is necessary to arrange the entire game board on the back side. Therefore, as the distance from the player to the back side, it becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball to which the path unit is sent.

Further, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, it is conceivable to open the portion where the recess is formed, but in this case, the rigidity of the path unit is lowered by the amount of the opening, and the path is formed. The unit is easily damaged. Further, if an opening is formed in front of the path unit, there is a risk that the opening may be passed through and fraudulent.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K4, since the concave portion is formed on the back side of the path unit and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness of the entire front side of the path unit from becoming thick. The game ball passing through the inside of the path unit can be easily seen, and the path unit is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine by suppressing the partial protrusion toward the front side of the path unit so that the inside of the path unit can be easily seen. It is possible to make it easier to see the game ball passing through.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed in an arc shape in a cross section in the direction of gravity in a front view, and the axis of the arc is set coaxially.

According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed in an arc shape in a cross section in the direction of gravity, and the axis of the arc is set coaxially. The separation distance can be made constant. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distance between the convex portion and the concave portion from being partially smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the game ball passing through the inside of the path unit from being pinched between the convex portion and the inner wall. can.

In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along an extension of the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball that rolls on the first path in front view.

According to the gaming machine K6, since the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along the extension line of the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball that rolls on the first path in the front view, the game that rolls on the first path. Even when the rolling speed of the ball is high, it is possible to prevent the center of the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path from being thrown above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be thrown inside the recess.

In any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position separated from both side surfaces of the third path in the horizontal direction in the front view with respect to the radial dimension of the gaming ball. ..

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position separated from both sides in the horizontal direction in the front view of the third path by the radial dimension of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball flowing down along the inner wall of the recess from colliding with both side surfaces in the horizontal direction in the front view of the path unit and swinging inside the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown along the inside of the recess can be smoothly thrown into the second path.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recess is recessed so that the cross section of the first path in the front view in the throwing direction is arcuate in cross section centered on the central portion in the horizontal direction of the third path. The game K8 is characterized in that the convex portion has a rectangular cross section in the throwing direction of the first path in front view.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the concave portion has a cross section in the throwing direction of the first path in the front view recessed in an arcuate cross section, and the convex portion is the front surface. Since the cross section of the first path in the visual direction in the throwing direction is projected in a rectangular shape, the distance between the concave portion and the convex portion of the guiding means is narrowed toward both ends of the first path in the throwing direction. Therefore, the game ball thrown inside the recess can be made difficult to swing in the throwing direction of the first path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the third path.

In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is extended so as to be inclined downward to one side in a direction opposite to the throwing direction of the gaming ball of the second path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is extended so as to be inclined downward to one side in the direction opposite to the throwing direction of the gaming ball on the second path in the front view. The game ball that comes into contact with the convex portion when flowing down the three paths can be guided in the inclined direction of the convex portion. As a result, the game ball in contact with the convex portion can be guided along the inner wall of the concave portion on the side away from the second path. As a result, the game ball flowing from the third path to the second path can be rolled in the throwing direction of the game ball of the second path, and the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the third path to the second path. can.

In any of the game machines K1 to K9, the first path includes a second guide means at a connecting portion with the third path, and the second guide means causes the game ball to be thrown from the first path. A game machine K10 characterized in that it can be guided to the guidance means.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path is provided with a second guiding means at a connecting portion with the third path, and the first path is more than the second guiding means. Since the gaming ball thrown from the route can be guided to the guiding means, the gaming ball thrown from the first route to the third route can be easily sent to the guiding means on the third route. As a result, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first path to the third path. Therefore, since the game ball thrown from the first path can be easily thrown to the guide means, the inflow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be smoothed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball of the entire path unit.

In the gaming machine K10, the second guiding means is recessed at a position facing the second convex portion and the second convex portion projecting on either the front side or the back side of the first path. The second recess is composed of two recesses, and the second recess is characterized in that the width dimension in the direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball is set large toward the upstream side of the first path in front view. K11.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K10, the second guiding means includes a second convex portion projecting on either the front side or the back side of the first path, and the second convex portion thereof. The second recess is composed of a second recess recessed at an opposite position, and the width dimension of the second recess is set large in a direction orthogonal to the flow direction of the game ball toward the upstream side of the first path in front view. Therefore, it is possible to easily accept the game ball sent through the first path into the second recess. As a result, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first path to the third path. Therefore, since the game ball thrown from the first path can be easily thrown to the guide means, the inflow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be smoothed. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball of the entire path unit.

In the gaming machine K10 or K11, the second recess is characterized in that the end portion in the downstream direction of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the gaming ball of the first path. ..

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K10 or K11, the end of the second recess in the downstream direction of the first path is located downstream of the rolling surface of the gaming ball of the first path. Therefore, the gaming ball that flows into the third path from the first path along the inner wall of the second recess can be made to flow into the third path on the far side from the first path. As a result, the game ball flowing from the first path to the third path can be easily sent to the inside of the recess, and the game ball can be easily flowed from the third path to the second path.

<About the concept of the invention using the special winning device 550 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a game board having a game area on the front side and a flow direction changing means for changing the flow direction of a game ball flowing down the game area, which is arranged in front of the game board, the flow direction changing means. Is a first member arranged on the front surface of the gaming board, a second member arranged on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval, and at least one of the first member or the second member. A gaming ball provided with an adjusting means for displacing one of them, and the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing surfaces of the first member and the second member to flow down between the facing surfaces of the first member and the second member. The gaming machine L1 characterized in that the flow direction of the machine can be adjusted.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a nail to be struck on the front surface of the gaming board has been known (for example, JP-A-11-197311). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to adjust the angle of the nails struck on the gaming board (bending the nails) to adjust the flowing direction of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. However, if the angle of the nail is changed to change the flow direction of the game ball, the angle of the nail is visually recognized by the player, which is disadvantageous to the player (it is difficult for the game ball to flow down into the advantageous flow path). There is a problem that when the player recognizes the angle of the nail), the player does not play with the gaming machine judged to be disadvantageous, and the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the flow direction changing means is arranged on the front side of the game board and the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval. The first member and the first member are provided with two members and an adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member or the second member, and the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other is changed by the adjusting means. Since the flow direction of the game ball flowing down between the two members can be adjusted, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) by the distance in the front-rear direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the flow direction changing means and judging that it is disadvantageous or advantageous, rather than a nail that changes the flow direction of the game ball with a horizontal separation distance with respect to the front view of the game board. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means, so that the second member is arranged on the front side. At least a part of the first member arranged on the back side can be hidden by the two members, so that the position of the first member can be made difficult for the player to see. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from not playing the game on the gaming machine because the player determines that it is disadvantageous from the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, the gaming board is provided with a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first member is a fastening member that inserts the first opening from the back side of the gaming board. The gaming machine L3, characterized in that the first member is arranged on the gaming board by fastening to.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L2, the gaming board is provided with a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the gaming board. By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is arranged on the gaming board, so that it is not necessary to form the fastening portion for fastening the first member on the front side of the gaming board. The outer shape of the first member in view can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other members in front of the game board.

Further, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board when the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member from being illegally operated and the position of the first member from being illegally changed.

In the gaming machine L3, the first member is provided with a protruding portion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protruding portion. The gaming machine L4, wherein the first member is arranged on the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, the first member has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protruding portion. As a result, the first member is arranged on the gaming board, so that the fastening portion of the fastening member can be accommodated inside the first opening. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the fastening portion with the fastening member from projecting to the front side of the first member, it is possible to secure a space between the first member and the second member facing each other.

In the gaming machine L4, the first member can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the front surface of the gaming board by the adjusting means, and the first opening has the same size as the displacement region of the protruding portion. A gaming machine L5 characterized by being opened in parallel.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L4, the first opening is opened to the same size as the displacement region of the protruding portion, so that when the position of the first member is displaced, the first opening protrudes. The portion can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to prevent the first member from being displaced in a direction other than the displacement direction (the direction displaced by the adjusting means). As a result, the work when the operator adjusts the position of the first member can be simplified.

A gaming machine L6 in any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, wherein the gaming board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from that of the first opening.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from that of the first opening, so that the gaming board is provided through the second opening. It is possible to operate the fastening member fastened to the back side of the game board. As a result, the work process when the operator operates the adjusting means can be simplified.

That is, since the accessory device and the case member for accommodating the accessory device are arranged on the back side of the game board, when the fastening member is operated from the back side of the game board, the accessory device and its Where it is necessary to remove the case member accommodating the accessory device from the game board, the fastening member can be operated from the front side of the game board by the second opening, so that the operator can operate the fastening member on the back side of the game board. Since it is not necessary to remove the arranged accessory device and the case member accommodating the accessory device, the work process of the operator can be simplified.

The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in front view by the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in front view, so that the second member with respect to the first member It is possible to suppress the change in the position of the second member in the front view as compared with the case where the position is changed in the left-right or up-down direction in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from determining that the position of the second member is advantageous or disadvantageous due to the change in the position of the second member in the front view. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed larger than that of the first member, and the first member is said in front view. A gaming machine L8 characterized in that it is covered with a second member.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed larger than that of the first member. Since the one member is covered with the second member in the front view, the first member can be hidden by the second member in the front view, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member projects to the other of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L9 characterized by having a protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member is the first member. Alternatively, since a protruding portion protruding from the other side of the second member is provided, the game ball thrown between the first member and the second member can be brought into contact with the protruding portion to change the throwing direction. can. Therefore, by recognizing the distance between the first member and the second member facing each other, it is possible to suppress the player from determining that the first member and the second member are advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means can stepwise adjust the position of the other of the first member or the second member with respect to one of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L10 characterized by providing means.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means adjusts the position of the other of the first member or the second member with respect to one of the first member or the second member. Since the step adjusting means that can be adjusted stepwise is provided, the operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change of the position stepwise. As a result, it is possible to prevent an error from occurring in the adjustment position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, the position adjustment of the first member or the second member can be simplified.

As a means for adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member stepwise, the first member or the second member has a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the second member. By changing the insertion position of the convex portion to be projected, the position of the first member or the second member can be changed, or the first member can be formed in a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the game board. An example is a mode in which the position of the first member is changed by changing the insertion position of the convex portion protruding from the other side of the member or the game board.

<About the concept of the invention using the special winning device 550 as an example>
The path in a gaming machine including a gaming area in which a game ball flows down and a path unit having a plurality of guide paths for guiding the throwing of the game ball flowing down the game area and arranged in the game area. The unit has a first guide path formed of a material capable of transmitting light and arranged on the front side of the gaming area, and a second guide path arranged on the back side of the first guide path. The first guide path is provided with a first winning opening capable of entering a game ball, and the second guide path is provided with a second winning opening capable of entering a game ball. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that a gaming ball entering the first winning opening is given a higher gaming value than a gaming ball entering the second winning opening.

Conventionally, a gaming machine in which a path unit having a plurality of guide paths for flowing down a game ball is arranged in a game area and the game ball flowing down inside the unit is visually recognized by the player to improve the interest of the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to make the player visually recognize the game ball flowing down the guide path and improve the interest of the player, the handling of each guide path tends to be complicatedly formed. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which of the guide routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, when the game value of the game ball flowing down the guide route is different, the player decides whether the ball is passing through an advantageous (high game value is given) or disadvantageous (low game value is given) route. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to judge and the player's interest cannot be sufficiently improved by the game ball flowing down the route unit.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the path unit has a first guide path formed of a material capable of transmitting light and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a back surface of the first guide path. A second guide path arranged on the side is provided, the first guide path is provided with a first winning opening capable of entering a game ball, and the second guide path is provided with a game ball. A first guide route because a gaming ball having a possible second winning opening and entering the first winning opening is given a higher game value than a gaming ball entering the second winning opening. It is possible to make it easier for the player to gaze at the game ball that flows down. Further, when the game ball is flowed down to the first and second guide paths at the same timing, the second guide path provided with the second winning opening having a low game value is on the back side of the first guide path. Since it is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide path provided with the first winning opening having a high game value. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball to which the high game value is given, so that it is possible to easily improve the interest of the player.

The predetermined game value means, for example, a game ball that is paid out to the player as a privilege when the game ball is entered into the first or second winning opening.

In the game machine M1, the first guide path is a first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction in a front view, and a game ball thrown from the first path is a game ball in the first path. A second path for throwing a game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the above, and a connecting path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path in the gravitational direction are provided, and the connection is provided. The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the path is formed by being curved in a semi-arc shape toward the back surface side of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the first guide path is a first path for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction in the front view, and the ball is thrown from the first path. The second path for sending the game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the game ball on the first path, and one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity. A connecting path for connecting is provided, and the connecting path is formed so as to be curved in a semi-arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected at the shortest distance. It is possible to increase the number of bends in the throwing path as compared to the case where the ball is thrown. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball can be gradually reduced at the curved portion, and the game ball can be prevented from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and swinging (shaking) in the connecting path. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed from the first path to the second path, so that the player can easily see the thrown ball of the game ball from the first path to the second path.

Further, in order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and swinging (shaking), the internal space of the connecting path is enlarged in the throwing direction of the first path, and the game ball is repeatedly repeated on the inner wall of the connecting path. It is possible to suppress the collision, but in this case, the connecting path is projected in the horizontal direction in the front view by the amount that the internal space of the connecting path is increased in the throwing direction of the first path. Therefore, since the path unit in the front view is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to keep the path unit within a predetermined range in the front view.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, since the connecting path is curved in a semicircular shape toward the back side, the outer shape of the path unit in front view can be kept within a predetermined range. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first guide path, the range visually recognized by the player can be contained within a predetermined range (outer shape of the route unit). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In the gaming machine M2, the path unit is arranged on the other side in the horizontal direction of the gaming region in the front view, and the connecting path is formed on one side in the horizontal direction of the path unit in the front view. The featured gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M2, the path unit is arranged on the other side in the horizontal direction of the gaming area in the front view, and the connecting path is one in the horizontal direction of the path unit in the front view. Since it is formed on the side, the connecting path can be formed at a position close to the player located in front of the gaming board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connecting path. As a result, even if the game ball is thrown to the back side by the connecting path, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connecting path.

In the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is arranged between the first path and the second path in a front view.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is arranged between the first path and the second path in the front view, so that the first path and the first path are the first. The first winning opening can be formed in the first guide path by using the dead space formed with the two paths. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer shape of the path unit from becoming large in the front view. As a result, the range in which the player can visually recognize the route unit can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to the gaming machine M4, the connecting path includes a third winning opening capable of inserting the game ball into two places of the connecting portion between the first path and the second path, and a third of them. The game ball is provided with a displacement member that can be displaced to a position where the winning opening is closed or opened, and the gaming ball that is entered into the third winning opening is the same as the gaming ball that is entered into the first winning opening. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that a gaming value is given.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connecting path is a third winning opening in which the gaming ball can be inserted into two places of the connecting portion with the first path and the second path. , A displacement member that can be displaced to a position that closes or opens the third winning opening, and a gaming ball that enters the third winning opening, and a gaming ball that enters the first winning opening. Since the same game value is given, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball thrown from the first path to the connecting path to enter either of the two third winning openings, and to flow down the connecting path. It is possible to easily give the player a sense of interest by playing a game ball.

That is, between the third winning opening on the upstream side formed in the connecting portion of the connecting path and the first path and the third winning opening on the downstream side formed in the connecting portion of the connecting path and the second path. Since the connecting path can be arranged in, the third winning opening is closed by the displacement member when the displacement member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing at a position where the third winning opening is closed or released. At that time, the game ball thrown from the first path to the connecting path is allowed to flow down the connecting path curved to the back side to secure a time until the third winning opening is released, and the third on the downstream side. It can be flowed into the winning opening. As a result, the game ball sent to the connecting route can be easily flowed into the third winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down the connecting route can easily give the player a taste.

Further, since the two third winning openings are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connecting path (the connecting portion between the first path and the second path), respectively, they can enter the third winning opening. It is possible to lengthen the time that the ball can be played. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time for giving the player a hobby, and it is possible to easily enhance the player's hobby.

A gaming machine M6, wherein in any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detecting means for detecting the passage of a gaming ball is provided outside the connecting path.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M2 to the gaming machine M5, a detecting means for detecting the passage of the gaming ball is provided in the connecting path, so that the gaming ball is clogged in the connecting path. In that case, the detection of the detection means is continued, so that the gaming machine can detect the error. Further, since the detecting means is arranged outside the connecting path, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught by the detecting means as compared with the case where the detecting means is arranged in the connecting path. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being clogged in the connecting path.

Further, since the detecting means is arranged outside the connecting path in which the rolling of the game balls is delayed, it is possible to easily accurately detect the number of game balls passing through the connecting path. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detecting means is larger than the number of balls winning in the first winning opening or the third winning opening, it is possible to make the gaming machine recognize that the fraud is being performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of fraud by notifying that fraud has been performed by a warning sound, abnormal lighting, or the like.

In the gaming machine M6, in the connecting path, the dimension between the facing surfaces of the inner walls in the front view is set to be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the facing of the inner walls of the first path in the direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball. The gaming machine M7 characterized in that it is set smaller than the interdimensional dimension.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6, the connecting path is set so that the dimension between the facing surfaces of the inner walls in the front view is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball. Since it is set smaller than the opposite dimension of the inner wall of the first path in the direction, when a game ball having a diameter larger than a predetermined size (diameter larger than the specified value) is thrown, the game ball stays in the connecting path. Can be clogged. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a diameter larger than the specified value from flowing down the path unit.

Further, since a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in the connecting path, when a game ball having a diameter larger than the specified value stays (clogs) in the connecting path, the detecting means causes the gaming machine. Can detect an error.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path has an opening formed on the lateral side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular shape toward the back side at a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. A game machine M7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path is determined to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball on the radial outer side wall of the path curved in a semicircular shape toward the back side. Since an opening that opens at the value of Can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game ball having a diameter smaller than the specified value from flowing down the path unit.

Since the opening is formed on the radial outer side wall of the connecting path, which is the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the connecting path, the opening is formed when the diameter of the game ball flowing down the connecting path is smaller than the specified diameter. The game ball can be easily discharged.

The gaming machine M8 includes a box-shaped accommodating portion that protrudes from the radial outside of the connecting path and communicates with the opening, and the accommodating portion is set to a size capable of accommodating a gaming ball. The gaming machine M9, which is formed in the detection range of the detection means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M8, the accommodating portion is provided with a box-shaped accommodating portion that protrudes from the radial outside of the connecting path and communicates with the opening. Since the ball is formed in a size that can accommodate the ball and is formed in the detection range of the detection means, a game having a diameter (smaller than the specified diameter) of a predetermined size or less discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path. The sphere can be stored inside the housing. Further, since the accommodating portion is formed in the detection range of the detecting means, the game ball stored inside the accommodating portion can be detected by the detecting means. As a result, when the game ball is stored inside the accommodating portion, the detection means can cause the game machine to detect an error.

In any of the game machines M1 to the game machine M9, the inflow port of the game ball of the first guide path and the inflow port of the game ball of the second guide path are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction in the front view. A gaming machine M10 characterized in that it is formed in.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M1 to the gaming machine M9, the inlet of the gaming ball on the first guide path and the inlet of the gaming ball on the second guide path are Since it is formed at positions adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction in the front view, the player until just before the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board flows into the first guide path or the second guide path. It can be difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the game ball that flows down the game area and is sent to the path unit. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player an interest.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
It includes a base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member having a throwing path arranged on the front side of the base member and formed as a space in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown. In a gaming machine, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member by a fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. Gaming machine N1 to play.

Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member having a ball throwing path arranged on the front side of the base member and formed as a space in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the first member is provided with an extension portion extending on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on a side surface (contact portion with the base member) on the base member side, and the extension portion is provided. By screwing the screw inserted into the opening formed in the base member into the base member, the screw is arranged in close contact with the front surface of the base member.

However, in a conventional gaming machine, in order to dispose the first member in close contact with the front surface of the base member, it is essential to fasten a screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. It is necessary to form an opening in the first member for inserting the screw. Here, in order to form the opening at a position that does not interfere with the throwing of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the throwing space of the game ball, and the extension portion where the opening is formed is outside the throwing space. Need to form. Therefore, since the extending portion is formed on the outer edge of the first member, the area that can be used as the throwing path becomes smaller than the outer shape of the first member, and the throwing path of the first member cannot be made sufficiently large. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is arranged on the base member in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member by the fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. , The first member and the base member can be arranged in close contact with each other by the urging force acting on the first member on the back surface side. Further, since the first member is arranged on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member, there is a fastening allowance (an opening through which the fixing means is inserted) with the base member on the front side of the first member. It is not necessary to form an extension portion) to be formed. Therefore, the entire area can be used as a throwing path with respect to the outer shape of the first member in the front view. As a result, the throwing path of the first member can be increased.

Further, since the fastening portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed to the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion between the base member and the first member from being illegally removed, and the fastening portion is visible to the player. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered.

The gaming machine N1 includes a second member arranged on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is inserted from the back side of the second member to the first member side. A gaming machine characterized in that it is fixed to the first member by the fixing means fixed to the first member, and is arranged on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, a second member is provided on the back side of the first member via a base member, and the second member is on the back side of the second member. The first member is fixed to the first member by a fixing means that is inserted into the first member side and fixed to the first member, and is arranged on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. When the second member is fastened to the second member, a force urged on the back surface side can be applied to the first member by the predetermined gap. Further, since a force urged to the front side can be applied to the second member, the base member can be sandwiched between the first member and the second member. Therefore, it is necessary to fasten the first member or the second member to the base member because the first member and the second member are less likely to be displaced from the base member due to the pinching force between the first member and the second member. Therefore, the fastening of the second member can be simplified accordingly.

The predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value larger than 0 and smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction in the front view. As a result, when the first member and the second member are fastened, a force that attracts each other can be applied to both the first member and the second member due to the gap.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is a protruding portion protruding inward of the first opening. The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that the first member is arranged on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protruding portion thereof.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has a first opening. The first member is disposed on the base member by providing a protruding portion protruding inward of the slingshot and fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protruding portion. Therefore, the fastening portion of the fixing means is inside the first opening. Can be placed in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion of the fixing means from being arranged on the front side of the base member, and it is possible to prevent the fastening portion of the fixing means from being formed in the throwing space of the first member. As a result, the size of the throwing space of the first member can be secured.

Further, since the fastening allowance (insertion depth) of the fixing means can be secured by the protruding portion, it is possible to prevent the fixing means from being fastened from the first member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the urging force on the back surface side acting on the first member.

In the gaming machine N1, a second member arranged on the back surface side of the first member via the base member, and a third member arranged between the first member and the second member facing each other. The base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the third member has dimensions in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member in the front view. It is set smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction, is arranged inside the first opening, the first member is arranged in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is arranged. The gaming machine N4 is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap from the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the second member arranged on the back side of the first member via the base member is arranged between the first member and the second member facing each other. The base member includes a third member to be provided, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the third member has a dimension in the front-rear direction in front view of the base member. It is set smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction in front view, is arranged inside the first opening, the first member is arranged in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is a base. Since it is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap from the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the member, it is attached to the back side of the first member via the third member. Forces can act. Therefore, the urging force on the back surface side that acts when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means can also be applied to the third member. As a result, the urging force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

Further, the rigidity of the entire first member can be increased by bringing the third member into close contact with the back side of the first member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entire first member from being elastically deformed by the urging force acting on the first member toward the back surface, and the throwing path of the game ball formed on the first member from being deformed. As a result, the game ball of the first member can be stably thrown.

In the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. Pachinko machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of the frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening opened in the base member. Therefore, the urging force acting on the third member can be used as a force for urging the frame-shaped member toward the back surface side. Therefore, the frame-shaped member can be easily arranged in a state of being in close contact with the base member.

Further, since the urging force acting on the back surface side when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means can be applied to the contact surface between the frame-shaped member and the base member, the first member The force acting on the contact portion with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is a displacement member that can displace the throwing space of the game ball of the first member, and a drive that is arranged on the back surface side of the first member to drive the displacement member. The third member includes a means, and the third member includes a third opening that is opened to a size that allows the driving means to be inserted, and the driving means is inserted inside the third opening. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged on the back side of one member.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is arranged on the back side of the first member and a displacement member that can displace the throwing space of the gaming ball of the first member. The third member is provided with a third opening that is opened to a size that allows the driving means to be inserted, and the driving means is inserted inside the third opening. Since it is arranged on the back side of the first member in this state, the driving means can be covered with the third member. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the gaming machine from being accessed by the driving means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being tampered with.

In the gaming machine N6, the second member is projected toward the first member, and the gaming ball that communicates with the throwing space of the first member and is thrown into the throwing space of the first member is used as the second member. The gaming machine N7 is provided with a communicating portion capable of throwing balls, and the communicating portion is arranged outside the third opening.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N6, the second member is projected toward the first member side, communicates with the throwing space of the first member, and is thrown into the throwing space of the first member. A communication portion capable of sending the ball to the second member is provided, and since the communication portion is arranged outside the third opening, the third member can be arranged between the communication portion and the driving means. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by driving the driving means to act on the communicating portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the communicating portion from slowing down the speed of passing through the communicating portion due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means, or to prevent the game ball from stopping at the communicating portion, and the first member to the second member to the second member. It is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game ball to the member.

In the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member projects from at least two positions on the back surface side of the first member. The protrusion is provided with a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and inserts the first opening, and is bent at the end of the first piece to the outside of the first opening. The second piece is provided with a second piece extending toward the surface and a raised portion on the front side of the second piece that overlaps with the base member in the front view, and the first piece is in the front view of the base member. The protrusion dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension between the raised portion and the back surface of the first member is the same as or the width dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member. It is set small, and the bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means, so that the first member is arranged in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member. A game machine N8 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is the back surface of the first member. A first piece that protrudes from at least two points on the side and protrudes from the back surface of the first member to insert the first opening, and a first piece that is bent at the end of the first piece and first. It includes a second piece extending outward of the opening and a raised portion on the front side of the second piece that overlaps the base member in front view, and the first piece is in front view of the base member. The protrusion dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension between the raised portion and the back surface of the first member is set to be the same as or smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view of the base member. , The bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means, so that the first member is arranged in a state of being urged to the back side with respect to the base member. It is not necessary to provide a portion for fastening the fixing means (for example, a screw) on the side, and it is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed on the first member. As a result, the throwing space can be increased, so that the throwing direction of the game ball thrown to the first member can be changed, and the throwing can be easily made interesting.

Further, since the screwed portion of the fixing means can be used as the base member, it is possible to prevent the throwing space of the first member from being elastically deformed by the urging force acting on the screwed portion of the fixing means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first member from being elastically deformed and slowing down the speed of the game ball thrown from the throwing path of the first member.

In the gaming machine N8, the base member includes a second opening formed with an opening in the front-rear direction in a front view, and a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the base member along the second opening. The gaming machine N9 is characterized in that the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N8, the base member is provided on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the front-rear direction in the front view and the second opening. Since the frame-shaped member to be arranged is provided and the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, the projecting portion is arranged inside the first opening by utilizing the opening of the second opening. Can be set up. Therefore, the work of arranging the first unit on the base member can be simplified, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceable on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven to the displacement of the displacement member, the driven direction of the driven member. The displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is displaced from the first position to an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. The driven member has a first displacement region that displaces the third position of the above, and a second displacement region that displaces the second position from the third position. By being displaced to the second position, the first driven position is driven to the second driven position, and the third driven position, which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, is displaced from the first driven position. It has a first driven region and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a part of the second displacement region and the first driven region is the same. The gaming machine O1 is set in a region, and when the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the restricting means regulates the swing of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction.

Conventionally, a base member, a displacement member displaceable on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by the displacement of the displacement member are provided, and the base member is driven by the displacement of the displacement member. A gaming machine that displaces a member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to regulate the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and the swing other than the driven direction, if a regulating means for regulating the swing of both the displacement member and the driven member is formed, the regulating means is used. It is necessary to form it at two places, which causes a problem that the shape becomes complicated and the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, in the game machine O1, the displacement member is provided with a regulating means for restricting the swing of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position. The driven member has a first displacement region that displaces the third position, which is an intermediate position between the first position and the first position and the second position, and a second displacement region that displaces the second position from the third position. When the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and from the first driven position to the intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position. It has a first driven region that displaces the third driven position and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a part of the second displacement region and the first driven region is When the displacement member is set in the same region and the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement region, the regulating means regulates the swing in a direction other than the displacement direction of the displacement member. Therefore, the same part of the regulating means is used. Therefore, the swing of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated. Therefore, since it is sufficient to form the regulating means at one place, the shape can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, since the swing of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated by using the same portion of the regulating means, it is not necessary to form the driven member, the displacement member and the regulating portion of one regulating means, respectively. The regulatory means can be reduced accordingly.

In the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion projecting from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is positioned so as to overlap at least a part of the base member in a front view. It is characterized in that it can be slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the member, and the region overlapping the base member in the front view is gradually reduced as the driven position moves from the first driven position to the second driven position. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion projecting from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is at least one of the base members in a front view. It is possible to slide and displace on a plane parallel to the base member at the position where it overlaps the portion, and as the driven position moves from the first driven position to the second driven position, the area that overlaps with the base member in the front view is gradually reduced. In the second driven position, the region where the driven member projects to the outside of the base member in the front view is made larger than that in the first driven position. Therefore, it is difficult to regulate the swing of the driven member by the regulating means provided on the base member because the driven member projects to the outside of the base member. Therefore, the driven member is more likely to swing toward the base member side as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position. The number of restricted points can be increased to make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is arranged in the second driven region.

In the game machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape having a long side when viewed from the front, has a rotatable axis on one side in the longitudinal direction, and is rotatably arranged on the base member. In one driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and when the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation axis. The gaming machine O3, wherein the other side of the driven member is arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity with respect to the rotation axis.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape having a long side in the front view, has a rotatable axis on one side in the longitudinal direction, and is used as a base member. It is rotatably arranged, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and when driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member is centered on the rotation axis. Since the driven member rotates and the other side of the driven member is arranged on the upper side in the direction of gravity with respect to the rotation axis, the driven member rotates when driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and the longitudinal side stands up. Therefore, as the driven member stands up, the load of the driven member is likely to act toward the rotation axis, and the load of the driven member acts in the swinging direction of the driven member, so that the driven member is likely to swing.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swing of the displacement member connected to the driven member, it is possible to increase the number of regulated points by the regulating means and make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is arranged in the second driven region.

Further, when the driven member is driven in the first driven region where a force for lifting the other end side of the driven member is required, the regulation of the displacement member is released from the first position to the third position (first displacement region). However, since the regulation of the displacement member is released by the regulating means in the first displacement region, it is possible to prevent the operation of the displacement member from being delayed by the regulating means. Therefore, when the displacement force of the driven member is required, the displacement force of the driven member can be secured.

In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member includes a protruding portion that is projected at a position facing the wall portion, and the tip of the protruding portion is brought into contact with the wall portion to displace the driven member. Is regulated, and the displacement member is set so that the space between the driven member and the wall portion can be displaced in the second displacement region, and the displacement member is set in the direction in which the driven member and the wall portion face each other. The gaming machine O4, characterized in that at least a part of the above overlaps with the driven member.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member includes a projecting portion projecting at a position facing the wall portion, and the tip of the projecting portion hits the wall portion. The displacement of the driven member is regulated by being in contact with the displacement member, and the displacement member is set so that the space between the driven member and the wall portion can be displaced in the displacement region at the end, and the displacement member is displaced in the direction in which the driven member and the wall portion face each other. Since at least a part of the displacement member overlaps with the driven member, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from tilting to the side opposite to the wall portion. As a result, the displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be regulated by the driven member and the wall portion, and swinging can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the side surface of the displacement member is in contact with the protruding portion of the driven member at the second driven position.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the projecting portion of the driven member at the second driven position, so that the displacement member is moved from the first driven position to the second driven position. When displaced to a position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the displacement member to stop. Therefore, it is possible to make the protruding portion abut on the wall portion to regulate the displacement of the driven member and to assist the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to secure a displaceable space for the displacement member and the driven member.

In the gaming machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member. Is set in the direction toward the axial center of the displacement member, the gaming machine O6.

According to the game machine O6, in addition to the effect of the game machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the driven member is connected to the displacement member. Since the displacement direction of the portion is set in the direction toward the axial center of the displacement member, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by the load of the driven member when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be set to the dead center relationship, so that the displacement member can be suppressed from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the game machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base portion and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the displacement direction of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member The gaming machine O7 is characterized in that the combined direction of the direction in which the reaction force due to the contact between the projecting portion and the displacement member acts is set to the direction toward the axial center of the displacement member.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effect of the game machine O5, the driven member is in contact with the displacement member of the driven member when one end is pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position. Since the combined direction of the displacement direction of the connecting portion and the direction in which the reaction force acts due to the contact between the projecting portion and the displacement member is set to the direction toward the axial center of the displacement member, the load of the driven member is set. When acting on the displacement member, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is arranged at the second driven position, the direction of the force acting on the displacement member from the driven member is directed toward the axial center of the displacement member, so that the displacement member rotates about the shaft support portion. It is possible to suppress the generation of the force of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the projecting portion is arranged with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and when the displacement member comes into contact with the wall portion, the protruding portion is brought into contact with the wall portion. Machine O8.

Here, if the protruding portion of the driven member and the wall portion are constantly in contact with each other, there is a risk that it becomes a resistance when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, and it becomes difficult to stably displace the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O8, the projecting portion is arranged with a predetermined gap from the wall portion, and when the displacement member comes into contact with the wall portion, the displacement member comes into contact with the wall portion, so that the displacement member is in the second driven position. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from swinging when it is displaced, and it is possible to prevent the protrusion and the bulging portion from becoming resistance during the displacement.

<Concept of the invention using the lower displacement member 440 as an example>
A decorative member formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting light on the back side at least in a front view, and a decorative member arranged on the back side of the decorative member in a displaceable state on a plane parallel to the front surface. In a game machine including a receiving portion capable of receiving and holding a game ball, the light emitting means provided on the back side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward a displacement region of the receiving portion is provided. The means is arranged on the back side of the receiving portion or between the decorative member and the receiving portion, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted by the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion. A gaming machine P1 characterized in that the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially different by blocking or reflecting.

Conventionally, a decorative member formed of a light-transmitting material capable of transmitting at least a part of light on the back side in front view and a displaceable state on a plane parallel to the front side on the back side of the decorative member. A gaming machine provided with a receiving portion capable of receiving and holding a gaming ball is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by receiving and holding the game ball in the receiving section and then moving the receiving section, it is possible to perform an effect of moving the game ball with the movement of the receiving section.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the receiving portion is arranged on the back side of the decorative member, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the positions of the receiving portion and the gaming ball received by the receiving portion. Therefore, when the receiving unit moves after the game ball is received (held) by the receiving unit, the player can determine in which direction the receiving unit and the game ball accepted (held) by the receiving unit have moved. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the position of the game ball accepted by the receiving unit.

On the other hand, the game machine P1 is provided with light emitting means which is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and can emit light toward the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the light emitting means is on the back side of the receiving portion or decoration. A game ball disposed between the member and the receiving portion and received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion blocks or reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means, and determines the amount of light emitted from the decorative member. The amount of light emitted from the receiving portion or the decorative member located on the front side of the game ball received by the receiving portion and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member at other positions are different from each other. By making them different, it is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion having a different amount of light.

More specifically, when the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received by the receiving part, so that the receiving part or the receiving part is blocked. The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in can be made darker than the other parts of the decorative member. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small (dark).

On the other hand, when the light emitting means is arranged between the decorative member and the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the receiving part or the game ball received by the receiving part, so that the receiving part or the receiving part or The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received by the receiving portion can be made brighter than the other parts of the decorative member. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion having a large amount of light (bright) emitted from the decorative member.

In the gaming machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the gaming ball held by the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is substantially the same as the center of the gaming ball held by the receiving portion. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that a light emitting portion is arranged at the height of the above, and the light transmitting portion of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means.

Here, in a structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member and the light is reflected or blocked by the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion, the light emitted from the light emitting means is the gaming ball. Not only that, but also by irradiating the receiving portion, the light is easily reflected or blocked by the receiving portion. Therefore, the light and darkness of the light formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving portion, so that the shape of the light and darkness is different from the outer shape of the game ball, and the amount of light is given to the player. There was a risk that it would be difficult to recognize that the game ball was placed on the back side of the different parts.

On the other hand, in the game machine P2, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the game ball held by the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is provided in the receiving portion. Since the light emitting portion is arranged at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball to be held, and the light transmitting portion of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means, the light emitting means can be used. It is possible to prevent the light and darkness formed by being emitted and blocked or reflected by the receiving portion from being formed on the front side of the decorative member through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. As a result, the shape of the light and darkness formed by passing through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member can be brought close to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game ball is arranged in the portion where the amount of light is different.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving portion is formed of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1 or P2, since the receiving portion is formed of a light transmitting material, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected or blocked by the receiving portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, when the game ball is not accepted by the receiving portion, it is possible to suppress the formation of a portion having a different amount of light in the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not accepted by the receiving portion, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving portion can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from gazing at the decorative member in the positioning operation or the returning operation of the receiving portion, and to make the player gaze only at the displacement operation of the receiving portion when he / she wants to gaze.

In the game machine P2 or P3, a connecting member formed of a non-light transmitting material and connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is provided, and the light emitting means is provided on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion. The connecting member is arranged so that the dimension of the receiving portion in the displacement direction is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and the connecting member is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member to displace the receiving portion. A gaming machine P4, characterized in that the light emitting means and the decorative member face each other with each other, and the light emitting means is projected or retracted.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of the game machine P2 or P3, a connecting member formed of a non-light transmitting material and connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is provided, and the light emitting means receives. The connecting member is arranged on the back side of the displacement region of the portion, the dimension of the connecting member in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is set larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and the connecting member is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. With the displacement of, the light emitting means and the decorative member are projected from each other or retracted, so that the area of light emitted from the decorative member can be changed with the displacement of the receiving portion. That is, the connecting member can block the light emitted from the light emitting means to the decorative member, and the area for blocking the light can be changed according to the displacement of the receiving portion. As a result, the receiving portion and the connecting member are overhanging and displaced between the light emitting means and the decorative member, so that the light emitting area emitted from the decorative member can be reduced. As a result, the light emitting surface of the decorative member is reduced, so that the player can easily recognize the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small by the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion.

In the gaming machine P4, the gaming machine P5 is characterized in that the connecting member is a part of a driving means for driving the receiving portion.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4, since the connecting member is a part of the driving means for driving the receiving portion, it has a role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the receiving portion and a light emitting means. The connecting member can also serve as a role of blocking the light emitted from the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the drive means for driving the receiving portion.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member displaceable from the game ball accepted by the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion. A gaming machine P6 characterized in that it projects between the light emitting means and the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion is a gaming ball accepted by the receiving portion. A more displaceable displacement member is provided, the displacement member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and a gaming ball is provided in a receiving portion. Is accepted and protrudes between the light emitting means and the decorative member. Therefore, only when the game ball is held in the receiving portion, the displacement member and the game ball block the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize the position of the game ball by the shadow (dark portion) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not accepted by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on the game.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the front side of the displacement region of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member displaceable from the game ball accepted by the receiving portion, and the displacement The member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the gaming ball is received by the receiving portion. A gaming machine P7 characterized in that it projects between the light emitting means and the gaming ball.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is arranged on the front side of the displacement region of the receiving part, and the receiving part is a game ball accepted by the receiving part. A more displaceable displacement member is provided, the displacement member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and is displaceable at a position where it protrudes or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and a game ball is provided in the receiving portion. Is accepted and protrudes between the light emitting means and the game ball. Therefore, only when the game ball is held by the receiving portion, the displacement member and the game ball reflect the light emitted from the light emitting means. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize the position of the game ball in the bright portion (the portion having a larger amount of light than the others) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not accepted by the receiving unit, the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on the game.

In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally made of a metal material having a higher light reflectance than the resin material, or the outer surface is coated with metal. As a result, the light radiated to the displacement member can be easily reflected, the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member can be clarified, and the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball.

The gaming machine P8 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape recessed on the back surface side.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effect of the game machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape recessed on the back surface side, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected to the decorative member side. At that time, the reflected light can be made difficult to be diffused (light can be easily collected). Therefore, by collecting the light reflected by the displacement member and emitted from the decorative member, it is possible to clarify the difference in the amount of light and make it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

In the gaming machines P1 to P8, the gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the decorative member is formed by bulging convexly in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed so as to bulge convexly in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, so that the light of the light emitting means transmitted from the decorative member is emitted. Can be easily diffused. As a result, the portion of the light formed by the game ball received by the receiving unit having a different amount of light can be enlarged and recognized by the player, so that the player can recognize the position of the game ball accepted by the receiving unit. It can be done easily.

In the gaming machines 01 to P9, the gaming machine P10 is characterized in that the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors.

According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors. Can be changed.

For example, it is better to divide the light emission between the first region of the first emission color and the second region of the second emission color and arrange the receiving portion in the first region to obtain the expectation of a big hit. Make it high. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the position of the game ball held in the receiving portion.

In this case, the range of the first region and the range of the second region can be changed only by changing the emission color. Therefore, by changing the emission range, a plurality of forms of the effect are formed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the game.

A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I13, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I13, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I13, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q3 characterized in that, in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine including a game board, a back member arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member arranged on the back side of the back member is known. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-33603).
However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the number of work steps for arranging the fixing member on the back surface member is increased.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the number of work steps of arranging the fixing member on the back surface member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a gaming board, a back member arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member arranged on the back side of the back member. Displacement that is arranged between the facing spaces from the game board to the back surface member, is on the back surface side of the game board, and can be operated from the outside between the facing spaces from the game board to the back surface member. The fixing member includes a member, and at least a part thereof is arranged on the front side of the back surface member, includes a protruding portion that engages with the displacement member, and the protruding portion and the displacement member engage with each other. , The fixing member is arranged on the back surface member.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 includes a first member arranged between the gaming board and the back member of the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, and the gaming machine is provided on the back side of the first member. Displacement members are arranged.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, in which the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back surface member and the gaming board.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the number of work steps for arranging the fixing member on the back member can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the fixing member can be arranged on the back surface member without being disturbed by the first member.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, a space between the displacement member and the gaming board can be secured.
<Code>
10 pachinko machine
11 outer frame
13,25013,26013,27013,28013,29013,30013,31013 Game board
60, 34060, 42060 Base plate (game board)
60a 1st opening (2nd opening)
60b second opening
60c decorative member (first decorative means)
34060d recess (first opening)
35060e sliding hole (first opening)
63 General winning opening (entrance)
86 Center frame (frame-shaped member)
86b protruding part (third member)
86b1 opening
86b3 detection device (detection means)
86b5 standing part (folded piece)
100, 42100, 43100, 44100 board box
43101, 45101 Engagement part (engagement part)
150 General winning opening unit (board member)
151 main body (front member)
154,10154,25154 Decorative member (second decorative means)
151a, 26151a, 27151a, 28151a, 31151a Inclined surface (inclined part)
151b, 28151b, 29151b, 30151b recesses (recesses)
151b2 concave bottom
155 protrusions
300, 15300, 15300, 16300, 17300, 18300, 19300, 20300, 21300, 22300, 23300, 24300, 42300, 43300, 44300 Back case (back member)
301c first opening
301d 2nd opening (opening)
310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 18310, 19310, 20310, 22310, 23310, 24310 Engagement member (displacement member)
311, 14311, 15311, 16311, 18311,22311,24311 Elastic piece (first piece)
315, 14315, 15315 controls
315a, 14315a inclined surface (suppressing means)
24316 engaging part (first protrusion)
320, 18320, 20320, 22320, 23320, 24320 fixing member
322, 18322, 22332, 23332, 24332 Engagement part (engagement part)
24335 containment
24335a step part (second protrusion)
340 shaft support member (fixing member)
19360,24360 operating element
410 base member
411e Curved wall (regulatory means, wall)
411f Recovery port (recovery member)
422 cam member (part of support structure, displacement member)
430 link member (part of support structure, driven member)
4441g Engagement wall (insertion member)
11450 decorative member
11451a transparent part
460 transmission mechanism
2464 movable rack (reverse member)
465 transmission gear (pinion gear)
466 rack (rack member)
11466e Shielding plate (connecting member)
467,12467 Ball receiving part (displacement member, receiving part)
12467c 1st piece (main body)
12467d 2nd piece (displacement part)
12467e 3rd piece (shielding part)
11491 Control board (board member)
11491a light emitter (light emitting part)
3468 1st link member (reverse member)
470 base member (base member)
471a Standing wall (wall part)
481b1 recess
491 control board (light emitting means)
492 displacement member (regulatory means)
520 base plate (second base member)
525 rolling part (passage member)
525b protrusion (resistance means)
540 sorting member (regulatory means, sorting means, integrated member)
540a leg (protrusion)
541 regulation plate (first haunting part, sorting means)
542 storage plate (second haunting part, means for changing the flow state)
550, 13550, 32550, 34550, 35550, 36550, 37550 special prize device (path unit)
551 1st unit (1st guide path, 1st member)
552 2nd unit (2nd guide path, 2nd member)
561 1st receiving section (1st winning opening)
562 Second receiving section (second winning opening)
563 3rd receiving section (3rd winning opening)
564,13564,32564,34564,35564,41564 Front plate (first member)
564a Guide (protruding wall)
564c, 41564c second convex part (part of the guiding means, convex part)
564b, 41564b 1st convex part (part of the 2nd guide means, 2nd convex part)
13564 Front plate (first member)
13564b First convex part (protrusion)
13564c 2nd convex part (protrusion)
571,13571,32571,34571,35571,41571 Base plate (second member)
571i, 41571i 2nd recess (part of guide means, recess)
571h, 41571h 1st recess (part of 2nd guide means, 2nd recess)
13571 Base plate (second member)
13571b 4th convex part (protrusion)
13571c 5th convex part (protrusion)
574a 1st receiving recess (3rd winning opening)
574b 2nd receiving recess (3rd winning opening)
34579,35579 Support part (protruding part)
40581a1 opening
40581a2 housing
583a 1st solenoid (driving means)
583b 1st variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
584a 2nd solenoid (driving means)
584b Second variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
615 1st passage (branch route)
616 2nd passage (branch route)
622 Central opening (opening, insertion)
634 Second central opening (opening, insertion)
700 rotation unit (first member)
7710 Displacement member
7713 Ball receiving member (receiving part)
7720 transmission member (transmission means)
7721 rotating member (main body)
7722 drive pin (pin part)
7723 arm member
7723a Driven groove (sliding groove)
730 Left side transmission member (rotation side transmission means, second member)
731 Transmission mechanism (one-way clutch mechanism)
731a transmission gear (part of gear train)
731b transmission gear (part of gear train)
731c transmission gear (part of gear train)
731d transmission gear (part of gear train)
731e, 7730 Load gear (load gear)
740 Right side transmission member (displacement side transmission means, first member)
741 Rotating member (crank member)
741a protrusion (pin part)
742 arm member
742b 1st sliding groove (sliding groove)
760 box member (cover member)
770 Closure member (displacement member, first member)
780 rotation regulation member (displacement regulation means)
800 rotating body (rotating member, second member)
810 base plate (fixing member)
811b communication hole (opening)
812b communication hole (second communication port)
820 LED board (light emitting means)
831 opening (1st communication port)
870 opening / closing member (displacement member)
871 protrusion (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
892 Sliding groove (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
KR1 1st throwing route (flow route)
KR2 2nd throwing path (2nd branch passage)
KR3 3rd throwing path (1st branch passage)
SP4 urging spring (urging means)
KM4 drive motor (drive means)
OW1 one-way clutch (engagement means)
SK1 main route (first route, part of the guidance route)
SK2 main route (first route, second route, part of guide route, upstream route)
SK3 main route (second route, part of guide route, downstream route)
SK4 main route (part of the guide route, detour)
SK5 main route (part of the guidance route)
SK6 main route (part of the guidance route)
SK7 main route (part of the guidance route)
HK1 secondary route (part of the guidance route)
HK2 secondary route (part of the guidance route)
HK3 secondary route (part of the guidance route)
WK1 curved route (third route, part of guide route, changed route)
SI shim member (adjustment means)

10 Pachinko machine
13 Game board 440 Lower displacement member (displacement means)
464c Contact plate (part of displacement means)
542 Storage plate (contact means)
KR1 1st throwing path (flow passage)
KR2 2nd throwing path (2nd branch passage)
KR3 3rd throwing path (1st branch passage)

Claims (1)

A game ball that is formed so as to be in contact with the game ball, the flow-down passage through which the game ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the game ball that flows down the flow-down passage by the contact. In a gaming machine provided with a contact means that affects the flow into the second branch passage and a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side.
It has a predetermined passage that is communicated with the first branch passage and can receive a game ball from the first branch passage, and is provided with a displacement means formed so as to be displaceable.
When the game ball flowing down from the downflow passage to the first branch passage can flow down to the predetermined passage, a part of the displacement means is brought into contact with the abutting means, so that the above-mentioned hit The contact between the contact means and the game ball is released, and the contact is released.
Wherein at least a portion of the rundown path, the gaming machine characterized by Rukoto disposed on the rear side of the game board.

Images